Package 'gt'

Title: Easily Create Presentation-Ready Display Tables
Description: Build display tables from tabular data with an easy-to-use set of functions. With its progressive approach, we can construct display tables with a cohesive set of table parts. Table values can be formatted using any of the included formatting functions. Footnotes and cell styles can be precisely added through a location targeting system. The way in which 'gt' handles things for you means that you don't often have to worry about the fine details.
Authors: Richard Iannone [aut, cre] , Joe Cheng [aut], Barret Schloerke [aut] , Ellis Hughes [aut] , Alexandra Lauer [aut] , JooYoung Seo [aut] , Ken Brevoort [aut] , Olivier Roy [aut], Posit Software, PBC [cph, fnd]
Maintainer: Richard Iannone <[email protected]>
License: MIT + file LICENSE
Version: 0.11.1.9000
Built: 2024-10-24 20:15:58 UTC
Source: https://github.com/rstudio/gt

Help Index


Adjust the luminance for a palette of colors

Description

The adjust_luminance() function can brighten or darken a palette of colors by an arbitrary number of steps, which is defined by a real number between -2.0 and 2.0. The transformation of a palette by a fixed step in this function will tend to apply greater darkening or lightening for those colors in the midrange compared to any very dark or very light colors in the input palette.

Usage

adjust_luminance(colors, steps)

Arguments

colors

Color vector

⁠vector<character>⁠ // required

This is the vector of colors that will undergo an adjustment in luminance. Each color value provided must either be a color name (in the set of colors provided by grDevices::colors()) or a hexadecimal string in the form of "#RRGGBB" or "#RRGGBBAA".

steps

Adjustment level

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>(-2>=val>=2)⁠ // required

A positive or negative factor by which the luminance of colors in the colors vector will be adjusted. Must be a number between -2.0 and 2.0.

Details

This function can be useful when combined with the data_color() function's palette argument, which can use a vector of colors or any of the ⁠col_*⁠ functions from the scales package (all of which have a palette argument).

Value

A vector of color values.

Examples

Get a palette of 8 pastel colors from the RColorBrewer package.

pal <- RColorBrewer::brewer.pal(8, "Pastel2")

Create lighter and darker variants of the base palette (one step lower, one step higher).

pal_darker  <- pal |> adjust_luminance(-1.0)
pal_lighter <- pal |> adjust_luminance(+1.0)

Create a tibble and make a gt table from it. Color each column in order of increasingly darker palettes (with data_color()).

dplyr::tibble(a = 1:8, b = 1:8, c = 1:8) |>
  gt() |>
  data_color(
    columns = a,
    colors = scales::col_numeric(
      palette = pal_lighter,
      domain = c(1, 8)
    )
  ) |>
  data_color(
    columns = b,
    colors = scales::col_numeric(
      palette = pal,
      domain = c(1, 8)
    )
  ) |>
  data_color(
    columns = c,
    colors = scales::col_numeric(
      palette = pal_darker,
      domain = c(1, 8)
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `adjust_luminance()` help file.

Function ID

8-9

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other helper functions: cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


Transform a gt table to a gtable object

Description

as_gtable() performs the transformation of a gt_tbl object to a gtable object.

Usage

as_gtable(data, plot = FALSE, text_grob = grid::textGrob)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

plot

Render through the graphics device?

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

The plot option determines whether the gtable object should be rendered on the graphics device.

text_grob

Function for drawing text

function // default: grid::textGrob

A function which will be used to draw text. Defaults to grid::textGrob() but can be swapped to gridtext::richtext_grob() to better render HTML content.

Value

A gtable object.

Function ID

13-6

Function Introduced

v0.11.0 (July 9, 2024)

See Also

Other table export functions: as_latex(), as_raw_html(), as_rtf(), as_word(), extract_body(), extract_cells(), extract_summary(), gtsave()


Output a gt object as LaTeX

Description

Get the LaTeX content from a gt_tbl object as a knit_asis object. This object contains the LaTeX code and attributes that serve as LaTeX dependencies (i.e., the LaTeX packages required for the table). Using as.character() on the created object will result in a single-element vector containing the LaTeX code.

Usage

as_latex(data)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

Details

LaTeX packages required to generate tables are: booktabs, caption, longtable, colortbl, array, anyfontsize, multirow.

In the event packages are not automatically added during the render phase of the document, please create and include a style file to load them.

Inside the document's YAML metadata, please include:

output:
  pdf_document: # Change to appropriate LaTeX template
    includes:
      in_header: 'gt_packages.sty'

The gt_packages.sty file would then contain the listed dependencies above:

  \usepackage{booktabs, caption, longtable, colortbl, array}

Examples

Use a subset of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. Add a header with tab_header() and then export the table as LaTeX code using the as_latex() function.

tab_latex <-
  gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, msrp) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:5) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("Data listing from **gtcars**"),
    subtitle = md("`gtcars` is an R dataset")
  ) |>
  as_latex()

What's returned is a knit_asis object, which makes it easy to include in R Markdown documents that are knit to PDF. We can use as.character() to get just the LaTeX code as a single-element vector.

Function ID

13-3

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other table export functions: as_gtable(), as_raw_html(), as_rtf(), as_word(), extract_body(), extract_cells(), extract_summary(), gtsave()


Get the HTML content of a gt table

Description

Get the HTML content from a gt_tbl object as a single-element character vector. By default, the generated HTML will have inlined styles, where CSS styles (that were previously contained in CSS rule sets external to the ⁠<table> element⁠) are included as style attributes in the HTML table's tags. This option is preferable when using the output HTML table in an emailing context.

Usage

as_raw_html(data, inline_css = TRUE)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

inline_css

Use inline CSS

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to supply styles to table elements as inlined CSS styles. This is useful when including the table HTML as part of an HTML email message body, since inlined styles are largely supported in email clients over using CSS in a ⁠<style>⁠ block.

Examples

Use a subset of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. Add a header with tab_header() and then export the table as HTML code with inlined CSS styles using as_raw_html().

tab_html <-
  gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, msrp) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 5) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("Data listing from **gtcars**"),
    subtitle = md("`gtcars` is an R dataset")
  ) |>
  as_raw_html()

What's returned is a single-element vector containing the HTML for the table. It has only the ⁠<table>...</table>⁠ part so it's not a complete HTML document but rather an HTML fragment.

Function ID

13-2

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other table export functions: as_gtable(), as_latex(), as_rtf(), as_word(), extract_body(), extract_cells(), extract_summary(), gtsave()


Output a gt object as RTF

Description

Get the RTF content from a gt_tbl object as as a single-element character vector. This object can be used with writeLines() to generate a valid .rtf file that can be opened by RTF readers.

Usage

as_rtf(
  data,
  incl_open = TRUE,
  incl_header = TRUE,
  incl_page_info = TRUE,
  incl_body = TRUE,
  incl_close = TRUE
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

incl_open, incl_close

Include opening/closing braces

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

Options that govern whether the opening or closing "{" and "}" should be included. By default, both options are TRUE.

incl_header

Include RTF header

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

Should the RTF header be included in the output? By default, this is TRUE.

incl_page_info

Include RTF page information

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

Should the RTF output include directives for the document pages? This is TRUE by default.

incl_body

Include RTF body

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to include the body of RTF document. By default, this is TRUE.

Examples

Use a subset of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. Add a header with tab_header() and then export the table as RTF code using the as_rtf() function.

tab_rtf <-
  gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:2) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("Data listing from **gtcars**"),
    subtitle = md("`gtcars` is an R dataset")
  ) |>
  as_rtf()

Function ID

13-4

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other table export functions: as_gtable(), as_latex(), as_raw_html(), as_word(), extract_body(), extract_cells(), extract_summary(), gtsave()


Output a gt object as Word

Description

Get the Open Office XML table tag content from a gt_tbl object as a single-element character vector.

Usage

as_word(
  data,
  align = "center",
  caption_location = c("top", "bottom", "embed"),
  caption_align = "left",
  split = FALSE,
  keep_with_next = TRUE
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

align

Table alignment

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "center"

An option for table alignment. Can either be "center", "left", or "right".

caption_location

Caption location

⁠singl-kw:[top|bottom|embed]⁠ // default: "top"

Determines where the caption should be positioned. This can either be "top", "bottom", or "embed".

caption_align

Caption alignment

Determines the alignment of the caption. This is either "left" (the default), "center", or "right". This option is only used when caption_location is not set as "embed".

split

Allow splitting of a table row across pages

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

A logical value that indicates whether to activate the Word option ⁠Allow row to break across pages⁠.

keep_with_next

Keeping rows together

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value that indicates whether a table should use Word option ⁠Keep rows together⁠.

Examples

Use a subset of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. Add a header with tab_header() and then export the table as OOXML code for Word using as_word()

tab_rtf <-
  gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:2) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("Data listing from **gtcars**"),
    subtitle = md("`gtcars` is an R dataset")
  ) |>
  as_word()

Function ID

13-5

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (August 25, 2022)

See Also

Other table export functions: as_gtable(), as_latex(), as_raw_html(), as_rtf(), extract_body(), extract_cells(), extract_summary(), gtsave()


Helper for defining custom borders for table cells

Description

cell_borders() is to be used with tab_style(), which itself allows for the setting of custom styles to one or more cells. Specifically, the call to cell_borders() should be bound to the styles argument of tab_style(). The sides argument is where we define which borders should be modified (e.g., "left", "right", etc.). With that selection, the color, style, and weight of the selected borders can then be modified.

Usage

cell_borders(sides = "all", color = "#000000", style = "solid", weight = px(1))

Arguments

sides

Border sides

⁠vector<character>⁠ // default: "all"

The border sides to be modified. Options include "left", "right", "top", and "bottom". For all borders surrounding the selected cells, we can use the "all" option.

color

Border color

⁠scalar<character>|NULL⁠ // default: "#000000"

The border color can be defined with a color name or with a hexadecimal color code. The default color value is "#000000" (black). Borders for any defined sides can be removed by supplying NULL here.

style

Border line style

⁠scalar<character>|NULL⁠ // default: "solid"

The border style can be one of either "solid" (the default), "dashed", "dotted", "hidden", or "double". Borders for any defined sides can be removed by supplying NULL here.

weight

Border weight

⁠scalar<character>|NULL⁠ // default: px(1)

The default value for weight is "1px" and higher values will become more visually prominent. Borders for any defined sides can be removed by supplying NULL to any of color, style, or weight.

Value

A list object of class cell_styles.

Examples

We can add horizontal border lines for all table body rows in a gt table based on the exibble dataset. For this, we need to use tab_style() (targeting all cells in the table body with cells_body()) in conjunction with cell_borders() in the style argument. Both top and bottom borders will be added as "solid" and "red" lines with a line width of 1.5 px.

exibble |>
  gt() |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_borders(
      sides = c("top", "bottom"),
      color = "red",
      weight = px(1.5),
      style = "solid"
    ),
    locations = cells_body()
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cell_borders()` help file.

It's possible to incorporate different horizontal and vertical ("left" and "right") borders at several different locations. This uses multiple cell_borders() and cells_body() calls within their own respective lists.

exibble |>
  gt() |>
  tab_style(
    style = list(
      cell_borders(
        sides = c("top", "bottom"),
        color = "#FF0000",
        weight = px(2)
      ),
      cell_borders(
        sides = c("left", "right"),
        color = "#0000FF",
        weight = px(2)
      )
    ),
    locations = list(
      cells_body(
        columns = num,
        rows = is.na(num)
      ),
      cells_body(
        columns = currency,
        rows = is.na(currency)
      )
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `cell_borders()` help file.

Function ID

8-27

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


Helper for defining custom fills for table cells

Description

cell_fill() is to be used with tab_style(), which itself allows for the setting of custom styles to one or more cells. Specifically, the call to cell_fill() should be bound to the styles argument of tab_style().

Usage

cell_fill(color = "#D3D3D3", alpha = NULL)

Arguments

color

Cell fill color

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "#D3D3D3"

If nothing is provided for color then "#D3D3D3" (light gray) will be used as a default.

alpha

Transparency value

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>(0>=val>=1)⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional alpha transparency value for the color as single value in the range of 0 (fully transparent) to 1 (fully opaque). If not provided the fill color will either be fully opaque or use alpha information from the color value if it is supplied in the ⁠#RRGGBBAA⁠ format.

Value

A list object of class cell_styles.

Examples

Let's use the exibble dataset to create a simple, two-column gt table (keeping only the num and currency columns). Styles are added with tab_style() in two separate calls (targeting different body cells with the cells_body() helper function). With the cell_fill() helper function we define cells with a "lightblue" background in one instance, and "gray85" in the other.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(num, currency) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_number(decimals = 1) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_fill(color = "lightblue"),
    locations = cells_body(
      columns = num,
      rows = num >= 5000
    )
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_fill(color = "gray85"),
    locations = cells_body(
      columns = currency,
      rows = currency < 100
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cell_fill()` help file.

Function ID

8-26

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


Helper for defining custom text styles for table cells

Description

This helper function can be used with tab_style(), which itself allows for the setting of custom styles to one or more cells. We can also define several styles within a single call of cell_text() and tab_style() will reliably apply those styles to the targeted element.

Usage

cell_text(
  color = NULL,
  font = NULL,
  size = NULL,
  align = NULL,
  v_align = NULL,
  style = NULL,
  weight = NULL,
  stretch = NULL,
  decorate = NULL,
  transform = NULL,
  whitespace = NULL,
  indent = NULL
)

Arguments

color

Text color

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The text color can be modified through the color argument.

font

Font (or collection of fonts) used for text

⁠vector<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The font or collection of fonts (subsequent font names are) used as fallbacks.

size

Text size

⁠scalar<numeric|integer|character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The size of the font. Can be provided as a number that is assumed to represent px values (or could be wrapped in the px() helper function). We can also use one of the following absolute size keywords: "xx-small", "x-small", "small", "medium", "large", "x-large", or "xx-large".

align

Text alignment

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The text in a cell can be horizontally aligned though one of the following options: "center", "left", "right", or "justify".

v_align

Vertical alignment

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The vertical alignment of the text in the cell can be modified through the options "middle", "top", or "bottom".

style

Text style

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Can be one of either "normal", "italic", or "oblique".

weight

Font weight

⁠scalar<character|numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The weight of the font can be modified thorough a text-based option such as "normal", "bold", "lighter", "bolder", or, a numeric value between 1 and 1000, inclusive. Note that only variable fonts may support the numeric mapping of weight.

stretch

Stretch text

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Allows for text to either be condensed or expanded. We can use one of the following text-based keywords to describe the degree of condensation/expansion: "ultra-condensed", "extra-condensed", "condensed", "semi-condensed", "normal", "semi-expanded", "expanded", "extra-expanded", or "ultra-expanded". Alternatively, we can supply percentage values from ⁠0\%⁠ to ⁠200\%⁠, inclusive. Negative percentage values are not allowed.

decorate

Decorate text

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Allows for text decoration effect to be applied. Here, we can use "overline", "line-through", or "underline".

transform

Transform text

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Allows for the transformation of text. Options are "uppercase", "lowercase", or "capitalize".

whitespace

White-space options

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A white-space preservation option. By default, runs of white-space will be collapsed into single spaces but several options exist to govern how white-space is collapsed and how lines might wrap at soft-wrap opportunities. The options are "normal", "nowrap", "pre", "pre-wrap", "pre-line", and "break-spaces".

indent

Text indentation

⁠scalar<numeric|integer|character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The indentation of the text. Can be provided as a number that is assumed to represent px values (or could be wrapped in the px() helper function). Alternatively, this can be given as a percentage (easily constructed with pct()).

Value

A list object of class cell_styles.

Examples

Let's use the exibble dataset to create a simple, two-column gt table (keeping only the num and currency columns). With tab_style() (called twice), we'll selectively add style to the values formatted with fmt_number(). We do this by using cell_text() in the style argument of tab_style().

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(num, currency) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_number(decimals = 1) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(weight = "bold"),
    locations = cells_body(
      columns = num,
      rows = num >= 5000
    )
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(style = "italic"),
    locations = cells_body(
      columns = currency,
      rows = currency < 100
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cell_text()` help file.

Function ID

8-25

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


Location helper for targeting data cells in the table body

Description

cells_body() is used to target the data cells in the table body. The function can be used to apply a footnote with tab_footnote(), to add custom styling with tab_style(), or the transform the targeted cells with text_transform(). The function is expressly used in each of those functions' locations argument. The 'body' location is present by default in every gt table.

Usage

cells_body(columns = everything(), rows = everything())

Arguments

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The columns to which targeting operations are constrained. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should form a constraint for targeting operations. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

Value

A list object with the classes cells_body and location_cells.

Targeting cells with columns and rows

Targeting of values is done through columns and additionally by rows (if nothing is provided for rows then entire columns are selected). The columns argument allows us to target a subset of cells contained in the resolved columns. We say resolved because aside from declaring column names in c() (with bare column names or names in quotes) we can use tidyselect-style expressions. This can be as basic as supplying a select helper like starts_with(), or, providing a more complex incantation like

where(~ is.numeric(.x) & max(.x, na.rm = TRUE) > 1E6)

which targets numeric columns that have a maximum value greater than 1,000,000 (excluding any NAs from consideration).

Once the columns are targeted, we may also target the rows within those columns. This can be done in a variety of ways. If a stub is present, then we potentially have row identifiers. Those can be used much like column names in the columns-targeting scenario. We can use simpler tidyselect-style expressions (the select helpers should work well here) and we can use quoted row identifiers in c(). It's also possible to use row indices (e.g., c(3, 5, 6)) though these index values must correspond to the row numbers of the input data (the indices won't necessarily match those of rearranged rows if row groups are present). One more type of expression is possible, an expression that takes column values (can involve any of the available columns in the table) and returns a logical vector.

Examples

Let's use a subset of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. Add a footnote (with tab_footnote()) that targets a single data cell via the use of cells_body() in locations (rows = hp == max(hp) will target a single row in the hp column).

gtcars |>
  dplyr::filter(ctry_origin == "United Kingdom") |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, year, hp) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Highest horsepower.",
    locations = cells_body(
      columns = hp,
      rows = hp == max(hp)
    ),
    placement = "right"
  ) |>
  opt_footnote_marks(marks = c("*", "+"))
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cells_body()` help file.

Function ID

8-18

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other location helper functions: cells_column_labels(), cells_column_spanners(), cells_footnotes(), cells_grand_summary(), cells_row_groups(), cells_source_notes(), cells_stub(), cells_stub_grand_summary(), cells_stub_summary(), cells_stubhead(), cells_summary(), cells_title(), location-helper


Location helper for targeting the column labels

Description

cells_column_labels() is used to target the table's column labels when applying a footnote with tab_footnote() or adding custom style with tab_style(). The function is expressly used in each of those functions' locations argument. The 'column_labels' location is present by default in every gt table.

Usage

cells_column_labels(columns = everything())

Arguments

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The columns to which targeting operations are constrained. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

Value

A list object with the classes cells_column_labels and location_cells.

Targeting columns with the columns argument

The columns argument allows us to target a subset of columns contained in the table. We can declare column names in c() (with bare column names or names in quotes) or we can use tidyselect-style expressions. This can be as basic as supplying a select helper like starts_with(), or, providing a more complex incantation like

where(~ is.numeric(.x) & max(.x, na.rm = TRUE) > 1E6)

which targets numeric columns that have a maximum value greater than 1,000,000 (excluding any NAs from consideration).

Examples

Let's use a small portion of the sza dataset to create a gt table. Add footnotes to the column labels with tab_footnote() and cells_column_labels() in locations.

sza |>
  dplyr::filter(
    latitude == 20 & month == "jan" &
      !is.na(sza)
  ) |>
  dplyr::select(-latitude, -month) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "True solar time.",
    locations = cells_column_labels(
      columns = tst
    )
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Solar zenith angle.",
    locations = cells_column_labels(
      columns = sza
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cells_column_labels()` help file.

Function ID

8-15

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other location helper functions: cells_body(), cells_column_spanners(), cells_footnotes(), cells_grand_summary(), cells_row_groups(), cells_source_notes(), cells_stub(), cells_stub_grand_summary(), cells_stub_summary(), cells_stubhead(), cells_summary(), cells_title(), location-helper


Location helper for targeting the column spanners

Description

cells_column_spanners() is used to target the cells that contain the table column spanners. This is useful when applying a footnote with tab_footnote() or adding custom style with tab_style(). The function is expressly used in each of those functions' locations argument. The 'column_spanners' location is generated by one or more uses of tab_spanner() or tab_spanner_delim().

Usage

cells_column_spanners(spanners = everything(), levels = NULL)

Arguments

spanners

Specification of spanner IDs

⁠<spanner-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The spanners to which targeting operations are constrained. Can either be a series of spanner ID values provided in c() or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

levels

*Specification of the spanner levels *

⁠scalar|vector<numerical>⁠ // default: NULL

The existing spanner levels (1, 2, ...) to which targeting operations are constrained. Use NULL to refer to all existing levels.

Value

A list object with the classes cells_column_spanners and location_cells.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table. We'll add a spanner column label over three columns (date, time, and datetime) with tab_spanner(). The spanner column label can be styled with tab_style() by using the cells_column_spanners() function in locations. In this example, we are making the text of the column spanner label appear as bold.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(-fctr, -currency, -group) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row") |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "dates and times",
    columns = c(date, time, datetime),
    id = "dt"
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(weight = "bold"),
    locations = cells_column_spanners(spanners = "dt")
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cells_column_spanners()` help file.

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table. We'll add two spanners for the column combinations of (num, char) and time related columns (time and datetime). Furthermore we add another level of spanners with a column label over all date- and time related columns (date, time, and datetime). We want all spanner labels with "time" in their name to be bold. Additionally we want the text to be red of the spanner that is both time- related and on level 1.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(-fctr, -currency, -group) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row") |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "time related cols",
    columns = c(datetime, time)
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "num and char",
    columns = c(num, char)
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "date and time cols",
    columns = c(date, time, datetime)
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(weight = "bold"),
    locations = cells_column_spanners(spanners = tidyselect::contains("time"))
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(color = "red"),
    locations = cells_column_spanners(
      spanners = tidyselect::contains("time"),
      levels = 1
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `cells_column_spanners()` help file.

Function ID

8-14

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other location helper functions: cells_body(), cells_column_labels(), cells_footnotes(), cells_grand_summary(), cells_row_groups(), cells_source_notes(), cells_stub(), cells_stub_grand_summary(), cells_stub_summary(), cells_stubhead(), cells_summary(), cells_title(), location-helper


Location helper for targeting the footnotes

Description

cells_footnotes() is used to target all footnotes in the footer section of the table. This is useful for adding custom styles to the footnotes with tab_style() (using the locations argument). The 'footnotes' location is generated by one or more uses of tab_footnote(). This location helper function cannot be used for the locations argument of tab_footnote() and doing so will result in a warning (with no change made to the table).

Usage

cells_footnotes()

Value

A list object with the classes cells_footnotes and location_cells.

Examples

Using a subset of the sza dataset, let's create a gt table. We'd like to color the sza column so that's done with the data_color() function. We can add a footnote with tab_footnote() and we can also style the footnotes section. The styling is done with tab_style() and locations = cells_footnotes().

sza |>
  dplyr::filter(
    latitude == 20 &
      month == "jan" &
      !is.na(sza)
  ) |>
  dplyr::select(-latitude, -month) |>
  gt() |>
  data_color(
    columns = sza,
    palette = c("white", "yellow", "navyblue"),
    domain = c(0, 90)
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Color indicates height of sun.",
    locations = cells_column_labels(columns = sza)
  ) |>
  tab_options(table.width = px(320)) |>
  tab_style(
    style = list(
      cell_text(size = "smaller"),
      cell_fill(color = "gray90")
      ),
    locations = cells_footnotes()
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cells_footnotes()` help file.

Function ID

8-23

Function Introduced

v0.3.0 (May 12, 2021)

See Also

Other location helper functions: cells_body(), cells_column_labels(), cells_column_spanners(), cells_grand_summary(), cells_row_groups(), cells_source_notes(), cells_stub(), cells_stub_grand_summary(), cells_stub_summary(), cells_stubhead(), cells_summary(), cells_title(), location-helper


Location helper for targeting cells in a grand summary

Description

cells_grand_summary() is used to target the cells in a grand summary and it is useful when applying a footnote with tab_footnote() or adding custom styles with tab_style(). The function is expressly used in each of those functions' locations argument. The 'grand_summary' location is generated by grand_summary_rows().

Usage

cells_grand_summary(columns = everything(), rows = everything())

Arguments

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The columns to which targeting operations are constrained. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should form a constraint for targeting operations. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

Value

A list object with the classes cells_grand_summary and location_cells.

Targeting cells with columns and rows

Targeting of grand summary cells is done through the columns and rows arguments. The columns argument allows us to target a subset of grand summary cells contained in the resolved columns. We say resolved because aside from declaring column names in c() (with bare column names or names in quotes) we can use tidyselect-style expressions. This can be as basic as supplying a select helper like starts_with(), or, providing a more complex incantation like

where(~ is.numeric(.x) & max(.x, na.rm = TRUE) > 1E6)

which targets numeric columns that have a maximum value greater than 1,000,000 (excluding any NAs from consideration).

Once the columns are targeted, we may also target the rows of the grand summary. Grand summary cells in the stub will have ID values that can be used much like column names in the columns-targeting scenario. We can use simpler tidyselect-style expressions (the select helpers should work well here) and we can use quoted row identifiers in c(). It's also possible to use row indices (e.g., c(3, 5, 6)) that correspond to the row number of a grand summary row.

Examples

Use a portion of the countrypops dataset to create a gt table. Add some styling to a grand summary cells with tab_style() and cells_grand_summary() in the locations argument.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(country_name == "Spain", year < 1970) |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("country")) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "year") |>
  fmt_number(
    columns = population,
    decimals = 0
  ) |>
  grand_summary_rows(
    columns = population,
    fns = change ~ max(.) - min(.),
    fmt = ~ fmt_integer(.)
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = list(
      cell_text(style = "italic"),
      cell_fill(color = "lightblue")
    ),
    locations = cells_grand_summary(
      columns = population,
      rows = 1
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cells_grand_summary()` help file.

Function ID

8-20

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other location helper functions: cells_body(), cells_column_labels(), cells_column_spanners(), cells_footnotes(), cells_row_groups(), cells_source_notes(), cells_stub(), cells_stub_grand_summary(), cells_stub_summary(), cells_stubhead(), cells_summary(), cells_title(), location-helper


Location helper for targeting row groups

Description

cells_row_groups() is used to target the table's row groups when applying a footnote with tab_footnote() or adding custom style with tab_style(). The function is expressly used in each of those functions' locations argument. The 'row_groups' location can be generated by the specifying a groupname_col in gt(), by introducing grouped data to gt() (via dplyr::group_by()), or, by specifying groups with tab_row_group().

Usage

cells_row_groups(groups = everything())

Arguments

groups

Specification of row group IDs

⁠<row-group-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The row groups to which targeting operations are constrained. Can either be a series of row group ID values provided in c() or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

Value

A list object with the classes cells_row_groups and location_cells.

Targeting cells with groups

By default groups is set to everything(), which means that all available groups will be considered. Providing the ID values (in quotes) of row groups in c() will serve to constrain the targeting to that subset of groups.

Examples

Let's use a summarized version of the pizzaplace dataset to create a gt table with grouped data. Add a summary with summary_rows() and then add a footnote to the "peppr_salami" row group label with tab_footnote(); the targeting is done with cells_row_groups() in the locations argument.

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::filter(name %in% c("soppressata", "peppr_salami")) |>
  dplyr::group_by(name, size) |>
  dplyr::summarize(`Pizzas Sold` = dplyr::n(), .groups = "drop") |>
  gt(rowname_col = "size", groupname_col = "name") |>
  summary_rows(
    columns = `Pizzas Sold`,
    fns = list(label = "TOTAL", fn = "sum"),
    fmt = ~ fmt_integer(.)
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "The Pepper-Salami.",
    cells_row_groups(groups = "peppr_salami")
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cells_row_groups()` help file.

Function ID

8-16

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other location helper functions: cells_body(), cells_column_labels(), cells_column_spanners(), cells_footnotes(), cells_grand_summary(), cells_source_notes(), cells_stub(), cells_stub_grand_summary(), cells_stub_summary(), cells_stubhead(), cells_summary(), cells_title(), location-helper


Location helper for targeting the source notes

Description

cells_source_notes() is used to target all source notes in the footer section of the table. This is useful for adding custom styles to the source notes with tab_style() (using the locations argument). The 'source_notes' location is generated by tab_source_note().

Usage

cells_source_notes()

Value

A list object with the classes cells_source_notes and location_cells.

Examples

Let's use a subset of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. Add a source note (with tab_source_note()) and style the source notes section inside tab_style() with locations = cells_source_notes().

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, msrp) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:5) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_source_note(source_note = "From edmunds.com") |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(
      color = "#A9A9A9",
      size = "small"
    ),
    locations = cells_source_notes()
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cells_source_notes()` help file.

Function ID

8-24

Function Introduced

v0.3.0 (May 12, 2021)

See Also

Other location helper functions: cells_body(), cells_column_labels(), cells_column_spanners(), cells_footnotes(), cells_grand_summary(), cells_row_groups(), cells_stub(), cells_stub_grand_summary(), cells_stub_summary(), cells_stubhead(), cells_summary(), cells_title(), location-helper


Location helper for targeting cells in the table stub

Description

cells_stub() is used to target the table's stub cells and it is useful when applying a footnote with tab_footnote() or adding a custom style with tab_style(). The function is expressly used in each of those functions' locations argument. Here are several ways that a stub location might be available in a gt table: (1) through specification of a rowname_col in gt(), (2) by introducing a data frame with row names to gt() with rownames_to_stub = TRUE, or (3) by using summary_rows() or grand_summary_rows() with neither of the previous two conditions being true.

Usage

cells_stub(rows = everything())

Arguments

rows

Rows to target

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The rows to which targeting operations are constrained. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

Value

A list object with the classes cells_stub and location_cells.

Examples

Using a transformed version of the sza dataset, let's create a gt table. Color all of the month values in the table stub with tab_style(), using cells_stub() in locations.

sza |>
  dplyr::filter(latitude == 20 & tst <= "1000") |>
  dplyr::select(-latitude) |>
  dplyr::filter(!is.na(sza)) |>
  tidyr::spread(key = "tst", value = sza) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "month") |>
  sub_missing(missing_text = "") |>
  tab_style(
    style = list(
      cell_fill(color = "darkblue"),
      cell_text(color = "white")
      ),
    locations = cells_stub()
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cells_stub()` help file.

Function ID

8-17

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other location helper functions: cells_body(), cells_column_labels(), cells_column_spanners(), cells_footnotes(), cells_grand_summary(), cells_row_groups(), cells_source_notes(), cells_stub_grand_summary(), cells_stub_summary(), cells_stubhead(), cells_summary(), cells_title(), location-helper


Location helper for targeting the stub cells in a grand summary

Description

cells_stub_grand_summary() is used to target the stub cells of a grand summary and it is useful when applying a footnote with tab_footnote() or adding custom styles with tab_style(). The function is expressly used in each of those functions' locations argument. The 'stub_grand_summary' location is generated by grand_summary_rows().

Usage

cells_stub_grand_summary(rows = everything())

Arguments

rows

Rows to target

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

We can specify which rows should be targeted. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

Value

A list object with the classes cells_stub_grand_summary and location_cells.

Targeting grand summary stub cells with rows

Targeting the stub cells of a grand summary row is done through the rows argument. Grand summary cells in the stub will have ID values that can be used much like column names in the columns-targeting scenario. We can use simpler tidyselect-style expressions (the select helpers should work well here) and we can use quoted row identifiers in c(). It's also possible to use row indices (e.g., c(3, 5, 6)) that correspond to the row number of a grand summary row.

Examples

Use a portion of the countrypops dataset to create a gt table. Add some styling to a grand summary stub cell with tab_style() and using cells_stub_grand_summary() in the locations argument.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(country_name == "Spain", year < 1970) |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("country")) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "year") |>
  fmt_number(
    columns = population,
    decimals = 0
  ) |>
  grand_summary_rows(
    columns = population,
    fns = list(change = ~max(.) - min(.)),
    fmt = ~ fmt_integer(.)
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(weight = "bold", transform = "uppercase"),
    locations = cells_stub_grand_summary(rows = "change")
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cells_stub_grand_summary()` help file.

Function ID

8-22

Function Introduced

v0.3.0 (May 12, 2021)

See Also

Other location helper functions: cells_body(), cells_column_labels(), cells_column_spanners(), cells_footnotes(), cells_grand_summary(), cells_row_groups(), cells_source_notes(), cells_stub(), cells_stub_summary(), cells_stubhead(), cells_summary(), cells_title(), location-helper


Location helper for targeting the stub cells in a summary

Description

cells_stub_summary() is used to target the stub cells of summary and it is useful when applying a footnote with tab_footnote() or adding custom styles with tab_style(). The function is expressly used in each of those functions' locations argument. The 'stub_summary' location is generated by summary_rows().

Usage

cells_stub_summary(groups = everything(), rows = everything())

Arguments

groups

Specification of row group IDs

⁠<row-group-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The row groups to which targeting operations are constrained. Can either be a series of row group ID values provided in c() or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

In conjunction with groups, we can specify which of their rows should form a constraint for targeting operations. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

Value

A list object with the classes cells_stub_summary and location_cells.

Targeting summary stub cells with groups and rows

Targeting the stub cells of group summary rows is done through the groups and rows arguments. By default groups is set to everything(), which means that all available groups will be considered. Providing the ID values (in quotes) of row groups in c() will serve to constrain the targeting to that subset of groups.

Once the groups are targeted, we may also target the rows of the summary. Summary cells in the stub will have ID values that can be used much like column names in the columns-targeting scenario. We can use simpler tidyselect-style expressions (the select helpers should work well here) and we can use quoted row identifiers in c(). It's also possible to use row indices (e.g., c(3, 5, 6)) that correspond to the row number of a summary row in a row group (numbering restarts with every row group).

Examples

Use a portion of the countrypops dataset to create a gt table. Add some styling to the summary data stub cells with tab_style() and cells_stub_summary() in the locations argument.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(country_name == "Japan", year < 1970) |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("country")) |>
  dplyr::mutate(decade = paste0(substr(year, 1, 3), "0s")) |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "year",
    groupname_col = "decade"
  ) |>
  fmt_integer(columns = population) |>
  summary_rows(
    groups = "1960s",
    columns = population,
    fns = list("min", "max"),
    fmt = ~ fmt_integer(.)
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = list(
      cell_text(
        weight = "bold",
        transform = "capitalize"
      ),
      cell_fill(
        color = "lightblue",
        alpha = 0.5
      )
    ),
    locations = cells_stub_summary(
      groups = "1960s"
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cells_stub_summary()` help file.

Function ID

8-21

Function Introduced

v0.3.0 (May 12, 2021)

See Also

Other location helper functions: cells_body(), cells_column_labels(), cells_column_spanners(), cells_footnotes(), cells_grand_summary(), cells_row_groups(), cells_source_notes(), cells_stub(), cells_stub_grand_summary(), cells_stubhead(), cells_summary(), cells_title(), location-helper


Location helper for targeting the table stubhead cell

Description

cells_stubhead() is used to target the table stubhead location when applying a footnote with tab_footnote() or adding custom style with tab_style(). The function is expressly used in each of those functions' locations argument. The 'stubhead' location is always present alongside the 'stub' location.

Usage

cells_stubhead()

Value

A list object with the classes cells_stubhead and location_cells.

Examples

Using a summarized version of the pizzaplace dataset, let's create a gt table. Add a stubhead label with tab_stubhead() and then style it with tab_style() in conjunction with the use of cells_stubhead() in the locations argument.

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::mutate(month = as.numeric(substr(date, 6, 7))) |>
  dplyr::group_by(month, type) |>
  dplyr::summarize(sold = dplyr::n(), .groups = "drop") |>
  dplyr::filter(month %in% 1:2) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "type") |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "type") |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_fill(color = "lightblue"),
    locations = cells_stubhead()
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cells_stubhead()` help file.

Function ID

8-13

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other location helper functions: cells_body(), cells_column_labels(), cells_column_spanners(), cells_footnotes(), cells_grand_summary(), cells_row_groups(), cells_source_notes(), cells_stub(), cells_stub_grand_summary(), cells_stub_summary(), cells_summary(), cells_title(), location-helper


Location helper for targeting group summary cells

Description

cells_summary() is used to target the cells in a group summary and it is useful when applying a footnote with tab_footnote() or adding a custom style with tab_style(). The function is expressly used in each of those functions' locations argument. The 'summary' location is generated by summary_rows().

Usage

cells_summary(
  groups = everything(),
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything()
)

Arguments

groups

Specification of row group IDs

⁠<row-group-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The row groups to which targeting operations are constrained. This aids in targeting the summary rows that reside in certain row groups. Can either be a series of row group ID values provided in c() or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything().

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The columns to which targeting operations are constrained. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should form a constraint for targeting operations. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

Value

A list object with the classes cells_summary and location_cells.

Targeting cells with columns, rows, and groups

Targeting of summary cells is done through the groups, columns, and rows arguments. By default groups is set to everything(), which means that all available groups will be considered. Providing the ID values (in quotes) of row groups in c() will serve to constrain the targeting to that subset of groups.

The columns argument allows us to target a subset of summary cells contained in the resolved columns. We say resolved because aside from declaring column names in c() (with bare column names or names in quotes) we can use tidyselect-style expressions. This can be as basic as supplying a select helper like starts_with(), or, providing a more complex incantation like

where(~ is.numeric(.x) & max(.x, na.rm = TRUE) > 1E6)

which targets numeric columns that have a maximum value greater than 1,000,000 (excluding any NAs from consideration).

Once the groups and columns are targeted, we may also target the rows of the summary. Summary cells in the stub will have ID values that can be used much like column names in the columns-targeting scenario. We can use simpler tidyselect-style expressions (the select helpers should work well here) and we can use quoted row identifiers in c(). It's also possible to use row indices (e.g., c(3, 5, 6)) that correspond to the row number of a summary row in a row group (numbering restarts with every row group).

Examples

Use a portion of the countrypops dataset to create a gt table. Add some styling to the summary data cells with tab_style(), using cells_summary() in the locations argument.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(country_name == "Japan", year < 1970) |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("country")) |>
  dplyr::mutate(decade = paste0(substr(year, 1, 3), "0s")) |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "year",
    groupname_col = "decade"
  ) |>
  fmt_number(
    columns = population,
    decimals = 0
  ) |>
  summary_rows(
    groups = "1960s",
    columns = population,
    fns = list("min", "max"),
    fmt = ~ fmt_integer(.)
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = list(
      cell_text(style = "italic"),
      cell_fill(color = "lightblue")
    ),
    locations = cells_summary(
      groups = "1960s",
      columns = population,
      rows = 1
    )
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = list(
      cell_text(style = "italic"),
      cell_fill(color = "lightgreen")
    ),
    locations = cells_summary(
      groups = "1960s",
      columns = population,
      rows = 2
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cells_summary()` help file.

Function ID

8-19

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other location helper functions: cells_body(), cells_column_labels(), cells_column_spanners(), cells_footnotes(), cells_grand_summary(), cells_row_groups(), cells_source_notes(), cells_stub(), cells_stub_grand_summary(), cells_stub_summary(), cells_stubhead(), cells_title(), location-helper


Location helper for targeting the table title and subtitle

Description

cells_title() is used to target the table title or subtitle when applying a footnote with tab_footnote() or adding custom style with tab_style(). The function is expressly used in each of those functions' locations argument. The header location where the title and optionally the subtitle reside is generated by the tab_header() function.

Usage

cells_title(groups = c("title", "subtitle"))

Arguments

groups

Specification of groups

⁠mult-kw:[title|subtitle]⁠ // default: c("title", "subtitle")

We can either specify "title", "subtitle", or both (the default) in a vector to target the title element, the subtitle element, or both elements.

Value

A list object of classes cells_title and location_cells.

Examples

Use a subset of the sp500 dataset to create a small gt table. Add a header with a title, and then add a footnote to the title with tab_footnote() and cells_title() (in locations).

sp500 |>
  dplyr::filter(date >= "2015-01-05" & date <= "2015-01-10") |>
  dplyr::select(-c(adj_close, volume, high, low)) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(title = "S&P 500") |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "All values in USD.",
    locations = cells_title(groups = "title")
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cells_title()` help file.

Function ID

8-12

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other location helper functions: cells_body(), cells_column_labels(), cells_column_spanners(), cells_footnotes(), cells_grand_summary(), cells_row_groups(), cells_source_notes(), cells_stub(), cells_stub_grand_summary(), cells_stub_summary(), cells_stubhead(), cells_summary(), location-helper


Add one or more columns to a gt table

Description

We can add new columns to a table with cols_add() and it works quite a bit like dplyr::mutate() does. The idea is that you supply name-value pairs where the name is the new column name and the value part describes the data that will go into the column. The latter can: (1) be a vector where the length of the number of rows in the data table, (2) be a single value (which will be repeated all the way down), or (3) involve other columns in the table (as they represent vectors of the correct length). The new columns are added to the end of the column series by default but can instead be added internally by using either the .before or .after arguments. If entirely empty (i.e., all NA) columns need to be added, you can use any of the NA types (e.g., NA, NA_character_, NA_real_, etc.) for such columns.

Usage

cols_add(.data, ..., .before = NULL, .after = NULL)

Arguments

.data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

...

Cell data assignments

⁠<multiple expressions>⁠ // (or, use .list)

Expressions for the assignment of cell values to the new columns. Name-value pairs, in the form of ⁠<column> = <value vector>⁠ will work, so long as any ⁠<column>⁠ value does not already exist in the table. The ⁠<value vector>⁠ may be an expression that uses one or more column names in the table to generate a vector of values. Single values in ⁠<value vector>⁠ will be repeated down the new column. A vector where the length is exactly the number of rows in the table can also be used.

.before, .after

Column used as anchor

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A single column-resolving expression or column index can be given to either .before or .after. The column specifies where the new columns should be positioned among the existing columns in the input data table. While select helper functions such as starts_with() and ends_with() can be used for column targeting, it's recommended that a single column name or index be used. This is to ensure that exactly one column is provided to either of these arguments (otherwise, the function will be stopped). If nothing is provided for either argument then any new column will be placed at the end of the column series.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Targeting the column for insertion with .before or .after

The targeting of a column for insertion is done through the .before or .after arguments (only one of these options should be be used). While tidyselect-style expressions or indices can used to target a column, it's advised that a single column name be used. This is to avoid the possibility of inadvertently resolving multiple columns (since the requirement is for a single column).

Examples

Let's take a subset of the exibble dataset and make a simple gt table with it (using the row column for labels in the stub). We'll add a single column to the right of all the existing columns and call it country. This new column needs eight values and these will be supplied when using cols_add().

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(num, char, datetime, currency, group) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row") |>
  cols_add(
    country = c("TL", "PY", "GL", "PA", "MO", "EE", "CO", "AU")
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_add()` help file.

We can add multiple columns with a single use of cols_add(). The columns generated can be formatted and otherwise manipulated just as any column could be in a gt table. The following example extends the first one by adding more columns and immediately using them in various function calls like fmt_flag() and fmt_units().

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(num, char, datetime, currency, group) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row") |>
  cols_add(
    country = c("TL", "PY", "GL", "PA", "MO", "EE", "CO", "AU"),
    empty = NA_character_,
    units = c(
      "k m s^-2", "N m^-2", "degC", "m^2 kg s^-2",
      "m^2 kg s^-3", "/s", "A s", "m^2 kg s^-3 A^-1"
    ),
    big_num = num ^ 3
  ) |>
  fmt_flag(columns = country) |>
  sub_missing(columns = empty, missing_text = "") |>
  fmt_units(columns = units) |>
  fmt_scientific(columns = big_num)
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `cols_add()` help file.

In this table generated from a portion of the towny dataset, we add two new columns (land_area and density) through a single use of cols_add(). The new land_area column is a conversion of land area from square kilometers to square miles and the density column is calculated by through division of population_2021 by that new land_area column. We hide the now unneeded land_area_km2 with cols_hide() and also perform some column labeling and adjustments to column widths with cols_label() and cols_width().

towny |>
  dplyr::select(name, population_2021, land_area_km2) |>
  dplyr::filter(population_2021 > 100000) |>
  dplyr::slice_max(population_2021, n = 10) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_add(
    land_area = land_area_km2 / 2.58998811,
    density = population_2021 / land_area
  ) |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  cols_hide(columns = land_area_km2) |>
  cols_label(
    population_2021 = "Population",
    density = "Density, {{*persons* / sq mi}}",
    land_area ~ "Area, {{mi^2}}"
  ) |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(120))
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `cols_add()` help file.

It's possible to start with an empty table (i.e., no columns and no rows) and add one or more columns to that. You can, for example, use dplyr::tibble() or data.frame() to create a completely empty table. The first cols_add() call for an empty table can have columns of arbitrary length but subsequent uses of cols_add() must adhere to the rule of new columns being the same length as existing.

dplyr::tibble() |>
  gt() |>
  cols_add(
    num = 1:5,
    chr = vec_fmt_spelled_num(1:5)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `cols_add()` help file.

Tables can contain no rows, yet have columns. In the following example, we'll create a zero-row table with three columns (num, chr, and ext) and perform the same cols_add()-based addition of two columns of data. This is another case where the function allows for arbitrary-length columns (since always adding zero-length columns is impractical). Furthermore, here we can reference columns that already exist (num and chr) and add values to them.

dplyr::tibble(
  num = numeric(0),
  chr = character(0),
  ext = character(0)
) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_add(
    num = 1:5,
    chr = vec_fmt_spelled_num(1:5)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `cols_add()` help file.

We should note that the ext column did not receive any values from cols_add() but the table was expanded to having five rows nonetheless. So, each cell of ext was by necessity filled with an NA value.

Function ID

5-7

Function Introduced

v0.10.0 (October 7, 2023)

See Also

Other column modification functions: cols_align(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_hide(), cols_label(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_unhide(), cols_units(), cols_width()


Set the alignment of columns

Description

The individual alignments of columns (which includes the column labels and all of their data cells) can be modified. We have the option to align text to the left, the center, and the right. In a less explicit manner, we can allow gt to automatically choose the alignment of each column based on the data type (with the auto option).

Usage

cols_align(
  data,
  align = c("auto", "left", "center", "right"),
  columns = everything()
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

align

Alignment type

⁠singl-kw:[auto|left|center|right]⁠ // default: "auto"

This can be any of "center", "left", or "right" for center-, left-, or right-alignment. Alternatively, the "auto" option (the default), will automatically align values in columns according to the data type (see the Details section for specifics on which alignments are applied).

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The columns for which the alignment should be applied. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). By default this is set to everything() which means that the chosen alignment affects all columns.

Details

When you create a gt table object using gt(), automatic alignment of column labels and their data cells is performed. By default, left-alignment is applied to columns of class character, Date, or POSIXct; center-alignment is for columns of class logical, factor, or list; and right-alignment is used for the numeric and integer columns.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Let's use countrypops to create a small gt table. We can change the alignment of the population column with cols_align(). In this example, the label and body cells of population will be aligned to the left.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("code")) |>
  dplyr::filter(
    country_name == "San Marino",
    year %in% 2017:2021
  ) |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "year",
    groupname_col = "country_name"
  ) |>
  cols_align(
    align = "left",
    columns = population
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_align()` help file.

Function ID

5-1

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_hide(), cols_label(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_unhide(), cols_units(), cols_width()


Align all numeric values in a column along the decimal mark

Description

For numeric columns that contain values with decimal portions, it is sometimes useful to have them lined up along the decimal mark for easier readability. We can do this with cols_align_decimal() and provide any number of columns (the function will skip over columns that don't require this type of alignment).

Usage

cols_align_decimal(data, columns = everything(), dec_mark = ".", locale = NULL)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The columns for which decimal alignment should be applied. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). By default this is set to everything() which means that the decimal alignment affects all columns.

dec_mark

Decimal mark

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "."

The character used as a decimal mark in the numeric values to be aligned. If a locale value was used when formatting the numeric values then locale is better to use and it will override any value here in dec_mark.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used to obtain the type of decimal mark used in the numeric values to be aligned (according to the locale's formatting rules). Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Let's put together a two-column table to create a gt table. The first column char just contains letters whereas the second column, num, has a collection of numbers and NA values. We could format the numbers with fmt_number() and elect to drop the trailing zeros past the decimal mark with drop_trailing_zeros = TRUE. This can leave formatted numbers that are hard to scan through because the decimal mark isn't fixed horizontally. We could remedy this and align the numbers by the decimal mark with cols_align_decimal().

dplyr::tibble(
  char = LETTERS[1:9],
  num = c(1.2, -33.52, 9023.2, -283.527, NA, 0.401, -123.1, NA, 41)
) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_number(
    columns = num,
    decimals = 3,
    drop_trailing_zeros = TRUE
  ) |>
  cols_align_decimal()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_align_decimal()` help file.

Function ID

5-2

Function Introduced

v0.8.0 (November 16, 2022)

See Also

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align(), cols_hide(), cols_label(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_unhide(), cols_units(), cols_width()


Hide one or more columns

Description

cols_hide() allows us to hide one or more columns from appearing in the final output table. While it's possible and often desirable to omit columns from the input table data before introduction to gt(), there can be cases where the data in certain columns is useful (as a column reference during formatting of other columns) but the final display of those columns is not necessary.

Usage

cols_hide(data, columns)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // required

The columns to hide in the output display table. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

Details

The hiding of columns is internally a rendering directive, so, all columns that are 'hidden' are still accessible and useful in any expression provided to a rows argument. Furthermore, cols_hide() (as with many gt functions) can be placed anywhere in a pipeline of gt function calls (acting as a promise to hide columns when the timing is right). However, there's perhaps greater readability when placing this call closer to the end of such a pipeline. cols_hide() quietly changes the visible state of a column (much like cols_unhide()) and doesn't yield warnings or messages when changing the state of already-invisible columns.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl. data will be unaltered if columns is not supplied.

Examples

Let's use a small portion of the countrypops dataset to create a gt table. We can hide the country_code_2 and country_code_3 columns with the cols_hide() function.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(
    country_name == "Egypt",
    year %in% 2017:2021
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_hide(columns = c(country_code_2, country_code_3))
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_hide()` help file.

Using another countrypops-based gt table, we can use the population column to provide the conditional placement of footnotes. Then, we'll hide that column along with the country_code_3 column. Note that the order of cols_hide() and tab_footnote() has no effect on the final display of the table.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(
    country_name == "Pakistan",
    year %in% 2017:2021
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_hide(columns = c(country_code_3, population)) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Population above 220,000,000.",
    locations = cells_body(
      columns = year,
      rows = population > 220E6
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `cols_hide()` help file.

Function ID

5-12

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

cols_unhide() to perform the inverse operation.

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_label(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_unhide(), cols_units(), cols_width()


Relabel one or more columns

Description

Column labels can be modified from their default values (the names of the columns from the input table data). When you create a gt table object using gt(), column names effectively become the column labels. While this serves as a good first approximation, column names as label defaults aren't often as appealing in a gt table as the option for custom column labels. cols_label() provides the flexibility to relabel one or more columns and we even have the option to use md() or html() for rendering column labels from Markdown or using HTML.

Usage

cols_label(.data, ..., .list = list2(...), .fn = NULL, .process_units = NULL)

Arguments

.data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

...

Column label assignments

⁠<multiple expressions>⁠ // required (or, use .list)

Expressions for the assignment of column labels for the table columns in .data. Two-sided formulas (e.g., ⁠<LHS> ~ <RHS>⁠) can be used, where the left-hand side corresponds to selections of columns and the right-hand side evaluates to single-length values for the label to apply. Column names should be enclosed in c(). Select helpers like starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), and everything() can be used in the LHS. Named arguments are also valid as input for simple mappings of column name to label text; they should be of the form ⁠<column name> = <label>⁠. Subsequent expressions that operate on the columns assigned previously will result in overwriting column label values.

.list

Alternative to ...

⁠<list of multiple expressions>⁠ // required (or, use ...)

Allows for the use of a list as an input alternative to ....

.fn

Function to apply

function // default: NULL (optional)

An option to specify a function that will be applied to all of the provided label values.

.process_units

Option to process any available units throughout

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Should your column text contain text that is already in gt's units notation (and, importantly, is surrounded by "{{"/"}}"), using TRUE here reprocesses all column such that the units are properly registered for each of the column labels. This ignores any column label assignments in ... or .list.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

A note on column names and column labels

It's important to note that while columns can be freely relabeled, we continue to refer to columns by their original column names. Column names in a tibble or data frame must be unique whereas column labels in gt have no requirement for uniqueness (which is useful for labeling columns as, say, measurement units that may be repeated several times—usually under different spanner labels). Thus, we can still easily distinguish between columns in other gt function calls (e.g., in all of the ⁠fmt*()⁠ functions) even though we may lose distinguishability between column labels once they have undergone relabeling.

Incorporating units with gt's units notation

Measurement units are often seen as part of column labels and indeed it can be much more straightforward to include them here rather than using other devices to make readers aware of units for specific columns. The gt package offers the function cols_units() to apply units to various columns with an interface that's similar to that of this function. However, it is also possible to define units here along with the column label, obviating the need for pattern syntax that joins the two text components. To do this, we have to surround the portion of text in the label that corresponds to the units definition with "{{"/"}}".

Now that we know how to mark text for units definition, we know need to know how to write proper units with the notation. Such notation uses a succinct method of writing units and it should feel somewhat familiar though it is particular to the task at hand. Each unit is treated as a separate entity (parentheses and other symbols included) and the addition of subscript text and exponents is flexible and relatively easy to formulate. This is all best shown with a few examples:

  • "m/s" and "m / s" both render as "m/s"

  • "m s^-1" will appear with the "-1" exponent intact

  • "m /s" gives the same result, as "/<unit>" is equivalent to "<unit>^-1"

  • "E_h" will render an "E" with the "h" subscript

  • "t_i^2.5" provides a t with an "i" subscript and a "2.5" exponent

  • "m[_0^2]" will use overstriking to set both scripts vertically

  • "g/L %C6H12O6%" uses a chemical formula (enclosed in a pair of "%" characters) as a unit partial, and the formula will render correctly with subscripted numbers

  • Common units that are difficult to write using ASCII text may be implicitly converted to the correct characters (e.g., the "u" in "ug", "um", "uL", and "umol" will be converted to the Greek mu symbol; "degC" and "degF" will render a degree sign before the temperature unit)

  • We can transform shorthand symbol/unit names enclosed in ":" (e.g., ":angstrom:", ":ohm:", etc.) into proper symbols

  • Greek letters can added by enclosing the letter name in ":"; you can use lowercase letters (e.g., ":beta:", ":sigma:", etc.) and uppercase letters too (e.g., ":Alpha:", ":Zeta:", etc.)

  • The components of a unit (unit name, subscript, and exponent) can be fully or partially italicized/emboldened by surrounding text with "*" or "**"

Examples

Let's use a portion of the countrypops dataset to create a gt table. We can relabel all the table's columns with the cols_label() function to improve its presentation. In this simple case we are supplying the name of the column on the left-hand side, and the label text on the right-hand side.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("code")) |>
  dplyr::filter(
    country_name == "Uganda",
    year %in% 2017:2021
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_label(
    country_name = "Name",
    year = "Year",
    population = "Population"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_label()` help file.

Using the countrypops dataset again, we label columns similarly to before but this time making the column labels be bold through Markdown formatting (with the md() helper function). It's possible here to use either a = or a ~ between the column name and the label text.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("code")) |>
  dplyr::filter(
    country_name == "Uganda",
    year %in% 2017:2021
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_label(
    country_name = md("**Name**"),
    year = md("**Year**"),
    population ~ md("**Population**")
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `cols_label()` help file.

With a select portion of the metro dataset, let's create a small gt table with three columns. Within cols_label() we'd like to provide column labels that contain line breaks. For that, we can use ⁠<br>⁠ to indicate where the line breaks should be. We also need to use the md() helper function to signal to gt that this text should be interpreted as Markdown. Instead of calling md() on each of labels as before, we can more conveniently use the .fn argument and provide the bare function there (it will be applied to each label defined in the cols_label() call).

metro |>
  dplyr::select(name, lines, passengers, connect_other) |>
  dplyr::slice_max(passengers, n = 10) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_hide(columns = passengers) |>
  cols_label(
    name = "Name of<br>Metro Station",
    lines = "Metro<br>Lines",
    connect_other = "Train<br>Services",
    .fn = md
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `cols_label()` help file.

Using a subset of the towny dataset, we can create an interesting gt table. First, only certain columns are selected from the dataset, some filtering of rows is done, rows are sorted, and then only the first 10 rows are kept. After the data is introduced to gt(), we then apply some spanner labels using two calls of tab_spanner(). Below those spanners, we want to label the columns by the years of interest. Using cols_label() and select expressions on the left side of the formulas, we can easily relabel multiple columns with common label text. Note that we cannot use an = sign in any of the expressions within cols_label(); because the left-hand side is not a single column name, we must use formula syntax (i.e., with the ~).

towny |>
  dplyr::select(
    name, ends_with("2001"), ends_with("2006"), matches("2001_2006")
  ) |>
  dplyr::filter(population_2001 > 100000) |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(pop_change_2001_2006_pct)) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  fmt_percent(columns = matches("change"), decimals = 1) |>
  tab_spanner(label = "Population", columns = starts_with("population")) |>
  tab_spanner(label = "Density", columns = starts_with("density")) |>
  cols_label(
    ends_with("01") ~ "2001",
    ends_with("06") ~ "2006",
    matches("change") ~ md("Population Change,<br>2001 to 2006")
  ) |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(120))
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `cols_label()` help file.

Here's another table that uses the towny dataset. The big difference compared to the previous gt table is that cols_label() as used here incorporates unit notation text (within "{{"/"}}").

towny |>
  dplyr::select(
    name, population_2021, density_2021, land_area_km2, latitude, longitude
  ) |>
  dplyr::filter(population_2021 > 100000) |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(population_2021)) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_integer(columns = population_2021) |>
  fmt_number(
    columns = c(density_2021, land_area_km2),
    decimals = 1
  ) |>
  fmt_number(columns = latitude, decimals = 2) |>
  fmt_number(columns = longitude, decimals = 2, scale_by = -1) |>
  cols_label(
    starts_with("population") ~ "Population",
    starts_with("density") ~ "Density, {{*persons* km^-2}}",
    land_area_km2 ~ "Area, {{km^2}}",
    latitude ~ "Latitude, {{:degrees:N}}",
    longitude ~ "Longitude, {{:degrees:W}}"
  ) |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(120))
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `cols_label()` help file.

The illness dataset has units within the units column. They're formatted in just the right way for gt too. Let's do some text manipulation through dplyr::mutate() and some pivoting with tidyr::pivot_longer() and tidyr::pivot_wider() in order to include the units as part of the column names in the reworked table. These column names are in a format where the units are included within "{{"/"}}", so, we can use cols_label() with the .process_units = TRUE option to register the measurement units. In addition to this, because there is a ⁠<br>⁠ included (for a line break), we should use the .fn option and provide the md() helper function (as a bare function name). This ensures that any line breaks will materialize.

illness |>
  dplyr::mutate(test = paste0(test, ",<br>{{", units, "}}")) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 8) |>
  dplyr::select(-c(starts_with("norm"), units)) |>
  tidyr::pivot_longer(
    cols = starts_with("day"),
    names_to = "day",
    names_prefix = "day_",
    values_to = "value"
  ) |>
  tidyr::pivot_wider(
    names_from = test,
    values_from = value
  ) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "day") |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "Day") |>
  cols_label(
    .fn = md,
    .process_units = TRUE
  ) |>
  cols_width(
    stub() ~ px(50),
    everything() ~ px(120)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the sixth code example in the `cols_label()` help file.

Function ID

5-4

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_hide(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_unhide(), cols_units(), cols_width()


Relabel columns with a function

Description

Column labels can be modified from their default values (the names of the columns from the input table data). When you create a gt table object using gt(), column names effectively become the column labels. While this serves as a good first approximation, you may want to make adjustments so that the columns names present better in the gt output table. The cols_label_with() function allows for modification of column labels through a supplied function. By default, the function will be invoked on all column labels but this can be limited to a subset via the columns argument. With the fn argument, we provide either a bare function name, a RHS formula (with . representing the vector of column labels), or, an anonymous function (e.g., function(x) tools::toTitleCase(x)).

Usage

cols_label_with(data, columns = everything(), fn)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The columns for which the column-labeling operations should be applied. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

fn

Function to apply

⁠function|formula⁠ // required

The function or function call to be applied to the column labels. This can take the form of a bare function (e.g., tools::toTitleCase), a function call as a RHS formula (e.g., ~ tools::toTitleCase(.)), or an anonymous function as in function(x) tools::toTitleCase(x).

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

A note on column names and column labels

It's important to note that while columns can be freely relabeled, we continue to refer to columns by their original column names. Column names in a tibble or data frame must be unique whereas column labels in gt have no requirement for uniqueness (which is useful for labeling columns as, say, measurement units that may be repeated several times—usually under different spanner labels). Thus, we can still easily distinguish between columns in other gt function calls (e.g., in all of the ⁠fmt*()⁠ functions) even though we may lose distinguishability in column labels once they have been relabeled.

Examples

Use a subset of the sp500 dataset to create a gt table. We want all the column labels to be entirely capitalized versions of the default labels but, instead of using cols_label() and rewriting each label manually in capital letters we can use cols_label_with() and instruct it to apply the toupper() function to all column labels.

sp500 |>
  dplyr::filter(
    date >= "2015-12-01" &
      date <= "2015-12-15"
  ) |>
  dplyr::select(-c(adj_close, volume)) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_label_with(fn = toupper)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_label_with()` help file.

Use the countrypops dataset to create a gt table. To improve the presentation of the table, we are again going to change the default column labels via function calls supplied within cols_label_with(). We can, if we prefer, apply multiple types of column label changes in sequence with multiple calls of cols_label_with(). Here, we use the make_clean_names() functions from the janitor package and follow up with the removal of a numeral with gsub().

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(year == 2021) |>
  dplyr::filter(grepl("^C", country_code_3)) |>
  dplyr::select(-country_code_2, -year) |>
  head(8) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_move_to_start(columns = country_code_3) |>
  fmt_integer(columns = population) |>
  cols_label_with(
    fn = ~ janitor::make_clean_names(., case = "title")
  ) |>
  cols_label_with(
    fn = ~ gsub("[0-9]", "", .)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `cols_label_with()` help file.

We can make a svelte gt table with the pizzaplace dataset. There are ways to use one instance of cols_label_with() with multiple functions called on the column labels. In the example, we use an anonymous function call (with the function(x) { ... } construction) to perform multiple mutations of x (the vector of column labels). We can even use the md() helper function with that to signal to gt that the column label should be interpreted as Markdown text.

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::mutate(month = substr(date, 6, 7)) |>
  dplyr::count(month, name = "pizze_vendute") |>
  dplyr::mutate(frazione_della_quota = pizze_vendute / 4000) |>
  dplyr::mutate(date = paste0("2015/", month, "/01")) |>
  dplyr::select(-month) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "date") |>
  fmt_date(date, date_style = "month", locale = "it") |>
  fmt_percent(columns = frazione_della_quota) |>
  fmt_integer(columns = pizze_vendute) |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(100)) |>
  cols_label_with(
    fn = function(x) {
      janitor::make_clean_names(x, case = "title") |>
        toupper() |>
        stringr::str_replace_all("^|$", "**") |>
        md()
    }
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `cols_label_with()` help file.

Function ID

5-5

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (March 31, 2023)

See Also

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_hide(), cols_label(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_unhide(), cols_units(), cols_width()


Merge data from two or more columns to a single column

Description

This function takes input from two or more columns and allows the contents to be merged into a single column by using a pattern that specifies the arrangement. We can specify which columns to merge together in the columns argument. The string-combining pattern is to be provided in the pattern argument. The first column in the columns series operates as the target column (i.e., the column that will undergo mutation) whereas all following columns will be untouched. There is the option to hide the non-target columns (i.e., second and subsequent columns given in columns). The formatting of values in different columns will be preserved upon merging.

Usage

cols_merge(
  data,
  columns,
  hide_columns = columns[-1],
  rows = everything(),
  pattern = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // required

The columns for which the merging operations should be applied. The first column resolved will be the target column (i.e., undergo mutation) and the other columns will serve to provide input. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). A vector is recommended because in that case we are absolutely certain about the order of columns, and, that order information is needed for this and other arguments.

hide_columns

Subset of columns to hide

⁠<column-targeting expression>|FALSE⁠ // default: columns[-1]

Any column names provided here will have their state changed to hidden (via internal use of cols_hide()) if they aren't already hidden. This is convenient if the shared purpose of these specified columns is only to provide string input to the target column. To suppress any hiding of columns, FALSE can be used here.

rows

Rows to target

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should participate in the merging process. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

pattern

Formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A formatting pattern that specifies the arrangement of the columns values and any string literals. The pattern uses numbers (within { }) that correspond to the indices of columns provided in columns. If two columns are provided in columns and we would like to combine the cell data onto the first column, "{1} {2}" could be used. If a pattern isn't provided then a space-separated pattern that includes all columns will be generated automatically. Further details are provided in the How the pattern works section.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

How the pattern works

There are two types of templating for the pattern string:

  1. { } for arranging single column values in a row-wise fashion

  2. ⁠<< >>⁠ to surround spans of text that will be removed if any of the contained { } yields a missing value

Integer values are placed in { } and those values correspond to the columns involved in the merge, in the order they are provided in the columns argument. So the pattern "{1} ({2}-{3})" corresponds to the target column value listed first in columns and the second and third columns cited (formatted as a range in parentheses). With hypothetical values, this might result as the merged string "38.2 (3-8)".

Because some values involved in merging may be missing, it is likely that something like "38.2 (3-NA)" would be undesirable. For such cases, placing sections of text in ⁠<< >>⁠ results in the entire span being eliminated if there were to be an NA value (arising from { } values). We could instead opt for a pattern like "{1}<< ({2}-{3})>>", which results in "38.2" if either columns {2} or {3} have an NA value. We can even use a more complex nesting pattern like "{1}<< ({2}-<<{3}>>)>>" to retain a lower limit in parentheses (where {3} is NA) but remove the range altogether if {2} is NA.

One more thing to note here is that if sub_missing() is used on values in a column, those specific values affected won't be considered truly missing by cols_merge() (since it's been handled with substitute text). So, the complex pattern "{1}<< ({2}-<<{3}>>)>>" might result in something like "38.2 (3-limit)" if sub_missing(..., missing_text = "limit") were used on the third column supplied in columns.

Comparison with other column-merging functions

There are three other column-merging functions that offer specialized behavior that is optimized for common table tasks: cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), and cols_merge_n_pct(). These functions operate similarly, where the non-target columns can be optionally hidden from the output table through the autohide option.

Examples

Use a subset of the sp500 dataset to create a gt table. Use the cols_merge() function to merge the open & close columns together, and, the low & high columns (putting an em dash between both). Relabel the columns with cols_label().

sp500 |>
  dplyr::slice(50:55) |>
  dplyr::select(-volume, -adj_close) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(open, close),
    pattern = "{1}&mdash;{2}"
  ) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(low, high),
    pattern = "{1}&mdash;{2}"
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    open = "open/close",
    low = "low/high"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_merge()` help file.

Use a portion of gtcars to create a gt table. Use the cols_merge() function to merge the trq & trq_rpm columns together, and, the mpg_c & mpg_h columns. Given the presence of NA values, we can use patterns that drop parts of the output text whenever missing values are encountered.

gtcars |>
  dplyr::filter(year == 2017) |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, starts_with(c("trq", "mpg"))) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_integer(columns = trq_rpm) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = starts_with("trq"),
    pattern = "{1}<< ({2} rpm)>>"
  ) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = starts_with("mpg"),
    pattern = "<<{1} city<</{2} hwy>>>>"
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    mfr = "Manufacturer",
    model = "Car Model",
    trq = "Torque",
    mpg_c = "MPG"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `cols_merge()` help file.

Function ID

5-14

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_hide(), cols_label(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_unhide(), cols_units(), cols_width()


Merge two columns to combine counts and percentages

Description

cols_merge_n_pct() is a specialized variant of cols_merge(), It operates by taking two columns that constitute both a count (col_n) and a fraction of the total population (col_pct) and merges them into a single column. What results is a column containing both counts and their associated percentages (e.g., ⁠12 (23.2%)⁠). The column specified in col_pct is dropped from the output table.

Usage

cols_merge_n_pct(data, col_n, col_pct, rows = everything(), autohide = TRUE)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

col_n

Column to target for counts

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // required

The column that contains values for the count component. While select helper functions such as starts_with() and ends_with() can be used for column targeting, it's recommended that a single column name be used. This is to ensure that exactly one column is provided here.

col_pct

Column to target for percentages

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // required

The column that contains values for the percentage component. While select helper functions such as starts_with() and ends_with() can be used for column targeting, it's recommended that a single column name be used. This is to ensure that exactly one column is provided here. This column should be formatted such that percentages are displayed (e.g., with fmt_percent()).

rows

Rows to target

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should participate in the merging process. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

autohide

Automatic hiding of the col_pct column

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to automatically hide the column specified as col_pct. Any columns with their state changed to hidden will behave the same as before, they just won't be displayed in the finalized table.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Comparison with other column-merging functions

This function could be somewhat replicated using cols_merge(), however, cols_merge_n_pct() employs the following specialized semantics for NA and zero-value handling:

  1. NAs in col_n result in missing values for the merged column (e.g., NA + ⁠10.2%⁠ = NA)

  2. NAs in col_pct (but not col_n) result in base values only for the merged column (e.g., 13 + NA = 13)

  3. NAs both col_n and col_pct result in missing values for the merged column (e.g., NA + NA = NA)

  4. If a zero (0) value is in col_n then the formatted output will be "0" (i.e., no percentage will be shown)

Any resulting NA values in the col_n column following the merge operation can be easily formatted using sub_missing(). Separate calls of sub_missing() can be used for the col_n and col_pct columns for finer control of the replacement values. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that values are correct in both the col_n and col_pct columns (this function neither generates nor recalculates values in either). Formatting of each column can be done independently in separate fmt_number() and fmt_percent() calls.

This function is part of a set of four column-merging functions. The other three are the general cols_merge() function and the specialized cols_merge_uncert() and cols_merge_range() functions. These functions operate similarly, where the non-target columns can be optionally hidden from the output table through the hide_columns or autohide options.

Examples

Using a summarized version of the pizzaplace dataset, let's create a gt table that displays the counts and percentages of the top 3 pizzas sold by pizza category in 2015. The cols_merge_n_pct() function is used to merge the n and frac columns (and the frac column is formatted using fmt_percent()).

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::count(name, type, price, sort = TRUE) |>
  dplyr::mutate(frac = prop.table(n)) |>
  dplyr::slice_max(n, n = 3, by = type) |>
  dplyr::arrange(type) |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "name",
    groupname_col = "type"
  ) |>
  fmt_currency(price) |>
  fmt_percent(frac) |>
  cols_merge_n_pct(
    col_n = n,
    col_pct = frac
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    n = md("*N* (%)"),
    price = "Price"
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(font = "monospace"),
    locations = cells_stub()
  ) |>
  tab_stubhead(md("Cat. and  \nPizza Code")) |>
  tab_header(title = "Top 3 Pizzas Sold by Category in 2015") |>
  tab_options(table.width = px(512))
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_merge_n_pct()` help file.

Function ID

5-17

Function Introduced

v0.3.0 (May 12, 2021)

See Also

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_hide(), cols_label(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_unhide(), cols_units(), cols_width()


Merge two columns to a value range column

Description

cols_merge_range() is a specialized variant of cols_merge(). It operates by taking a two columns that constitute a range of values (col_begin and col_end) and merges them into a single column. What results is a column containing both values separated by an em dash. The column specified in col_end is dropped from the output table.

Usage

cols_merge_range(
  data,
  col_begin,
  col_end,
  rows = everything(),
  autohide = TRUE,
  sep = NULL,
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

col_begin

Column to target for beginning of range

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // required

The column that contains values for the start of the range. While select helper functions such as starts_with() and ends_with() can be used for column targeting, it's recommended that a single column name be used. This is to ensure that exactly one column is provided here.

col_end

Column to target for end of range

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // required

The column that contains values for the end of the range. While select helper functions such as starts_with() and ends_with() can be used for column targeting, it's recommended that a single column name be used. This is to ensure that exactly one column is provided here.

rows

Rows to target

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should participate in the merging process. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

autohide

Automatic hiding of the col_end column

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to automatically hide the column specified as col_end. Any columns with their state changed to hidden will behave the same as before, they just won't be displayed in the finalized table.

sep

Separator text for ranges

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The separator text that indicates the values are ranged. If a sep value is not provided then the range separator specific to the locale provided will be used (if a locale isn't specified then an en dash will be used). You can specify the use of an en dash with "--"; a triple-hyphen sequence ("---") will be transformed to an em dash. Should you want hyphens to be taken literally, the sep value can be supplied within the base I() function.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for applying a sep pattern specific to a locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() as a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Comparison with other column-merging functions

This function could be somewhat replicated using cols_merge(), however, cols_merge_range() employs the following specialized operations for NA handling:

  1. NAs in col_begin (but not col_end) result in a display of only

  2. NAs in col_end (but not col_begin) result in a display of only the col_begin values only for the merged column (this is the converse of the previous)

  3. NAs both in col_begin and col_end result in missing values for the merged column

Any resulting NA values in the col_begin column following the merge operation can be easily formatted using sub_missing(). Separate calls of sub_missing() can be used for the col_begin and col_end columns for finer control of the replacement values.

This function is part of a set of four column-merging functions. The other three are the general cols_merge() function and the specialized cols_merge_uncert() and cols_merge_n_pct() functions. These functions operate similarly, where the non-target columns can be optionally hidden from the output table through the hide_columns or autohide options.

Examples

Let's use a subset of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table, keeping only the model, mpg_c, and mpg_h columns. Merge the "mpg*" columns together as a single range column (which is labeled as MPG, in italics) using the cols_merge_range() function. After the merging process, the column label for the mpg_c column is updated with cols_label() to better describe the content.

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(model, starts_with("mpg")) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:8) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_merge_range(
    col_begin = mpg_c,
    col_end = mpg_h
  ) |>
  cols_label(mpg_c = md("*MPG*"))
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_merge_range()` help file.

Function ID

5-16

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_hide(), cols_label(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_unhide(), cols_units(), cols_width()


Merge columns to a value-with-uncertainty column

Description

cols_merge_uncert() is a specialized variant of cols_merge(). It takes as input a base value column (col_val) and either: (1) a single uncertainty column, or (2) two columns representing lower and upper uncertainty bounds. These columns will be essentially merged in a single column (that of col_val). What results is a column with values and associated uncertainties, and any columns specified in col_uncert are hidden from appearing the output table.

Usage

cols_merge_uncert(
  data,
  col_val,
  col_uncert,
  rows = everything(),
  sep = " +/- ",
  autohide = TRUE
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

col_val

Column to target for base values

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // required

The column that contains values for the start of the range. While select helper functions such as starts_with() and ends_with() can be used for column targeting, it's recommended that a single column name be used. This is to ensure that exactly one column is provided here.

col_uncert

Column or columns to target for uncertainty values

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // required

The most common case involves supplying a single column with uncertainties; these values will be combined with those in col_val. Less commonly, the lower and upper uncertainty bounds may be different. For that case, two columns representing the lower and upper uncertainty values away from col_val, respectively, should be provided. While select helper functions such as starts_with() and ends_with() can be used for column targeting, it's recommended that one or two column names be explicitly provided in a vector.

rows

Rows to target

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should participate in the merging process. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

sep

Separator text for uncertainties

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: " +/- "

The separator text that contains the uncertainty mark for a single uncertainty value. The default value of " +/- " indicates that an appropriate plus/minus mark will be used depending on the output context. Should you want this special symbol to be taken literally, it can be supplied within the I() function.

autohide

Automatic hiding of the col_uncert column(s)

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to automatically hide any columns specified in col_uncert. Any columns with their state changed to 'hidden' will behave the same as before, they just won't be displayed in the finalized table.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Comparison with other column-merging functions

This function could be somewhat replicated using cols_merge() in the case where a single column is supplied for col_uncert, however, cols_merge_uncert() employs the following specialized semantics for NA handling:

  1. NAs in col_val result in missing values for the merged column (e.g., NA + 0.1 = NA)

  2. NAs in col_uncert (but not col_val) result in base values only for the merged column (e.g., 12.0 + NA = 12.0)

  3. NAs both col_val and col_uncert result in missing values for the merged column (e.g., NA + NA = NA)

Any resulting NA values in the col_val column following the merge operation can be easily formatted using sub_missing().

This function is part of a set of four column-merging functions. The other three are the general cols_merge() function and the specialized cols_merge_range() and cols_merge_n_pct() functions. These functions operate similarly, where the non-target columns can be optionally hidden from the output table through the hide_columns or autohide options.

Examples

Let's use the exibble dataset to create a simple, two-column gt table (keeping only the num and currency columns). We'll format the num column with the fmt_number() function. Next we merge the currency and num columns into the currency column; this will contain a base value and an uncertainty and it's all done using the cols_merge_uncert() function. After the merging process, the column label for the currency column is updated with cols_label() to better describe the content.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(num, currency) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:7) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_number(
    columns = num,
    decimals = 3,
    use_seps = FALSE
  ) |>
  cols_merge_uncert(
    col_val = currency,
    col_uncert = num
  ) |>
  cols_label(currency = "value + uncert.")
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_merge_uncert()` help file.

Function ID

5-15

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_hide(), cols_label(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_range(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_unhide(), cols_units(), cols_width()


Move one or more columns

Description

On those occasions where you need to move columns this way or that way, we can make use of the cols_move() function. While it's true that the movement of columns can be done upstream of gt, it is much easier and less error prone to use the function provided here. The movement procedure here takes one or more specified columns (in the columns argument) and places them to the right of a different column (the after argument). The ordering of the columns to be moved is preserved, as is the ordering of all other columns in the table.

Usage

cols_move(data, columns, after)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // required

The columns for which the moving operations should be applied. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything(). The columns move as a group to a different position. The order of the remaining columns will be preserved.

after

Column used as anchor

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // required

The column used to anchor the insertion of the moved columns. All of the moved columns will be placed to the right of this column. While select helper functions such as starts_with() and ends_with() can be used for column targeting, it's recommended that a single column name be used. This is to ensure that exactly one column is provided here.

Details

The columns supplied in columns must all exist in the table and none of them can be in the after argument. The after column must also exist and only one column should be provided here. If you need to place one or more columns at the beginning of the column series, the cols_move_to_start() function should be used. Similarly, if those columns to move should be placed at the end of the column series then use cols_move_to_end().

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use the countrypops dataset to create a gt table. We'll choose to position the population column after the country_name column by using the cols_move() function.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("code")) |>
  dplyr::filter(
    country_name == "Japan",
    year %in% 2012:2021
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_move(
    columns = population,
    after = country_name
  ) |>
  fmt_integer(columns = population)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_move()` help file.

Function ID

5-9

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_hide(), cols_label(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_unhide(), cols_units(), cols_width()


Move one or more columns to the end

Description

It's possible to move a set of columns to the end of the column series, we only need to specify which columns are to be moved. While this can be done upstream of gt, this function makes to process much easier and it's less error prone. The ordering of the columns that are moved to the end is preserved (same with the ordering of all other columns in the table).

Usage

cols_move_to_end(data, columns)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // required

The columns for which the moving operations should be applied. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything(). The columns move as a group to the right-most side of the table. The order of the remaining columns will be preserved.

Details

The columns supplied in columns must all exist in the table. If you need to place one or columns at the start of the column series, cols_move_to_start() should be used. More control is offered with cols_move(), where columns could be placed after a specific column.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

For this example, we'll use a portion of the countrypops dataset to create a simple gt table. Let's move the year column, which is the middle column, to the end of the column series with cols_move_to_end().

countrypops |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("code")) |>
  dplyr::filter(
    country_name == "Benin",
    year %in% 2017:2021
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_move_to_end(columns = year)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_move_to_end()` help file.

We can also move multiple columns at a time. With the same countrypops-based table, let's move both the year and country_name columns to the end of the column series.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("code")) |>
  dplyr::filter(
    country_name == "Benin",
    year %in% 2017:2021
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_move_to_end(columns = c(year, country_name))
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `cols_move_to_end()` help file.

Function ID

5-11

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_hide(), cols_label(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_unhide(), cols_units(), cols_width()


Move one or more columns to the start

Description

We can easily move set of columns to the beginning of the column series and we only need to specify which columns. It's possible to do this upstream of gt, however, it is easier with this function and it presents less possibility for error. The ordering of the columns that are moved to the start is preserved (same with the ordering of all other columns in the table).

Usage

cols_move_to_start(data, columns)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // required

The columns for which the moving operations should be applied. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). The columns move as a group to the left-most side of the table. The order of the remaining columns will be preserved.

Details

The columns supplied in columns must all exist in the table. If you need to place one or columns at the end of the column series, cols_move_to_end() should be used. More control is offered with cols_move(), where columns could be placed after a specific column.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

For this example, we'll use a portion of the countrypops dataset to create a simple gt table. Let's move the year column, which is the middle column, to the start of the column series with cols_move_to_start().

countrypops |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("code")) |>
  dplyr::filter(
    country_name == "Fiji",
    year %in% 2017:2021
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_move_to_start(columns = year)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_move_to_start()` help file.

We can also move multiple columns at a time. With the same countrypops-based table, let's move both the year and population columns to the start of the column series.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("code")) |>
  dplyr::filter(
    country_name == "Fiji",
    year %in% 2017:2021
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_move_to_start(columns = c(year, population))
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `cols_move_to_start()` help file.

Function ID

5-10

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_hide(), cols_label(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_unhide(), cols_units(), cols_width()


Add a new column of nanoplots, taking input data from selected columns

Description

Nanoplots are tiny plots you can use in your gt table. They are simple by design, mainly because there isn't a lot of space to work with. With that simplicity, however, you do get a set of very succinct data visualizations that adapt nicely to the amount of data you feed into them. With cols_nanoplot() you take data from one or more columns as the basic inputs for the nanoplots and generate a new column containing the plots. The nanoplots are robust against missing values, and multiple strategies are available for handling missingness.

Nanoplots try to show individual data with reasonably good visibility. Interactivity is included as a basic feature so one can hover over the data points and vertical guides will display the value ascribed to each data point. Because gt knows all about numeric formatting, values will be compactly formatted so as to not take up valuable real estate. If you need to create a nanoplot based on monetary values, that can be handled by providing the currency code to the nanoplot_options() helper (then hook that up to the options argument). A guide on the left-hand side of the plot area will appear on hover and display the minimal and maximal y values.

There are three types of nanoplots available: "line", "bar", "boxplot". A line plot shows individual data points and has smooth connecting lines between them to allow for easier scanning of values. You can opt for straight-line connections between data points, or, no connections at all (it's up to you). You can even eschew the data points and just have a simple line. Regardless of how you mix and match difference plot layers, the plot area focuses on the domain of the data points with the goal of showing you the overall trend of the data. The data you feed into a line plot can consist of a single vector of values (resulting in equally-spaced y values), or, you can supply two vectors representative of x and y.

A bar plot is built a little bit differently. The focus is on evenly-spaced bars (requiring a single vector of values) that project from a zero line, clearly showing the difference between positive and negative values. By default, any type of nanoplot will have basic interactivity. One can hover over the data points and vertical guides will display values ascribed to each. A guide on the left-hand side of the plot area will display the minimal and maximal y values on hover.

Every box plot will take the collection of values for a row and construct the plot horizontally. This is essentially a standard box-and-whisker diagram where outliers are automatically displayed outside the left and right fences.

While basic customization options are present in the cols_nanoplot(), many more opportunities for customizing nanoplots on a more granular level are possible with the nanoplot_options() helper function. That function should be invoked at the options argument of cols_nanoplot(). Through that helper, layers of the nanoplots can be selectively removed and the aesthetics of the remaining plot components can be modified.

Usage

cols_nanoplot(
  data,
  columns,
  rows = everything(),
  plot_type = c("line", "bar", "boxplot"),
  plot_height = "2em",
  missing_vals = c("gap", "marker", "zero", "remove"),
  autoscale = FALSE,
  autohide = TRUE,
  columns_x_vals = NULL,
  reference_line = NULL,
  reference_area = NULL,
  expand_x = NULL,
  expand_y = NULL,
  new_col_name = NULL,
  new_col_label = NULL,
  before = NULL,
  after = NULL,
  options = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns from which to get data for the dependent variable

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // required

The columns which contain the numeric data to be plotted as nanoplots. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). Data collected from the columns will be concatenated together in the order of resolution.

rows

Rows that should contain nanoplots

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

With rows we can specify which rows should contain nanoplots in the new column. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

plot_type

The type of nanoplot to display

⁠singl-kw:[line|bar|boxplot]⁠ // default: "line"

Nanoplots can either take the form of a line plot (using "line"), a bar plot (with "bar"), or a box plot ("boxplot"). A line plot, by default, contains layers for a data line, data points, and a data area. Each of these can be deactivated by using nanoplot_options(). With a bar plot, the always visible layer is that of the data bars. Furthermore, a line plot can optionally take in x values through the columns_x_vals argument whereas bar plots and box plots both ignore any data representing the independent variable.

plot_height

The height of the nanoplots

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "2em"

The height of the nanoplots. The default here is a sensible value of "2em". By way of comparison, this is a far greater height than the default for icons through fmt_icon() ("1em") and is the same height as images inserted via fmt_image() (also having a "2em" height default).

missing_vals

Treatment of missing values

⁠singl-kw:[gap|marker|zero|remove]⁠ // default: "gap"

If missing values are encountered within the input data, there are three strategies available for their handling: (1) "gap" will show data gaps at the sites of missing data, where data lines will have discontinuities and bar plots will have missing bars; (2) "marker" will behave like "gap" but show prominent visual marks at the missing data locations; (3) "zero" will replace NA values with zero values; and (4) "remove" will remove any incoming NA values.

autoscale

Automatically set x- and y-axis scale limits based on data

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Using autoscale = TRUE will ensure that the bounds of all nanoplots produced are based on the limits of data combined from all input rows. This will result in a shared scale across all of the nanoplots (for y- and x-axis data), which is useful in those cases where the nanoplot data should be compared across rows.

autohide

Automatically hide the columns/columns_x_vals column(s)

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to automatically hide any columns specified in columns and also columns_x_vals (if used). Any columns with their state changed to 'hidden' will behave the same as before, they just won't be displayed in the finalized table. Should you want to have these 'input' columns be viewable, set autohide = FALSE.

columns_x_vals

Columns containing values for the optional x variable

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

We can optionally obtain data for the independent variable (i.e., the x-axis data) if specifying columns in columns_x_vals. This is only for the "line" type of plot (set via the plot_type argument). We can supply either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). Data collected from the columns will be concatenated together in the order of resolution.

reference_line

Add a reference line

⁠scalar<numeric|integer|character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A reference line requires a single input to define the line. It could be a static numeric value, applied to all nanoplots generated. Or, the input can be one of the following for generating the line from the underlying data: (1) "mean", (2) "median", (3) "min", (4) "max", (5) "q1", (6) "q3", (7) "first", or (8) "last".

reference_area

Add a reference area

⁠vector<numeric|integer|character>|list⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A reference area requires two inputs to define bottom and top boundaries for a rectangular area. The types of values supplied are the same as those expected for reference_line, which is either a static numeric value or one of the following keywords for the generation of the value: (1) "mean", (2) "median", (3) "min", (4) "max", (5) "q1", (6) "q3", (7) "first", or (8) "last". Input can either be a vector or list with two elements.

expand_x, expand_y

Expand plot scale in the x and y directions

⁠vector<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Should you need to have plots expand in the x or y direction, provide one or more values to expand_x or expand_y. Any values provided that are outside of the range of data provided to the plot should result in a scale expansion.

new_col_name

Column name for the new column containing the plots

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A single column name in quotation marks. Values will be extracted from this column and provided to compatible arguments. If not provided the new column name will be "nanoplots".

new_col_label

Column label for the new column containing the plots

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A single column label. If not supplied then the column label will inherit from new_col_name (if nothing provided to that argument, the label will be "nanoplots").

before, after

Column used as anchor

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A single column-resolving expression or column index can be given to either before or after. The column specifies where the new column containing the nanoplots should be positioned among the existing columns in the input data table. While select helper functions such as starts_with() and ends_with() can be used for column targeting, it's recommended that a single column name or index be used. This is to ensure that exactly one column is provided to either of these arguments (otherwise, the function will be stopped). If nothing is provided for either argument then the new column will be placed at the end of the column series.

options

Set options for the nanoplots

⁠obj:<nanoplot_options⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

By using the nanoplot_options() helper function here, you can alter the layout and styling of the nanoplots in the new column.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Targeting cells with columns and rows

Targeting of values to insert into the nanoplots is done through columns and additionally by rows (if nothing is provided for rows then entire columns are selected). Aside from declaring column names in c() (with bare column names or names in quotes) we can use also tidyselect-style expressions. This can be as basic as supplying a select helper like starts_with(), or, providing a more complex incantation like

where(~ is.numeric(.x) & max(.x, na.rm = TRUE) > 1E6)

which targets numeric columns that have a maximum value greater than 1,000,000 (excluding any NAs from consideration).

Once the columns are targeted, we may also target the rows within those columns. This can be done in a variety of ways. If a stub is present, then we potentially have row identifiers. Those can be used much like column names in the columns-targeting scenario. We can use simpler tidyselect-style expressions (the select helpers should work well here) and we can use quoted row identifiers in c(). It's also possible to use row indices (e.g., c(3, 5, 6)) though these index values must correspond to the row numbers of the input data (the indices won't necessarily match those of rearranged rows if row groups are present). One more type of expression is possible, an expression that takes column values (can involve any of the available columns in the table) and returns a logical vector.

How to supply data for nanoplots

The input data for nanoplots naturally needs to be numeric and there are two major ways to formulate that data: (1) from single values across many columns, and (2) using text-based value streams. It's pretty easy to rationalize the first, and we may already have wide data in the input data frame anyway (take a look at the illness and towny datasets for examples of this). There's one data value per column so the key thing here is to reference the columns in the correct order. With a select helper, good column naming, and the columns being in the intended order, this is a snap.

The second option is to use text-based value streams. Sometimes you simply don't want or don't need multiple columns and so a single column with all of the data might be more practical. To make this work, you'd need to have a set of numerical values separated by some sort of delimiter (could be a comma, a space, a semicolon, you get the idea). Here's an example with three numbers, written three ways: "3.6 -2.44 1.98", "3.6, -2.44, 1.98", and "3.6;-2.44;1.98". You can include NA values, not a problem, and here's an example of that: "6.232 NA 3.7 0.93". Another form of value stream involves using datetimes in the ISO 8601 form of ⁠YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS⁠. These will be internally converted to numeric values (seconds elapsed since "1970-01-01 00:00:00"). An example of a datetime-based value stream is: "2012-06-12 08:24:13, 2012-06-12 10:37:08, 2012-06-12 14:03:24".

Value streams can be pretty big if you want them to be, and you don't have to deal with containing individual values across multiple columns. For the case where you need to provide two sets of values (x and y, for line plots with columns and columns_x_vals), have two equivalently sized value streams in two columns. Value streams can also be concatenated together by referencing columns having their own separate value streams.

Reference line and reference area

Neither a horizontal reference line nor a reference area is present in the default view but these can be added by providing valid input values in the reference_line and reference_area arguments. A reference line can be either be a static numeric value (supply any number to reference_line), or it can be a keyword that computes the reference line y value using the data values for each nanoplot. The following keywords can be used:

  1. "mean": The mean of the data values

  2. "median": Median of data values

  3. "min": Minimum value in set of data values

  4. "max": The maximum value

  5. "q1": The first, or lower, quartile of the data values

  6. "q3": The third quartile, otherwise known as the upper quartile

  7. "first": The first data value

  8. "last": The last data value

The reference area accepts two inputs, and this can be two of the above keywords, a keyword and a static numeric value, or two numeric values.

Examples

Let's make some nanoplots with the illness dataset. The columns beginning with 'day' all contain ordered measurement values, comprising seven individual daily results. Using cols_nanoplot() we create a new column to hold the nanoplots (with new_col_name = "nanoplots"), referencing the columns containing the data (with columns = starts_with("day")). It's also possible to define a column label here using the new_col_label argument.

illness |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "test") |>
  tab_header("Partial summary of daily tests performed on YF patient") |>
  tab_stubhead(label = md("**Test**")) |>
  cols_hide(columns = starts_with("norm")) |>
  fmt_units(columns = units) |>
  cols_nanoplot(
    columns = starts_with("day"),
    new_col_name = "nanoplots",
    new_col_label = md("*Progression*")
  ) |>
  cols_align(align = "center", columns = nanoplots) |>
  cols_merge(columns = c(test, units), pattern = "{1} ({2})") |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Measurements from Day 3 through to Day 8.",
    locations = cells_column_labels(columns = nanoplots)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_nanoplot()` help file.

The previous table showed us some line-based nanoplots. We can also make very small bar plots with cols_nanoplot(). Let's take the pizzaplace dataset and make a small summary table showing daily pizza sales by type (there are four types). This will be limited to the first ten days of pizza sales in 2015, so, there will be ten rows in total. We can use plot_type = "bar" to make bar plots from the daily sales counts in the chicken, classic, supreme, and veggie columns. Because we know there will always be four bars (one for each type of pizza) we can be a little creative and apply colors to each of the bars through use of the data_bar_fill_color argument in nanoplot_options().

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::count(type, date) |>
  tidyr::pivot_wider(names_from = type, values_from = n) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "date") |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("First Ten Days of Pizza Sales in 2015")
  ) |>
  cols_nanoplot(
    columns = c(chicken, classic, supreme, veggie),
    plot_type = "bar",
    autohide = FALSE,
    new_col_name = "pizzas_sold",
    new_col_label = "Sales by Type",
    options = nanoplot_options(
      show_data_line = FALSE,
      show_data_area = FALSE,
      data_bar_stroke_color = "transparent",
      data_bar_fill_color = c("brown", "gold", "purple", "green")
    )
  ) |>
  cols_width(pizzas_sold ~ px(150)) |>
  cols_align(columns = -date, align = "center") |>
  fmt_date(columns = date, date_style = "yMMMEd") |>
  opt_all_caps()
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `cols_nanoplot()` help file.

Now we'll make another table that contains two columns of nanoplots. Starting from the towny dataset, we first reduce it down to a subset of columns and rows. All of the columns related to either population or density will be used as input data for the two nanoplots. Both nanoplots will use a reference line that is generated from the median of the input data. And by naming the new nanoplot-laden columns in a similar manner as the input data columns, we can take advantage of select helpers (e.g., when using tab_spanner()). Many of the input data columns are now redundant because of the plots, so we'll elect to hide most of those with cols_hide().

towny |>
  dplyr::select(name, starts_with("population"), starts_with("density")) |>
  dplyr::filter(population_2021 > 200000) |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(population_2021)) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_integer(columns = starts_with("population")) |>
  fmt_number(columns = starts_with("density"), decimals = 1) |>
  cols_nanoplot(
    columns = starts_with("population"),
    reference_line = "median",
    autohide = FALSE,
    new_col_name = "population_plot",
    new_col_label = md("*Change*")
  ) |>
  cols_nanoplot(
    columns = starts_with("density"),
    plot_type = "bar",
    autohide = FALSE,
    new_col_name = "density_plot",
    new_col_label = md("*Change*")
  ) |>
  cols_hide(columns = matches("2001|2006|2011|2016")) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Population",
    columns = starts_with("population")
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Density ({{*persons* km^-2}})",
    columns = starts_with("density")
  ) |>
  cols_label_with(
    columns = -matches("plot"),
    fn = function(x) gsub("[^0-9]+", "", x)
  ) |>
  cols_align(align = "center", columns = matches("plot")) |>
  cols_width(
    name ~ px(140),
    everything() ~ px(100)
  ) |>
  opt_horizontal_padding(scale = 2)
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `cols_nanoplot()` help file.

The sza dataset can, with just some use of dplyr and tidyr, give us a wide table full of nanoplottable values. We'll transform the solar zenith angles to solar altitude angles and create a column of nanoplots using the newly calculated values. There are a few NA values during periods where the sun hasn't risen (usually before 06:30 in the winter months) and those values will be replaced with 0 using missing_vals = "zero". We'll also elect to create bar plots using the plot_type = "bar" option. The height of the plots will be bumped up to "2.5em" from the default of "2em". Finally, we will use nanoplot_options() to modify the coloring of the data bars.

sza |>
  dplyr::filter(latitude == 20 & tst <= "1200") |>
  dplyr::select(-latitude) |>
  dplyr::filter(!is.na(sza)) |>
  dplyr::mutate(saa = 90 - sza) |>
  dplyr::select(-sza) |>
  tidyr::pivot_wider(
    names_from = tst,
    values_from = saa,
    names_sort = TRUE
  ) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "month") |>
  tab_header(
    title = "Solar Altitude Angles",
    subtitle = "Average values every half hour from 05:30 to 12:00"
  ) |>
  cols_nanoplot(
    columns = matches("0"),
    plot_type = "bar",
    missing_vals = "zero",
    new_col_name = "saa",
    plot_height = "2.5em",
    options = nanoplot_options(
      data_bar_stroke_color = "GoldenRod",
      data_bar_fill_color = "DarkOrange"
    )
  ) |>
  tab_options(
    table.width = px(400),
    column_labels.hidden = TRUE
  ) |>
  cols_align(
    align = "center",
    columns = everything()
  ) |>
  tab_source_note(
    source_note = "The solar altitude angle is the complement to
    the solar zenith angle. TMYK."
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `cols_nanoplot()` help file.

You can use number and time streams as data for nanoplots. Let's demonstrate how we can make use of them with some creative transformation of the pizzaplace dataset. A value stream is really a string with delimited numeric values, like this: "7.24,84.2,14". A value stream can also contain dates and/or datetimes, and here's an example of that: "2020-06-02 13:05:13,2020-06-02 14:24:05,2020-06-02 18:51:37". Having data in this form can often be more convenient since different nanoplots might have varying amounts of data (and holding different amounts of data in a fixed number of columns is cumbersome). There are date and time columns in this dataset and we'll use that to get x values denoting high-resolution time instants: the second of the day that a pizza was sold (this is true pizza analytics). We also have the sell price for a pizza, and that'll serve as the y values. The pizzas belong to four different groups (in the type column) and we'll group by that and create value streams with paste(..., collapse = ",") inside the dplyr::summarize() call. With two value streams in each row (having the same number of values) we can now make a gt table with nanoplots.

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::filter(date == "2015-01-01") |>
  dplyr::mutate(date_time = paste(date, time)) |>
  dplyr::select(type, date_time, price) |>
  dplyr::group_by(type) |>
  dplyr::summarize(
    date_time = paste(date_time, collapse = ","),
    sold = paste(price, collapse = ",")
  ) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "type") |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("Pizzas sold on **January 1, 2015**"),
    subtitle = "Between the opening hours of 11:30 to 22:30"
  ) |>
  cols_nanoplot(
    columns = sold,
    columns_x_vals = date_time,
    expand_x = c("2015-01-01 11:30", "2015-01-01 22:30"),
    reference_line = "median",
    new_col_name = "pizzas_sold",
    new_col_label = "Pizzas Sold",
    options = nanoplot_options(
      show_data_line = FALSE,
      show_data_area = FALSE,
      currency = "USD"
    )
  ) |>
  cols_width(pizzas_sold ~ px(200)) |>
  cols_align(columns = pizzas_sold, align = "center") |>
  opt_all_caps()
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `cols_nanoplot()` help file.

Notice that the columns containing the value streams are hid due to the default argument autohide = TRUE because, while useful, they don't need to be displayed to anybody viewing a table. Since we have a lot of data points and a connecting line is not as valuable here, we also set show_data_line = FALSE in nanoplot_options(). It's more interesting to see the clusters of the differently priced pizzas over the entire day. Specifying a currency in nanoplot_options() is a nice touch since the y values are sale prices in U.S. Dollars (hovering over data points gives correctly formatted values). Finally, having a reference line based on the median gives pretty useful information. Seems like customers preferred getting the "chicken"-type pizzas in large size!

Using the gibraltar dataset, let's make a series of nanoplots across the meteorological parameters of temperature, humidity, and wind speed. We'll want to customize the appearance of the plots across three columns and we can make this somewhat simpler by assigning a common set of options through nanoplot_options(). In this table we want to make comparisons across nanoplots in a particular column easier, so, we'll set autoscale = TRUE so that there is a common y-axis scale for each of the parameters (based on the extents of the data).

nanoplot_options_list <-
  nanoplot_options(
    data_point_radius = px(4),
    data_point_stroke_width = px(2),
    data_point_stroke_color = "black",
    data_point_fill_color = "white",
    data_line_stroke_width = px(4),
    data_line_stroke_color = "gray",
    show_data_line = TRUE,
    show_data_points = TRUE,
    show_data_area = FALSE,
  )

gibraltar |>
  dplyr::filter(date <= "2023-05-14") |>
  dplyr::mutate(time = as.numeric(hms::as_hms(paste0(time, ":00")))) |>
  dplyr::mutate(humidity = humidity * 100) |>
  dplyr::select(date, time, temp, humidity, wind_speed) |>
  dplyr::group_by(date) |>
  dplyr::summarize(
    time = paste(time, collapse = ","),
    temp = paste(temp, collapse = ","),
    humidity = paste(humidity, collapse = ","),
    wind_speed = paste(wind_speed, collapse = ","),
  ) |>
  dplyr::mutate(is_satsun = lubridate::wday(date) %in% c(1, 7)) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "date") |>
  tab_header(
    title = "Meteorological Summary of Gibraltar Station",
    subtitle = "Data taken from May 1-14, 2023."
  ) |>
  fmt_date(columns = stub(), date_style = "wd_m_day_year") |>
  cols_nanoplot(
    columns = temp,
    columns_x_vals = time,
    expand_x = c(0, 86400),
    autoscale = TRUE,
    new_col_name = "temperature_nano",
    new_col_label = "Temperature",
    options = nanoplot_options_list
  ) |>
  cols_nanoplot(
    columns = humidity,
    columns_x_vals = time,
    expand_x = c(0, 86400),
    autoscale = TRUE,
    new_col_name = "humidity_nano",
    new_col_label = "Humidity",
    options = nanoplot_options_list
  ) |>
  cols_nanoplot(
    columns = wind_speed,
    columns_x_vals = time,
    expand_x = c(0, 86400),
    autoscale = TRUE,
    new_col_name = "wind_speed_nano",
    new_col_label = "Wind Speed",
    options = nanoplot_options_list
  ) |>
  cols_units(
    temperature_nano = ":degree:C",
    humidity_nano = "% (RH)",
    wind_speed_nano = "m s^-1"
  ) |>
  cols_hide(columns = is_satsun) |>
  tab_style_body(
    style = cell_fill(color = "#E5FEFE"),
    values = TRUE,
    targets = "row",
    extents = c("body", "stub")
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(align = "center"),
    locations = cells_column_labels()
  )
This image of a table was generated from the sixth code example in the `cols_nanoplot()` help file.

Box plots can be generated, and we just need to use plot_type = "boxplot" to make that type of nanoplot. Using a small portion of the pizzaplace dataset, we will create a simple table that displays a box plot of pizza sales for a selection of days. By converting the string-time 24-hour-clock time values to the number of seconds elapsed in a day, we get continuous values that can be incorporated into each box plot. And, by supplying a function to the y_val_fmt_fn argument within nanoplot_options(), we can transform the integer seconds values back to clock times for display on hover.

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::filter(date <= "2015-01-14") |>
  dplyr::mutate(time = as.numeric(hms::as_hms(time))) |>
  dplyr::summarize(time = paste(time, collapse = ","), .by = date) |>
  dplyr::mutate(is_weekend = lubridate::wday(date) %in% 6:7) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(title = "Pizza Sales in Early January 2015") |>
  fmt_date(columns = date, date_style = 2) |>
  cols_nanoplot(
    columns = time,
    plot_type = "boxplot",
    options = nanoplot_options(y_val_fmt_fn = function(x) hms::as_hms(x))
  ) |>
  cols_hide(columns = is_weekend) |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(250)) |>
  cols_align(align = "center", columns = nanoplots) |>
  cols_align(align = "left", columns = date) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_borders(
      sides = "left", color = "gray"),
    locations = cells_body(columns = nanoplots)
  ) |>
  tab_style_body(
    style = cell_fill(color = "#E5FEFE"),
    values = TRUE,
    targets = "row"
  ) |>
  tab_options(column_labels.hidden = TRUE)
This image of a table was generated from the seventh code example in the `cols_nanoplot()` help file.

Function ID

5-8

Function Introduced

v0.10.0 (October 7, 2023)

See Also

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_hide(), cols_label(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_unhide(), cols_units(), cols_width()


Unhide one or more columns

Description

cols_unhide() allows us to take one or more hidden columns (usually done via cols_hide()) and make them visible in the final output table. This may be important in cases where the user obtains a gt_tbl object with hidden columns and there is motivation to reveal one or more of those.

Usage

cols_unhide(data, columns)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The columns to unhide in the output display table. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

Details

The hiding and unhiding of columns is internally a rendering directive, so, all columns that are 'hidden' are still accessible and useful in any expression provided to a rows argument. The cols_unhide() function quietly changes the visible state of a column (much like the cols_hide() function) and doesn't yield warnings or messages when changing the state of already-visible columns.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Let's use a small portion of the countrypops dataset to create a gt table. We'll hide the country_code_2 and country_code_3 columns with cols_hide().

tab_1 <-
  countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(
    country_name == "Singapore",
    year %in% 2017:2021
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_hide(columns = c(country_code_2, country_code_3))

tab_1
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_unhide()` help file.

If the tab_1 object is provided without the code or source data to regenerate it, and, the user wants to reveal otherwise hidden columns then cols_unhide() becomes useful.

tab_1 |> cols_unhide(columns = country_code_2)
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `cols_unhide()` help file.

Function ID

5-13

Function Introduced

v0.3.0 (May 12, 2021)

See Also

cols_hide() to perform the inverse operation.

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_hide(), cols_label(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_units(), cols_width()


Define units for one or more columns

Description

Column labels can sometimes contain measurement units, and these might range from easy to define and typeset (e.g., "m/s") to very difficult. Such difficulty can arise from the need to include subscripts or superscripts, non-ASCII symbols, etc. The cols_units() function tries to make this task easier by letting you apply text pertaining to units to various columns. This takes advantage of gt's specialized units notation (e.g., "J Hz^-1 mol^-1" can be used to generate units for the molar Planck constant). The notation here provides several conveniences for defining units, letting you produce the correct formatting no matter what the table output format might be (i.e., HTML, LaTeX, RTF, etc.). Details pertaining to the units notation can be found in the section entitled How to use gt's units notation.

Usage

cols_units(.data, ..., .list = list2(...), .units_pattern = NULL)

Arguments

.data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

...

Column units definitions

⁠<multiple expressions>⁠ // required (or, use .list)

Expressions for the assignment of column units for the table columns in .data. Two-sided formulas (e.g., ⁠<LHS> ~ <RHS>⁠) can be used, where the left-hand side corresponds to selections of columns and the right-hand side evaluates to single-length values for the units to apply. Column names should be enclosed in c(). Select helpers like starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), and everything() can be used in the LHS. Named arguments are also valid as input for simple mappings of column name to the gt units syntax; they should be of the form ⁠<column name> = <units text>⁠. Subsequent expressions that operate on the columns assigned previously will result in overwriting column units definition values.

.list

Alternative to ...

⁠<list of multiple expressions>⁠ // required (or, use ...)

Allows for the use of a list as an input alternative to ....

.units_pattern

Pattern to combine column labels and units

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional pattern to be used for combining column labels with the defined units. The default pattern is "{1}, {2}", where "{1}" refers to the column label text and "{2}" is the text related to the associated units. This default can be modified through the column_labels.units_pattern option found in tab_options(). Setting a value here will provide an override to the column_labels.units_pattern default (only for the resolved columns in the invocation of cols_units()).

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

How to use gt's units notation

The units notation involves a shorthand of writing units that feels familiar and is fine-tuned for the task at hand. Each unit is treated as a separate entity (parentheses and other symbols included) and the addition of subscript text and exponents is flexible and relatively easy to formulate. This is all best shown with examples:

  • "m/s" and "m / s" both render as "m/s"

  • "m s^-1" will appear with the "-1" exponent intact

  • "m /s" gives the same result, as "/<unit>" is equivalent to "<unit>^-1"

  • "E_h" will render an "E" with the "h" subscript

  • "t_i^2.5" provides a t with an "i" subscript and a "2.5" exponent

  • "m[_0^2]" will use overstriking to set both scripts vertically

  • "g/L %C6H12O6%" uses a chemical formula (enclosed in a pair of "%" characters) as a unit partial, and the formula will render correctly with subscripted numbers

  • Common units that are difficult to write using ASCII text may be implicitly converted to the correct characters (e.g., the "u" in "ug", "um", "uL", and "umol" will be converted to the Greek mu symbol; "degC" and "degF" will render a degree sign before the temperature unit)

  • We can transform shorthand symbol/unit names enclosed in ":" (e.g., ":angstrom:", ":ohm:", etc.) into proper symbols

  • Greek letters can added by enclosing the letter name in ":"; you can use lowercase letters (e.g., ":beta:", ":sigma:", etc.) and uppercase letters too (e.g., ":Alpha:", ":Zeta:", etc.)

  • The components of a unit (unit name, subscript, and exponent) can be fully or partially italicized/emboldened by surrounding text with "*" or "**"

Examples

Let's analyze some pizzaplace data with dplyr and then make a gt table. Here we are separately defining new column labels with cols_label() and then defining the units (to combine to those labels) through cols_units(). The default pattern for combination is "{1}, {2}" which is acceptable here.

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::mutate(month = lubridate::month(date, label = TRUE, abbr = TRUE)) |>
  dplyr::group_by(month) |>
  dplyr::summarize(
    n_sold = dplyr::n(),
    rev = sum(price)
  ) |>
  dplyr::mutate(chg = (rev - dplyr::lag(rev)) / dplyr::lag(rev)) |>
  dplyr::mutate(month = as.character(month)) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "month") |>
  fmt_integer(columns = n_sold) |>
  fmt_currency(columns = rev, use_subunits = FALSE) |>
  fmt_percent(columns = chg) |>
  sub_missing() |>
  cols_label(
    n_sold = "Number of Pizzas Sold",
    rev = "Revenue Generated",
    chg = "Monthly Changes in Revenue"
  ) |>
  cols_units(
    n_sold = "units month^-1",
    rev = "USD month^-1",
    chg = "% change *m*/*m*"
  ) |>
  cols_width(
    stub() ~ px(40),
    everything() ~ px(200)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_units()` help file.

The sza dataset has a wealth of information and here we'll generate a smaller table that contains the average solar zenith angles at noon for different months and at different northern latitudes. The column labels are numbers representing the latitudes and it's convenient to apply units of 'degrees north' to each of them with cols_units(). The extra thing we wanted to do here was to ensure that the units are placed directly after the column labels, and we do that with .units_pattern = "{1}{2}". This append the units ("{2}") right to the column label ("{1}").

sza |>
  dplyr::filter(tst == "1200") |>
  dplyr::select(-tst) |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(latitude)) |>
  tidyr::pivot_wider(
    names_from = latitude,
    values_from = sza
  ) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "month") |>
  cols_units(
    everything() ~ ":degree:N",
    .units_pattern = "{1}{2}"
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Solar Zenith Angle",
    columns = everything()
  ) |>
  text_transform(
    fn = toupper,
    locations = cells_stub()
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(align = "right"),
    locations = cells_stub()
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `cols_units()` help file.

Taking a portion of the towny dataset, let's use spanners to describe what's in the columns and use only measurement units for the column labels. The columns labels that have to do with population and density information will be replaced with units defined in cols_units(). We'll use a .units_pattern value of "{2}", which means that only the units will be present (the "{1}", representing the column label text, is omitted). Spanners added through several invocations of tab_spanner() will declare what the last four columns contain.

towny |>
  dplyr::select(
    name, land_area_km2,
    ends_with("2016"), ends_with("2021")
  ) |>
  dplyr::slice_max(population_2021, n = 10) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "name") |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "City") |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  cols_label(
    land_area_km2 ~ "Area, {{km^2}}",
    starts_with("population") ~ "",
    starts_with("density") ~ ""
  ) |>
  cols_units(
    starts_with("population") ~ "*ppl*",
    starts_with("density") ~ "*ppl* km^-2",
    .units_pattern = "{2}"
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Population",
    columns = starts_with("population"),
    gather = FALSE
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Density",
    columns = starts_with("density"),
    gather = FALSE
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "2016",
    columns = ends_with("2016"),
    gather = FALSE
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "2021",
    columns = ends_with("2021"),
    gather = FALSE
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(align = "center"),
    locations = cells_column_labels(
      c(starts_with("population"), starts_with("density"))
    )
  ) |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(120)) |>
  opt_horizontal_padding(scale = 3)
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `cols_units()` help file.

Function ID

5-6

Function Introduced

v0.10.0 (October 7, 2023)

See Also

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_hide(), cols_label(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_unhide(), cols_width()


Set the widths of columns

Description

Manual specifications of column widths can be performed using the cols_width() function. We choose which columns get specific widths. This can be in units of pixels (easily set by use of the px() helper function), or, as percentages (where the pct() helper function is useful). Width assignments are supplied in ... through two-sided formulas, where the left-hand side defines the target columns and the right-hand side is a single dimension.

Usage

cols_width(.data, ..., .list = list2(...))

Arguments

.data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

...

Column width assignments

⁠<multiple expressions>⁠ // required (or, use .list)

Expressions for the assignment of column widths for the table columns in .data. Two-sided formulas (e.g, ⁠<LHS> ~ <RHS>⁠) can be used, where the left-hand side corresponds to selections of columns and the right-hand side evaluates to single-length character values in the form ⁠{##}px⁠ (i.e., pixel dimensions); the px() helper function is best used for this purpose. Column names should be enclosed in c(). The column-based select helpers starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), and everything() can be used in the LHS. Subsequent expressions that operate on the columns assigned previously will result in overwriting column width values (both in the same cols_width() call and across separate calls). All other columns can be assigned a default width value by using everything() on the left-hand side.

.list

Alternative to ...

⁠<list of multiple expressions>⁠ // required (or, use ...)

Allows for the use of a list as an input alternative to ....

Details

Column widths can be set as absolute or relative values (with px and percentage values). Those columns not specified are treated as having variable width. The sizing behavior for column widths depends on the combination of value types, and, whether a table width has been set (which could, itself, be expressed as an absolute or relative value). Widths for the table and its container can be individually modified with the table.width and container.width arguments within tab_options()).

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use select columns from the exibble dataset to create a gt table. We can specify the widths of columns with cols_width(). This is done with named arguments in ..., specifying the exact widths for table columns (using everything() at the end will capture all remaining columns).

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(
    num, char, date,
    datetime, row
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_width(
    num ~ px(150),
    ends_with("r") ~ px(100),
    starts_with("date") ~ px(200),
    everything() ~ px(60)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `cols_width()` help file.

Function ID

5-3

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other column modification functions: cols_add(), cols_align(), cols_align_decimal(), cols_hide(), cols_label(), cols_label_with(), cols_merge(), cols_merge_n_pct(), cols_merge_range(), cols_merge_uncert(), cols_move(), cols_move_to_end(), cols_move_to_start(), cols_nanoplot(), cols_unhide(), cols_units()


The fundamental physical constants

Description

This dataset contains values for over 300 basic fundamental constants in nature. The values originate from the 2018 adjustment which is based on the latest relevant precision measurements and improvements of theoretical calculations. Such work has been carried out under the authority of the Task Group on Fundamental Constants (TGFC) of the Committee on Data of the International Science Council (CODATA). These updated values became available on May 20, 2019. They are published at http://physics.nist.gov/constants, a website of the Fundamental Constants Data Center of the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), Gaithersburg, Maryland, USA.

Usage

constants

Format

A tibble with 354 rows and 4 variables:

name

The name of the constant.

value

The value of the constant.

uncert

The uncertainty associated with the value. If NA then the value is seen as an 'exact' value (e.g., an electron volt has the exact value of 1.602 176 634 e-19 J).

sf_value,sf_uncert

The number of significant figures associated with the value and any uncertainty value.

units

The units associated with the constant.

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-12

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.10.0 (October 7, 2023)

See Also

Other datasets: countrypops, exibble, films, gibraltar, gtcars, illness, metro, nuclides, peeps, photolysis, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sp500, sza, towny

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(constants)

Yearly populations of countries from 1960 to 2023

Description

A dataset that presents yearly, total populations of countries. Total population is based on counts of all residents regardless of legal status or citizenship. Country identifiers include the English-language country names, and the 2- and 3-letter ISO 3166-1 country codes. Each row contains a population value for a given year (from 1960 to 2023). Any NA values within population indicate the non-existence of the entity during that year.

Usage

countrypops

Format

A tibble with 13,760 rows and 5 variables:

country_name

The name of the country.

country_code_2, country_code_3

The 2- and 3-letter ISO 3166-1 country codes.

year

The year for the population estimate.

population

The population estimate, midway through the year.

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-1

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

Source

https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/SP.POP.TOTL

See Also

Other datasets: constants, exibble, films, gibraltar, gtcars, illness, metro, nuclides, peeps, photolysis, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sp500, sza, towny


Supply a custom currency symbol to fmt_currency()

Description

The currency() helper function makes it easy to specify a context-aware currency symbol to currency argument of fmt_currency(). Since gt can render tables to several output formats, currency() allows for different variations of the custom symbol based on the output context (which are html, latex, rtf, and default). The number of decimal places for the custom currency defaults to 2, however, a value set for the decimals argument of fmt_currency() will take precedence.

Usage

currency(..., .list = list2(...))

Arguments

...

Currency symbols by output context

⁠<named arguments>⁠ // required (or, use .list)

One or more named arguments using output contexts as the names and currency symbol text as the values.

.list

Alternative to ...

⁠<list of multiple expressions>⁠ // required (or, use ...)

Allows for the use of a list as an input alternative to ....

Details

We can use any combination of html, latex, rtf, and default as named arguments for the currency text in each of the namesake contexts. The default value is used as a fallback when there doesn't exist a dedicated currency text value for a particular output context (e.g., when a table is rendered as HTML and we use currency(latex = "LTC", default = "ltc"), the currency symbol will be "ltc". For convenience, if we provide only a single string without a name, it will be taken as the default (i.e., currency("ltc") is equivalent to currency(default = "ltc")). However, if we were to specify currency strings for multiple output contexts, names are required each and every context.

Value

A list object of class gt_currency.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table. Within the fmt_currency() call, we'll format the currency column to have currency values in guilder (a defunct Dutch currency). We can register this custom currency with the currency() helper function, supplying the "&fnof;" HTML entity for html outputs and using "f" for any other type of gt output.

exibble |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_currency(
    columns = currency,
    currency = currency(
      html = "&fnof;",
      default = "f"
    ),
    decimals = 2
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `currency()` help file.

Function ID

8-6

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


Perform data cell colorization

Description

It's possible to add color to data cells according to their values with data_color() There is a multitude of ways to perform data cell colorizing here:

  • targeting: we can constrain which columns and rows should receive the colorization treatment (through the columns and rows arguments)

  • direction: ordinarily we perform coloring in a column-wise fashion but there is the option to color data cells in a row-wise manner (this is controlled by the direction argument)

  • coloring method: data_color() automatically computes colors based on the column type but you can choose a specific methodology (e.g., with bins or quantiles) and the function will generate colors accordingly; the method argument controls this through keywords and other arguments act as inputs to specific methods

  • coloring function: a custom function can be supplied to the fn argument for finer control over color evaluation with data; the ⁠scales::col_*()⁠ color mapping functions can be used here or any function you might want to define

  • color palettes: with palette we could supply a vector of colors, a virdis or RColorBrewer palette name, or, a palette from the paletteer package

  • value domain: we can either opt to have the range of values define the domain, or, specify one explicitly with the domain argument

  • indirect color application: it's possible to compute colors from one column and apply them to one or more different columns; we can even perform a color mapping from multiple source columns to the same multiple of target columns

  • color application: with the apply_to argument, there's an option for whether to apply the cell-specific colors to the cell background or the cell text

  • text autocoloring: if colorizing the cell background, data_color() will automatically recolor the foreground text to provide the best contrast (can be deactivated with autocolor_text = FALSE)

data_color() won't fail with the default options used, but that won't typically provide you the type of colorization you really need. You can however safely iterate through a collection of different options without running into too many errors.

Usage

data_color(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  direction = c("column", "row"),
  target_columns = NULL,
  method = c("auto", "numeric", "bin", "quantile", "factor"),
  palette = NULL,
  domain = NULL,
  bins = 8,
  quantiles = 4,
  levels = NULL,
  ordered = FALSE,
  na_color = NULL,
  alpha = NULL,
  reverse = FALSE,
  fn = NULL,
  apply_to = c("fill", "text"),
  autocolor_text = TRUE,
  contrast_algo = c("apca", "wcag"),
  colors = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

The columns to which cell data color operations are constrained. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should form a constraint for cell data color operations. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

direction

Color computation direction

⁠singl-kw:[column|row]⁠ // default: "column"

Should the color computations be performed column-wise or row-wise? By default this is set with the "column" keyword and colors will be applied down columns. The alternative option with the "row" keyword ensures that the color mapping works across rows.

target_columns

Indirect columns to target

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // default: NULL optional

For indirect column coloring treatments, we can supply the columns that will receive the styling. The necessary precondition is that we must use direction = "column". If columns resolves to a single column then we may use one or more columns in target_columns. If on the other hand columns resolves to multiple columns, then target_columns must resolve to the same multiple.

method

Color computation method

⁠singl-kw:[auto|numeric|bin|quantile|factor]⁠ // default: "auto"

A method for computing color based on the data within body cells. Can be "auto" (the default), "numeric", "bin", "quantile", or "factor". The "auto" method will automatically choose the "numeric" method for numerical input data or the "factor" method for any non-numeric inputs.

palette

Color palette

⁠vector<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A vector of color names, a color class that can be cast to a vector of color names, the name of an RColorBrewer palette, the name of a viridis palette, or a discrete palette accessible from the paletteer package using the ⁠<package>::<palette>⁠ syntax (e.g., "wesanderson::IsleofDogs1"). If providing a vector of colors as a palette, each color value provided must either be a color name (Only R/X11 color names or CSS 3.0 color names) or a hexadecimal string in the form of "#RRGGBB" or "#RRGGBBAA". If nothing is provided here, the default R color palette is used (i.e., the colors from palette()).

domain

Value domain

⁠vector<numeric|integer|character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The possible values that can be mapped. For the "numeric" and "bin" methods, this can be a numeric range specified with a length of two vector. Representative numeric data is needed for the "quantile" method and categorical data must be used for the "factor" method. If NULL (the default value), the values in each column or row (depending on direction) value will represent the domain.

bins

Specification of bin number

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 8

For method = "bin" this can either be a numeric vector of two or more unique cut points, or, a single numeric value (greater than or equal to 2) giving the number of intervals into which the domain values are to be cut. By default, this is 8.

quantiles

Specification of quantile number

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 4

For method = "quantile" this is the number of equal-size quantiles to use. By default, this is set to 4.

levels

Specification of factor levels

⁠vector<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

For method = "factor" this allows for an alternate way of specifying levels. If anything is provided here then any value supplied to domain will be ignored. This should be a character vector of unique values.

ordered

Use an ordered factor

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

For method = "factor", setting this to TRUE means that the vector supplied to domain will be treated as being in the correct order if that vector needs to be coerced to a factor. By default, this is FALSE.

na_color

Default color for NA values

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The color to use for missing values. By default (with na_color = NULL), the color gray ("#808080") will be used. This option has no effect if providing a color-mapping function to fn.

alpha

Transparency value

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>(0>=val>=1)⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional, fixed alpha transparency value that will be applied to all color palette values (regardless of whether a color palette was directly supplied in palette or generated through a color mapping function via fn).

reverse

Reverse order of computed colors

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the colors computed operate in the reverse order? If TRUE then colors that normally change from red to blue will change in the opposite direction.

fn

Color-mapping function

function // default: NULL (optional)

A color-mapping function. The function should be able to take a vector of data values as input and return an equal-length vector of color values. The ⁠scales::col_*()⁠ functions (i.e.,scales::col_numeric(), scales::col_bin(), and scales::col_factor()) can be invoked here with options, as those functions themselves return a color-mapping function.

apply_to

How to apply color

⁠singl-kw:[fill|text]⁠ // default: "fill"

Which style element should the colors be applied to? Options include the cell background (the default, given as "fill") or the cell text ("text").

autocolor_text

Automatically recolor text

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to let gt modify the coloring of text within cells undergoing background coloring. This will result in better text-to-background color contrast. By default, this is set to TRUE.

contrast_algo

Color contrast algorithm choice

⁠singl-kw:[apca|wcag]⁠ // default: "apca"

The color contrast algorithm to use when autocolor_text = TRUE. By default this is "apca" (Accessible Perceptual Contrast Algorithm) and the alternative to this is "wcag" (Web Content Accessibility Guidelines).

colors

Deprecated Color mapping function

function // default: NULL (optional)

This argument is deprecated. Use the fn argument instead to provide a scales-based color-mapping function. If providing a palette, use the palette argument.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Color computation methods

data_color() offers four distinct methods for computing color based on cell data values. They are set by the method argument and the options go by the keywords "numeric", "bin", "quantile", and "factor". There are other arguments in data_color() that variously support these methods (e.g., bins for the "bin" method, etc.). Here we'll go through each method, providing a short explanation of what each one does and which options are available.

"numeric"

The "numeric" method provides a simple linear mapping from continuous numeric data to an interpolated palette. Internally, this uses scales::col_numeric(). This method is suited for numeric data cell values and can make use of a supplied domain value, in the form of a two-element numeric vector describing the range of values, if provided.

"bin"

The "bin" method provides a mapping of continuous numeric data to value-based bins. Internally, this uses scales::col_bin() which itself uses base::cut(). As with the "numeric" method, "bin" is meant for numeric data cell values. The use of a domain value is supported with this method. The bins argument in data_color() is specific to this method, offering the ability to: (1) specify the number of bins, or (2) provide a vector of cut points.

"quantile"

The "quantile" method provides a mapping of continuous numeric data to quantiles. Internally, this uses scales::col_quantile() which itself uses stats::quantile(). Input data cell values should be numeric, as with the "numeric" and "bin" methods. A numeric domain value is supported with this method. The quantiles argument in data_color() controls the number of equal-size quantiles to use.

"factor"

The "factor" method provides a mapping of factors to colors. With discrete palettes, color interpolation is used when the number of factors does not match the number of colors in the palette. Internally, this uses scales::col_factor(). Input data cell values can be of any type (i.e., factor, character, numeric values, and more are supported). The optional input to domain should take the form of categorical data. The levels and ordered arguments in data_color() support this method.

Color palette access from RColorBrewer and viridis

All palettes from the RColorBrewer package and select palettes from viridis can be accessed by providing the palette name in palette. RColorBrewer has 35 available palettes:

Palette Name Colors Category Colorblind Friendly
1 "BrBG" 11 Diverging Yes
2 "PiYG" 11 Diverging Yes
3 "PRGn" 11 Diverging Yes
4 "PuOr" 11 Diverging Yes
5 "RdBu" 11 Diverging Yes
6 "RdYlBu" 11 Diverging Yes
7 "RdGy" 11 Diverging No
8 "RdYlGn" 11 Diverging No
9 "Spectral" 11 Diverging No
10 "Dark2" 8 Qualitative Yes
11 "Paired" 12 Qualitative Yes
12 "Set1" 9 Qualitative No
13 "Set2" 8 Qualitative Yes
14 "Set3" 12 Qualitative No
15 "Accent" 8 Qualitative No
16 "Pastel1" 9 Qualitative No
17 "Pastel2" 8 Qualitative No
18 "Blues" 9 Sequential Yes
19 "BuGn" 9 Sequential Yes
20 "BuPu" 9 Sequential Yes
21 "GnBu" 9 Sequential Yes
22 "Greens" 9 Sequential Yes
23 "Greys" 9 Sequential Yes
24 "Oranges" 9 Sequential Yes
25 "OrRd" 9 Sequential Yes
26 "PuBu" 9 Sequential Yes
27 "PuBuGn" 9 Sequential Yes
28 "PuRd" 9 Sequential Yes
29 "Purples" 9 Sequential Yes
30 "RdPu" 9 Sequential Yes
31 "Reds" 9 Sequential Yes
32 "YlGn" 9 Sequential Yes
33 "YlGnBu" 9 Sequential Yes
34 "YlOrBr" 9 Sequential Yes
35 "YlOrRd" 9 Sequential Yes

We can access four colorblind-friendly palettes from viridis: "viridis", "magma", "plasma", and "inferno". Simply provide any one of those names to palette.

Color palette access from paletteer

Choosing the right color palette can often be difficult because it's both hard to discover suitable palettes and then obtain the vector of colors. To make this process easier we can elect to use the paletteer package, which makes a wide range of palettes from various R packages readily available. The info_paletteer() information table allows us to easily inspect all of the discrete color palettes available in paletteer. We only then need to specify the palette and associated package using the ⁠<package>::<palette>⁠ syntax (e.g., "tvthemes::Stannis") for the palette argument.

A requirement for using paletteer in this way is that the package must be installed (gt doesn't import paletteer currently). This can be easily done with install.packages("paletteer"). Not having this package installed with result in an error when using the ⁠<package>::<palette>⁠ syntax in palette.

Foreground text and background fill

By default, gt will choose the ideal text color (for maximal contrast) when colorizing the background of data cells. This option can be disabled by setting autocolor_text to FALSE. The contrast_algo argument lets us choose between two color contrast algorithms: "apca" (Accessible Perceptual Contrast Algorithm, the default algo) and "wcag" (Web Content Accessibility Guidelines).

Examples

data_color() can be used without any supplied arguments to colorize a gt table. Let's do this with the exibble dataset:

exibble |>
  gt() |>
  data_color()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `data_color()` help file.

What's happened is that data_color() applies background colors to all cells of every column with the default palette in R (accessed through palette()). The default method for applying color is "auto", where numeric values will use the "numeric" method and character or factor values will use the "factor" method. The text color undergoes an automatic modification that maximizes contrast (since autocolor_text is TRUE by default).

You can use any of the available method keywords and gt will only apply color to the compatible values. Let's use the "numeric" method and supply palette values of "red" and "green".

exibble |>
  gt() |>
  data_color(
    method = "numeric",
    palette = c("red", "green")
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `data_color()` help file.

With those options in place we see that only the numeric columns num and currency received color treatments. Moreover, the palette colors were mapped to the lower and upper limits of the data in each column; interpolated colors were used for the values in between the numeric limits of the two columns.

We can constrain the cells to which coloring will be applied with the columns and rows arguments. Further to this, we can manually set the limits of the data with the domain argument (which is preferable in most cases). Here, the domain will be set as domain = c(0, 50).

exibble |>
  gt() |>
  data_color(
    columns = currency,
    rows = currency < 50,
    method = "numeric",
    palette = c("red", "green"),
    domain = c(0, 50)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `data_color()` help file.

We can use any of the palettes available in the RColorBrewer and viridis packages. Let's make a new gt table from a subset of the countrypops dataset. Then, through data_color(), we'll apply coloring to the population column with the "numeric" method, use a domain between 2.5 and 3.4 million, and specify palette = "viridis".

countrypops |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("code")) |>
  dplyr::filter(
    country_name == "Bangladesh",
    year %in% 2012:2021
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  data_color(
    columns = population,
    method = "numeric",
    palette = "viridis",
    domain = c(150E6, 170E6),
    reverse = TRUE
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `data_color()` help file.

We can alternatively use the fn argument for supplying the scales-based function scales::col_numeric(). That function call will itself return a function (which is what the fn argument actually requires) that takes a vector of numeric values and returns color values. Here is an alternate version of the code that returns the same table as in the previous example.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("code")) |>
  dplyr::filter(
    country_name == "Bangladesh",
    year %in% 2012:2021
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  data_color(
    columns = population,
    fn = scales::col_numeric(
      palette = "viridis",
      domain = c(150E6, 170E6),
      reverse = TRUE
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `data_color()` help file.

Using your own function in fn can be very useful if you want to make use of specialized arguments in the ⁠scales::col_*()⁠ functions. You could even supply your own specialized function for performing complex colorizing treatments!

data_color() has a way to apply colorization indirectly to other columns. That is, you can apply colors to a column different from the one used to generate those specific colors. The trick is to use the target_columns argument. Let's do this with a more complete countrypops-based table example.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(country_code_3 %in% c("FRA", "GBR")) |>
  dplyr::filter(year %% 10 == 0) |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("code")) |>
  dplyr::mutate(color = "") |>
  gt(groupname_col = "country_name") |>
  fmt_integer(columns = population) |>
  data_color(
    columns = population,
    target_columns = color,
    method = "numeric",
    palette = "viridis",
    domain = c(4E7, 7E7)
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    year = "",
    population = "Population",
    color = ""
  ) |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.65)
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `data_color()` help file.

When specifying a single column in columns we can use as many target_columns values as we want. Let's make another countrypops-based table where we map the generated colors from the year column to all columns in the table. This time, the palette used is "inferno" (also from the viridis package).

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(country_code_3 %in% c("FRA", "GBR", "ITA")) |>
  dplyr::select(-contains("code")) |>
  dplyr::filter(year %% 5 == 0) |>
  tidyr::pivot_wider(
    names_from = "country_name",
    values_from = "population"
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_integer(columns = c(everything(), -year)) |>
  cols_width(
    year ~ px(80),
    everything() ~ px(160)
  ) |>
  opt_all_caps() |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.75) |>
  opt_horizontal_padding(scale = 3) |>
  data_color(
    columns = year,
    target_columns = everything(),
    palette = "inferno"
  ) |>
  tab_options(
    table_body.hlines.style = "none",
    column_labels.border.top.color = "black",
    column_labels.border.bottom.color = "black",
    table_body.border.bottom.color = "black"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the sixth code example in the `data_color()` help file.

Now, it's time to use pizzaplace to create a gt table. The color palette to be used is the "ggsci::red_material" one (it's in the ggsci R package but also obtainable from the paletteer package). Colorization will be applied to the to the sold and income columns. We don't have to specify those in columns because those are the only columns in the table. Also, the domain is not set here. We'll use the bounds of the available data in each column.

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::group_by(type, size) |>
  dplyr::summarize(
    sold = dplyr::n(),
    income = sum(price),
    .groups = "drop_last"
  ) |>
  dplyr::group_by(type) |>
  dplyr::mutate(f_sold = sold / sum(sold)) |>
  dplyr::mutate(size = factor(
    size, levels = c("S", "M", "L", "XL", "XXL"))
  ) |>
  dplyr::arrange(type, size) |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "size",
    groupname_col = "type"
  ) |>
  fmt_percent(
    columns = f_sold,
    decimals = 1
  ) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(size, f_sold),
    pattern = "{1} ({2})"
  ) |>
  cols_align(align = "left", columns = stub()) |>
  data_color(
    method = "numeric",
    palette = "ggsci::red_material"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the seventh code example in the `data_color()` help file.

Colorization can occur in a row-wise manner. The key to making that happen is by using direction = "row". Let's use the sza dataset to make a gt table. Then, color will be applied to values across each 'month' of data in that table. This is useful when not setting a domain as the bounds of each row will be captured, coloring each cell with values relative to the range. The palette is "PuOr" from the RColorBrewer package (only the name here is required).

sza |>
  dplyr::filter(latitude == 20 & tst <= "1200") |>
  dplyr::select(-latitude) |>
  dplyr::filter(!is.na(sza)) |>
  tidyr::spread(key = "tst", value = sza) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "month") |>
  sub_missing(missing_text = "") |>
  data_color(
    direction = "row",
    palette = "PuOr",
    na_color = "white"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the eighth code example in the `data_color()` help file.

Notice that na_color = "white" was used, and this avoids the appearance of gray cells for the missing values (we also removed the "NA" text with sub_missing(), opting for empty strings).

Function ID

3-36

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Provide a vector of sensible system fonts for use with gt tables

Description

The vector of fonts given by default_fonts() can be safely used with a gt table rendered as HTML since the font stack is expected to be available across a wide set of systems. We can always specify additional fonts to use and place them higher in precedence order, done through prepending to this vector (i.e., this font stack should be placed after that to act as a set of fallbacks).

This vector of fonts is useful when specifying font values inside cell_text() (itself usable in tab_style() or tab_style_body()). If using opt_table_font() (which also has a font argument), we probably don't need to specify this vector of fonts since that function prepends font names (this is handled by its add option, which is TRUE by default).

Usage

default_fonts()

Value

A character vector of font names.

Examples

Let's use the exibble dataset to create a simple, two-column gt table (keeping only the char and time columns). Attempting to modify the fonts used for the time column is much safer if default_fonts() is appended to the end of the font listing inside cell_text(). What will happen, since the "Comic Sansa" and "Menloa" fonts shouldn't exist, is that we'll get

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(char, time) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(
      font = c("Comic Sansa", "Menloa", default_fonts())
    ),
    locations = cells_body(columns = time)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `default_fonts()` help file.

Function ID

8-32

Function Introduced

v0.2.2 (August 5, 2020)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


Perform LaTeX escaping

Description

Text may contain several characters with special meanings in LaTeX. escape_latex() will transform a character vector so that it is safe to use within LaTeX tables.

Usage

escape_latex(text)

Arguments

text

LaTeX text

⁠vector<character>⁠ // required

A character vector containing the text that is to be LaTeX-escaped.

Value

A character vector.

Function ID

8-29

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


A toy example tibble for testing with gt: exibble

Description

This tibble contains data of a few different classes, which makes it well-suited for quick experimentation with the functions in this package. It contains only eight rows with numeric, character, and factor columns. The last 4 rows contain NA values in the majority of this tibble's columns (1 missing value per column). The date, time, and datetime columns are character-based dates/times in the familiar ISO 8601 format. The row and group columns provide for unique rownames and two groups (grp_a and grp_b) for experimenting with the gt() function's rowname_col and groupname_col arguments.

Usage

exibble

Format

A tibble with 8 rows and 9 variables:

num

A numeric column ordered with increasingly larger values.

char

A character column composed of names of fruits from a to h.

fctr

A factor column with numbers from 1 to 8, written out.

date, time, datetime

Character columns with dates, times, and datetimes.

currency

A numeric column that is useful for testing currency-based formatting.

row

A character column in the format row_X which can be useful for testing with row labels in a table stub.

group

A character column with four grp_a values and four grp_b values which can be useful for testing tables that contain row groups.

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-6

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, films, gibraltar, gtcars, illness, metro, nuclides, peeps, photolysis, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sp500, sza, towny

Examples

exibble

Extract the table body from a gt object

Description

We can extract the body of a gt table, even at various stages of its rendering, from a gt_tbl object using extract_body(). By default, the data frame returned will have gone through all of the build stages but we can intercept the table body after a certain build stage. Here are the eight different build stages and some notes about each:

  1. "init": the body table is initialized here, entirely with NA values. It's important to note that all columns of the are of the character type in this first stage. And all columns remain in the same order as the input data table.

  2. "fmt_applied": Any cell values that have had formatting applied to them are migrated to the body table. All other cells remain as NA values. Depending on the output type, the formatting may also be different.

  3. "sub_applied": Any cell values that have had substitution functions applied to them (whether or not they were previously formatted) are migrated to the body table or modified in place (if formatted). All cells that had neither been formatted nor undergone substitution remain as NA values.

  4. "unfmt_included": All cells that either didn't have any formatting or any substitution operations applied are migrated to the body table. NA values now become the string "NA", so, there aren't any true missing values in this body table.

  5. "cols_merged": The result of column-merging operations (through cols_merge() and related functions) is materialized here. Columns that were asked to be hidden will be present here (i.e., hiding columns doesn't remove them from the body table).

  6. "body_reassembled": Though columns do not move positions rows can move to different positions, and this is usually due to migration to different row groups. At this stage, rows will be in the finalized order that is seen in the associated display table.

  7. "text_transformed": Various ⁠text_*()⁠ functions in gt can operate on body cells (now fully formatted at this stage) and return transformed character values. After this stage, the effects of those functions are apparent.

  8. "footnotes_attached": Footnote marks are attached to body cell values (either on the left or right of the content). This stage performs said attachment.

Usage

extract_body(
  data,
  build_stage = NULL,
  incl_hidden_cols = FALSE,
  incl_stub_cols = TRUE,
  ...,
  output = c("html", "latex", "rtf", "word", "grid")
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

build_stage

The build stage of the formatted R data frame

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

When a gt undergoes rendering, the body of the table proceeds through several build stages. Providing a single stage name will yield a data frame that has been extracted after completed that stage. Here are the build stages in order: (1) "init", (2) "fmt_applied", (3) "sub_applied", (4) "unfmt_included", (5) "cols_merged", (6) "body_reassembled", (7) "text_transformed", and (8) "footnotes_attached". If not supplying a value for build_stage then the entire build for the table body (i.e., up to and including the "footnotes_attached" stage) will be performed before returning the data frame.

incl_hidden_cols

Should hidden columns be included?

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Certain columns may be hidden from final display via cols_hide(). By default, those columns won't be part of the extracted data frame. However, we can choose to include them by using incl_hidden_cols = TRUE.

incl_stub_cols

Should stub columns be included?

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

Any stub columns in the gt object (which may consist of a grouping column and a column for row labels) are included in the extracted data for clarity but clearly marked with the names "::group_id::" and "::rowname::". We can exclude them by setting incl_stub_cols = FALSE.

...

These dots are for future extensions and must be empty.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "html"

The output format of the resulting data frame. This can either be "html" (the default), "latex", "rtf", or "word".

Value

A data frame or tibble object containing the table body.

Examples

Use a modified version of sp500 the dataset to create a gt table with row groups and row labels. Formatting will be applied to the date- and currency-based columns.

gt_tbl <-
  sp500 |>
  dplyr::filter(date >= "2015-01-05" & date <= "2015-01-16") |>
  dplyr::arrange(date) |>
  dplyr::mutate(week = paste0("W", strftime(date, format = "%V"))) |>
  dplyr::select(-adj_close, -volume) |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "date",
    groupname_col = "week"
  ) |>
  fmt_date(columns = date, date_style = "day_month_year") |>
  fmt_currency(columns = c(open, high, low, close)) |>
  cols_hide(columns = c(high, low))

gt_tbl
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `extract_body()` help file.

Using extract_body() on the gt object (gt_tbl) will provide us with a tibble that contains the fully built data cells for the output context (in this case, "html").

extract_body(gt_tbl)
#> # A tibble: 10 x 4
#>    `::group_id::` `::rowname::`   open      close    
#>    <chr>          <chr>           <chr>     <chr>    
#>  1 W02            5 January 2015  $2,054.44 $2,020.58
#>  2 W02            6 January 2015  $2,022.15 $2,002.61
#>  3 W02            7 January 2015  $2,005.55 $2,025.90
#>  4 W02            8 January 2015  $2,030.61 $2,062.14
#>  5 W02            9 January 2015  $2,063.45 $2,044.81
#>  6 W03            12 January 2015 $2,046.13 $2,028.26
#>  7 W03            13 January 2015 $2,031.58 $2,023.03
#>  8 W03            14 January 2015 $2,018.40 $2,011.27
#>  9 W03            15 January 2015 $2,013.75 $1,992.67
#> 10 W03            16 January 2015 $1,992.25 $2,019.42

To provide us with a better frame of reference, the grouping and row label values are provided as the first columns in the returned output. We could suppress those in the output by setting incl_stub_cols = FALSE.

extract_body(gt_tbl, incl_stub_cols = FALSE)
#> # A tibble: 10 x 2
#>    open      close    
#>    <chr>     <chr>    
#>  1 $2,054.44 $2,020.58
#>  2 $2,022.15 $2,002.61
#>  3 $2,005.55 $2,025.90
#>  4 $2,030.61 $2,062.14
#>  5 $2,063.45 $2,044.81
#>  6 $2,046.13 $2,028.26
#>  7 $2,031.58 $2,023.03
#>  8 $2,018.40 $2,011.27
#>  9 $2,013.75 $1,992.67
#> 10 $1,992.25 $2,019.42

The high and low columns were hidden via cols_hide() and so they won't be shown in the returned data unless we use incl_hidden_cols = TRUE.

extract_body(
  gt_tbl,
  incl_stub_cols = FALSE,
  incl_hidden_cols = TRUE
)
#> # A tibble: 10 x 4
#>    open      high      low       close    
#>    <chr>     <chr>     <chr>     <chr>    
#>  1 $2,054.44 $2,054.44 $2,017.34 $2,020.58
#>  2 $2,022.15 $2,030.25 $1,992.44 $2,002.61
#>  3 $2,005.55 $2,029.61 $2,005.55 $2,025.90
#>  4 $2,030.61 $2,064.08 $2,030.61 $2,062.14
#>  5 $2,063.45 $2,064.43 $2,038.33 $2,044.81
#>  6 $2,046.13 $2,049.30 $2,022.58 $2,028.26
#>  7 $2,031.58 $2,056.93 $2,008.25 $2,023.03
#>  8 $2,018.40 $2,018.40 $1,988.44 $2,011.27
#>  9 $2,013.75 $2,021.35 $1,991.47 $1,992.67
#> 10 $1,992.25 $2,020.46 $1,988.12 $2,019.42

Function ID

13-7

Function Introduced

v0.10.0 (October 7, 2023)

See Also

Other table export functions: as_gtable(), as_latex(), as_raw_html(), as_rtf(), as_word(), extract_cells(), extract_summary(), gtsave()


Extract a vector of formatted cells from a gt object

Description

Get a vector of cell data from a gt_tbl object. The output vector will have cell data formatted in the same way as the table.

Usage

extract_cells(
  data,
  columns,
  rows = everything(),
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word", "grid")
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should form a constraint for extraction. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A vector of cell data extracted from a gt table.

Examples

Let's create a gt table with the exibble dataset to use in the next few examples:

gt_tbl <- gt(exibble, rowname_col = "row", groupname_col = "group")

We can extract a cell from the table with the extract_cells() function. This is done by providing a column and a row intersection:

extract_cells(gt_tbl, columns = num, row = 1)
#> [1] "1.111e-01"

Multiple cells can be extracted. Let's get the first four cells from the char column.

extract_cells(gt_tbl, columns = char, rows = 1:4)
#> [1] "apricot" "banana" "coconut" "durian"

We can format cells and expect that the formatting is fully retained after extraction.

gt_tbl |>
  fmt_number(columns = num, decimals = 2) |>
  extract_cells(columns = num, rows = 1)
#> [1] "0.11"

Function ID

13-9

Function Introduced

v0.8.0 (November 16, 2022)

See Also

Other table export functions: as_gtable(), as_latex(), as_raw_html(), as_rtf(), as_word(), extract_body(), extract_summary(), gtsave()


Extract a summary list from a gt object

Description

Get a list of summary row data frames from a gt_tbl object where summary rows were added via summary_rows(). The output data frames contain the group_id and rowname columns, whereby rowname contains descriptive stub labels for the summary rows.

Usage

extract_summary(data)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

Value

A list of data frames containing summary data.

Examples

Use a modified version of sp500 the dataset to create a gt table with row groups and row labels. Create summary rows labeled as min, max, and avg for every row group with summary_rows(). Then, extract the summary rows as a list object.

summary_extracted <-
  sp500 |>
  dplyr::filter(date >= "2015-01-05" & date <="2015-01-30") |>
  dplyr::arrange(date) |>
  dplyr::mutate(week = paste0("W", strftime(date, format = "%V"))) |>
  dplyr::select(-adj_close, -volume) |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "date",
    groupname_col = "week"
  ) |>
  summary_rows(
    groups = everything(),
    columns = c(open, high, low, close),
    fns = list(
      min = ~min(.),
      max = ~max(.),
      avg = ~mean(.)
    ),
  ) |>
  extract_summary()

summary_extracted
#> $summary_df_data_list
#> $summary_df_data_list$W02
#> # A tibble: 3 x 9
#>   group_id row_id rowname  date  open  high   low close  week
#>   <chr>    <chr>  <chr>   <dbl> <dbl> <dbl> <dbl> <dbl> <dbl>
#> 1 W02      min    min        NA 2006. 2030. 1992. 2003.    NA
#> 2 W02      max    max        NA 2063. 2064. 2038. 2062.    NA
#> 3 W02      avg    avg        NA 2035. 2049. 2017. 2031.    NA
#> 
#> $summary_df_data_list$W03
#> # A tibble: 3 x 9
#>   group_id row_id rowname  date  open  high   low close  week
#>   <chr>    <chr>  <chr>   <dbl> <dbl> <dbl> <dbl> <dbl> <dbl>
#> 1 W03      min    min        NA 1992. 2018. 1988. 1993.    NA
#> 2 W03      max    max        NA 2046. 2057. 2023. 2028.    NA
#> 3 W03      avg    avg        NA 2020. 2033. 2000. 2015.    NA
#> 
#> $summary_df_data_list$W04
#> # A tibble: 3 x 9
#>   group_id row_id rowname  date  open  high   low close  week
#>   <chr>    <chr>  <chr>   <dbl> <dbl> <dbl> <dbl> <dbl> <dbl>
#> 1 W04      min    min        NA 2020. 2029. 2004. 2023.    NA
#> 2 W04      max    max        NA 2063. 2065. 2051. 2063.    NA
#> 3 W04      avg    avg        NA 2035. 2049. 2023. 2042.    NA
#> 
#> $summary_df_data_list$W05
#> # A tibble: 3 x 9
#>   group_id row_id rowname  date  open  high   low close  week
#>   <chr>    <chr>  <chr>   <dbl> <dbl> <dbl> <dbl> <dbl> <dbl>
#> 1 W05      min    min        NA 2002. 2023. 1989. 1995.    NA
#> 2 W05      max    max        NA 2050. 2058. 2041. 2057.    NA
#> 3 W05      avg    avg        NA 2030. 2039. 2009. 2021.    NA

Use the summary list to make a new gt table. The key thing is to use dplyr::bind_rows() and then pass the tibble to gt().

summary_extracted |>
  unlist(recursive = FALSE) |>
  dplyr::bind_rows() |>
  gt(groupname_col = "group_id") |>
  cols_hide(columns = row_id)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `extract_summary()` help file.

Function ID

13-8

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other table export functions: as_gtable(), as_latex(), as_raw_html(), as_rtf(), as_word(), extract_body(), extract_cells(), gtsave()


Feature films in competition at the Cannes Film Festival

Description

Each entry in the films is a feature film that appeared in the official selection during a festival year (starting in 1946 and active to the present day). The year column refers to the year of the festival and this figure doesn't always coincide with the release year of the film. The film's title reflects the most common title of the film in English, where the original_title column provides the title of the film in its spoken language (transliterated to Roman script where necessary).

Usage

films

Format

A tibble with 1,851 rows and 8 variables:

year

The year of the festival in which the film was in competition.

title,original_title

The title field provides the film title used for English-speaking audiences. The original_title field is populated when title differs greatly from the non-English original.

director

The director or set of co-directors for the film. Multiple directors are separated by a comma.

languages

The languages spoken in the film in the order of appearance. This consists of ISO 639 language codes (primarily as two-letter codes, but using three-letter codes where necessary).

countries_of_origin

The country or countries of origin for the production. Here, 2-letter ISO 3166-1 country codes (set in uppercase) are used.

run_time

The run time of the film in hours and minutes. This is given as a string in the format ⁠[x]h [y]m⁠.

imdb_url

The URL of the film's information page in the Internet Movie Database (IMDB).

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-9

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.11.0 (July 9, 2024)

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, exibble, gibraltar, gtcars, illness, metro, nuclides, peeps, photolysis, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sp500, sza, towny

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(films)

Set a column format with a formatter function

Description

fmt() provides a way to execute custom formatting functionality with raw data values in a way that can consider all output contexts.

Along with the columns and rows arguments that provide some precision in targeting data cells, the fns argument allows you to define one or more functions for manipulating the raw data.

If providing a single function to fns, the recommended format is in the form: fns = function(x) .... This single function will format the targeted data cells the same way regardless of the output format (e.g., HTML, LaTeX, RTF).

If you require formatting of x that depends on the output format, a list of functions can be provided for the html, latex, rtf, and default contexts. This can be in the form of fns = list(html = function(x) ..., latex = function(x) ..., default = function(x) ...). In this multiple-function case, we recommended including the default function as a fallback if all contexts aren't provided.

Usage

fmt(data, columns = everything(), rows = everything(), compat = NULL, fns)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

compat

Formatting compatibility

⁠vector<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional vector that provides the compatible classes for the formatting. By default this is NULL.

fns

Formatting functions

⁠function|list of functions⁠ // required

Either a single formatting function or a named list of functions. Can also be anonymous functions, in both base R (⁠\(x) x + 1⁠) and rlang (~.x + 1) syntax.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table. We'll format the numeric values in the num column with fmt(). We supply a functions to the fns argument. This supplied function will take values in the column (x), multiply them by 1000, and exclose them in single quotes.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(-row, -group) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt(
    columns = num,
    fns = function(x) {
      paste0("'", x * 1000, "'")
    }
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt()` help file.

Function ID

3-30

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Automatically format column data according to their values

Description

fmt_auto() will automatically apply formatting of various types in a way that best suits the data table provided. The function will attempt to format numbers such that they are condensed to an optimal width, either with scientific notation or large-number suffixing. Currency values are detected by currency codes embedded in the column name and formatted in the correct way. Although the functionality here is comprehensive it's still possible to reduce the scope of automatic formatting with the scope argument and also by choosing a subset of columns and rows to which the formatting will be applied.

Usage

fmt_auto(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  scope = c("numbers", "currency"),
  lg_num_pref = c("sci", "suf"),
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

scope

Scope of automatic formatting

⁠mult-kw:[numbers|currency]⁠ // default: c("numbers", "currency")

By default, the function will format both "numbers"-type values and "currency"-type values though the scope can be reduced to a single type of value to format.

lg_num_pref

Large-number preference

⁠singl-kw:[sci|suf]⁠ // default: "sci"

When large numbers are present, there can be a fixed preference toward how they are formatted. Choices are scientific notation for very small and very large values ("sci"), or, the use of suffixed numbers ("suf", for large values only).

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table. Format all of the columns automatically with the fmt_auto() function.

exibble |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_auto()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_auto()` help file.

Let's now use the countrypops dataset to create another gt table. We'll again use fmt_auto() to automatically format all columns but this time the choice will be made to opt for large-number suffixing instead of scientific notation. This is done by using the lg_num_pref = "suf" option.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::select(country_code_3, year, population) |>
  dplyr::filter(country_code_3 %in% c("CHN", "IND", "USA", "PAK", "IDN")) |>
  dplyr::filter(year > 1975 & year %% 5 == 0) |>
  tidyr::spread(year, population) |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(`2020`)) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "country_code_3") |>
  fmt_auto(lg_num_pref = "suf")
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_auto()` help file.

Function ID

3-29

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format column data containing bin/interval information

Description

When using cut() (or other functions that use it in some way) you get bins that can look like this: "(0,10]", "(10,15]", "(15,20]", "(20,40]". This interval notation expresses the lower and upper limits of each range. The square or round brackets define whether each of the endpoints are included in the range ([/⁠]⁠ for inclusion, (/⁠)⁠ for exclusion). Should bins of this sort be present in a table, the fmt_bins() function can be used to format that syntax to a form that presents better in a display table. It's possible to format the values of the intervals with the fmt argument, and, the separator can be modified with the sep argument.

Usage

fmt_bins(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  sep = "--",
  fmt = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

sep

Separator between values

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "--"

The separator text that indicates the values are ranged. The default value of "--" indicates that an en dash will be used for the range separator. Using "---" will be taken to mean that an em dash should be used. Should you want these special symbols to be taken literally, they can be supplied within base::I().

fmt

Formatting expressions

⁠<single expression>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional formatting expression in formula form. If used, the RHS of ~ should contain a formatting call (e.g., ⁠~ fmt_number(., decimals = 3, use_seps = FALSE⁠).

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_bins() is compatible with body cells that are of the "character" or "factor" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Formatting expressions for fmt

We can supply a one-sided (RHS only) expression to fmt, and, several can be provided in a list. The expression uses a formatting function (e.g., fmt_number(), fmt_currency(), etc.) and it must contain an initial . that stands for the data object. If performing numeric formatting it might look something like this:

fmt = ~ fmt_number(., decimals = 1, use_seps = FALSE)

Examples

Use the countrypops dataset to create a gt table. Before even getting to the gt() call, we use cut() in conjunction with scales::breaks_log() to create some highly customized bins. Consequently each country's population in the 2021 year is assigned to a bin. These bins have a characteristic type of formatting that can be used as input to fmt_bins(), and using that formatting function allows us to customize the presentation of those ranges. For instance, here we are formatting the left and right values of the ranges with fmt_integer() (using formula syntax).

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(year == 2021) |>
  dplyr::select(country_code_2, population) |>
  dplyr::mutate(population_class = cut(
    population,
    breaks = scales::breaks_log(n = 20)(population)
    )
  ) |>
  dplyr::group_by(population_class) |>
  dplyr::summarize(
    count = dplyr::n(),
    countries = paste0(country_code_2, collapse = ",")
  ) |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(population_class)) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_flag(columns = countries) |>
  fmt_bins(
    columns = population_class,
    fmt = ~ fmt_integer(., suffixing = TRUE)
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    population_class = "Population Range",
    count = "",
    countries = "Countries"
  ) |>
  cols_width(
    population_class ~ px(150),
    count ~ px(50)
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(style = "italic"),
    locations = cells_body(columns = count)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_bins()` help file.

Function ID

3-17

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format values as bytes

Description

With numeric values in a gt table, we can transform those to values of bytes with human readable units. fmt_bytes() allows for the formatting of byte sizes to either of two common representations: (1) with decimal units (powers of 1000, examples being "kB" and "MB"), and (2) with binary units (powers of 1024, examples being "KiB" and "MiB").

It is assumed the input numeric values represent the number of bytes and automatic truncation of values will occur. The numeric values will be scaled to be in the range of 1 to <1000 and then decorated with the correct unit symbol according to the standard chosen. For more control over the formatting of byte sizes, we can use the following options:

  • decimals: choice of the number of decimal places, option to drop trailing zeros, and a choice of the decimal symbol

  • digit grouping separators: options to enable/disable digit separators and provide a choice of separator symbol

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in number formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

fmt_bytes(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  standard = c("decimal", "binary"),
  decimals = 1,
  n_sigfig = NULL,
  drop_trailing_zeros = TRUE,
  drop_trailing_dec_mark = TRUE,
  use_seps = TRUE,
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  dec_mark = ".",
  force_sign = FALSE,
  incl_space = TRUE,
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

standard

Standard used to express byte sizes

⁠singl-kw:[decimal|binary]⁠ // default: "decimal"

The form of expressing large byte sizes is divided between: (1) decimal units (powers of 1000; e.g., "kB" and "MB"), and (2) binary units (powers of 1024; e.g., "KiB" and "MiB").

decimals

Number of decimal places

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=0) // default: 1

This corresponds to the exact number of decimal places to use. A value such as 2.34 can, for example, be formatted with 0 decimal places and it would result in "2". With 4 decimal places, the formatted value becomes "2.3400". The trailing zeros can be removed with drop_trailing_zeros = TRUE.

n_sigfig

Number of significant figures

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=1) // default: NULL (optional)

A option to format numbers to n significant figures. By default, this is NULL and thus number values will be formatted according to the number of decimal places set via decimals. If opting to format according to the rules of significant figures, n_sigfig must be a number greater than or equal to 1. Any values passed to the decimals and drop_trailing_zeros arguments will be ignored.

drop_trailing_zeros

Drop any trailing zeros

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

A logical value that allows for removal of trailing zeros (those redundant zeros after the decimal mark).

drop_trailing_dec_mark

Drop the trailing decimal mark

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value that determines whether decimal marks should always appear even if there are no decimal digits to display after formatting (e.g., 23 becomes 23. if FALSE). By default trailing decimal marks are not shown.

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

dec_mark

Decimal mark

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "."

The string to be used as the decimal mark. For example, using dec_mark = "," with the value 0.152 would result in a formatted value of "0,152"). This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the positive sign be shown for positive numbers (effectively showing a sign for all numbers except zero)? If so, use TRUE for this option. The default is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a minus sign.

incl_space

Include a space between the value and the units

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option for whether to include a space between the value and the units. The default is to use a space character for separation.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_bytes() is compatible with body cells that are of the "numeric" or "integer" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_bytes() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • standard

  • decimals

  • n_sigfig

  • drop_trailing_zeros

  • drop_trailing_dec_mark

  • use_seps

  • pattern

  • sep_mark

  • dec_mark

  • force_sign

  • incl_space

  • locale

Please note that for each of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Adapting output to a specific locale

This formatting function can adapt outputs according to a provided locale value. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). The use of a valid locale ID here means separator and decimal marks will be correct for the given locale. Should any values be provided in sep_mark or dec_mark, they will be overridden by the locale's preferred values.

Note that a locale value provided here will override any global locale setting performed in gt()'s own locale argument (it is settable there as a value received by all other functions that have a locale argument). As a useful reference on which locales are supported, we can call info_locales() to view an info table.

Examples

Use a single column from the exibble dataset and create a simple gt table. We'll use fmt_bytes() to format the num column to display as byte sizes in the decimal standard.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(num) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_bytes()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_bytes()` help file.

Let's create an analogous table again by using fmt_bytes(), this time showing byte sizes as binary values by using standard = "binary".

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(num) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_bytes(standard = "binary")
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_bytes()` help file.

Function ID

3-12

Function Introduced

v0.3.0 (May 12, 2021)

See Also

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_bytes().

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format chemical formulas

Description

fmt_chem() lets you format chemical formulas or even chemical reactions in the table body. Often the input text will be in a common form representing single compounds (like "C2H4O", for acetaldehyde) but chemical reactions can be used (e.g., ⁠2CH3OH -> CH3OCH3 + H2O"⁠). So long as the text within the targeted cells conforms to gt's specialized chemistry notation, the appropriate conversions will occur. Details pertaining to chemistry notation can be found in the section entitled How to use gt's chemistry notation.

Usage

fmt_chem(data, columns = everything(), rows = everything())

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

How to use gt's chemistry notation

The chemistry notation involves a shorthand of writing chemical formulas and chemical reactions, if needed. It should feel familiar in its basic usage and the more advanced typesetting tries to limit the amount of syntax needed. It's always best to show examples on usage:

  • "CH3O2" and "(NH4)2S" will render with subscripted numerals

  • Charges can be expressed with terminating "+" or "-", as in "H+" and "[AgCl2]-"; if any charges involve the use of a number, the following incantations could be used: "CrO4^2-", "Fe^n+", "Y^99+", "Y^{99+}" (the final two forms produce equivalent output)

  • Stoichiometric values can be included with whole values prepending formulas (e.g., "2H2O2") or by setting them off with a space, like this: "2 H2O2", "0.5 H2O", "1/2 H2O", "(1/2) H2O"

  • Certain standalone, lowercase letters or combinations thereof will be automatically stylized to fit conventions; "NO_x" and "x Na(NH4)HPO4" will have italicized 'x' characters and you can always italicize letters by surrounding with "*" (as in "*n* H2O" or "*n*-C5H12")

  • Chemical isotopes can be rendered using either of these two constructions preceding an element: "^{227}_{90}Th" or "^227_90Th"; nuclides can be represented in a similar manner, here are two examples: "^{0}_{-1}n^{-}", "^0_-1n-"

  • Chemical reactions can use "+" signs and a variety of reaction arrows: (1) "A -> B", (2) "A <- B", (3) "A <-> B", (4) "A <--> B", (5) "A <=> B", (6) "A <=>> B", or (7) "A <<=> B"

  • Center dots (useful in addition compounds) can be added by using a single "." or "*" character, surrounded by spaces; here are two equivalent examples "KCr(SO4)2 . 12 H2O" and "KCr(SO4)2 * 12 H2O"

  • Single and double bonds can be shown by inserting a "-" or "=" between adjacent characters (i.e., these shouldn't be at the beginning or end of the markup); two examples: "C6H5-CHO", "CH3CH=CH2"

  • as with units notation, Greek letters can be inserted by surrounding the letter name with ":"; here's an example that describes the delta value of carbon-13: ":delta: ^13C"

Examples

Let's use the reactions dataset and create a new gt table. The table will be filtered down to only a few rows and columns. The column cmpd_formula contains chemical formulas and the formatting of those will be performed by fmt_chem(). Certain column labels with chemical names (o3_k298 and no3_k298) can be handled within cols_label() by using surrounding the text with "{{%"/"%}}".

reactions |>
  dplyr::filter(cmpd_type == "terminal monoalkene") |>
  dplyr::filter(grepl("^1-", cmpd_name)) |>
  dplyr::select(cmpd_name, cmpd_formula, ends_with("k298")) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(title = "Gas-phase reactions of selected terminal alkenes") |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Reaction Rate Constant at 298 K",
    columns = ends_with("k298")
  ) |>
  fmt_chem(columns = cmpd_formula) |>
  fmt_scientific() |>
  sub_missing() |>
  cols_label(
    cmpd_name = "Alkene",
    cmpd_formula = "Formula",
    OH_k298 = "OH",
    O3_k298 = "{{%O3%}}",
    NO3_k298 = "{{%NO3%}}",
    Cl_k298 = "Cl"
  ) |>
  opt_align_table_header(align = "left")
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_chem()` help file.

Taking just a few rows from the photolysis dataset, let's create a new gt table. The cmpd_formula and products columns both contain text in chemistry notation (the first has compounds, and the second column has the products of photolysis reactions). These columns will be formatted by fmt_chem(). The compound formulas will be merged with the compound names with cols_merge().

photolysis |>
  dplyr::filter(cmpd_name %in% c(
    "hydrogen peroxide", "nitrous acid",
    "nitric acid", "acetaldehyde",
    "methyl peroxide", "methyl nitrate",
    "ethyl nitrate", "isopropyl nitrate"
  )) |>
  dplyr::select(-c(l, m, n, quantum_yield, type)) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(title = "Photolysis pathways of selected VOCs") |>
  fmt_chem(columns = c(cmpd_formula, products)) |>
  cols_nanoplot(
    columns = sigma_298_cm2,
    columns_x_vals = wavelength_nm,
    expand_x = c(200, 400),
    new_col_name = "cross_section",
    new_col_label = "Absorption Cross Section",
    options = nanoplot_options(
      show_data_points = FALSE,
      data_line_stroke_width = 4,
      data_line_stroke_color = "black",
      show_data_area = FALSE
    )
  ) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(cmpd_name, cmpd_formula),
    pattern = "{1}, {2}"
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    cmpd_name = "Compound",
    products = "Products"
  ) |>
  opt_align_table_header(align = "left")
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_chem()` help file.

fmt_chem() can handle the typesetting of nuclide notation. Let's take a subset of columns and rows from the nuclides dataset and make a new gt table. The contents of the nuclide column contains isotopes of hydrogen and carbon and this is placed in the table stub. Using fmt_chem() makes it so that the subscripted and superscripted values are properly formatted to the convention of formatting nuclides.

nuclides |>
  dplyr::filter(element %in% c("H", "C")) |>
  dplyr::mutate(nuclide = gsub("[0-9]+$", "", nuclide)) |>
  dplyr::select(nuclide, atomic_mass, half_life, decay_1, is_stable) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "nuclide") |>
  tab_header(title = "Isotopes of Hydrogen and Carbon") |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "Isotope") |>
  fmt_chem(columns = nuclide) |>
  fmt_scientific(columns = half_life) |>
  fmt_number(
    columns = atomic_mass,
    decimals = 4,
    scale_by = 1 / 1e6
  ) |>
  sub_missing(
    columns = half_life,
    rows = is_stable,
    missing_text = md("**STABLE**")
  ) |>
  sub_missing(columns = half_life, rows = !is_stable) |>
  sub_missing(columns = decay_1) |>
  data_color(
    columns = decay_1,
    target_columns = c(atomic_mass, half_life, decay_1),
    palette = "LaCroixColoR::PassionFruit",
    na_color = "white"
  ) |>
  cols_label_with(fn = function(x) tools::toTitleCase(gsub("_", " ", x))) |>
  cols_label(decay_1 = "Decay Mode") |>
  cols_width(
    stub() ~ px(70),
    c(atomic_mass, half_life, decay_1) ~ px(120)
  ) |>
  cols_hide(columns = c(is_stable)) |>
  cols_align(align = "center", columns = decay_1) |>
  opt_align_table_header(align = "left") |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.5)
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_chem()` help file.

Function ID

3-20

Function Introduced

v0.11.0 (July 9, 2024)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Generate country names from their corresponding country codes

Description

Tables that have comparable data between countries often need to have the country name included. While this seems like a fairly simple task, being consistent with country names is surprisingly difficult. The fmt_country() function can help in this regard by supplying a country name based on a 2- or 3-letter ISO 3166-1 country code (e.g., Singapore has the "SG" country code). The resulting country names have been obtained from the Unicode CLDR (Common Locale Data Repository), which is a good source since all country names are agreed upon by consensus. Furthermore, the country names can be localized through the locale argument (either in this function or through the initial gt() call).

Multiple country names can be included per cell by separating country codes with commas (e.g., "RO,BM"). And it is okay if the codes are set in either uppercase or lowercase letters. The sep argument allows for a common separator to be applied between country names.

Usage

fmt_country(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep = " ",
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep

Separator between country names

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: " "

In the output of country names within a body cell, sep provides the separator between each instance. By default, this is a single space character (" ").

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_country() function is compatible with body cells that are of the "character" or "factor" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_country() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • pattern

  • sep

  • locale

Please note that for each of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Supported regions

The following 242 regions (most of which comprise countries) are supported with names across 574 locales: "AD", "AE", "AF", "AG", "AI", "AL", "AM", "AO", "AR", "AS", "AT", "AU", "AW", "AX", "AZ", "BA", "BB", "BD", "BE", "BF", "BG", "BH", "BI", "BJ", "BL", "BM", "BN", "BO", "BR", "BS", "BT", "BW", "BY", "BZ", "CA", "CC", "CD", "CF", "CG", "CH", "CI", "CK", "CL", "CM", "CN", "CO", "CR", "CU", "CV", "CW", "CY", "CZ", "DE", "DJ", "DK", "DM", "DO", "DZ", "EC", "EE", "EG", "EH", "ER", "ES", "ET", "EU", "FI", "FJ", "FK", "FM", "FO", "FR", "GA", "GB", "GD", "GE", "GF", "GG", "GH", "GI", "GL", "GM", "GN", "GP", "GQ", "GR", "GS", "GT", "GU", "GW", "GY", "HK", "HN", "HR", "HT", "HU", "ID", "IE", "IL", "IM", "IN", "IO", "IQ", "IR", "IS", "IT", "JE", "JM", "JO", "JP", "KE", "KG", "KH", "KI", "KM", "KN", "KP", "KR", "KW", "KY", "KZ", "LA", "LB", "LC", "LI", "LK", "LR", "LS", "LT", "LU", "LV", "LY", "MA", "MC", "MD", "ME", "MF", "MG", "MH", "MK", "ML", "MM", "MN", "MO", "MP", "MQ", "MR", "MS", "MT", "MU", "MV", "MW", "MX", "MY", "MZ", "NA", "NC", "NE", "NF", "NG", "NI", "NL", "NO", "NP", "NR", "NU", "NZ", "OM", "PA", "PE", "PF", "PG", "PH", "PK", "PL", "PM", "PN", "PR", "PS", "PT", "PW", "PY", "QA", "RE", "RO", "RS", "RU", "RW", "SA", "SB", "SC", "SD", "SE", "SG", "SI", "SK", "SL", "SM", "SN", "SO", "SR", "SS", "ST", "SV", "SX", "SY", "SZ", "TC", "TD", "TF", "TG", "TH", "TJ", "TK", "TL", "TM", "TN", "TO", "TR", "TT", "TV", "TW", "TZ", "UA", "UG", "US", "UY", "UZ", "VA", "VC", "VE", "VG", "VI", "VN", "VU", "WF", "WS", "YE", "YT", "ZA", "ZM", and "ZW".

Examples

The peeps dataset will be used to generate a small gt table containing only the people born in the 1980s. The country column contains 3-letter country codes and those will be transformed to country names with fmt_country().

peeps |>
  dplyr::filter(grepl("198", dob)) |>
  dplyr::select(name_given, name_family, country, dob) |>
  dplyr::arrange(country, name_family) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_country(columns = country) |>
  cols_merge(columns = c(name_given, name_family)) |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.5) |>
  tab_options(column_labels.hidden = TRUE)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_country()` help file.

Use the countrypops dataset to create a gt table. We will only include a few columns and rows from that table. The country_code_3 column has 3-letter country codes in the format required for fmt_country() and using that function transforms the codes to country names.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(year == 2021) |>
  dplyr::filter(grepl("^S", country_name)) |>
  dplyr::arrange(country_name) |>
  dplyr::select(-country_name, -year) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  fmt_flag(columns = country_code_2) |>
  fmt_country(columns = country_code_3) |>
  cols_label(
    country_code_2 = "",
    country_code_3 = "Country",
    population = "Population (2021)"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_country()` help file.

The country names derived from country codes can be localized. Let's translate some of those country names into three different languages using different locale values in separate calls of fmt_country().

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(year == 2021) |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(population)) |>
  dplyr::filter(
    dplyr::row_number() > max(dplyr::row_number()) - 5 |
    dplyr::row_number() <= 5
  ) |>
  dplyr::select(
    country_code_fl = country_code_2,
    country_code_2a = country_code_2,
    country_code_2b = country_code_2,
    country_code_2c = country_code_2,
    population
  ) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "country_code_fl") |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  fmt_flag(columns = stub()) |>
  fmt_country(columns = ends_with("a")) |>
  fmt_country(columns = ends_with("b"), locale = "ja") |>
  fmt_country(columns = ends_with("c"), locale = "ar") |>
  cols_label(
    ends_with("a") ~ "`en`",
    ends_with("b") ~ "`ja`",
    ends_with("c") ~ "`ar`",
    population = "Population",
    .fn = md
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Country name in specified locale",
    columns = matches("2a|2b|2c")
  ) |>
  cols_align(align = "center", columns = matches("2a|2b|2c")) |>
  opt_horizontal_padding(scale = 2)
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_country()` help file.

Let's make another gt table, this time using the films dataset. The countries_of_origin column contains 2-letter country codes and some cells contain multiple countries (separated by commas). We'll use fmt_country() on that column and also specify that the rendered country names should be separated by a comma and a space character. Also note that historical country codes like "SU" ('USSR'), "CS" ('Czechoslovakia'), and "YU" ('Yugoslavia') are permitted as inputs for fmt_country().

films |>
  dplyr::filter(year == 1959) |>
  dplyr::select(
    contains("title"), run_time, director, countries_of_origin, imdb_url
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(title = "Feature Films in Competition at the 1959 Festival") |>
  fmt_country(columns = countries_of_origin, sep = ", ") |>
  fmt_url(
    columns = imdb_url,
    label = fontawesome::fa("imdb", fill = "black")
  ) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(title, original_title, imdb_url),
    pattern = "{1}<< ({2})>> {3}"
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    title = "Film",
    run_time = "Length",
    director = "Director",
    countries_of_origin = "Country"
  ) |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.5) |>
  opt_table_font(stack = "classical-humanist", weight = "bold") |>
  opt_stylize(style = 1, color = "gray") |>
  tab_options(heading.title.font.size = px(26))
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `fmt_country()` help file.

Country names can sometimes pair nicely with flag-based graphics. In this example (using a different portion of the films dataset) we use fmt_country() along with fmt_flag(). The formatted country names are then merged into the same cells as the icons via cols_merge().

films |>
  dplyr::filter(director == "Jean-Pierre Dardenne, Luc Dardenne") |>
  dplyr::select(title, year, run_time, countries_of_origin) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(title = "In Competition Films by the Dardenne Bros.") |>
  cols_add(country_flag = countries_of_origin) |>
  fmt_flag(columns = country_flag) |>
  fmt_country(columns = countries_of_origin, sep = ", ") |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(countries_of_origin, country_flag),
    pattern = "{2}<br>{1}"
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(size = px(9)),
    locations = cells_body(columns = countries_of_origin)
  ) |>
  cols_merge(columns = c(title, year), pattern = "{1} ({2})") |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.5) |>
  opt_horizontal_padding(scale = 3) |>
  opt_table_font(font = google_font("PT Sans")) |>
  opt_stylize(style = 1, color = "blue") |>
  tab_options(
    heading.title.font.size = px(26),
    column_labels.hidden = TRUE
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `fmt_country()` help file.

Function ID

3-25

Function Introduced

v0.11.0 (July 9, 2024)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format values as currencies

Description

With numeric values in a gt table, we can perform currency-based formatting with fmt_currency(). The function supports both automatic formatting with either a three-letter or a numeric currency code. We can also specify a custom currency that is formatted according to one or more output contexts with the currency() helper function. We have fine control over the conversion from numeric values to currency values, where we could take advantage of the following options:

  • the currency: providing a currency code or common currency name will procure the correct currency symbol and number of currency subunits; we could also use the currency() helper function to specify a custom currency

  • currency symbol placement: the currency symbol can be placed before or after the values

  • decimals/subunits: choice of the number of decimal places, and a choice of the decimal symbol, and an option on whether to include or exclude the currency subunits (the decimal portion)

  • negative values: choice of a negative sign or parentheses for values less than zero

  • digit grouping separators: options to enable/disable digit separators and provide a choice of separator symbol

  • scaling: we can choose to scale targeted values by a multiplier value

  • large-number suffixing: larger figures (thousands, millions, etc.) can be autoscaled and decorated with the appropriate suffixes

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted currency values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in currency formatting specific to the chosen locale; it will also retrieve the locale's currency if none is explicitly given

We can call info_currencies() for a useful reference on all of the valid inputs to the currency argument.

Usage

fmt_currency(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  currency = NULL,
  use_subunits = TRUE,
  decimals = NULL,
  drop_trailing_dec_mark = TRUE,
  use_seps = TRUE,
  accounting = FALSE,
  scale_by = 1,
  suffixing = FALSE,
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  dec_mark = ".",
  force_sign = FALSE,
  placement = "left",
  incl_space = FALSE,
  system = c("intl", "ind"),
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

currency

Currency to use

⁠scalar<character>|obj:<gt_currency>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The currency to use for the numeric value. This input can be supplied as a 3-letter currency code (e.g., "USD" for U.S. Dollars, "EUR" for the Euro currency). Use info_currencies() to get an information table with all of the valid currency codes and examples of each. Alternatively, we can provide a general currency type (e.g., "dollar", "pound", "yen", etc.) to simplify the process. Use info_currencies() with the type == "symbol" option to view an information table with all of the supported currency symbol names along with examples.

We can also use the currency() helper function to specify a custom currency, where the string could vary across output contexts. For example, using currency(html = "&fnof;", default = "f") would give us a suitable glyph for the Dutch guilder in an HTML output table, and it would simply be the letter "f" in all other output contexts). Please note that decimals will default to 2 when using the currency() helper function.

If nothing is provided here but a locale value has been set (either in this function call or as part of the initial gt() call), the currency will be obtained from that locale. Virtually all locales are linked to a territory that is a country (use info_locales() for details on all locales used in this package), so, the in-use (or de facto) currency will be obtained. As the default locale is "en", the "USD" currency will be used if neither a locale nor a currency value is given.

use_subunits

Show or hide currency subunits

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option for whether the subunits portion of a currency value should be displayed. For example, with an input value of 273.81, the default formatting will produce "$273.81". Removing the subunits (with use_subunits = FALSE) will give us "$273".

decimals

Number of decimal places

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=0) // default: NULL (optional)

The decimals values corresponds to the exact number of decimal places to use. This value is optional as a currency has an intrinsic number of decimal places (i.e., the subunits). A value such as 2.34 can, for example, be formatted with 0 decimal places and if the currency used is "USD" it would result in "$2". With 4 decimal places, the formatted value becomes "$2.3400".

drop_trailing_dec_mark

Drop the trailing decimal mark

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value that determines whether decimal marks should always appear even if there are no decimal digits to display after formatting. For example, when use_subunits = FALSE or decimals = 0 a formatted value such as "$23" can be fashioned as "$23." by setting drop_trailing_dec_mark = FALSE.

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

accounting

Use accounting style

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option to use accounting style for values. Normally, negative values will be shown with a minus sign but using accounting style will instead put any negative values in parentheses.

scale_by

Scale values by a fixed multiplier

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 1

All numeric values will be multiplied by the scale_by value before undergoing formatting. Since the default value is 1, no values will be changed unless a different multiplier value is supplied. This value will be ignored if using any of the suffixing options (i.e., where suffixing is not set to FALSE).

suffixing

Specification for large-number suffixing

⁠scalar<logical>|vector<character>⁠ // default: FALSE

The suffixing option allows us to scale and apply suffixes to larger numbers (e.g., 1924000 can be transformed to ⁠1.92M⁠). This option can accept a logical value, where FALSE (the default) will not perform this transformation and TRUE will apply thousands ("K"), millions ("M"), billions ("B"), and trillions ("T") suffixes after automatic value scaling.

We can alternatively provide a character vector that serves as a specification for which symbols are to used for each of the value ranges. These preferred symbols will replace the defaults (e.g., c("k", "Ml", "Bn", "Tr") replaces "K", "M", "B", and "T").

Including NA values in the vector will ensure that the particular range will either not be included in the transformation (e.g., c(NA, "M", "B", "T") won't modify numbers at all in the thousands range) or the range will inherit a previous suffix (e.g., with c("K", "M", NA, "T"), all numbers in the range of millions and billions will be in terms of millions).

Any use of suffixing (where it is not set expressly as FALSE) means that any value provided to scale_by will be ignored.

If using system = "ind" then the default suffix set provided by suffixing = TRUE will be the equivalent of c(NA, "L", "Cr"). This doesn't apply suffixes to the thousands range, but does express values in lakhs and crores.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

dec_mark

Decimal mark

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "."

The string to be used as the decimal mark. For example, using dec_mark = "," with the value 0.152 would result in a formatted value of "0,152"). This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the positive sign be shown for positive values (effectively showing a sign for all values except zero)? If so, use TRUE for this option. The default is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a minus sign. This option is disregarded when using accounting notation with accounting = TRUE.

placement

Currency symbol placement

⁠singl-kw:[left|right]⁠ // default: "left"

The placement of the currency symbol. This can be either be "left" (as in "$450") or "right" (which yields "450$").

incl_space

Include a space between the value and the currency symbol

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option for whether to include a space between the value and the currency symbol. The default is to not introduce a space character.

system

Numbering system for grouping separators

⁠singl-kw:[intl|ind]⁠ // default: "intl"

The international numbering system (keyword: "intl") is widely used and its grouping separators (i.e., sep_mark) are always separated by three digits. The alternative system, the Indian numbering system (keyword: "ind"), uses grouping separators that correspond to thousand, lakh, crore, and higher quantities.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_currency() is compatible with body cells that are of the "numeric" or "integer" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_currency() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • currency

  • use_subunits

  • decimals

  • drop_trailing_dec_mark

  • use_seps

  • accounting

  • scale_by

  • suffixing

  • pattern

  • sep_mark

  • dec_mark

  • force_sign

  • placement

  • incl_space

  • system

  • locale

Please note that for all of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Adapting output to a specific locale

This formatting function can adapt outputs according to a provided locale value. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). The use of a locale ID here means separator and decimal marks will be correct for the given locale. Should any values be provided in sep_mark or dec_mark, they will be overridden by the locale's preferred values. In addition to number formatting, providing a locale value and not providing a currency allows gt to obtain the currency code from the locale's territory.

Note that a locale value provided here will override any global locale setting performed in gt()'s own locale argument (it is settable there as a value received by all other functions that have a locale argument). As a useful reference on which locales are supported, we can call info_locales() to view an info table.

Examples

Let's make a simple gt table from the exibble dataset. We'll keep only the num and currency, columns, then, format those columns using fmt_currency() (with the "JPY" and "GBP" currencies).

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(num, currency) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_currency(
    columns = num,
    currency = "JPY"
  ) |>
  fmt_currency(
    columns = currency,
    currency = "GBP"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_currency()` help file.

Let's take a single column from exibble (currency) and format it with a currency name (this differs from the 3-letter currency code). In this case, we'll use the "euro" currency and set the placement of the symbol to the right of any value. Additionally, the currency symbol will separated from the value with a single space character (using incl_space = TRUE).

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(currency) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_currency(
    currency = "euro",
    placement = "right",
    incl_space = TRUE
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_currency()` help file.

With the pizzaplace dataset, let's make a summary table that gets the number of "hawaiian" pizzas sold (and revenue generated) by month. In the gt table, we'll format only the revenue column. The currency value is automatically U.S. Dollars when don't supply either a currency code or a locale. We'll also create a grand summary with grand_summary_rows(). Within that summary row, the total revenue needs to be formatted with fmt_currency() and we can do that within the fmt argument.

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::filter(name == "hawaiian") |>
  dplyr::mutate(month = lubridate::month(date, label = TRUE, abbr = TRUE)) |>
  dplyr::select(month, price) |>
  dplyr::group_by(month) |>
  dplyr::summarize(
    `number sold` = dplyr::n(),
    revenue = sum(price)
  ) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "month") |>
  tab_header(title = "Summary of Hawaiian Pizzas Sold by Month") |>
  fmt_currency(columns = revenue) |>
  grand_summary_rows(
    fns = list(label = "Totals:", id = "totals", fn = "sum"),
    fmt = ~ fmt_currency(., columns = revenue),
  ) |>
  opt_all_caps()
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_currency()` help file.

If supplying a locale value to fmt_currency(), we can opt use the locale's assumed currency and not have to supply a currency value (doing so would override the locale's default currency). With a column of locale values, we can format currency values on a row-by-row basis through the use of from_column(). Here, we'll reference the locale column in the argument of the same name.

dplyr::tibble(
  amount = rep(50.84, 5),
  currency = c("JPY", "USD", "GHS", "KRW", "CNY"),
  locale = c("ja", "en", "ee", "ko", "zh"),
) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_currency(
    columns = amount,
    locale = from_column(column = "locale")
  ) |>
  cols_hide(columns = locale)
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `fmt_currency()` help file.

We can similarly use from_column() to reference a column that has currency code values. Here's an example of how to create a simple currency conversion table. The curr column contains the 3-letter currency codes, and that column is referenced via from_column() in the currency argument of fmt_currency().

dplyr::tibble(
  flag = c("EU", "GB", "CA", "AU", "JP", "IN"),
  curr = c("EUR", "GBP", "CAD", "AUD", "JPY", "INR"),
  conv = c(
    0.912952, 0.787687, 1.34411,
    1.53927, 144.751, 82.9551
  )
) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_currency(
    columns = conv,
    currency = from_column(column = "curr")
  ) |>
  fmt_flag(columns = flag) |>
  cols_merge(columns = c(flag, curr)) |>
  cols_label(
    flag = "Currency",
    conv = "Amount"
  ) |>
  tab_header(
    title = "Conversion of 1 USD to Six Other Currencies",
    subtitle = md("Conversion rates obtained on **Aug 13, 2023**")
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `fmt_currency()` help file.

Function ID

3-8

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_currency().

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format values as dates

Description

Format input values to time values using one of 41 preset date styles. Input can be in the form of POSIXt (i.e., datetimes), the Date type, or character (must be in the ISO 8601 form of ⁠YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS⁠ or YYYY-MM-DD).

Usage

fmt_date(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  date_style = "iso",
  pattern = "{x}",
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

date_style

Predefined style for dates

⁠scalar<character>|scalar<numeric|integer>(1<=val<=41)⁠ // default: "iso"

The date style to use. By default this is the short name "iso" which corresponds to ISO 8601 date formatting. There are 41 date styles in total and their short names can be viewed using info_date_style().

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_date() is compatible with body cells that are of the "Date", "POSIXt" or "character" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_date() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • date_style

  • pattern

  • locale

Please note that for each of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Formatting with the date_style argument

We need to supply a preset date style to the date_style argument. The date styles are numerous and can handle localization to any supported locale. A large segment of date styles are termed flexible date formats and this means that their output will adapt to any locale provided. That feature makes the flexible date formats a better option for locales other than "en" (the default locale).

The following table provides a listing of all date styles and their output values (corresponding to an input date of 2000-02-29).

Date Style Output Notes
1 "iso" "2000-02-29" ISO 8601
2 "wday_month_day_year" "Tuesday, February 29, 2000"
3 "wd_m_day_year" "Tue, Feb 29, 2000"
4 "wday_day_month_year" "Tuesday 29 February 2000"
5 "month_day_year" "February 29, 2000"
6 "m_day_year" "Feb 29, 2000"
7 "day_m_year" "29 Feb 2000"
8 "day_month_year" "29 February 2000"
9 "day_month" "29 February"
10 "day_m" "29 Feb"
11 "year" "2000"
12 "month" "February"
13 "day" "29"
14 "year.mn.day" "2000/02/29"
15 "y.mn.day" "00/02/29"
16 "year_week" "2000-W09"
17 "year_quarter" "2000-Q1"
18 "yMd" "2/29/2000" flexible
19 "yMEd" "Tue, 2/29/2000" flexible
20 "yMMM" "Feb 2000" flexible
21 "yMMMM" "February 2000" flexible
22 "yMMMd" "Feb 29, 2000" flexible
23 "yMMMEd" "Tue, Feb 29, 2000" flexible
24 "GyMd" "2/29/2000 A" flexible
25 "GyMMMd" "Feb 29, 2000 AD" flexible
26 "GyMMMEd" "Tue, Feb 29, 2000 AD" flexible
27 "yM" "2/2000" flexible
28 "Md" "2/29" flexible
29 "MEd" "Tue, 2/29" flexible
30 "MMMd" "Feb 29" flexible
31 "MMMEd" "Tue, Feb 29" flexible
32 "MMMMd" "February 29" flexible
33 "GyMMM" "Feb 2000 AD" flexible
34 "yQQQ" "Q1 2000" flexible
35 "yQQQQ" "1st quarter 2000" flexible
36 "Gy" "2000 AD" flexible
37 "y" "2000" flexible
38 "M" "2" flexible
39 "MMM" "Feb" flexible
40 "d" "29" flexible
41 "Ed" "29 Tue" flexible

We can call info_date_style() in the console to view a similar table of date styles with example output.

Adapting output to a specific locale

This formatting function can adapt outputs according to a provided locale value. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). Note that a locale value provided here will override any global locale setting performed in gt()'s own locale argument (it is settable there as a value received by all other functions that have a locale argument). As a useful reference on which locales are supported, we can call info_locales() to view an info table.

Examples

Let's use the exibble dataset to create a simple, two-column gt table (keeping only the date and time columns). With fmt_date(), we'll format the date column to display dates formatted with the "month_day_year" date style.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(date, time) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_date(
    columns = date,
    date_style = "month_day_year"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_date()` help file.

Again using the exibble dataset, let's format the date column to have mixed date formats, where dates after April 1st will be different than the others because of the expressions used in the rows argument. This will involve two calls of fmt_date() with different statements provided for rows. In the first call (dates after the 1st of April) the date style "m_day_year" is used; for the second call, "day_m_year" is the named date style supplied to date_style.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(date, time) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_date(
    columns = date,
    rows = as.Date(date) > as.Date("2015-04-01"),
    date_style = "m_day_year"
  ) |>
  fmt_date(
    columns = date,
    rows = as.Date(date) <= as.Date("2015-04-01"),
    date_style = "day_m_year"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_date()` help file.

Use the exibble dataset to create a single-column gt table (with only the date column). Format the date values using the "yMMMEd" date style (which is one of the 'flexible' styles). Also, we'll set the locale to "nl" to get the dates in Dutch.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(date) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_date(
    date_style = "yMMMEd",
    locale = "nl"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_date()` help file.

Function ID

3-13

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_date().

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format values as datetimes

Description

Format input values to datetime values using either presets for the date and time components or a formatting directive (this can either use a CLDR datetime pattern or strptime formatting). The input values can be in the form of POSIXct (i.e., datetimes), the Date type, or character (must be in the ISO 8601 form of ⁠YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS⁠ or YYYY-MM-DD).

Usage

fmt_datetime(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  date_style = "iso",
  time_style = "iso",
  sep = " ",
  format = NULL,
  tz = NULL,
  pattern = "{x}",
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

date_style

Predefined style for dates

⁠scalar<character>|scalar<numeric|integer>(1<=val<=41)⁠ // default: "iso"

The date style to use. By default this is the short name "iso" which corresponds to ISO 8601 date formatting. There are 41 date styles in total and their short names can be viewed using info_date_style().

time_style

Predefined style for times

⁠scalar<character>|scalar<numeric|integer>(1<=val<=25)⁠ // default: "iso"

The time style to use. By default this is the short name "iso" which corresponds to how times are formatted within ISO 8601 datetime values. There are 25 time styles in total and their short names can be viewed using info_time_style().

sep

Separator between date and time components

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: " "

The separator string to use between the date and time components. By default, this is a single space character (" "). Only used when not specifying a format code.

format

Date/time formatting string

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional formatting string used for generating custom dates/times. If used then the arguments governing preset styles (date_style and time_style) will be ignored in favor of formatting via the format string.

tz

Time zone

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The time zone for printing dates/times (i.e., the output). The default of NULL will preserve the time zone of the input data in the output. If providing a time zone, it must be one that is recognized by the user's operating system (a vector of all valid tz values can be produced with OlsonNames()).

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_datetime() is compatible with body cells that are of the "Date", "POSIXct" or "character" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_datetime() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • date_style

  • time_style

  • sep

  • format

  • tz

  • pattern

  • locale

Please note that for each of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Formatting with the date_style argument

We can supply a preset date style to the date_style argument to separately handle the date portion of the output. The date styles are numerous and can handle localization to any supported locale. A large segment of date styles are termed flexible date formats and this means that their output will adapt to any locale provided. That feature makes the flexible date formats a better option for locales other than "en" (the default locale).

The following table provides a listing of all date styles and their output values (corresponding to an input date of 2000-02-29).

Date Style Output Notes
1 "iso" "2000-02-29" ISO 8601
2 "wday_month_day_year" "Tuesday, February 29, 2000"
3 "wd_m_day_year" "Tue, Feb 29, 2000"
4 "wday_day_month_year" "Tuesday 29 February 2000"
5 "month_day_year" "February 29, 2000"
6 "m_day_year" "Feb 29, 2000"
7 "day_m_year" "29 Feb 2000"
8 "day_month_year" "29 February 2000"
9 "day_month" "29 February"
10 "day_m" "29 Feb"
11 "year" "2000"
12 "month" "February"
13 "day" "29"
14 "year.mn.day" "2000/02/29"
15 "y.mn.day" "00/02/29"
16 "year_week" "2000-W09"
17 "year_quarter" "2000-Q1"
18 "yMd" "2/29/2000" flexible
19 "yMEd" "Tue, 2/29/2000" flexible
20 "yMMM" "Feb 2000" flexible
21 "yMMMM" "February 2000" flexible
22 "yMMMd" "Feb 29, 2000" flexible
23 "yMMMEd" "Tue, Feb 29, 2000" flexible
24 "GyMd" "2/29/2000 A" flexible
25 "GyMMMd" "Feb 29, 2000 AD" flexible
26 "GyMMMEd" "Tue, Feb 29, 2000 AD" flexible
27 "yM" "2/2000" flexible
28 "Md" "2/29" flexible
29 "MEd" "Tue, 2/29" flexible
30 "MMMd" "Feb 29" flexible
31 "MMMEd" "Tue, Feb 29" flexible
32 "MMMMd" "February 29" flexible
33 "GyMMM" "Feb 2000 AD" flexible
34 "yQQQ" "Q1 2000" flexible
35 "yQQQQ" "1st quarter 2000" flexible
36 "Gy" "2000 AD" flexible
37 "y" "2000" flexible
38 "M" "2" flexible
39 "MMM" "Feb" flexible
40 "d" "29" flexible
41 "Ed" "29 Tue" flexible

We can call info_date_style() in the console to view a similar table of date styles with example output.

Formatting with the time_style argument

We can supply a preset time style to the time_style argument to separately handle the time portion of the output. There are many time styles and all of them can handle localization to any supported locale. Many of the time styles are termed flexible time formats and this means that their output will adapt to any locale provided. That feature makes the flexible time formats a better option for locales other than "en" (the default locale).

The following table provides a listing of all time styles and their output values (corresponding to an input time of 14:35:00). It is noted which of these represent 12- or 24-hour time. Some of the flexible formats (those that begin with "E") include the day of the week. Keep this in mind when pairing such time_style values with a date_style so as to avoid redundant or repeating information.

Time Style Output Notes
1 "iso" "14:35:00" ISO 8601, 24h
2 "iso-short" "14:35" ISO 8601, 24h
3 "h_m_s_p" "2:35:00 PM" 12h
4 "h_m_p" "2:35 PM" 12h
5 "h_p" "2 PM" 12h
6 "Hms" "14:35:00" flexible, 24h
7 "Hm" "14:35" flexible, 24h
8 "H" "14" flexible, 24h
9 "EHm" "Thu 14:35" flexible, 24h
10 "EHms" "Thu 14:35:00" flexible, 24h
11 "Hmsv" "14:35:00 GMT+00:00" flexible, 24h
12 "Hmv" "14:35 GMT+00:00" flexible, 24h
13 "hms" "2:35:00 PM" flexible, 12h
14 "hm" "2:35 PM" flexible, 12h
15 "h" "2 PM" flexible, 12h
16 "Ehm" "Thu 2:35 PM" flexible, 12h
17 "Ehms" "Thu 2:35:00 PM" flexible, 12h
18 "EBhms" "Thu 2:35:00 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
19 "Bhms" "2:35:00 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
20 "EBhm" "Thu 2:35 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
21 "Bhm" "2:35 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
22 "Bh" "2 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
23 "hmsv" "2:35:00 PM GMT+00:00" flexible, 12h
24 "hmv" "2:35 PM GMT+00:00" flexible, 12h
25 "ms" "35:00" flexible

We can call info_time_style() in the console to view a similar table of time styles with example output.

Formatting with a CLDR datetime pattern

We can use a CLDR datetime pattern with the format argument to create a highly customized and locale-aware output. This is a character string that consists of two types of elements:

  • Pattern fields, which repeat a specific pattern character one or more times. These fields are replaced with date and time data when formatting. The character sets of A-Z and a-z are reserved for use as pattern characters.

  • Literal text, which is output verbatim when formatting. This can include:

    • Any characters outside the reserved character sets, including spaces and punctuation.

    • Any text between single vertical quotes (e.g., 'text').

    • Two adjacent single vertical quotes (”), which represent a literal single quote, either inside or outside quoted text.

The number of pattern fields is quite sizable so let's first look at how some CLDR datetime patterns work. We'll use the datetime string "2018-07-04T22:05:09.2358(America/Vancouver)" for all of the examples that follow.

  • "mm/dd/y" -> "05/04/2018"

  • "EEEE, MMMM d, y" -> "Wednesday, July 4, 2018"

  • "MMM d E" -> "Jul 4 Wed"

  • "HH:mm" -> "22:05"

  • "h:mm a" -> "10:05 PM"

  • "EEEE, MMMM d, y 'at' h:mm a" -> "Wednesday, July 4, 2018 at 10:05 PM"

Here are the individual pattern fields:

Year

Calendar Year

This yields the calendar year, which is always numeric. In most cases the length of the "y" field specifies the minimum number of digits to display, zero-padded as necessary. More digits will be displayed if needed to show the full year. There is an exception: "yy" gives use just the two low-order digits of the year, zero-padded as necessary. For most use cases, "y" or "yy" should be good enough.

Field Patterns Output
"y" "2018"
"yy" "18"
"yyy" to "yyyyyyyyy" "2018" to "000002018"
Year in the Week in Year Calendar

This is the year in 'Week of Year' based calendars in which the year transition occurs on a week boundary. This may differ from calendar year "y" near a year transition. This numeric year designation is used in conjunction with pattern character "w" in the ISO year-week calendar as defined by ISO 8601.

Field Patterns Output
"Y" "2018"
"YY" "18"
"YYY" to "YYYYYYYYY" "2018" to "000002018"

Quarter

Quarter of the Year: formatting and standalone versions

The quarter names are identified numerically, starting at 1 and ending at 4. Quarter names may vary along two axes: the width and the context. The context is either 'formatting' (taken as a default), which the form used within a complete date format string, or, 'standalone', the form for date elements used independently (such as in calendar headers). The standalone form may be used in any other date format that shares the same form of the name. Here, the formatting form for quarters of the year consists of some run of "Q" values whereas the standalone form uses "q".

Field Patterns Output Notes
"Q"/"q" "3" Numeric, one digit
"QQ"/"qq" "03" Numeric, two digits (zero padded)
"QQQ"/"qqq" "Q3" Abbreviated
"QQQQ"/"qqqq" "3rd quarter" Wide
"QQQQQ"/"qqqqq" "3" Narrow

Month

Month: formatting and standalone versions

The month names are identified numerically, starting at 1 and ending at 12. Month names may vary along two axes: the width and the context. The context is either 'formatting' (taken as a default), which the form used within a complete date format string, or, 'standalone', the form for date elements used independently (such as in calendar headers). The standalone form may be used in any other date format that shares the same form of the name. Here, the formatting form for months consists of some run of "M" values whereas the standalone form uses "L".

Field Patterns Output Notes
"M"/"L" "7" Numeric, minimum digits
"MM"/"LL" "07" Numeric, two digits (zero padded)
"MMM"/"LLL" "Jul" Abbreviated
"MMMM"/"LLLL" "July" Wide
"MMMMM"/"LLLLL" "J" Narrow

Week

Week of Year

Values calculated for the week of year range from 1 to 53. Week 1 for a year is the first week that contains at least the specified minimum number of days from that year. Weeks between week 1 of one year and week 1 of the following year are numbered sequentially from 2 to 52 or 53 (if needed).

There are two available field lengths. Both will display the week of year value but the "ww" width will always show two digits (where weeks 1 to 9 are zero padded).

Field Patterns Output Notes
"w" "27" Minimum digits
"ww" "27" Two digits (zero padded)
Week of Month

The week of a month can range from 1 to 5. The first day of every month always begins at week 1 and with every transition into the beginning of a week, the week of month value is incremented by 1.

Field Pattern Output
"W" "1"

Day

Day of Month

The day of month value is always numeric and there are two available field length choices in its formatting. Both will display the day of month value but the "dd" formatting will always show two digits (where days 1 to 9 are zero padded).

Field Patterns Output Notes
"d" "4" Minimum digits
"dd" "04" Two digits, zero padded
Day of Year

The day of year value ranges from 1 (January 1) to either 365 or 366 (December 31), where the higher value of the range indicates that the year is a leap year (29 days in February, instead of 28). The field length specifies the minimum number of digits, with zero-padding as necessary.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"D" "185"
"DD" "185" Zero padded to minimum width of 2
"DDD" "185" Zero padded to minimum width of 3
Day of Week in Month

The day of week in month returns a numerical value indicating the number of times a given weekday had occurred in the month (e.g., '2nd Monday in March'). This conveniently resolves to predicable case structure where ranges of day of the month values return predictable day of week in month values:

  • days 1 - 7 -> 1

  • days 8 - 14 -> 2

  • days 15 - 21 -> 3

  • days 22 - 28 -> 4

  • days 29 - 31 -> 5

Field Pattern Output
"F" "1"
Modified Julian Date

The modified version of the Julian date is obtained by subtracting 2,400,000.5 days from the Julian date (the number of days since January 1, 4713 BC). This essentially results in the number of days since midnight November 17, 1858. There is a half day offset (unlike the Julian date, the modified Julian date is referenced to midnight instead of noon).

Field Patterns Output
"g" to "ggggggggg" "58303" -> "000058303"

Weekday

Day of Week Name

The name of the day of week is offered in four different widths.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"E", "EE", or "EEE" "Wed" Abbreviated
"EEEE" "Wednesday" Wide
"EEEEE" "W" Narrow
"EEEEEE" "We" Short

Periods

AM/PM Period of Day

This denotes before noon and after noon time periods. May be upper or lowercase depending on the locale and other options. The wide form may be the same as the short form if the 'real' long form (e.g. 'ante meridiem') is not customarily used. The narrow form must be unique, unlike some other fields.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"a", "aa", or "aaa" "PM" Abbreviated
"aaaa" "PM" Wide
"aaaaa" "p" Narrow
AM/PM Period of Day Plus Noon and Midnight

Provide AM and PM as well as phrases for exactly noon and midnight. May be upper or lowercase depending on the locale and other options. If the locale doesn't have the notion of a unique 'noon' (i.e., 12:00), then the PM form may be substituted. A similar behavior can occur for 'midnight' (00:00) and the AM form. The narrow form must be unique, unlike some other fields.

(a) input_midnight: "2020-05-05T00:00:00" (b) input_noon: "2020-05-05T12:00:00"

Field Patterns Output Notes
"b", "bb", or "bbb" (a) "midnight" Abbreviated
(b) "noon"
"bbbb" (a) "midnight" Wide
(b) "noon"
"bbbbb" (a) "mi" Narrow
(b) "n"
Flexible Day Periods

Flexible day periods denotes things like 'in the afternoon', 'in the evening', etc., and the flexibility comes from a locale's language and script. Each locale has an associated rule set that specifies when the day periods start and end for that locale.

(a) input_morning: "2020-05-05T00:08:30" (b) input_afternoon: "2020-05-05T14:00:00"

Field Patterns Output Notes
"B", "BB", or "BBB" (a) "in the morning" Abbreviated
(b) "in the afternoon"
"BBBB" (a) "in the morning" Wide
(b) "in the afternoon"
"BBBBB" (a) "in the morning" Narrow
(b) "in the afternoon"

Hours, Minutes, and Seconds

Hour 0-23

Hours from 0 to 23 are for a standard 24-hour clock cycle (midnight plus 1 minute is 00:01) when using "HH" (which is the more common width that indicates zero-padding to 2 digits).

Using "2015-08-01T08:35:09":

Field Patterns Output Notes
"H" "8" Numeric, minimum digits
"HH" "08" Numeric, 2 digits (zero padded)
Hour 1-12

Hours from 1 to 12 are for a standard 12-hour clock cycle (midnight plus 1 minute is 12:01) when using "hh" (which is the more common width that indicates zero-padding to 2 digits).

Using "2015-08-01T08:35:09":

Field Patterns Output Notes
"h" "8" Numeric, minimum digits
"hh" "08" Numeric, 2 digits (zero padded)
Hour 1-24

Using hours from 1 to 24 is a less common way to express a 24-hour clock cycle (midnight plus 1 minute is 24:01) when using "kk" (which is the more common width that indicates zero-padding to 2 digits).

Using "2015-08-01T08:35:09":

Field Patterns Output Notes
"k" "9" Numeric, minimum digits
"kk" "09" Numeric, 2 digits (zero padded)
Hour 0-11

Using hours from 0 to 11 is a less common way to express a 12-hour clock cycle (midnight plus 1 minute is 00:01) when using "KK" (which is the more common width that indicates zero-padding to 2 digits).

Using "2015-08-01T08:35:09":

Field Patterns Output Notes
"K" "7" Numeric, minimum digits
"KK" "07" Numeric, 2 digits (zero padded)
Minute

The minute of the hour which can be any number from 0 to 59. Use "m" to show the minimum number of digits, or "mm" to always show two digits (zero-padding, if necessary).

Field Patterns Output Notes
"m" "5" Numeric, minimum digits
"mm" "06" Numeric, 2 digits (zero padded)
Seconds

The second of the minute which can be any number from 0 to 59. Use "s" to show the minimum number of digits, or "ss" to always show two digits (zero-padding, if necessary).

Field Patterns Output Notes
"s" "9" Numeric, minimum digits
"ss" "09" Numeric, 2 digits (zero padded)
Fractional Second

The fractional second truncates (like other time fields) to the width requested (i.e., count of letters). So using pattern "SSSS" will display four digits past the decimal (which, incidentally, needs to be added manually to the pattern).

Field Patterns Output
"S" to "SSSSSSSSS" "2" -> "235000000"
Milliseconds Elapsed in Day

There are 86,400,000 milliseconds in a day and the "A" pattern will provide the whole number. The width can go up to nine digits with "AAAAAAAAA" and these higher field widths will result in zero padding if necessary.

Using "2011-07-27T00:07:19.7223":

Field Patterns Output
"A" to "AAAAAAAAA" "439722" -> "000439722"

Era

The Era Designator

This provides the era name for the given date. The Gregorian calendar has two eras: AD and BC. In the AD year numbering system, AD 1 is immediately preceded by 1 BC, with nothing in between them (there was no year zero).

Field Patterns Output Notes
"G", "GG", or "GGG" "AD" Abbreviated
"GGGG" "Anno Domini" Wide
"GGGGG" "A" Narrow

Time Zones

TZ // Short and Long Specific non-Location Format

The short and long specific non-location formats for time zones are suggested for displaying a time with a user friendly time zone name. Where the short specific format is unavailable, it will fall back to the short localized GMT format ("O"). Where the long specific format is unavailable, it will fall back to the long localized GMT format ("OOOO").

Field Patterns Output Notes
"z", "zz", or "zzz" "PDT" Short Specific
"zzzz" "Pacific Daylight Time" Long Specific
TZ // Common UTC Offset Formats

The ISO8601 basic format with hours, minutes and optional seconds fields is represented by "Z", "ZZ", or "ZZZ". The format is equivalent to RFC 822 zone format (when the optional seconds field is absent). This is equivalent to the "xxxx" specifier. The field pattern "ZZZZ" represents the long localized GMT format. This is equivalent to the "OOOO" specifier. Finally, "ZZZZZ" pattern yields the ISO8601 extended format with hours, minutes and optional seconds fields. The ISO8601 UTC indicator Z is used when local time offset is 0. This is equivalent to the "XXXXX" specifier.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"Z", "ZZ", or "ZZZ" "-0700" ISO 8601 basic format
"ZZZZ" "GMT-7:00" Long localized GMT format
"ZZZZZ" "-07:00" ISO 8601 extended format
TZ // Short and Long Localized GMT Formats

The localized GMT formats come in two widths "O" (which removes the minutes field if it's 0) and "OOOO" (which always contains the minutes field). The use of the GMT indicator changes according to the locale.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"O" "GMT-7" Short localized GMT format
"OOOO" "GMT-07:00" Long localized GMT format
TZ // Short and Long Generic non-Location Formats

The generic non-location formats are useful for displaying a recurring wall time (e.g., events, meetings) or anywhere people do not want to be overly specific. Where either of these is unavailable, there is a fallback to the generic location format ("VVVV"), then the short localized GMT format as the final fallback.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"v" "PT" Short generic non-location format
"vvvv" "Pacific Time" Long generic non-location format
TZ // Short Time Zone IDs and Exemplar City Formats

These formats provide variations of the time zone ID and often include the exemplar city. The widest of these formats, "VVVV", is useful for populating a choice list for time zones, because it supports 1-to-1 name/zone ID mapping and is more uniform than other text formats.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"V" "cavan" Short time zone ID
"VV" "America/Vancouver" Long time zone ID
"VVV" "Vancouver" The tz exemplar city
"VVVV" "Vancouver Time" Generic location format
TZ // ISO 8601 Formats with Z for +0000

The "X"-"XXX" field patterns represent valid ISO 8601 patterns for time zone offsets in datetimes. The final two widths, "XXXX" and "XXXXX" allow for optional seconds fields. The seconds field is not supported by the ISO 8601 specification. For all of these, the ISO 8601 UTC indicator Z is used when the local time offset is 0.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"X" "-07" ISO 8601 basic format (h, optional m)
"XX" "-0700" ISO 8601 basic format (h & m)
"XXX" "-07:00" ISO 8601 extended format (h & m)
"XXXX" "-0700" ISO 8601 basic format (h & m, optional s)
"XXXXX" "-07:00" ISO 8601 extended format (h & m, optional s)
TZ // ISO 8601 Formats (no use of Z for +0000)

The "x"-"xxxxx" field patterns represent valid ISO 8601 patterns for time zone offsets in datetimes. They are similar to the "X"-"XXXXX" field patterns except that the ISO 8601 UTC indicator Z will not be used when the local time offset is 0.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"x" "-07" ISO 8601 basic format (h, optional m)
"xx" "-0700" ISO 8601 basic format (h & m)
"xxx" "-07:00" ISO 8601 extended format (h & m)
"xxxx" "-0700" ISO 8601 basic format (h & m, optional s)
"xxxxx" "-07:00" ISO 8601 extended format (h & m, optional s)

Formatting with a strptime format code

Performing custom date/time formatting with the format argument can also occur with a strptime format code. This works by constructing a string of individual format codes representing formatted date and time elements. These are all indicated with a leading ⁠%⁠, literal characters are interpreted as any characters not starting with a ⁠%⁠ character.

First off, let's look at a few format code combinations that work well together as a strptime format. This will give us an intuition on how these generally work. We'll use the datetime "2015-06-08 23:05:37.48" for all of the examples that follow.

  • "%m/%d/%Y" -> "06/08/2015"

  • "%A, %B %e, %Y" -> "Monday, June 8, 2015"

  • "%b %e %a" -> "Jun 8 Mon"

  • "%H:%M" -> "23:05"

  • "%I:%M %p" -> "11:05 pm"

  • "%A, %B %e, %Y at %I:%M %p" -> "Monday, June 8, 2015 at 11:05 pm"

Here are the individual format codes for the date components:

  • "%a" -> "Mon" (abbreviated day of week name)

  • "%A" -> "Monday" (full day of week name)

  • "%w" -> "1" (day of week number in ⁠0..6⁠; Sunday is 0)

  • "%u" -> "1" (day of week number in ⁠1..7⁠; Monday is 1, Sunday 7)

  • "%y" -> "15" (abbreviated year, using the final two digits)

  • "%Y" -> "2015" (full year)

  • "%b" -> "Jun" (abbreviated month name)

  • "%B" -> "June" (full month name)

  • "%m" -> "06" (month number)

  • "%d" -> "08" (day number, zero-padded)

  • "%e" -> "8" (day number without zero padding)

  • "%j" -> "159" (day of the year, always zero-padded)

  • "%W" -> "23" (week number for the year, always zero-padded)

  • "%V" -> "24" (week number for the year, following the ISO 8601 standard)

  • "%C" -> "20" (the century number)

Here are the individual format codes for the time components:

  • "%H" -> "23" (24h hour)

  • "%I" -> "11" (12h hour)

  • "%M" -> "05" (minute)

  • "%S" -> "37" (second)

  • "%OS3" -> "37.480" (seconds with decimals; 3 decimal places here)

  • ⁠%p⁠ -> "pm" (AM or PM indicator)

Here are some extra formats that you may find useful:

  • "%z" -> "+0000" (signed time zone offset, here using UTC)

  • "%F" -> "2015-06-08" (the date in the ISO 8601 date format)

  • "%%" -> "%" (the literal "⁠%⁠" character, in case you need it)

Adapting output to a specific locale

This formatting function can adapt outputs according to a provided locale value. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). Note that a locale value provided here will override any global locale setting performed in gt()'s own locale argument (it is settable there as a value received by all other functions that have a locale argument). As a useful reference on which locales are supported, we can call info_locales() to view an info table.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a single-column gt table (with only the datetime column). With fmt_datetime() we'll format the datetime column to have dates formatted with the "month_day_year" style and times with the "h_m_s_p" 12-hour time style.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(datetime) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_datetime(
    date_style = "month_day_year",
    time_style = "h_m_s_p"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_datetime()` help file.

Using the same input table, we can use fmt_datetime() with flexible date and time styles. Two that work well together are "MMMEd" and "Hms". These date and time styles will, being flexible, create outputs that conform to the locale value given to the locale argument. Let's use two calls of fmt_datetime(): the first will format all rows in datetime to the Danish locale (with locale = "da") and the second call will target the first three rows with the same formatting, but in the default locale (which is "en").

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(datetime) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_datetime(
    date_style = "MMMEd",
    time_style = "Hms",
    locale = "da"
  ) |>
  fmt_datetime(
    rows = 1:3,
    date_style = "MMMEd",
    time_style = "Hms"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_datetime()` help file.

It's possible to use the format argument and write our own formatting specification. Using the CLDR datetime pattern "EEEE, MMMM d, y 'at' h:mm a (zzzz)" gives us datetime outputs with time zone formatting. Let's provide a time zone ID ("America/Vancouver") to the tz argument.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(datetime) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_datetime(
    format = "EEEE, MMMM d, y 'at' h:mm a (zzzz)",
    tz = "America/Vancouver"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_datetime()` help file.

Function ID

3-15

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_datetime().

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format numeric or duration values as styled time duration strings

Description

Format input values to time duration values whether those input values are numbers or of the difftime class. We can specify which time units any numeric input values have (as weeks, days, hours, minutes, or seconds) and the output can be customized with a duration style (corresponding to narrow, wide, colon-separated, and ISO forms) and a choice of output units ranging from weeks to seconds.

Usage

fmt_duration(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  input_units = NULL,
  output_units = NULL,
  duration_style = c("narrow", "wide", "colon-sep", "iso"),
  trim_zero_units = TRUE,
  max_output_units = NULL,
  pattern = "{x}",
  use_seps = TRUE,
  sep_mark = ",",
  force_sign = FALSE,
  system = c("intl", "ind"),
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

input_units

Declaration of duration units for numerical values

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

If one or more selected columns contains numeric values (not difftime values, which contain the duration units), a keyword must be provided for input_units for gt to determine how those values are to be interpreted in terms of duration. The accepted units are: "seconds", "minutes", "hours", "days", and "weeks".

output_units

Choice of output units

⁠mult-kw:[weeks|days|hours|minutes|seconds]⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Controls the output time units. The default, NULL, means that gt will automatically choose time units based on the input duration value. To control which time units are to be considered for output (before trimming with trim_zero_units) we can specify a vector of one or more of the following keywords: "weeks", "days", "hours", "minutes", or "seconds".

duration_style

Style for representing duration values

⁠singl-kw:[narrow|wide|colon-sep|iso]⁠ // default: "narrow"

A choice of four formatting styles for the output duration values. With "narrow" (the default style), duration values will be formatted with single letter time-part units (e.g., 1.35 days will be styled as "1d 8h 24m"). With "wide", this example value will be expanded to "1 day 8 hours 24 minutes" after formatting. The "colon-sep" style will put days, hours, minutes, and seconds in the "([D]/)[HH]:[MM]:[SS]" format. The "iso" style will produce a value that conforms to the ISO 8601 rules for duration values (e.g., 1.35 days will become "P1DT8H24M").

trim_zero_units

Trimming of zero values

⁠scalar<logical>|mult-kw:[leading|trailing|internal]⁠ // default: TRUE

Provides methods to remove output time units that have zero values. By default this is TRUE and duration values that might otherwise be formatted as "0w 1d 0h 4m 19s" with trim_zero_units = FALSE are instead displayed as "1d 4m 19s". Aside from using TRUE/FALSE we could provide a vector of keywords for more precise control. These keywords are: (1) "leading", to omit all leading zero-value time units (e.g., "0w 1d" -> "1d"), (2) "trailing", to omit all trailing zero-value time units (e.g., "3d 5h 0s" -> "3d 5h"), and "internal", which removes all internal zero-value time units (e.g., "5d 0h 33m" -> "5d 33m").

max_output_units

Maximum number of time units to display

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=1) // default: NULL (optional)

If output_units is NULL, where the output time units are unspecified and left to gt to handle, a numeric value provided for max_output_units will be taken as the maximum number of time units to display in all output time duration values. By default, this is NULL and all possible time units will be displayed. This option has no effect when duration_style = "colon-sep" (only output_units can be used to customize that type of duration output).

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the positive sign be shown for positive values (effectively showing a sign for all values except zero)? If so, use TRUE for this option. By default only negative values will display a minus sign.

system

Numbering system for grouping separators

⁠singl-kw:[intl|ind]⁠ // default: "intl"

The international numbering system (keyword: "intl") is widely used and its grouping separators (i.e., sep_mark) are always separated by three digits. The alternative system, the Indian numbering system (keyword: "ind"), uses grouping separators that correspond to thousand, lakh, crore, and higher quantities.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Output units for the colon-separated duration style

The colon-separated duration style (enabled when duration_style = "colon-sep") is essentially a clock-based output format which uses the display logic of chronograph watch functionality. It will, by default, display duration values in the ⁠(D/)HH:MM:SS⁠ format. Any duration values greater than or equal to 24 hours will have the number of days prepended with an adjoining slash mark. While this output format is versatile, it can be changed somewhat with the output_units option. The following combinations of output units are permitted:

  • c("minutes", "seconds") -> MM:SS

  • c("hours", "minutes") -> HH:MM

  • c("hours", "minutes", "seconds") -> HH:MM:SS

  • c("days", "hours", "minutes") -> ⁠(D/)HH:MM⁠

Any other specialized combinations will result in the default set being used, which is c("days", "hours", "minutes", "seconds")

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_duration() is compatible with body cells that are of the "numeric", "integer", or "difftime" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Examples

Use part of the sp500 table to create a gt table. Create a difftime-based column and format the duration values to be displayed as the number of days since March 30, 2020.

sp500 |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  dplyr::mutate(
    time_point = lubridate::ymd("2020-03-30"),
    time_passed = difftime(time_point, date)
  ) |>
  dplyr::select(time_passed, open, close) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "month") |>
  fmt_duration(
    columns = time_passed,
    output_units = "days",
    duration_style = "wide"
  ) |>
  fmt_currency(columns = c(open, close))
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_duration()` help file.

Function ID

3-16

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_duration().

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format email addresses to generate 'mailto:' links

Description

Should cells contain email addresses, fmt_email() can be used to make email addresses work well with email clients on the user system. This should be expressly used on columns that contain only email addresses (i.e., no email addresses as part of a larger block of text). Should you have such a column of data, there are options for how the email addresses should be styled. They can be of the conventional style (with underlines and text coloring that sets it apart from other text), or, they can appear to be button-like (with a surrounding box that can be filled with a color of your choosing).

Email addresses in data cells are trusted as email addresses. We can also provide more readable labels with the display_name argument. Supplying a single value there will show the same label for all email addresses but display names from an adjacent column could be used via a from_column() call within display_name.

Usage

fmt_email(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  display_name = NULL,
  as_button = FALSE,
  color = "auto",
  show_underline = "auto",
  button_fill = "auto",
  button_width = "auto",
  button_outline = "auto",
  target = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

display_name

Display name for the email address

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The display name is the visible 'label' to use for the email address. If NULL (the default) the address itself will serve as the display name. There are two non-NULL options: (1) a piece of static text can be used for the display name by providing a string, and (2) a function can be provided to fashion a display name from every email address.

as_button

Style email address as a button

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option to style the email address as a button. By default, this is FALSE. If this option is chosen then the button_fill argument becomes usable.

color

Link color

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "auto"

The color used for the resulting email address and its underline. This is "auto" by default; this allows gt to choose an appropriate color based on various factors (such as the background button_fill when as_button is TRUE).

show_underline

Show the link underline

⁠scalar<character>|scalar<logical>⁠ // default: "auto"

Should the email address be decorated with an underline? By default this is "auto" which means that gt will choose TRUE when as_button = FALSE and FALSE in the other case. The underline will be the same color as that set in the color option.

button_fill, button_width, button_outline

Button options

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "auto"

Options for styling an email address as a button (and only applies if as_button = TRUE). All of these options are by default set to "auto", allowing gt to choose appropriate fill, width, and outline values.

target

The 'target' anchor element attribute

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL

The anchor element 'target' attribute value. For a description of the 'target' attribute and its allowed values, refer to the MDN Web Docs reference on the anchor HTML element.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_email() is compatible with body cells that are of the "character" or "factor" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_email() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • display_name

  • as_button

  • color

  • show_underline

  • button_fill

  • button_width

  • button_outline

Please note that for each of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Examples

Let's take ten rows from the peeps dataset and create a table of contact information with mailing addresses and email addresses. With the column that contains email addresses (email_addr), we can use fmt_email() to generate 'mailto:' links. Clicking any of these formatted email addresses should result in new message creation (depending on the OS integration with an email client).

peeps |>
  dplyr::filter(country == "AUS") |>
  dplyr::select(
    starts_with("name"),
    address, city, state_prov, postcode, country, email_addr
  ) |>
  dplyr::mutate(city = toupper(city)) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "name_family") |>
  tab_header(title = "Our Contacts in Australia") |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "Name") |>
  fmt_email(columns = email_addr) |>
  fmt_country(columns = country) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(address, city, state_prov, postcode, country),
    pattern = "{1}<br>{2} {3} {4}<br>{5}"
  ) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(name_family, name_given),
    pattern = "{1},<br>{2}"
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    address = "Mailing Address",
    email_addr = "Email"
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(size = "x-small"),
    locations = cells_body(columns = address)
  ) |>
  opt_align_table_header(align = "left")
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_email()` help file.

We can further condense the table by reducing the email link to an icon. The approach we take here is the use of a fontawesome icon within the display_name argument. The icon used is "envelope" and each icon produced serves as a clickable 'mailto:' link. By adjusting one of the cols_merge() calls, we can place the icon/link next to the name of the person.

peeps |>
  dplyr::filter(country == "AUS") |>
  dplyr::select(
    starts_with("name"),
    address, city, state_prov, postcode, country, email_addr
  ) |>
  dplyr::mutate(city = toupper(city)) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "name_family") |>
  tab_header(title = "Our Contacts in Australia") |>
  fmt_email(
    columns = email_addr,
    display_name = fontawesome::fa(
      name = "envelope",
      height = "0.75em",
      fill = "gray"
    )
  ) |>
  fmt_country(columns = country) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(address, city, state_prov, postcode, country),
    pattern = "{1}<br>{2} {3} {4}<br>{5}"
  ) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(name_family, name_given, email_addr),
    pattern = "{1}, {2} {3}"
  ) |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(200)) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(size = px(11)),
    locations = cells_body(columns = address)
  ) |>
  tab_options(column_labels.hidden = TRUE) |>
  opt_align_table_header(align = "left")
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_email()` help file.

Another option is to display the names of the email recipients instead of the email addresses, making the display names serve as 'mailto:' links. We can do this by using from_column() in the display_name argument. The display names in this case are the combined given and family names, handled earlier through a dplyr::mutate() call. With some space conserved, we take the opportunity here to add in phone information for each person.

peeps |>
  dplyr::filter(country == "AUS") |>
  dplyr::mutate(name = paste(name_given, name_family)) |>
  dplyr::mutate(city = toupper(city)) |>
  dplyr::mutate(phone_number = gsub("^\\(0|\\)", "", phone_number)) |>
  dplyr::select(
    name, address, city, state_prov, postcode, country,
    email_addr, phone_number, country_code
  ) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "email_addr") |>
  tab_header(title = "Our Contacts in Australia") |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "Name") |>
  fmt_email(
    columns = email_addr,
    display_name = from_column("name"),
    color = "gray25"
  ) |>
  cols_hide(columns = name) |>
  fmt_country(columns = country) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(address, city, state_prov, postcode, country),
    pattern = "{1}<br>{2} {3} {4}<br>{5}"
  ) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(phone_number, country_code),
    pattern = "+{2} {1}"
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    address = "Mailing Address",
    email_addr = "Email",
    phone_number = "Phone"
  ) |>
  cols_move_to_start(columns = phone_number) |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(170)) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(size = px(11)),
    locations = cells_body(columns = address)
  ) |>
  cols_align(align = "left") |>
  opt_align_table_header(align = "left")
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_email()` help file.

Function ID

3-22

Function Introduced

v0.11.0 (July 9, 2024)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format values to engineering notation

Description

With numeric values in a gt table, we can perform formatting so that the targeted values are rendered in engineering notation, where numbers are written in the form of a mantissa (m) and an exponent (n). When combined the construction is either of the form m x 10^n or mEn. The mantissa is a number between 1 and 1000 and the exponent is a multiple of 3. For example, the number 0.0000345 can be written in engineering notation as ⁠34.50 x 10^-6⁠. This notation helps to simplify calculations and make it easier to compare numbers that are on very different scales.

We have fine control over the formatting task, with the following options:

  • decimals: choice of the number of decimal places, option to drop trailing zeros, and a choice of the decimal symbol

  • scaling: we can choose to scale targeted values by a multiplier value

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

fmt_engineering(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  decimals = 2,
  drop_trailing_zeros = FALSE,
  drop_trailing_dec_mark = TRUE,
  scale_by = 1,
  exp_style = "x10n",
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  dec_mark = ".",
  force_sign_m = FALSE,
  force_sign_n = FALSE,
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

decimals

Number of decimal places

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=0) // default: 2

This corresponds to the exact number of decimal places to use. A value such as 2.34 can, for example, be formatted with 0 decimal places and it would result in "2". With 4 decimal places, the formatted value becomes "2.3400".

drop_trailing_zeros

Drop any trailing zeros

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

A logical value that allows for removal of trailing zeros (those redundant zeros after the decimal mark).

drop_trailing_dec_mark

Drop the trailing decimal mark

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value that determines whether decimal marks should always appear even if there are no decimal digits to display after formatting (e.g., 23 becomes 23. if FALSE). By default trailing decimal marks are not shown.

scale_by

Scale values by a fixed multiplier

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 1

All numeric values will be multiplied by the scale_by value before undergoing formatting. Since the default value is 1, no values will be changed unless a different multiplier value is supplied.

exp_style

Style declaration for exponent formatting

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "x10n"

Style of formatting to use for the scientific notation formatting. By default this is "x10n" but other options include using a single letter (e.g., "e", "E", etc.), a letter followed by a "1" to signal a minimum digit width of one, or "low-ten" for using a stylized "10" marker.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

dec_mark

Decimal mark

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "."

The string to be used as the decimal mark. For example, using dec_mark = "," with the value 0.152 would result in a formatted value of "0,152"). This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign_m, force_sign_n

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the plus sign be shown for positive values of the mantissa (first component, force_sign_m) or the exponent (force_sign_n)? This would effectively show a sign for all values except zero on either of those numeric components of the notation. If so, use TRUE for either one of these options. The default for both is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a sign.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_engineering() is compatible with body cells that are of the "numeric" or "integer" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_engineering() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • decimals

  • drop_trailing_zeros

  • drop_trailing_dec_mark

  • scale_by

  • exp_style

  • pattern

  • sep_mark

  • dec_mark

  • force_sign_m

  • force_sign_n

  • locale

Please note that for all of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Adapting output to a specific locale

This formatting function can adapt outputs according to a provided locale value. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). The use of a valid locale ID here means separator and decimal marks will be correct for the given locale. Should any values be provided in sep_mark or dec_mark, they will be overridden by the locale's preferred values.

Note that a locale value provided here will override any global locale setting performed in gt()'s own locale argument (it is settable there as a value received by all other functions that have a locale argument). As a useful reference on which locales are supported, we can call info_locales() to view an info table.

Examples

Let's define a data frame that contains two columns of values (one small and one large). After creating a simple gt table from small_large_tbl we'll call fmt_engineering() on both columns.

small_large_tbl <-
  dplyr::tibble(
    small = 10^(-12:-1),
    large = 10^(1:12)
  )

small_large_tbl |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_engineering()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_engineering()` help file.

Notice that within the form of m x 10^n, the n values move in steps of 3 (away from 0), and m values can have 1-3 digits before the decimal. Further to this, any values where n is 0 results in a display of only m (the first two values in the large column demonstrates this).

Engineering notation expresses values so that they are align to certain SI prefixes. Here is a table that compares select SI prefixes and their symbols to decimal and engineering-notation representations of the key numbers.

prefixes_tbl <-
  dplyr::tibble(
    name = c(
      "peta", "tera", "giga", "mega", "kilo",
      NA,
      "milli", "micro", "nano", "pico", "femto"
    ),
    symbol = c(
      "P", "T", "G", "M", "k",
      NA,
      "m", ":micro:", "n", "p", "f"
    ),
    decimal = c(10^(seq(15, -15, -3))),
    engineering = decimal
  )

prefixes_tbl |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_number(columns = decimal, n_sigfig = 1) |>
  fmt_engineering(columns = engineering) |>
  fmt_units(columns = symbol) |>
  sub_missing()
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_engineering()` help file.

The default method of styling the notation uses the 'm x 10^n' construction but this can be changed to a 'mEn' style via the exp_style argument. We can supply any single letter here and optionally affix a "1" to indicate there should not be any zero-padding of the n value. Two calls of fmt_engineering() are used here to show different options for styling in engineering notation.

small_large_tbl |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_engineering(
    columns = small,
    exp_style = "E"
  ) |>
  fmt_engineering(
    columns = large,
    exp_style = "e1",
    force_sign_n = TRUE
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_engineering()` help file.

Function ID

3-4

Function Introduced

v0.3.1 (August 9, 2021)

See Also

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_engineering().

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Generate flag icons for countries from their country codes

Description

While it is fairly straightforward to insert images into body cells (using fmt_image() is one way to it), there is often the need to incorporate specialized types of graphics within a table. One such group of graphics involves iconography representing different countries, and the fmt_flag() function helps with inserting a flag icon (or multiple) in body cells. To make this work seamlessly, the input cells need to contain some reference to a country, and this can be in the form of a 2- or 3-letter ISO 3166-1 country code (e.g., Egypt has the "EG" country code). This function will parse the targeted body cells for those codes (and the countrypops dataset contains all of them) and insert the appropriate flag graphics.

Multiple flags can be included per cell by separating country codes with commas (e.g., "GB,TT"). The sep argument allows for a common separator to be applied between flag icons.

Usage

fmt_flag(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  height = "1em",
  sep = " ",
  use_title = TRUE,
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

height

Height of flag

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "1em"

The absolute height of the flag icon in the table cell. By default, this is set to "1em".

sep

Separator between flags

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: " "

In the output of flag icons within a body cell, sep provides the separator between each icon. By default, this is a single space character (" ").

use_title

Display country name on hover

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to display a tooltip for the country name (in the language according to the locale value, set either here or in gt()) when hovering over the flag icon.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_flag() is compatible with body cells that are of the "character" or "factor" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_flag() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • height

  • sep

  • use_title

  • locale

Please note that for each of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Supported regions

The following 242 regions (most of which comprise countries) are supported with names across 574 locales: "AD", "AE", "AF", "AG", "AI", "AL", "AM", "AO", "AR", "AS", "AT", "AU", "AW", "AX", "AZ", "BA", "BB", "BD", "BE", "BF", "BG", "BH", "BI", "BJ", "BL", "BM", "BN", "BO", "BR", "BS", "BT", "BW", "BY", "BZ", "CA", "CC", "CD", "CF", "CG", "CH", "CI", "CK", "CL", "CM", "CN", "CO", "CR", "CU", "CV", "CW", "CY", "CZ", "DE", "DJ", "DK", "DM", "DO", "DZ", "EC", "EE", "EG", "EH", "ER", "ES", "ET", "EU", "FI", "FJ", "FK", "FM", "FO", "FR", "GA", "GB", "GD", "GE", "GF", "GG", "GH", "GI", "GL", "GM", "GN", "GP", "GQ", "GR", "GS", "GT", "GU", "GW", "GY", "HK", "HN", "HR", "HT", "HU", "ID", "IE", "IL", "IM", "IN", "IO", "IQ", "IR", "IS", "IT", "JE", "JM", "JO", "JP", "KE", "KG", "KH", "KI", "KM", "KN", "KP", "KR", "KW", "KY", "KZ", "LA", "LB", "LC", "LI", "LK", "LR", "LS", "LT", "LU", "LV", "LY", "MA", "MC", "MD", "ME", "MF", "MG", "MH", "MK", "ML", "MM", "MN", "MO", "MP", "MQ", "MR", "MS", "MT", "MU", "MV", "MW", "MX", "MY", "MZ", "NA", "NC", "NE", "NF", "NG", "NI", "NL", "NO", "NP", "NR", "NU", "NZ", "OM", "PA", "PE", "PF", "PG", "PH", "PK", "PL", "PM", "PN", "PR", "PS", "PT", "PW", "PY", "QA", "RE", "RO", "RS", "RU", "RW", "SA", "SB", "SC", "SD", "SE", "SG", "SI", "SK", "SL", "SM", "SN", "SO", "SR", "SS", "ST", "SV", "SX", "SY", "SZ", "TC", "TD", "TF", "TG", "TH", "TJ", "TK", "TL", "TM", "TN", "TO", "TR", "TT", "TV", "TW", "TZ", "UA", "UG", "US", "UY", "UZ", "VA", "VC", "VE", "VG", "VI", "VN", "VU", "WF", "WS", "YE", "YT", "ZA", "ZM", and "ZW".

You can view the entire set of supported flag icons as an informative table by calling info_flags().

Examples

Use the countrypops dataset to create a gt table. We will only include a few columns and rows from that table. The country_code_2 column has 2-letter country codes in the format required for fmt_flag() and using that function transforms the codes to circular flag icons.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(year == 2021) |>
  dplyr::filter(grepl("^S", country_name)) |>
  dplyr::arrange(country_name) |>
  dplyr::select(-country_name, -year) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  fmt_flag(columns = country_code_2) |>
  fmt_country(columns = country_code_3) |>
  cols_label(
    country_code_2 = "",
    country_code_3 = "Country",
    population = "Population (2021)"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_flag()` help file.

Using countrypops we can generate a table that provides populations every five years for the Benelux countries ("BE", "NL", and "LU"). This requires some manipulation with dplyr and tidyr before introducing the table to gt. With fmt_flag() we can obtain flag icons in the country_code_2 column. After that, we can merge the flag icons into the stub column, generating row labels that have a combination of icon and text.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(country_code_2 %in% c("BE", "NL", "LU")) |>
  dplyr::filter(year %% 10 == 0) |>
  dplyr::select(country_name, country_code_2, year, population) |>
  tidyr::pivot_wider(names_from = year, values_from = population) |>
  dplyr::slice(1, 3, 2) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "country_name") |>
  tab_header(title = "Populations of the Benelux Countries") |>
  tab_spanner(columns = everything(), label = "Year") |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  fmt_flag(columns = country_code_2) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(country_name, country_code_2),
    pattern = "{2} {1}"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_flag()` help file.

fmt_flag() works well even when there are multiple country codes within the same cell. It can operate on comma-separated codes without issue. When rendered to HTML, hovering over each of the flag icons results in tooltip text showing the name of the country.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(year == 2021, population < 100000) |>
  dplyr::select(country_code_2, population) |>
  dplyr::mutate(population_class = cut(
    population,
    breaks = scales::breaks_pretty(n = 5)(population)
    )
  ) |>
  dplyr::group_by(population_class) |>
  dplyr::summarize(
    countries = paste0(country_code_2, collapse = ",")
  ) |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(population_class)) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(title = "Countries with Small Populations") |>
  fmt_flag(columns = countries) |>
  fmt_bins(
    columns = population_class,
    fmt = ~ fmt_integer(., suffixing = TRUE)
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    population_class = "Population Range",
    countries = "Countries"
  ) |>
  cols_width(population_class ~ px(150))
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_flag()` help file.

Function ID

3-24

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format values as mixed fractions

Description

With numeric values in a gt table, we can perform mixed-fraction-based formatting. There are several options for setting the accuracy of the fractions. Furthermore, there is an option for choosing a layout (i.e., typesetting style) for the mixed-fraction output.

The following options are available for controlling this type of formatting:

  • accuracy: how to express the fractional part of the mixed fractions; there are three keyword options for this and an allowance for arbitrary denominator settings

  • simplification: an option to simplify fractions whenever possible

  • layout: We can choose to output values with diagonal or inline fractions

  • digit grouping separators: options to enable/disable digit separators and provide a choice of separator symbol for the whole number portion

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted mixed fractions

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in number formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

fmt_fraction(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  accuracy = NULL,
  simplify = TRUE,
  layout = c("inline", "diagonal"),
  use_seps = TRUE,
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  system = c("intl", "ind"),
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

accuracy

Accuracy of fractions

⁠singl-kw:[low|med|high]|scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=1)⁠ // default: "low"

The type of fractions to generate. This can either be one of the keywords "low", "med", or "high" (to generate fractions with denominators of up to 1, 2, or 3 digits, respectively) or an integer value greater than zero to obtain fractions with a fixed denominator (2 yields halves, 3 is for thirds, 4 is quarters, etc.). For the latter option, using simplify = TRUE will simplify fractions where possible (e.g., 2/4 will be simplified as 1/2). By default, the "low" option is used.

simplify

Simplify the fraction

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

If choosing to provide a numeric value for accuracy, the option to simplify the fraction (where possible) can be taken with TRUE (the default). With FALSE, denominators in fractions will be fixed to the value provided in accuracy.

layout

Layout of fractions in HTML output

⁠singl-kw:[inline|diagonal]⁠ // default: "inline"

For HTML output, the "inline" layout is the default. This layout places the numerals of the fraction on the baseline and uses a standard slash character. The "diagonal" layout will generate fractions that are typeset with raised/lowered numerals and a virgule.

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

system

Numbering system for grouping separators

⁠singl-kw:[intl|ind]⁠ // default: "intl"

The international numbering system (keyword: "intl") is widely used and its grouping separators (i.e., sep_mark) are always separated by three digits. The alternative system, the Indian numbering system (keyword: "ind"), uses grouping separators that correspond to thousand, lakh, crore, and higher quantities.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_fraction() is compatible with body cells that are of the "numeric" or "integer" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_fraction() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit ifferently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • accuracy

  • simplify

  • layout

  • use_seps

  • pattern

  • sep_mark

  • system

  • locale

Please note that for all of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Adapting output to a specific locale

This formatting function can adapt outputs according to a provided locale value. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). The use of a valid locale ID here means separator and decimal marks will be correct for the given locale. Should any value be provided in sep_mark, it will be overridden by the locale's preferred values.

Note that a locale value provided here will override any global locale setting performed in gt()'s own locale argument (it is settable there as a value received by all other functions that have a locale argument). As a useful reference on which locales are supported, we can call info_locales() to view an info table.

Examples

Using a summarized version of the pizzaplace dataset, let's create a gt table. With fmt_fraction() we can format the f_sold and f_income columns to display fractions. As for how the fractions are represented, we are electing to use accuracy = 10. This gives all fractions as tenths. We won't simplify the fractions (by using simplify = FALSE) and this means that a fraction like 5/10 won't become 1/2. With layout ="diagonal", we get a diagonal display of all fractions.

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::group_by(type, size) |>
  dplyr::summarize(
    sold = dplyr::n(),
    income = sum(price),
    .groups = "drop_last"
  ) |>
  dplyr::group_by(type) |>
  dplyr::mutate(
    f_sold = sold / sum(sold),
    f_income = income / sum(income),
  ) |>
  dplyr::arrange(type, dplyr::desc(income)) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "size") |>
  tab_header(
    title = "Pizzas Sold in 2015",
    subtitle = "Fraction of Sell Count and Revenue by Size per Type"
  ) |>
  fmt_integer(columns = sold) |>
  fmt_currency(columns = income) |>
  fmt_fraction(
    columns = starts_with("f_"),
    accuracy = 10,
    simplify = FALSE,
    layout = "diagonal"
  ) |>
  sub_missing(missing_text = "") |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Sold",
    columns = contains("sold")
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Revenue",
    columns = contains("income")
  ) |>
  text_transform(
    locations = cells_body(),
    fn = function(x) {
      dplyr::case_when(
        x == 0 ~ "<em>nil</em>",
        x != 0 ~ x
      )
    }
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    sold = "Amount",
    income = "Amount",
    f_sold = md("_f_"),
    f_income = md("_f_")
  ) |>
  cols_align(align = "center", columns = starts_with("f")) |>
  tab_options(
    table.width = px(400),
    row_group.as_column = TRUE
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_fraction()` help file.

Function ID

3-7

Function Introduced

v0.4.0 (February 15, 2022)

See Also

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_fraction().

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Use icons within a table's body cells

Description

We can draw from a library of thousands of icons and selectively insert them into a gt table. The fmt_icon() function makes this possible and it operates a lot like fmt_flag() in that input cells need to contain some reference to an icon name. We are exclusively using Font Awesome icons here (and we do need to have the fontawesome package installed) so the reference is the short icon name. Multiple icons can be included per cell by separating icon names with commas (e.g., "hard-drive,clock"). The sep argument allows for a common separator to be applied between flag icons.

Usage

fmt_icon(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  height = "1em",
  sep = " ",
  stroke_color = NULL,
  stroke_width = NULL,
  stroke_alpha = NULL,
  fill_color = NULL,
  fill_alpha = NULL,
  vertical_adj = NULL,
  margin_left = NULL,
  margin_right = NULL,
  a11y = c("semantic", "decorative", "none")
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

height

Height of icon

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "1em"

The absolute height of the icon in the table cell. By default, this is set to "1em".

sep

Separator between icons

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: " "

In the output of icons within a body cell, sep provides the separator between each icon. By default, this is a single space character (" ").

stroke_color

Color of the icon stroke/outline

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The icon stroke is essentially the outline of the icon. The color of the stroke can be modified by applying a single color here. If not provided then the default value of "currentColor" is applied so that the stroke color matches that of the parent HTML element's color attribute.

stroke_width

Width of the icon stroke/outline

⁠scalar<character|numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The stroke_width option allows for setting the color of the icon outline stroke. By default, the stroke width is very small at "1px" so a size adjustment here can sometimes be useful.

stroke_alpha

Transparency value for icon stroke/outline

⁠scalar<numeric>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The level of transparency for the icon stroke can be controlled with a decimal value between 0 and 1.

fill_color

Color of the icon fill

⁠scalar<character>|vector<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The fill color of the icon can be set with fill_color; providing a single color here will change the color of the fill but not of the icon's 'stroke' or outline (use stroke_color to modify that). A named vector or named list comprising the icon names with corresponding fill colors can alternatively be used here (e.g., ⁠list("circle-check" = "green", "circle-xmark" = "red"⁠). If nothing is provided then the default value of "currentColor" is applied so that the fill matches the color of the parent HTML element's color attribute.

fill_alpha

Transparency value for icon fill

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>(0>=val>=1)⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The level of transparency for the icon fill can be controlled with a decimal value between 0 and 1.

vertical_adj

Vertical adjustment of icon from baseline

⁠scalar<character|numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The vertical alignment of the icon. By default, a length of "-0.125em" is used.

margin_left

Margin width left of icon

⁠scalar<character|numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The length value for the margin that's to the left of the icon can be set with margin_left. By default, "auto" is used for this but if space is needed on the left-hand side then a length of "0.2em" is recommended as a starting point.

margin_right

Margin width right of icon

⁠scalar<character|numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The length value for the margin that's to the right of the icon can be set with margin_right. By default, "auto" is used for this but if space is needed on the right-hand side then a length of "0.2em" is recommended as a starting point.

a11y

Accessibility mode for icon

⁠singl-kw:[semantic|decorative|none]⁠ // default: "semantic"

The accessibility mode for the icon display can be set with the a11y argument. Icons can either be "semantic" or "decorative". Using "none" will result in no accessibility features for the icons.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_icon() is compatible with body cells that are of the "character" or "factor" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_icon() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • height

  • sep

  • stroke_color

  • stroke_width

  • stroke_alpha

  • fill_color

  • fill_alpha

  • vertical_adj

  • margin_left

  • margin_right

  • a11y

Please note that for each of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Icons that can be used

fmt_icon() relies on an installation of the fontawesome package to operate and every icon within that package can be accessed here with either an icon name or a full name. For example, the Arrow Down icon has an icon name of "arrow-down" and its corresponding full name is "fas fa-arrow-down". In most cases you'll want to use the shorter name, but some icons have both a Solid ("fas") and a Regular ("far") variant so only the full name can disambiguate the pairing. In the latest release of fontawesome (v0.5.2), there are 2,025 icons and you can view the entire icon listing by calling info_icons(). What you'll get from that is an information table showing every icon and associated set of identifiers.

Examples

For this first example of generating icons with fmt_icon(), let's make a simple tibble that has two columns of Font Awesome icon names. We separate multiple icons per cell with commas. By default, the icons are 1 em in height; we're going to make the icons slightly larger here (so we can see the fine details of them) by setting height = "4em".

dplyr::tibble(
  animals = c(
    "hippo", "fish,spider", "mosquito,locust,frog",
    "dog,cat", "kiwi-bird"
  ),
  foods = c(
    "bowl-rice", "egg,pizza-slice", "burger,lemon,cheese",
    "carrot,hotdog", "bacon"
  )
) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_icon(height = "4em") |>
  cols_align(align = "center", columns = everything())
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_icon()` help file.

Let's take a few rows from the towny dataset and make it so the csd_type column contains Font Awesome icon names (we want only the "city" and "house-chimney" icons here). After using fmt_icon() to format the csd_type column, we get icons that are representative of the two categories of municipality for this subset of data.

towny |>
  dplyr::select(name, csd_type, population_2021) |>
  dplyr::filter(csd_type %in% c("city", "town")) |>
  dplyr::group_by(csd_type) |>
  dplyr::slice_max(population_2021, n = 5) |>
  dplyr::ungroup() |>
  dplyr::mutate(
    csd_type = ifelse(csd_type == "town", "house-chimney", "city")
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  fmt_icon(columns = csd_type) |>
  cols_move_to_start(columns = csd_type) |>
  cols_label(
    csd_type = "",
    name = "City/Town",
    population_2021 = "Population"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_icon()` help file.

Let's use a portion of the metro dataset to create a gt table. Depending on which train services are offered at the subset of stations, Font Awesome icon names will be applied to cells where the different services exist (the specific names are "train-subway", "train", and "train-tram"). With tidyr::unite(), those icon names can be converged into a single column (services) with the NA values removed. Since the names correspond to icons and they are in the correct format (separated by commas), they can be formatted as Font Awesome icons with fmt_icon().

metro |>
  dplyr::select(name, lines, connect_rer, connect_tramway, location) |>
  dplyr::slice_tail(n = 10) |>
  dplyr::mutate(lines = "train-subway") |>
  dplyr::mutate(connect_rer = ifelse(!is.na(connect_rer), "train", NA)) |>
  dplyr::mutate(
    connect_tramway = ifelse(!is.na(connect_tramway), "train-tram", NA)
  ) |>
  tidyr::unite(
    col = services,
    lines:connect_tramway,
    sep = ",",
    na.rm = TRUE
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_icon(
    columns = services,
    a11y = "decorative"
  ) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(name, services),
    pattern = "{1} ({2})"
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    name = "Station",
    location = "Location"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_icon()` help file.

Taking a handful of starred reviews from a popular film review website, we will attempt to format a numerical score (0 to 4) to use the "star" and "star-half" icons. In this case, it is useful to generate the repeating sequence of icon names (separated by commas) in the rating column before introducing the table to gt(). We can make use of the numerical rating values in stars within fmt_icon() with a little help from from_column(). Using that, we can dynamically adjust the icon's fill_alpha (i.e., opacity) value and accentuate the films with higher scores.

dplyr::tibble(
  film = c(
    "The Passengers of the Night", "Serena", "The Father",
    "Roma", "The Handmaiden", "Violet", "Vice"
  ),
  stars = c(3, 1, 3.5, 4, 4, 2.5, 1.5)
) |>
  dplyr::mutate(rating = dplyr::case_when(
    stars %% 1 == 0 ~ strrep("star,", stars),
    stars %% 1 != 0 ~ paste0(strrep("star,", floor(stars)), "star-half")
  )) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_icon(
    columns = rating,
    fill_color = "red",
    fill_alpha = from_column("stars", fn = function(x) x / 4)
  ) |>
  cols_hide(columns = stars) |>
  tab_source_note(
    source_note = md(
      "Data obtained from <https://www.rogerebert.com/reviews>."
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `fmt_icon()` help file.

A fairly common thing to do with icons in tables is to indicate whether a quantity is either higher or lower than another. Up and down arrow symbols can serve as good visual indicators for this purpose. We can make use of the "up-arrow" and "down-arrow" icons here. The fmt_icon() function has to find those text values in cells to generate the icons, so, lets generate the text within a new column with cols_add() (an expression is used therein to generate the correct text given the close and open values). Following that, fmt_icon() is used and its fill_color argument is provided with a named vector that indicates which color should be used for each icon.

sp500 |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  dplyr::select(date, open, close) |>
  dplyr::arrange(-dplyr::row_number()) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "date") |>
  cols_add(week = date, .after = date) |>
  cols_add(dir = ifelse(close > open, "arrow-up", "arrow-down")) |>
  cols_merge(columns = c(date, week), pattern = "{1} ({2})") |>
  fmt_date(columns = date, date_style = "m_day_year") |>
  fmt_datetime(columns = week, format = "w", pattern = "W{x}") |>
  fmt_currency() |>
  fmt_icon(
    columns = dir,
    fill_color = c("arrow-up" = "green", "arrow-down" = "red")
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    open = "Opening Value",
    close = "Closing Value",
    dir = ""
  ) |>
  opt_stylize(style = 1, color = "gray")
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `fmt_icon()` help file.

Function ID

3-26

Function Introduced

v0.10.0 (October 7, 2023)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format image paths to generate images in cells

Description

To more easily insert graphics into body cells, we can use fmt_image(). This allows for one or more images to be placed in the targeted cells. The cells need to contain some reference to an image file, either: (1) complete http/https or local paths to the files; (2) the file names, where a common path can be provided via path; or (3) a fragment of the file name, where the file_pattern helps to compose the entire file name and path provides the path information. This should be expressly used on columns that contain only references to image files (i.e., no image references as part of a larger block of text). Multiple images can be included per cell by separating image references by commas. The sep argument allows for a common separator to be applied between images.

Usage

fmt_image(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  height = NULL,
  width = NULL,
  sep = " ",
  path = NULL,
  file_pattern = "{x}",
  encode = TRUE
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

height, width

Height and width of images

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The absolute height of the image in the table cell. If you set the width and height remains NULL (or vice versa), the width-to-height ratio will be preserved when gt calculates the length of the missing dimension. If width and height are both NULL, height is set as "2em" and width will be calculated.

sep

Separator between images

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: " "

In the output of images within a body cell, sep provides the separator between each image.

path

Path to image files

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional path to local image files (this is combined with all filenames).

file_pattern

File pattern specification

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

The pattern to use for mapping input values in the body cells to the names of the graphics files. The string supplied should use "{x}" in the pattern to map filename fragments to input strings.

encode

Use Base64 encoding

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

The option to always use Base64 encoding for image paths that are determined to be local. By default, this is TRUE.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_image() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • height

  • width

  • sep

  • path

  • file_pattern

  • encode

Please note that for each of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Examples

Using a small portion of metro dataset, let's create a gt table. We will only include a few columns and rows from that table. The lines and connect_rer columns have comma-separated listings of numbers/letters (corresponding to lines served at each station). We have a directory of SVG graphics for all of these lines within the package (the path for the directory containing the images can be accessed via system.file("metro_svg", package = "gt")), and the filenames roughly correspond to the data in those two columns. fmt_image() can be used with these inputs since the path and file_pattern arguments allow us to compose complete and valid file locations. What you get from all of this are sequences of images in the table cells, taken from the referenced graphics files on disk.

metro |>
  dplyr::select(name, caption, lines, connect_rer) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(name, caption),
    pattern = "{1}<< ({2})>>"
  ) |>
  text_replace(
    locations = cells_body(columns = name),
    pattern = "\\((.*?)\\)",
    replacement = "<br>(<em>\\1</em>)"
  ) |>
  sub_missing(columns = connect_rer, missing_text = "") |>
  fmt_image(
    columns = lines,
    path = system.file("metro_svg", package = "gt"),
    file_pattern = "metro_{x}.svg"
  ) |>
  fmt_image(
    columns = connect_rer,
    path = system.file("metro_svg", package = "gt"),
    file_pattern = "rer_{x}.svg"
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    name = "Station",
    lines = "Lines",
    connect_rer = "RER"
  ) |>
  cols_align(align = "left") |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_borders(
      sides = c("left", "right"),
      weight = px(1),
      color = "gray85"
    ),
    locations = cells_body(columns = lines)
  ) |>
  opt_stylize(style = 6, color = "blue") |>
  opt_all_caps() |>
  opt_horizontal_padding(scale = 1.75)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_image()` help file.

Function ID

3-23

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format values to indexed characters

Description

With numeric values in a gt table we can transform those to index values, usually based on letters. These characters can be derived from a specified locale and they are intended for ordering (often leaving out characters with diacritical marks).

Usage

fmt_index(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  case = c("upper", "lower"),
  index_algo = c("repeat", "excel"),
  pattern = "{x}",
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

case

Use uppercase or lowercase letters

⁠singl-kw:[upper|lower]⁠ // default: "upper"

Should the resulting index characters be rendered as uppercase ("upper") or lowercase ("lower") letters? By default, this is set to "upper".

index_algo

Indexing algorithm

⁠singl-kw:[repeat|excel]⁠ // default: "repeat"

The indexing algorithm handles the recycling of the index character set. By default, the "repeat" option is used where characters are doubled, tripled, and so on, when moving past the character set limit. The alternative is the "excel" option, where Excel-based column naming is adapted and used here (e.g., ⁠[..., Y, Z, AA, AB, ...]⁠).

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_index() is compatible with body cells that are of the "numeric" or "integer" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_index() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • case

  • index_algo

  • pattern

  • locale

Please note that for all of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Examples

Using a summarized version of the towny dataset, let's create a gt table. Here, fmt_index() is used to transform incremental integer values into capitalized letters (in the ranking column). With cols_merge() that formatted column of "A" to "E" values is merged with the census_div column to create an indexed listing of census subdivisions, here ordered by increasing total municipal population.

towny |>
  dplyr::select(name, csd_type, census_div, population_2021) |>
  dplyr::group_by(census_div) |>
  dplyr::summarize(
    population = sum(population_2021),
    .groups = "drop_last"
  ) |>
  dplyr::slice_min(population, n = 5) |>
  dplyr::mutate(ranking = dplyr::row_number(), .before = 0) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  fmt_index(columns = ranking, pattern = "{x}.") |>
  cols_merge(columns = c(ranking, census_div)) |>
  cols_align(align = "left", columns = ranking) |>
  cols_label(
    ranking = md("Census  \nSubdivision"),
    population = md("Population  \nin 2021")
  ) |>
  tab_header(title = md("The smallest  \ncensus subdivisions")) |>
  tab_options(table.width = px(325))
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_index()` help file.

Function ID

3-10

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_index().

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format values as integers

Description

With numeric values in a gt table, we can perform number-based formatting so that the targeted values are always rendered as integer values. We can have fine control over integer formatting with the following options:

  • digit grouping separators: options to enable/disable digit separators and provide a choice of separator symbol

  • scaling: we can choose to scale targeted values by a multiplier value

  • large-number suffixing: larger figures (thousands, millions, etc.) can be autoscaled and decorated with the appropriate suffixes

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in number formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

fmt_integer(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  use_seps = TRUE,
  accounting = FALSE,
  scale_by = 1,
  suffixing = FALSE,
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  force_sign = FALSE,
  system = c("intl", "ind"),
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

accounting

Use accounting style

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option to use accounting style for values. Normally, negative values will be shown with a minus sign but using accounting style will instead put any negative values in parentheses.

scale_by

Scale values by a fixed multiplier

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 1

All numeric values will be multiplied by the scale_by value before undergoing formatting. Since the default value is 1, no values will be changed unless a different multiplier value is supplied. This value will be ignored if using any of the suffixing options (i.e., where suffixing is not set to FALSE).

suffixing

Specification for large-number suffixing

⁠scalar<logical>|vector<character>⁠ // default: FALSE

The suffixing option allows us to scale and apply suffixes to larger numbers (e.g., 1924000 can be transformed to ⁠2M⁠). This option can accept a logical value, where FALSE (the default) will not perform this transformation and TRUE will apply thousands (K), millions (M), billions (B), and trillions (T) suffixes after automatic value scaling.

We can alternatively provide a character vector that serves as a specification for which symbols are to used for each of the value ranges. These preferred symbols will replace the defaults (e.g., c("k", "Ml", "Bn", "Tr") replaces "K", "M", "B", and "T").

Including NA values in the vector will ensure that the particular range will either not be included in the transformation (e.g., c(NA, "M", "B", "T") won't modify numbers at all in the thousands range) or the range will inherit a previous suffix (e.g., with c("K", "M", NA, "T"), all numbers in the range of millions and billions will be in terms of millions).

Any use of suffixing (where it is not set expressly as FALSE) means that any value provided to scale_by will be ignored.

If using system = "ind" then the default suffix set provided by suffixing = TRUE will be the equivalent of c(NA, "L", "Cr"). This doesn't apply suffixes to the thousands range, but does express values in lakhs and crores.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the positive sign be shown for positive values (effectively showing a sign for all values except zero)? If so, use TRUE for this option. The default is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a minus sign. This option is disregarded when using accounting notation with accounting = TRUE.

system

Numbering system for grouping separators

⁠singl-kw:[intl|ind]⁠ // default: "intl"

The international numbering system (keyword: "intl") is widely used and its grouping separators (i.e., sep_mark) are always separated by three digits. The alternative system, the Indian numbering system (keyword: "ind"), uses grouping separators that correspond to thousand, lakh, crore, and higher quantities.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_integer() is compatible with body cells that are of the "numeric" or "integer" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_integer() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • use_seps

  • accounting

  • scale_by

  • suffixing

  • pattern

  • sep_mark

  • force_sign

  • system

  • locale

Please note that for all of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Adapting output to a specific locale

This formatting function can adapt outputs according to a provided locale value. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). The use of a valid locale ID here means separator marks will be correct for the given locale. Should any value be provided in sep_mark, it will be overridden by the locale's preferred value.

Note that a locale value provided here will override any global locale setting performed in gt()'s own locale argument (it is settable there as a value received by all other functions that have a locale argument). As a useful reference on which locales are supported, we can call info_locales() to view an info table.

Examples

For this example, we'll use two columns from the exibble dataset and create a simple gt table. With fmt_integer(), we'll format the num column as integer values having no digit separators (with the use_seps = FALSE option).

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(num, char) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_integer(use_seps = FALSE)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_integer()` help file.

Let's use a modified version of the countrypops dataset to create a gt table with row labels. We will format all numeric columns with fmt_integer() and scale all values by 1 / 1E6, giving us integer values representing millions of people. We can make clear what the values represent with an informative spanner label via tab_spanner().

countrypops |>
  dplyr::select(country_code_3, year, population) |>
  dplyr::filter(country_code_3 %in% c("CHN", "IND", "USA", "PAK", "IDN")) |>
  dplyr::filter(year > 1975 & year %% 5 == 0) |>
  tidyr::spread(year, population) |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(`2015`)) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "country_code_3") |>
  fmt_integer(scale_by = 1 / 1E6) |>
  tab_spanner(label = "Millions of People", columns = everything())
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_integer()` help file.

Using a subset of the towny dataset, we can do interesting things with integer values. Through cols_add() we'll add the difference column (which calculates the difference between 2021 and 2001 populations). All numeric values will be formatted with a first pass of fmt_integer(); a second pass of fmt_integer() focuses on the difference column and here we use the force_sign = TRUE option to draw attention to positive and negative difference values.

towny |>
  dplyr::select(name, population_2001, population_2021) |>
  dplyr::slice_tail(n = 10) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_add(difference = population_2021 - population_2001) |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  fmt_integer(columns = difference, force_sign = TRUE) |>
  cols_label_with(fn = function(x) gsub("population_", "", x)) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_fill(color = "gray90"),
    locations = cells_body(columns = difference)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_integer()` help file.

Function ID

3-2

Function Introduced

v0.3.1 (August 9, 2021)

See Also

Format number with decimal values: fmt_number()

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_integer()

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format Markdown text

Description

Any Markdown-formatted text in the incoming cells will be transformed to the appropriate output type during render when using fmt_markdown().

Usage

fmt_markdown(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  md_engine = c("markdown", "commonmark")
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

md_engine

Choice of Markdown engine

⁠singl-kw:[markdown|commonmark]⁠ // default: "markdown"

The engine preference for Markdown rendering. By default, this is set to "markdown" where gt will use the markdown package for Markdown conversion to HTML and LaTeX. The other option is "commonmark" and with that the commonmark package will be used.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with the md_engine argument of fmt_markdown() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently.

Please note that for this argument (md_engine), a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the character type. Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide().

Examples

Create a few Markdown-based text snippets.

text_1a <- "
### This is Markdown.

Markdown's syntax is comprised entirely of
punctuation characters, which punctuation
characters have been carefully chosen so as
to look like what they mean... assuming
you've ever used email.
"

text_1b <- "
Info on Markdown syntax can be found
[here](https://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/).
"

text_2a <- "
The **gt** package has these datasets:

 - `countrypops`
 - `sza`
 - `gtcars`
 - `sp500`
 - `pizzaplace`
 - `exibble`
"

text_2b <- "
There's a quick reference [here](https://commonmark.org/help/).
"

Arrange the text snippets as a tibble using dplyr::tribble(), then, create a gt table and format all columns with fmt_markdown().

dplyr::tribble(
  ~Markdown, ~md,
  text_1a,   text_2a,
  text_1b,   text_2b,
) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_markdown(columns = everything()) |>
  tab_options(table.width = px(400))
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_markdown()` help file.

fmt_markdown() can also handle LaTeX math formulas enclosed in "$..$" (inline math) and also "$$..$$" (display math). The following table has body cells that contain mathematical formulas in display mode (i.e., the formulas are surrounded by "$$"). Further to this, math can be used within md() wherever there is the possibility to insert text into the table (e.g., with cols_label(), tab_header(), etc.).

dplyr::tibble(
  idx = 1:5,
  l_time_domain =
    c(
      "$$1$$",
      "$${{\\bf{e}}^{a\\,t}}$$",
      "$${t^n},\\,\\,\\,\\,\\,n = 1,2,3, \\ldots$$",
      "$${t^p}, p > -1$$",
      "$$\\sqrt t$$"
    ),
  l_laplace_s_domain =
    c(
      "$$\\frac{1}{s}$$",
      "$$\\frac{1}{{s - a}}$$",
      "$$\\frac{{n!}}{{{s^{n + 1}}}}$$",
      "$$\\frac{{\\Gamma \\left( {p + 1} \\right)}}{{{s^{p + 1}}}}$$",
      "$$\\frac{{\\sqrt \\pi }}{{2{s^{\\frac{3}{2}}}}}$$"
    )
) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "idx") |>
  fmt_markdown() |>
  cols_label(
    l_time_domain = md(
      "Time Domain<br/>$\\small{f\\left( t \\right) =
      {\\mathcal{L}^{\\,\\, - 1}}\\left\\{ {F\\left( s \\right)} \\right\\}}$"
    ),
    l_laplace_s_domain = md(
      "$s$ Domain<br/>$\\small{F\\left( s \\right) =
      \\mathcal{L}\\left\\{ {f\\left( t \\right)} \\right\\}}$"
    )
  ) |>
  tab_header(
    title = md(
      "A (Small) Table of Laplace Transforms &mdash; $\\small{{\\mathcal{L}}}$"
    ),
    subtitle = md(
      "Five commonly used Laplace transforms and formulas.<br/><br/>"
    )
  ) |>
  cols_align(align = "center") |>
  opt_align_table_header(align = "left") |>
  cols_width(
    idx ~ px(50),
    l_time_domain ~ px(300),
    l_laplace_s_domain ~ px(600)
  ) |>
  opt_stylize(
    style = 2,
    color = "gray",
    add_row_striping = FALSE
  ) |>
  opt_table_outline(style = "invisible") |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_fill(color = "gray95"),
    locations = cells_body(columns = l_time_domain)
  ) |>
  tab_options(
    heading.title.font.size = px(32),
    heading.subtitle.font.size = px(18),
    heading.padding = px(0),
    footnotes.multiline = FALSE,
    column_labels.border.lr.style = "solid",
    column_labels.border.lr.width = px(1)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_markdown()` help file.

Function ID

3-27

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_markdown().

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format numeric values

Description

With numeric values in a gt table, we can perform number-based formatting so that the targeted values are rendered with a higher consideration for tabular presentation. Furthermore, there is finer control over numeric formatting with the following options:

  • decimals: choice of the number of decimal places, option to drop trailing zeros, and a choice of the decimal symbol

  • digit grouping separators: options to enable/disable digit separators and provide a choice of separator symbol

  • scaling: we can choose to scale targeted values by a multiplier value

  • large-number suffixing: larger figures (thousands, millions, etc.) can be autoscaled and decorated with the appropriate suffixes

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in number formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

fmt_number(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  decimals = 2,
  n_sigfig = NULL,
  drop_trailing_zeros = FALSE,
  drop_trailing_dec_mark = TRUE,
  use_seps = TRUE,
  accounting = FALSE,
  scale_by = 1,
  suffixing = FALSE,
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  dec_mark = ".",
  force_sign = FALSE,
  system = c("intl", "ind"),
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

decimals

Number of decimal places

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=0) // default: 2

This corresponds to the exact number of decimal places to use. A value such as 2.34 can, for example, be formatted with 0 decimal places and it would result in "2". With 4 decimal places, the formatted value becomes "2.3400".

n_sigfig

Number of significant figures

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=1) // default: NULL (optional)

A option to format numbers to n significant figures. By default, this is NULL and thus number values will be formatted according to the number of decimal places set via decimals. If opting to format according to the rules of significant figures, n_sigfig must be a number greater than or equal to 1. Any values passed to the decimals and drop_trailing_zeros arguments will be ignored.

drop_trailing_zeros

Drop any trailing zeros

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

A logical value that allows for removal of trailing zeros (those redundant zeros after the decimal mark).

drop_trailing_dec_mark

Drop the trailing decimal mark

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value that determines whether decimal marks should always appear even if there are no decimal digits to display after formatting (e.g., 23 becomes 23. if FALSE). By default trailing decimal marks are not shown.

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

accounting

Use accounting style

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option to use accounting style for values. Normally, negative values will be shown with a minus sign but using accounting style will instead put any negative values in parentheses.

scale_by

Scale values by a fixed multiplier

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 1

All numeric values will be multiplied by the scale_by value before undergoing formatting. Since the default value is 1, no values will be changed unless a different multiplier value is supplied. This value will be ignored if using any of the suffixing options (i.e., where suffixing is not set to FALSE).

suffixing

Specification for large-number suffixing

⁠scalar<logical>|vector<character>⁠ // default: FALSE

The suffixing option allows us to scale and apply suffixes to larger numbers (e.g., 1924000 can be transformed to ⁠1.92M⁠). This option can accept a logical value, where FALSE (the default) will not perform this transformation and TRUE will apply thousands ("K"), millions ("M"), billions ("B"), and trillions ("T") suffixes after automatic value scaling.

We can alternatively provide a character vector that serves as a specification for which symbols are to used for each of the value ranges. These preferred symbols will replace the defaults (e.g., c("k", "Ml", "Bn", "Tr") replaces "K", "M", "B", and "T").

Including NA values in the vector will ensure that the particular range will either not be included in the transformation (e.g., c(NA, "M", "B", "T") won't modify numbers at all in the thousands range) or the range will inherit a previous suffix (e.g., with c("K", "M", NA, "T"), all numbers in the range of millions and billions will be in terms of millions).

Any use of suffixing (where it is not set expressly as FALSE) means that any value provided to scale_by will be ignored.

If using system = "ind" then the default suffix set provided by suffixing = TRUE will be the equivalent of c(NA, "L", "Cr"). This doesn't apply suffixes to the thousands range, but does express values in lakhs and crores.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

dec_mark

Decimal mark

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "."

The string to be used as the decimal mark. For example, using dec_mark = "," with the value 0.152 would result in a formatted value of "0,152"). This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the positive sign be shown for positive values (effectively showing a sign for all values except zero)? If so, use TRUE for this option. The default is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a minus sign. This option is disregarded when using accounting notation with accounting = TRUE.

system

Numbering system for grouping separators

⁠singl-kw:[intl|ind]⁠ // default: "intl"

The international numbering system (keyword: "intl") is widely used and its grouping separators (i.e., sep_mark) are always separated by three digits. The alternative system, the Indian numbering system (keyword: "ind"), uses grouping separators that correspond to thousand, lakh, crore, and higher quantities.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_number() is compatible with body cells that are of the "numeric" or "integer" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_number() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • decimals

  • n_sigfig

  • drop_trailing_zeros

  • drop_trailing_dec_mark

  • use_seps

  • accounting

  • scale_by

  • suffixing

  • pattern

  • sep_mark

  • dec_mark

  • force_sign

  • system

  • locale

Please note that for all of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Adapting output to a specific locale

This formatting function can adapt outputs according to a provided locale value. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). The use of a valid locale ID here means separator and decimal marks will be correct for the given locale. Should any values be provided in sep_mark or dec_mark, they will be overridden by the locale's preferred values.

Note that a locale value provided here will override any global locale setting performed in gt()'s own locale argument (it is settable there as a value received by all other functions that have a locale argument). As a useful reference on which locales are supported, we can call info_locales() to view an info table.

Examples

Let's use the exibble dataset to create a gt table. With fmt_number(), we'll format the num column to have three decimal places (with decimals = 3) and omit the use of digit separators (with use_seps = FALSE).

exibble |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_number(
    columns = num,
    decimals = 3,
    use_seps = FALSE
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_number()` help file.

Use a modified version of the countrypops dataset to create a gt table with row labels. Format all columns to use large-number suffixing (e.g., where "10,000,000" becomes "10M") with the suffixing = TRUE option.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::select(country_code_3, year, population) |>
  dplyr::filter(country_code_3 %in% c("CHN", "IND", "USA", "PAK", "IDN")) |>
  dplyr::filter(year > 1975 & year %% 5 == 0) |>
  tidyr::spread(year, population) |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(`2015`)) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "country_code_3") |>
  fmt_number(suffixing = TRUE)
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_number()` help file.

In a variation of the previous table, we can combine large-number suffixing with a declaration of the number of significant digits to use. With things like population figures, n_sigfig = 3 is a very good option.

countrypops |>
  dplyr::select(country_code_3, year, population) |>
  dplyr::filter(country_code_3 %in% c("CHN", "IND", "USA", "PAK", "IDN")) |>
  dplyr::filter(year > 1975 & year %% 5 == 0) |>
  tidyr::spread(year, population) |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(`2015`)) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "country_code_3") |>
  fmt_number(suffixing = TRUE, n_sigfig = 3)
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_number()` help file.

There can be cases where you want to show numbers to a large number of decimal places but also drop the unnecessary trailing zeros for low-precision values. Let's take a portion of the towny dataset and format the latitude and longitude columns with fmt_number(). We'll have up to 5 digits displayed as decimal values, but we'll also unconditionally drop any runs of trailing zeros in the decimal part with drop_trailing_zeros = TRUE.

towny |>
  dplyr::select(name, latitude, longitude) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_number(decimals = 5, drop_trailing_zeros = TRUE) |>
  cols_merge(columns = -name, pattern = "{1}, {2}") |>
  cols_label(
    name ~ "Municipality",
    latitude = "Location"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `fmt_number()` help file.

Another strategy for dealing with precision of decimals is to have a separate column of values that specify how many decimal digits to retain. Such a column can be added via cols_add() or it can be part of the input table for gt(). With that column available, it can be referenced in the decimals argument with from_column(). This approach yields a display of coordinate values that reflects the measurement precision of each value.

towny |>
  dplyr::select(name, latitude, longitude) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_add(dec_digits = c(1, 2, 2, 5, 5, 2, 3, 2, 3, 3)) |>
  fmt_number(decimals = from_column(column = "dec_digits")) |>
  cols_merge(columns = -name, pattern = "{1}, {2}") |>
  cols_label(
    name ~ "Municipality",
    latitude = "Location"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `fmt_number()` help file.

Function ID

3-1

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

The integer-formatting function (format rounded values (i.e., no decimals shown and input values are rounded as necessary): fmt_integer().

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_number()

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format values as parts-per quantities

Description

With numeric values in a gt table we can format the values so that they are rendered as per mille, ppm, ppb, etc., quantities. The following list of keywords (with associated naming and scaling factors) is available to use within fmt_partsper():

  • "per-mille": Per mille, (1 part in ⁠1,000⁠)

  • "per-myriad": Per myriad, (1 part in ⁠10,000⁠)

  • "pcm": Per cent mille (1 part in ⁠100,000⁠)

  • "ppm": Parts per million, (1 part in ⁠1,000,000⁠)

  • "ppb": Parts per billion, (1 part in ⁠1,000,000,000⁠)

  • "ppt": Parts per trillion, (1 part in ⁠1,000,000,000,000⁠)

  • "ppq": Parts per quadrillion, (1 part in ⁠1,000,000,000,000,000⁠)

The function provides a lot of formatting control and we can use the following options:

  • custom symbol/units: we can override the automatic symbol or units display with our own choice as the situation warrants

  • decimals: choice of the number of decimal places, option to drop trailing zeros, and a choice of the decimal symbol

  • digit grouping separators: options to enable/disable digit separators and provide a choice of separator symbol

  • value scaling toggle: choose to disable automatic value scaling in the situation that values are already scaled coming in (and just require the appropriate symbol or unit display)

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in number formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

fmt_partsper(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  to_units = c("per-mille", "per-myriad", "pcm", "ppm", "ppb", "ppt", "ppq"),
  symbol = "auto",
  decimals = 2,
  drop_trailing_zeros = FALSE,
  drop_trailing_dec_mark = TRUE,
  scale_values = TRUE,
  use_seps = TRUE,
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  dec_mark = ".",
  force_sign = FALSE,
  incl_space = "auto",
  system = c("intl", "ind"),
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

to_units

Output Quantity

⁠singl-kw:[per-mille|per-myriad|pcm|ppm|ppb|ppt|ppq]⁠ // default: "per-mille"

A keyword that signifies the desired output quantity. This can be any from the following set: "per-mille", "per-myriad", "pcm", "ppm", "ppb", "ppt", or "ppq".

symbol

Symbol or units to use in output display

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "auto"

The symbol/units to use for the quantity. By default, this is set to "auto" and gt will choose the appropriate symbol based on the to_units keyword and the output context. However, this can be changed by supplying a string (e.g, using symbol = "ppbV" when to_units = "ppb").

decimals

Number of decimal places

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=0) // default: 2

This corresponds to the exact number of decimal places to use. A value such as 2.34 can, for example, be formatted with 0 decimal places and it would result in "2". With 4 decimal places, the formatted value becomes "2.3400".

drop_trailing_zeros

Drop any trailing zeros

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

A logical value that allows for removal of trailing zeros (those redundant zeros after the decimal mark).

drop_trailing_dec_mark

Drop the trailing decimal mark

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value that determines whether decimal marks should always appear even if there are no decimal digits to display after formatting (e.g., 23 becomes 23. if FALSE). By default trailing decimal marks are not shown.

scale_values

Scale input values accordingly

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

Should the values be scaled through multiplication according to the keyword set in to_units? By default this is TRUE since the expectation is that normally values are proportions. Setting to FALSE signifies that the values are already scaled and require only the appropriate symbol/units when formatted.

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

dec_mark

Decimal mark

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "."

The string to be used as the decimal mark. For example, using dec_mark = "," with the value 0.152 would result in a formatted value of "0,152"). This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the positive sign be shown for positive values (effectively showing a sign for all values except zero)? If so, use TRUE for this option. The default is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a minus sign. This option is disregarded when using accounting notation with accounting = TRUE.

incl_space

Include a space between the value and the symbol/units

⁠scalar<character>|scalar<logical>⁠ // default: "auto"

An option for whether to include a space between the value and the symbol/units. The default is "auto" which provides spacing dependent on the mark itself. This can be directly controlled by using either TRUE or FALSE.

system

Numbering system for grouping separators

⁠singl-kw:[intl|ind]⁠ // default: "intl"

The international numbering system (keyword: "intl") is widely used and its grouping separators (i.e., sep_mark) are always separated by three digits. The alternative system, the Indian numbering system (keyword: "ind"), uses grouping separators that correspond to thousand, lakh, crore, and higher quantities.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_partsper() is compatible with body cells that are of the "numeric" or "integer" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_partsper() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • to_units

  • symbol

  • decimals

  • drop_trailing_zeros

  • drop_trailing_dec_mark

  • scale_values

  • use_seps

  • pattern

  • sep_mark

  • dec_mark

  • force_sign

  • incl_space

  • system

  • locale

Please note that for all of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Adapting output to a specific locale

This formatting function can adapt outputs according to a provided locale value. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). The use of a valid locale ID here means separator and decimal marks will be correct for the given locale. Should any values be provided in sep_mark or dec_mark, they will be overridden by the locale's preferred values.

Note that a locale value provided here will override any global locale setting performed in gt()'s own locale argument (it is settable there as a value received by all other functions that have a locale argument). As a useful reference on which locales are supported, we can call info_locales() to view an info table.

Examples

Create a tibble of small numeric values and generate a gt table. Format the a column to appear in scientific notation with fmt_scientific() and format the b column as per mille values with fmt_partsper().

dplyr::tibble(x = 0:-5, a = 10^(0:-5), b = a) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "x") |>
  fmt_scientific(a, decimals = 0) |>
  fmt_partsper(
    columns = b,
    to_units = "per-mille"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_partsper()` help file.

Function ID

3-6

Function Introduced

v0.6.0 (May 24, 2022)

See Also

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_partsper().

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format by simply passing data through

Description

We can format values with fmt_passthrough(), which does little more than: (1) coercing to character (as all the ⁠fmt_*()⁠ functions do), and (2) applying decorator text via the pattern argument (the default is to apply nothing). This formatting function is useful when don't want to modify the input data other than to decorate it within a pattern.

Usage

fmt_passthrough(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  escape = TRUE,
  pattern = "{x}"
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

escape

Text escaping

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to escape text according to the final output format of the table. For example, if a LaTeX table is to be generated then LaTeX escaping would be performed during rendering. By default this is set to TRUE but setting as FALSE would be useful in the case where text is crafted for a specific output format in mind.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_passthrough() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • escape

  • pattern

Please note that for both of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Examples

Let's use the exibble dataset to create a single-column gt table (with only the char column). Now we can pass the data in that column through the 'non-formatter' that is fmt_passthrough(). While the function doesn't do any explicit formatting it has a feature common to all other formatting functions: the pattern argument. So that's what we'll use in this example, applying a simple pattern to the non-NA values that adds an "s" character.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(char) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_passthrough(
    rows = !is.na(char),
    pattern = "{x}s"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_passthrough()` help file.

Function ID

3-28

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format values as a percentage

Description

With numeric values in a gt table, we can perform percentage-based formatting. It is assumed the input numeric values are proportional values and, in this case, the values will be automatically multiplied by 100 before decorating with a percent sign (the other case is accommodated through setting scale_values = FALSE). For more control over percentage formatting, we can use the following options:

  • percent sign placement: the percent sign can be placed after or before the values and a space can be inserted between the symbol and the value.

  • decimals: choice of the number of decimal places, option to drop trailing zeros, and a choice of the decimal symbol

  • digit grouping separators: options to enable/disable digit separators and provide a choice of separator symbol

  • value scaling toggle: choose to disable automatic value scaling in the situation that values are already scaled coming in (and just require the percent symbol)

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in number formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

fmt_percent(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  decimals = 2,
  drop_trailing_zeros = FALSE,
  drop_trailing_dec_mark = TRUE,
  scale_values = TRUE,
  use_seps = TRUE,
  accounting = FALSE,
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  dec_mark = ".",
  force_sign = FALSE,
  placement = "right",
  incl_space = FALSE,
  system = c("intl", "ind"),
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

decimals

Number of decimal places

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=0) // default: 2

This corresponds to the exact number of decimal places to use. A value such as 2.34 can, for example, be formatted with 0 decimal places and it would result in "2". With 4 decimal places, the formatted value becomes "2.3400".

drop_trailing_zeros

Drop any trailing zeros

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

A logical value that allows for removal of trailing zeros (those redundant zeros after the decimal mark).

drop_trailing_dec_mark

Drop the trailing decimal mark

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value that determines whether decimal marks should always appear even if there are no decimal digits to display after formatting (e.g., 23 becomes 23. if FALSE). By default trailing decimal marks are not shown.

scale_values

Multiply input values by 100

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

Should the values be scaled through multiplication by 100? By default this scaling is performed since the expectation is that incoming values are usually proportional. Setting to FALSE signifies that the values are already scaled and require only the percent sign when formatted.

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

accounting

Use accounting style

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option to use accounting style for values. Normally, negative values will be shown with a minus sign but using accounting style will instead put any negative values in parentheses.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

dec_mark

Decimal mark

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "."

The string to be used as the decimal mark. For example, using dec_mark = "," with the value 0.152 would result in a formatted value of "0,152"). This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the positive sign be shown for positive values (effectively showing a sign for all values except zero)? If so, use TRUE for this option. The default is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a minus sign. This option is disregarded when using accounting notation with accounting = TRUE.

placement

Percent sign placement

⁠singl-kw:[right|left]⁠ // default: "right"

This option governs the placement of the percent sign. This can be either be "right" (the default) or "left".

incl_space

Include a space between the value and the % sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option for whether to include a space between the value and the percent sign. The default is to not introduce a space character.

system

Numbering system for grouping separators

⁠singl-kw:[intl|ind]⁠ // default: "intl"

The international numbering system (keyword: "intl") is widely used and its grouping separators (i.e., sep_mark) are always separated by three digits. The alternative system, the Indian numbering system (keyword: "ind"), uses grouping separators that correspond to thousand, lakh, crore, and higher quantities.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_percent() is compatible with body cells that are of the "numeric" or "integer" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_percent() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • decimals

  • drop_trailing_zeros

  • drop_trailing_dec_mark

  • scale_values

  • use_seps

  • accounting

  • pattern

  • sep_mark

  • dec_mark

  • force_sign

  • incl_space

  • placement

  • system

  • locale

Please note that for all of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Adapting output to a specific locale

This formatting function can adapt outputs according to a provided locale value. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). The use of a valid locale ID here means separator and decimal marks will be correct for the given locale. Should any values be provided in sep_mark or dec_mark, they will be overridden by the locale's preferred values.

Note that a locale value provided here will override any global locale setting performed in gt()'s own locale argument (it is settable there as a value received by all other functions that have a locale argument). As a useful reference on which locales are supported, we can callinfo_locales() to view an info table.

Examples

Use a summarized version of the pizzaplace dataset to create a gt table. With fmt_percent(), we can format the frac_of_quota column to display values as percentages (to one decimal place).

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::mutate(month = as.numeric(substr(date, 6, 7))) |>
  dplyr::count(month, name = "pizzas_sold") |>
  dplyr::mutate(frac_of_quota = pizzas_sold / 4000) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "month") |>
  fmt_percent(
    columns = frac_of_quota,
    decimals = 1
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_percent()` help file.

Function ID

3-5

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_percent().

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format values as Roman numerals

Description

With numeric values in a gt table we can transform those to Roman numerals, rounding values as necessary.

Usage

fmt_roman(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  case = c("upper", "lower"),
  pattern = "{x}"
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

case

Use uppercase or lowercase letters

⁠singl-kw:[upper|lower]⁠ // default: "upper"

Should Roman numerals should be rendered as uppercase ("upper") or lowercase ("lower") letters? By default, this is set to "upper".

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_roman() is compatible with body cells that are of the "numeric" or "integer" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_roman() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • case

  • pattern

Please note that for both of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Examples

Create a tibble of small numeric values and generate a gt table. Format the roman column to appear as Roman numerals with fmt_roman().

dplyr::tibble(arabic = c(1, 8, 24, 85), roman = arabic) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "arabic") |>
  fmt_roman(columns = roman)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_roman()` help file.

Formatting values to Roman numerals can be very useful when combining such output with row labels (usually through cols_merge()). Here's an example where we take a portion of the illness dataset and generate some row labels that combine (1) a row number (in lowercase Roman numerals), (2) the name of the test, and (3) the measurement units for the test (nicely formatted by way of fmt_units()):

illness |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 6) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "test") |>
  fmt_units(columns = units) |>
  cols_hide(columns = starts_with("day")) |>
  sub_missing(missing_text = "") |>
  cols_merge_range(col_begin = norm_l, col_end = norm_u) |>
  cols_add(i = 1:6) |>
  fmt_roman(columns = i, case = "lower", pattern = "{x}.") |>
  cols_merge(columns = c(test, i, units), pattern = "{2} {1} ({3})") |>
  cols_label(norm_l = "Normal Range") |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "Test")
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_roman()` help file.

Function ID

3-9

Function Introduced

v0.8.0 (November 16, 2022)

See Also

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_roman().

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format values to scientific notation

Description

With numeric values in a gt table, we can perform formatting so that the targeted values are rendered in scientific notation, where extremely large or very small numbers can be expressed in a more practical fashion. Here, numbers are written in the form of a mantissa (m) and an exponent (n) with the construction m x 10^n or mEn. The mantissa component is a number between 1 and 10. For instance, ⁠2.5 x 10^9⁠ can be used to represent the value 2,500,000,000 in scientific notation. In a similar way, 0.00000012 can be expressed as ⁠1.2 x 10^-7⁠. Due to its ability to describe numbers more succinctly and its ease of calculation, scientific notation is widely employed in scientific and technical domains.

We have fine control over the formatting task, with the following options:

  • decimals: choice of the number of decimal places, option to drop trailing zeros, and a choice of the decimal symbol

  • scaling: we can choose to scale targeted values by a multiplier value

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

fmt_scientific(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  decimals = 2,
  n_sigfig = NULL,
  drop_trailing_zeros = FALSE,
  drop_trailing_dec_mark = TRUE,
  scale_by = 1,
  exp_style = "x10n",
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  dec_mark = ".",
  force_sign_m = FALSE,
  force_sign_n = FALSE,
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

decimals

Number of decimal places

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=0) // default: 2

This corresponds to the exact number of decimal places to use. A value such as 2.34 can, for example, be formatted with 0 decimal places and it would result in "2". With 4 decimal places, the formatted value becomes "2.3400".

n_sigfig

Number of significant figures

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=1) // default: NULL (optional)

A option to format numbers to n significant figures. By default, this is NULL and thus number values will be formatted according to the number of decimal places set via decimals. If opting to format according to the rules of significant figures, n_sigfig must be a number greater than or equal to 1. Any values passed to the decimals and drop_trailing_zeros arguments will be ignored.

drop_trailing_zeros

Drop any trailing zeros

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

A logical value that allows for removal of trailing zeros (those redundant zeros after the decimal mark).

drop_trailing_dec_mark

Drop the trailing decimal mark

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value that determines whether decimal marks should always appear even if there are no decimal digits to display after formatting (e.g., 23 becomes 23. if FALSE). By default trailing decimal marks are not shown.

scale_by

Scale values by a fixed multiplier

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 1

All numeric values will be multiplied by the scale_by value before undergoing formatting. Since the default value is 1, no values will be changed unless a different multiplier value is supplied.

exp_style

Style declaration for exponent formatting

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "x10n"

Style of formatting to use for the scientific notation formatting. By default this is "x10n" but other options include using a single letter (e.g., "e", "E", etc.), a letter followed by a "1" to signal a minimum digit width of one, or "low-ten" for using a stylized "10" marker.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

dec_mark

Decimal mark

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "."

The string to be used as the decimal mark. For example, using dec_mark = "," with the value 0.152 would result in a formatted value of "0,152"). This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign_m, force_sign_n

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the plus sign be shown for positive values of the mantissa (first component, force_sign_m) or the exponent (force_sign_n)? This would effectively show a sign for all values except zero on either of those numeric components of the notation. If so, use TRUE for either one of these options. The default for both is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a sign.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_scientific() is compatible with body cells that are of the "numeric" or "integer" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_scientific() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • decimals

  • drop_trailing_zeros

  • drop_trailing_dec_mark

  • scale_by

  • exp_style

  • pattern

  • sep_mark

  • dec_mark

  • force_sign_m

  • force_sign_n

  • locale

Please note that for all of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Adapting output to a specific locale

This formatting function can adapt outputs according to a provided locale value. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). The use of a valid locale ID here means separator and decimal marks will be correct for the given locale. Should any values be provided in sep_mark or dec_mark, they will be overridden by the locale's preferred values.

Note that a locale value provided here will override any global locale setting performed in gt()'s own locale argument (it is settable there as a value received by all other functions that have a locale argument). As a useful reference on which locales are supported, we can call info_locales() to view an info table.

Examples

Let's define a data frame that contains two columns of values (one small and one large). After creating a simple gt table from small_large_tbl we'll call fmt_scientific() on both columns.

small_large_tbl <-
  dplyr::tibble(
    small = 10^(-12:-1),
    large = 10^(1:12)
  )

small_large_tbl |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_scientific()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_scientific()` help file.

The default method of styling the notation uses the 'm x 10^n' construction but this can be changed to a 'mEn' style via the exp_style argument. We can supply any single letter here and optionally affix a "1" to indicate there should not be any zero-padding of the n value. Two calls of fmt_scientific() are used here to show different options for styling in scientific notation.

small_large_tbl |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_scientific(
    columns = small,
    exp_style = "E"
  ) |>
  fmt_scientific(
    columns = large,
    exp_style = "e1",
    force_sign_n = TRUE
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_scientific()` help file.

Taking a portion of the reactions dataset, we can create a gt table that contains reaction rate constants that should be expressed in scientific notation. All of the numeric values in the filtered table require that type of formatting so fmt_scientific() can be called without requiring any specification of column names in the columns argument. By default, the number of decimal places is fixed to 2, which is fine for this table.

reactions |>
  dplyr::filter(cmpd_type == "mercaptan") |>
  dplyr::select(cmpd_name, cmpd_formula, OH_k298, Cl_k298, NO3_k298) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "cmpd_name") |>
  tab_header(title = "Gas-phase reactions of selected mercaptan compounds") |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = md("Reaction Rate Constant (298 K),<br>{{cm^3 molecules^-1 s^-1}}"),
    columns = ends_with("k298")
  ) |>
  fmt_chem(columns = cmpd_formula) |>
  fmt_scientific() |>
  sub_missing() |>
  cols_label(
    cmpd_formula = "",
    OH_k298 = "OH",
    NO3_k298 = "{{%NO3%}}",
    Cl_k298 = "Cl"
  ) |>
  opt_stylize() |>
  opt_horizontal_padding(scale = 3) |>
  opt_table_font(font = google_font("IBM Plex Sans")) |>
  tab_options(stub.font.weight = "500")
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_scientific()` help file.

The constants table contains a plethora of data on the fundamental physical constants and values range from very small to very large, warranting the use of figures in scientific notation. Because the values differ in the degree of measurement precision, the dataset has columns (sf_value and sf_uncert) that include the number of significant figures for each measurement value and for the associated uncertainty. We can use the n_sigfig argument of fmt_scientific() in conjunction with the from_column() helper to format each value and its uncertainty to the proper number of significant digits.

constants |>
  dplyr::filter(grepl("Planck", name)) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_scientific(
    columns = value,
    n_sigfig = from_column(column = "sf_value")
  ) |>
  fmt_scientific(
    columns = uncert,
    n_sigfig = from_column(column = "sf_uncert")
  ) |>
  cols_hide(columns = starts_with("sf")) |>
  fmt_units(columns = units) |>
  sub_missing(missing_text = "")
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `fmt_scientific()` help file.

Function ID

3-3

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_scientific().

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format values to spelled-out numbers

Description

With numeric values in a gt table we can transform those to numbers that are spelled out with fmt_spelled_num(). Any values from 0 to 100 can be spelled out so, for example, the value 23 will be formatted as "twenty-three". Providing a locale ID will result in the number spelled out in the locale's language rules. For example, should a Swedish locale ("sv") be provided, the value 23 will yield "tjugotre". In addition to this, we can optionally use the pattern argument for decoration of the formatted values.

Usage

fmt_spelled_num(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  pattern = "{x}",
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_spelled_num() is compatible with body cells that are of the "numeric" or "integer" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_spelled_num() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • pattern

  • locale

Please note that for both of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Supported locales

The following 80 locales are supported in the locale argument of fmt_spelled_num(): "af" (Afrikaans), "ak" (Akan), "am" (Amharic), "ar" (Arabic), "az" (Azerbaijani), "be" (Belarusian), "bg" (Bulgarian), "bs" (Bosnian), "ca" (Catalan), "ccp" (Chakma), "chr" (Cherokee), "cs" (Czech), "cy" (Welsh), "da" (Danish), "de" (German), "de-CH" (German (Switzerland)), "ee" (Ewe), "el" (Greek), "en" (English), "eo" (Esperanto), "es" (Spanish), "et" (Estonian), "fa" (Persian), "ff" (Fulah), "fi" (Finnish), "fil" (Filipino), "fo" (Faroese), "fr" (French), "fr-BE" (French (Belgium)), "fr-CH" (French (Switzerland)), "ga" (Irish), "he" (Hebrew), "hi" (Hindi), "hr" (Croatian), "hu" (Hungarian), "hy" (Armenian), "id" (Indonesian), "is" (Icelandic), "it" (Italian), "ja" (Japanese), "ka" (Georgian), "kk" (Kazakh), "kl" (Kalaallisut), "km" (Khmer), "ko" (Korean), "ky" (Kyrgyz), "lb" (Luxembourgish), "lo" (Lao), "lrc" (Northern Luri), "lt" (Lithuanian), "lv" (Latvian), "mk" (Macedonian), "ms" (Malay), "mt" (Maltese), "my" (Burmese), "ne" (Nepali), "nl" (Dutch), "nn" (Norwegian Nynorsk), "no" (Norwegian), "pl" (Polish), "pt" (Portuguese), "qu" (Quechua), "ro" (Romanian), "ru" (Russian), "se" (Northern Sami), "sk" (Slovak), "sl" (Slovenian), "sq" (Albanian), "sr" (Serbian), "sr-Latn" (Serbian (Latin)), "su" (Sundanese), "sv" (Swedish), "sw" (Swahili), "ta" (Tamil), "th" (Thai), "tr" (Turkish), "uk" (Ukrainian), "vi" (Vietnamese), "yue" (Cantonese), and "zh" (Chinese).

Examples

Let's use a summarized version of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. fmt_spelled_num() is used to transform integer values into spelled-out numbering (in the n column). That formatted column of numbers-as-words is given cell background colors via data_color() (the underlying numerical values are always available).

gtcars |>
  dplyr::count(mfr, ctry_origin) |>
  dplyr::arrange(ctry_origin) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "mfr", groupname_col = "ctry_origin") |>
  cols_label(n = "No. of Entries") |>
  fmt_spelled_num() |>
  tab_stub_indent(rows = everything(), indent = 2) |>
  data_color(
    columns = n,
    method = "numeric",
    palette = "viridis",
    alpha = 0.8
  ) |>
  opt_all_caps() |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.5) |>
  cols_align(align = "center", columns = n)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_spelled_num()` help file.

With a considerable amount of dplyr and tidyr work done to the pizzaplace dataset, we can create a new gt table. fmt_spelled_num() will be used here to transform the integer values in the rank column. We'll do so with a special pattern that puts the word 'Number' in front of every spelled-out number.

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::mutate(month = lubridate::month(date, label = TRUE)) |>
  dplyr::filter(month %in% month.abb[1:6]) |>
  dplyr::group_by(name, month) |>
  dplyr::summarize(sum = sum(price), .groups = "drop") |>
  dplyr::arrange(month, desc(sum)) |>
  dplyr::group_by(month) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 5) |>
  dplyr::mutate(rank = dplyr::row_number()) |>
  dplyr::ungroup() |>
  dplyr::select(-sum) |>
  tidyr::pivot_wider(names_from = month, values_from = c(name)) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_spelled_num(columns = rank, pattern = "Number {x}") |>
  opt_all_caps() |>
  cols_align(columns = -rank, align = "center") |>
  cols_width(
    rank ~ px(120),
    everything() ~ px(100)
  ) |>
  opt_table_font(stack = "rounded-sans") |>
  tab_options(table.font.size = px(14))
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_spelled_num()` help file.

Let's make a table that compares how the numbers from 1 to 10 are spelled across a small selection of languages. Here we use fmt_spelled_num() with each column, ensuring that the locale value matches that of the column name.

dplyr::tibble(
  num = 1:10,
  en = num,
  fr = num,
  de = num,
  es = num,
  pl = num,
  bg = num,
  ko = num,
  zh = num
) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "num") |>
  fmt_spelled_num(columns = en, locale = "en") |>
  fmt_spelled_num(columns = fr, locale = "fr") |>
  fmt_spelled_num(columns = de, locale = "de") |>
  fmt_spelled_num(columns = es, locale = "es") |>
  fmt_spelled_num(columns = pl, locale = "pl") |>
  fmt_spelled_num(columns = bg, locale = "bg") |>
  fmt_spelled_num(columns = ko, locale = "ko") |>
  fmt_spelled_num(columns = zh, locale = "zh") |>
  cols_label_with(fn = function(x) md(paste0("`", x, "`"))) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Numbers in the specified locale",
    columns = everything()
  ) |>
  cols_align(align = "left", columns = everything()) |>
  cols_width(
    c(en, fr, de, es, pl, bg) ~ px(100),
    c(ko, zh) ~ px(50)
  ) |>
  opt_horizontal_padding(scale = 2) |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.5)
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_spelled_num()` help file.

Function ID

3-11

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_spelled_num().

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format TRUE and FALSE values

Description

There can be times where logical values are useful in a gt table. You might want to express a 'yes' or 'no', a 'true' or 'false', or, perhaps use pairings of complementary symbols that make sense in a table. The fmt_tf() function has a set of tf_style presets that can be used to quickly map TRUE/FALSE values to strings (which are automatically translated according to a given locale value), or, symbols like up/down or left/right arrows and open/closed shapes.

While the presets are nice, you can provide your own mappings through the true_val and false_val arguments. With those you could provide text (perhaps a Unicode symbol?) or even a fontawesome icon by using fontawesome::fa("<icon name>"). The function will automatically handle alignment when auto_align = TRUE and try to give you the best look depending on the options chosen. For extra customization, you can also apply color to the individual TRUE, FALSE, and NA mappings. Just supply a vector of colors (up to a length of 3) to the colors argument.

Usage

fmt_tf(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  tf_style = "true-false",
  pattern = "{x}",
  true_val = NULL,
  false_val = NULL,
  na_val = NULL,
  colors = NULL,
  auto_align = TRUE,
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

tf_style

Predefined style for TRUE/FALSE formatting

⁠scalar<character>|scalar<numeric|integer>(1<=val<=10)⁠ // default: "true-false"

The TRUE/FALSE mapping style to use. By default this is the short name "true-false" which corresponds to the words 'true' and 'false'. Two other tf_style values produce words: "yes-no" and "up-down". All three of these options for tf_style are locale-aware through the locale option, so, a "yes" value will instead be "ja" when locale = "de". Options 4 through to 10 involve pairs of symbols (e.g., "check-mark" displays a check mark for TRUE and an X symbol for FALSE).

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

true_val

Text to use for TRUE values

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

While the choice of a tf_style will typically supply the true_val and false_val text, we could override this and supply text for any TRUE values. This doesn't need to be used in conjunction with false_val.

false_val

Text to use for FALSE values

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

While the choice of a tf_style will typically supply the true_val and false_val text, we could override this and supply text for any FALSE values. This doesn't need to be used in conjunction with true_val.

na_val

Text to use for NA values

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

None of the tf_style presets will replace any missing values encountered in the targeted cells. While we always have the option to use sub_missing() for NA replacement, we have the opportunity to do that here with the na_val option. This is useful because we also have the means to add color to the na_val text or symbol and doing that requires that a replacement value for NAs is specified here.

colors

Colors to use for the resulting strings or symbols

⁠vector<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Providing a vector of color values to colors will progressively add color to the formatted result depending on the number of colors provided. With a single color, all formatted values will be in that color. Giving two colors results in TRUE values being the first color, and FALSE values receiving the second. With the three color option, the final color will be given to any NA values replaced through na_val.

auto_align

Automatic alignment of the formatted column

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

The input values may have resulted in an alignment that is not as suitable once formatting has occurred. With auto_align = TRUE, the formatted values will be inspected and this may result in a favorable change in alignment. Typically, symbols will be center aligned whereas words will receive a left alignment (for words in LTR languages).

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_tf() is compatible with body cells that are of the "logical" (preferred) or "numeric" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

There is a special caveat when attempting to format numerical values: the values must either be exactly 1 (the analogue for TRUE) or exactly 0 (the analogue for FALSE). Any other numerical values will be disregarded and left as is. Because of these restrictions, it is recommended that only logical values undergo formatting.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_tf() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • tf_style

  • pattern

  • true_val

  • false_val

  • na_val

  • locale

Please note that for each of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Formatting with the tf_style argument

We can supply a preset TRUE/FALSE style to the tf_style argument to handle the formatting of logical values. There are several such styles and the first three of them can handle localization to any supported locale (i.e., the pairs of words for each style will be translated to the language of the locale) value.

The following table provides a listing of all valid tf_style values and a description of their output values. The output from styles 4 to 10 are described in terms of the Unicode character names used for the TRUE and FALSE values.

TF Style Output (for TRUE and FALSE)
1 "true-false" "true", "false" (locale-aware)
2 "yes-no" "yes", "no" (locale-aware)
3 "up-down" "up", "down" (locale-aware)
4 "check-mark" ⁠<Heavy Check Mark>⁠, ⁠<Heavy Ballot X>⁠
5 "circles" ⁠<Black Circle>⁠, ⁠<Heavy Circle>⁠
6 "squares" ⁠<Black Square>⁠, ⁠<White Square>⁠
7 "diamonds" ⁠<Black Diamond>⁠, ⁠<White Diamond>⁠
8 "arrows" ⁠<Upwards Arrow>⁠, ⁠<Downwards Arrow>⁠
9 "triangles" ⁠<Black Up-Pointing Triangle>⁠, ⁠<Black Down-Pointing Triangle>⁠
10 "triangles-lr" ⁠<Heavy Check Mark>⁠, ⁠<Heavy Ballot X>⁠

Adapting output to a specific locale

This formatting function can adapt outputs according to a provided locale value. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). Note that a locale value provided here will override any global locale setting performed in gt()'s own locale argument (it is settable there as a value received by all other functions that have a locale argument). As a useful reference on which locales are supported, we can call info_locales() to view an info table.

Examples

Let's use a subset of the sp500 dataset to create a small gt table containing opening and closing price data for a week in 2013. We can add a logical column (dir) with cols_add(); the expression used determines whether the close value is greater than the open value. That new column is inserted between open and close. Then, we use fmt_tf() to generate up and down arrows in the dir column. We elect to use green upward arrows and red downward arrows (through the colors option). With a little numeric formatting and changes to the column labels, the table becomes more presentable.

sp500 |>
  dplyr::filter(date >= "2013-01-07" & date <= "2013-01-12") |>
  dplyr::arrange(date) |>
  dplyr::select(-c(adj_close, volume, high, low)) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "date") |>
  cols_add(dir = close > open, .after = open) |>
  fmt_tf(
    columns = dir,
    tf_style = "arrows",
    colors = c("green", "red")
  ) |>
  fmt_currency(columns = c(open, close)) |>
  cols_label(
    open = "Opening",
    close = "Closing",
    dir = ""
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_tf()` help file.

The reactions dataset contains chemical kinetic information on a wide variety of atmospherically-relevant compounds. It might be interesting to get a summary (for a small subset of compounds) for which rate constants are available for the selected compounds. We first start by selecting the relevant rows and columns. Then we generate logical columns for each of the reaction types (i.e., if a value is NA then there's no measurement, so that's FALSE). Once the gt table has been created, we can use fmt_tf() to provide open and filled circles to indicate whether a particular reaction has been measured and presented in the literature.

reactions |>
  dplyr::filter(cmpd_type %in% c("carboxylic acid", "alkyne", "allene")) |>
  dplyr::select(cmpd_name, cmpd_type, ends_with("k298")) |>
  dplyr::mutate(across(ends_with("k298"), is.na)) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "cmpd_name", groupname_col = "cmpd_type") |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Has a measured rate constant",
    columns = ends_with("k298")
  ) |>
  tab_stub_indent(
    rows = everything(),
    indent = 2
  ) |>
  fmt_tf(
    columns = ends_with("k298"),
    tf_style = "circles"
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    OH_k298 = "OH",
    O3_k298 = "Ozone",
    NO3_k298 = "Nitrate",
    Cl_k298 = "Chlorine"
  ) |>
  cols_width(
    stub() ~ px(200),
    ends_with("k298") ~ px(80)
  ) |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.35)
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_tf()` help file.

There are census-based population values in the towny dataset and quite a few small towns within it. Let's look at the ten smallest towns (according to the 2021 figures) and work out whether their populations have increased or declined since 1996. Also, let's determine which of these towns even have a website. After that data preparation, the data is made into a gt table and fmt_tf() can be used in the website and pop_dir columns (which both have TRUE/FALSE values). Each of these fmt_tf() calls will either produce "yes"/"no" or "up"/"down" strings (set via the tf_style option).

towny |>
  dplyr::arrange(population_2021) |>
  dplyr::mutate(website = !is.na(website))  |>
  dplyr::mutate(pop_dir = population_2021 > population_1996) |>
  dplyr::select(name, website, population_1996, population_2021, pop_dir) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "name") |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Population",
    columns = starts_with("pop")
  ) |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "Town") |>
  fmt_tf(
    columns = website,
    tf_style = "yes-no",
    auto_align = FALSE
  ) |>
  fmt_tf(
    columns = pop_dir,
    tf_style = "up-down",
    pattern = "It's {x}."
  ) |>
  cols_label_with(
    columns = starts_with("population"),
    fn = function(x) sub("population_", "", x)
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    website = md("Has a  \n website?"),
    pop_dir = "Pop. direction?"
  ) |>
  opt_horizontal_padding(scale = 2)
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_tf()` help file.

If formatting to words instead of symbols (with the hyphenated tf_style keywords), the words themselves can be translated to different languages if providing a locale value. In this next example, we're manually creating a tibble with locale codes and their associated languages. The yes and up columns all receive TRUE whereas no and down will all be FALSE. With two calls of fmt_tf() for each of these pairings, we get the columns' namesake words. To have these words translated, the locale argument is pointed toward values in the code column by using from_column().

dplyr::tibble(
  code = c("de", "fr", "is", "tr", "ka", "lt", "ca", "bg", "lv"),
  lang = c(
    "German", "French", "Icelandic", "Turkish", "Georgian",
    "Lithuanian", "Catalan", "Bulgarian", "Latvian"
  ),
  yes = TRUE,
  no = FALSE,
  up = TRUE,
  down = FALSE
) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "lang") |>
  tab_header(title = "Common words in a few languages") |>
  fmt_tf(
    columns = c(yes, no),
    tf_style = "yes-no",
    locale = from_column("code")
  ) |>
  fmt_tf(
    columns = c(up, down),
    tf_style = "up-down",
    locale = from_column("code")
  ) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(lang, code),
    pattern = "{1} ({2})"
  ) |>
  cols_width(
    stub() ~ px(150),
    everything() ~ px(80)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `fmt_tf()` help file.

Function ID

3-18

Function Introduced

v0.11.0 (July 9, 2024)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format values as times

Description

Format input values to time values using one of 25 preset time styles. Input can be in the form of POSIXt (i.e., datetimes), character (must be in the ISO 8601 forms of HH:MM:SS or ⁠YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS⁠), or Date (which always results in the formatting of 00:00:00).

Usage

fmt_time(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  time_style = "iso",
  pattern = "{x}",
  locale = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

time_style

Predefined style for times

⁠scalar<character>|scalar<numeric|integer>(1<=val<=25)⁠ // default: "iso"

The time style to use. By default this is the short name "iso" which corresponds to how times are formatted within ISO 8601 datetime values. There are 25 time styles in total and their short names can be viewed using info_time_style().

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. A locale ID can be also set in the initial gt() function call (where it would be used automatically by any function with a locale argument) but a locale value provided here will override that global locale.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_time() is compatible with body cells that are of the "Date", "POSIXt" or "character" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_time() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • time_style

  • pattern

  • locale

Please note that for each of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Formatting with the time_style argument

We need to supply a preset time style to the time_style argument. There are many time styles and all of them can handle localization to any supported locale. Many of the time styles are termed flexible time formats and this means that their output will adapt to any locale provided. That feature makes the flexible time formats a better option for locales other than "en" (the default locale).

The following table provides a listing of all time styles and their output values (corresponding to an input time of 14:35:00). It is noted which of these represent 12- or 24-hour time.

Time Style Output Notes
1 "iso" "14:35:00" ISO 8601, 24h
2 "iso-short" "14:35" ISO 8601, 24h
3 "h_m_s_p" "2:35:00 PM" 12h
4 "h_m_p" "2:35 PM" 12h
5 "h_p" "2 PM" 12h
6 "Hms" "14:35:00" flexible, 24h
7 "Hm" "14:35" flexible, 24h
8 "H" "14" flexible, 24h
9 "EHm" "Thu 14:35" flexible, 24h
10 "EHms" "Thu 14:35:00" flexible, 24h
11 "Hmsv" "14:35:00 GMT+00:00" flexible, 24h
12 "Hmv" "14:35 GMT+00:00" flexible, 24h
13 "hms" "2:35:00 PM" flexible, 12h
14 "hm" "2:35 PM" flexible, 12h
15 "h" "2 PM" flexible, 12h
16 "Ehm" "Thu 2:35 PM" flexible, 12h
17 "Ehms" "Thu 2:35:00 PM" flexible, 12h
18 "EBhms" "Thu 2:35:00 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
19 "Bhms" "2:35:00 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
20 "EBhm" "Thu 2:35 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
21 "Bhm" "2:35 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
22 "Bh" "2 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
23 "hmsv" "2:35:00 PM GMT+00:00" flexible, 12h
24 "hmv" "2:35 PM GMT+00:00" flexible, 12h
25 "ms" "35:00" flexible

We can call info_time_style() in the console to view a similar table of time styles with example output.

Adapting output to a specific locale

This formatting function can adapt outputs according to a provided locale value. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). Note that a locale value provided here will override any global locale setting performed in gt()'s own locale argument (it is settable there as a value received by all other functions that have a locale argument). As a useful reference on which locales are supported, we can use info_locales() to view an info table.

Examples

Let's use the exibble dataset to create a simple, two-column gt table (keeping only the date and time columns). Format the time column with fmt_time() to display times formatted with the "h_m_s_p" time style.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(date, time) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_time(
    columns = time,
    time_style = "h_m_s_p"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_time()` help file.

Again using the exibble dataset, let's format the time column to have mixed time formats, where times after 16:00 will be different than the others because of the expressions used in the rows argument. This will involve two calls of fmt_time() with different statements provided for rows. In the first call (times after 16:00) the time style "h_m_s_p" is used; for the second call, "h_m_p" is the named time style supplied to time_style.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(date, time) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_time(
    columns = time,
    rows = time > "16:00",
    time_style = "h_m_s_p"
  ) |>
  fmt_time(
    columns = time,
    rows = time <= "16:00",
    time_style = "h_m_p"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_time()` help file.

Use the exibble dataset to create a single-column gt table (with only the time column). Format the time values using the "EBhms" time style (which is one of the 'flexible' styles). Also, we'll set the locale to "sv" to get the times in Swedish.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(time) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_time(
    columns = time,
    time_style = "EBhms",
    locale = "sv"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_time()` help file.

Function ID

3-14

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

The vector-formatting version of this function: vec_fmt_time().

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format measurement units

Description

fmt_units() lets you better format measurement units in the table body. These must conform to gt's specialized units notation (e.g., "J Hz^-1 mol^-1" can be used to generate units for the molar Planck constant) for the best conversion. The notation here provides several conveniences for defining units, so as long as the values to be formatted conform to this syntax, you'll obtain nicely-formatted units no matter what the table output format might be (i.e., HTML, LaTeX, RTF, etc.). Details pertaining to the units notation can be found in the section entitled How to use gt's units notation.

Usage

fmt_units(data, columns = everything(), rows = everything())

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

How to use gt's units notation

The units notation involves a shorthand of writing units that feels familiar and is fine-tuned for the task at hand. Each unit is treated as a separate entity (parentheses and other symbols included) and the addition of subscript text and exponents is flexible and relatively easy to formulate. This is all best shown with examples:

  • "m/s" and "m / s" both render as "m/s"

  • "m s^-1" will appear with the "-1" exponent intact

  • "m /s" gives the same result, as "/<unit>" is equivalent to "<unit>^-1"

  • "E_h" will render an "E" with the "h" subscript

  • "t_i^2.5" provides a t with an "i" subscript and a "2.5" exponent

  • "m[_0^2]" will use overstriking to set both scripts vertically

  • "g/L %C6H12O6%" uses a chemical formula (enclosed in a pair of "%" characters) as a unit partial, and the formula will render correctly with subscripted numbers

  • Common units that are difficult to write using ASCII text may be implicitly converted to the correct characters (e.g., the "u" in "ug", "um", "uL", and "umol" will be converted to the Greek mu symbol; "degC" and "degF" will render a degree sign before the temperature unit)

  • We can transform shorthand symbol/unit names enclosed in ":" (e.g., ":angstrom:", ":ohm:", etc.) into proper symbols

  • Greek letters can added by enclosing the letter name in ":"; you can use lowercase letters (e.g., ":beta:", ":sigma:", etc.) and uppercase letters too (e.g., ":Alpha:", ":Zeta:", etc.)

  • The components of a unit (unit name, subscript, and exponent) can be fully or partially italicized/emboldened by surrounding text with "*" or "**"

Examples

Let's use the illness dataset and create a new gt table. The units column contains character values in gt's specialized units notation (e.g., "x10^9 / L") so the fmt_units() function was used to better format those units.

illness |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_units(columns = units) |>
  sub_missing(columns = -starts_with("norm")) |>
  sub_missing(columns = c(starts_with("norm"), units), missing_text = "") |>
  sub_large_vals(rows = test == "MYO", threshold = 1200) |>
  fmt_number(
    decimals = 2,
    drop_trailing_zeros = TRUE
  ) |>
  tab_header(title = "Laboratory Findings for the YF Patient") |>
  tab_spanner(label = "Day", columns = starts_with("day")) |>
  cols_label_with(fn = ~ gsub("day_", "", .)) |>
  cols_merge_range(col_begin = norm_l, col_end = norm_u) |>
  cols_label(
    starts_with("norm") ~ "Normal Range",
    test ~ "Test",
    units ~ "Units"
  ) |>
  cols_width(
    starts_with("day") ~ px(80),
    everything() ~ px(120)
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(align = "center"),
    locations = cells_column_labels(columns = starts_with("day"))
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_fill(color = "aliceblue"),
    locations = cells_body(columns = c(test, units))
  ) |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.4) |>
  opt_align_table_header(align = "left") |>
  tab_options(heading.padding = px(10))
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_units()` help file.

The constants dataset contains values for hundreds of fundamental physical constants. We'll take a subset of values that have some molar basis and generate a gt table from that. Like the illness dataset, this one has a units column so, again, the fmt_units() function will be used to format those units. Here, the preference for typesetting measurement units is to have positive and negative exponents (e.g., not "<unit_1> / <unit_2>" but rather "<unit_1> <unit_2>^-1").

constants |>
  dplyr::filter(grepl("molar", name)) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_hide(columns = c(uncert, starts_with("sf"))) |>
  fmt_units(columns = units) |>
  fmt_scientific(columns = value, decimals = 3) |>
  tab_header(title = "Physical Constants Having a Molar Basis") |>
  tab_options(column_labels.hidden = TRUE)
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_units()` help file.

Function ID

3-19

Function Introduced

v0.10.0 (October 7, 2023)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Format URLs to generate links

Description

Should cells contain URLs, fmt_url() can be used to make them navigable links. This should be expressly used on columns that contain only URL text (i.e., no URLs as part of a larger block of text). Should you have such a column of data, there are options for how the links should be styled. They can be of the conventional style (with underlines and text coloring that sets it apart from other text), or, they can appear to be button-like (with a surrounding box that can be filled with a color of your choosing).

URLs in data cells are detected in two ways. The first is using the simple Markdown notation for URLs of the form: ⁠[label](URL)⁠. The second assumes that the text is the URL. In the latter case the URL is also used as the label but there is the option to use the label argument to modify that text.

Usage

fmt_url(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  label = NULL,
  as_button = FALSE,
  color = "auto",
  show_underline = "auto",
  button_fill = "auto",
  button_width = "auto",
  button_outline = "auto",
  target = NULL,
  rel = NULL,
  referrerpolicy = NULL,
  hreflang = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range() and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should undergo formatting. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row captions within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

label

Link label

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The visible 'label' to use for the link. If NULL (the default) the URL will serve as the label. There are two non-NULL options: (1) a piece of static text can be used for the label by providing a string, and (2) a function can be provided to fashion a label from every URL.

as_button

Style link as a button

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option to style the link as a button. By default, this is FALSE. If this option is chosen then the button_fill argument becomes usable.

color

Link color

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "auto"

The color used for the resulting link and its underline. This is "auto" by default; this allows gt to choose an appropriate color based on various factors (such as the background button_fill when as_button is TRUE).

show_underline

Show the link underline

⁠scalar<character>|scalar<logical>⁠ // default: "auto"

Should the link be decorated with an underline? By default this is "auto" which means that gt will choose TRUE when as_button = FALSE and FALSE in the other case. The link underline will be the same color as that set in the color option.

button_fill, button_width, button_outline

Button options

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "auto"

Options for styling a link-as-button (and only applies if as_button = TRUE). All of these options are by default set to "auto", allowing gt to choose appropriate fill, width, and outline values.

target, rel, referrerpolicy, hreflang

Anchor element attributes

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL

Additional anchor element attributes. For descriptions of each attribute and the allowed values, refer to the MDN Web Docs reference on the anchor HTML element.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of formatting function with data values

fmt_url() is compatible with body cells that are of the "character" or "factor" types. Any other types of body cells are ignored during formatting. This is to say that cells of incompatible data types may be targeted, but there will be no attempt to format them.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of fmt_url() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row could be formatted a little bit differently. These arguments provide support for from_column():

  • label

  • as_button

  • color

  • show_underline

  • button_fill

  • button_width

  • button_outline

Please note that for each of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide(). Finally, there is no limitation to how many arguments the from_column() helper is applied so long as the arguments belong to this closed set.

Examples

Using a portion of the towny dataset, let's create a gt table. We can use fmt_url() on the website column to generate navigable links to websites. By default the links are underlined and the color will be chosen for you (it's dark cyan).

towny |>
  dplyr::filter(csd_type == "city") |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(population_2021)) |>
  dplyr::select(name, website, population_2021) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("The 10 Largest Municipalities in `towny`"),
    subtitle = "Population values taken from the 2021 census."
  ) |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  fmt_url(columns = website) |>
  cols_label(
    name = "Name",
    website = "Site",
    population_2021 = "Population"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `fmt_url()` help file.

Let's try something else. We can set a static text label for the link with the label argument (and we'll use the word "site" for this). The link underline is removable with show_underline = FALSE. With this change, it seems sensible to merge the link to the "name" column and enclose the link text in parentheses (cols_merge() handles all that).

towny |>
  dplyr::filter(csd_type == "city") |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(population_2021)) |>
  dplyr::select(name, website, population_2021) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("The 10 Largest Municipalities in `towny`"),
    subtitle = "Population values taken from the 2021 census."
  ) |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  fmt_url(
    columns = website,
    label = "site",
    show_underline = FALSE
  ) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(name, website),
    pattern = "{1} ({2})"
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    name = "Name",
    population_2021 = "Population"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `fmt_url()` help file.

fmt_url() allows for the styling of links as 'buttons'. This is as easy as setting as_button = TRUE. Doing that unlocks the ability to set a button_fill color. This color can automatically selected by gt (this is the default) but here we're using "steelblue". The label argument also accepts a function! We can choose to adapt the label text from the URLs by eliminating any leading "https://" or "www." parts.

towny |>
  dplyr::filter(csd_type == "city") |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(population_2021)) |>
  dplyr::select(name, website, population_2021) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  dplyr::mutate(ranking = dplyr::row_number()) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "ranking") |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("The 10 Largest Municipalities in `towny`"),
    subtitle = "Population values taken from the 2021 census."
  ) |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  fmt_url(
    columns = website,
    label = function(x) gsub("https://|www.", "", x),
    as_button = TRUE,
    button_fill = "steelblue",
    button_width = px(150)
  ) |>
  cols_move_to_end(columns = website) |>
  cols_align(align = "center", columns = website) |>
  cols_width(
    ranking ~ px(40),
    website ~ px(200)
  ) |>
  tab_options(column_labels.hidden = TRUE) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(weight = "bold"),
    locations = cells_stub()
  ) |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.75)
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `fmt_url()` help file.

It's perhaps inevitable that you'll come across missing values in your column of URLs. fmt_url() will preserve input NA values, allowing you to handle them with sub_missing(). Here's an example of that.

towny |>
  dplyr::arrange(population_2021) |>
  dplyr::select(name, website, population_2021) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("The 10 Smallest Municipalities in `towny`"),
    subtitle = "Population values taken from the 2021 census."
  ) |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  fmt_url(columns = website) |>
  cols_label(
    name = "Name",
    website = "Site",
    population_2021 = "Population"
  ) |>
  sub_missing()
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `fmt_url()` help file.

Links can be presented as icons. Let's take a look at an example of this type of presentation with a table based on the films dataset. The imdb_url column contains the URL information and in the fmt_url() call, we can use fontawesome::fa() to specify a label. In this case we elect to use the "link" icon and we can make some sizing adjustments to the icon here to ensure the layout looks optimal. We also use cols_merge() to combine the film's title, its original title (if present), and the link icon.

films |>
  dplyr::filter(year == 2021) |>
  dplyr::select(
    contains("title"), run_time, director, imdb_url
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(title = "Feature Films in Competition at the 2021 Festival") |>
  fmt_url(
    columns = imdb_url,
    label = fontawesome::fa(
      name = "link",
      height = "0.75em",
      vertical_align = "0em"
     ),
    color = "gray65"
  ) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(title, original_title, imdb_url),
    pattern = "{1}<< ({2})>> {3}"
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    title = "Film",
    run_time = "Length",
    director = "Director(s)",
  ) |>
  tab_options(heading.title.font.size = px(26)) |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.4) |>
  opt_horizontal_padding(scale = 2) |>
  opt_align_table_header(align = "left")
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `fmt_url()` help file.

Function ID

3-21

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Formatting functions

Description

All formatting functions in gt are quite consistent. All functions that start with the common ⁠fmt_*()⁠ prefix have the following points in common

Details

Let's use the exibble data for this.

Examples

gt_tbl <- gt(exibble)

#
# They all have `columns` and `rows` to specify target cells and default to
# styling all compatible cells.
#
# By default, they apply styling to all compatible columns.

# Will style all numeric columns
gt_tbl %>% fmt_number()

# will style the time column
gt_tbl %>% fmt_time(columns = time)

# Will style nothing since is only compatible with logical values
gt_tbl %>% fmt_tf()

#
# Their order has importance as the last styling will have priority.
#

# Will style all numeric columns as integer
# fmt_number() will have no effect
gt_tbl %>% fmt_number() %>% fmt_integer()

#
# Therefore, to apply different styling, it is important to specify columns or rows.
#

# Will style all numeric columns as number and as currency the currency column.
# fmt_number() will have no effect
gt_tbl %>% fmt_number() %>% fmt_integer(currency)

Reference a column of values for certain parameters

Description

It can be useful to obtain parameter values from a column in a gt for functions that operate on the table body and stub cells. For example, you might want to indent row labels in the stub. You could call tab_stub_indent() and indent different rows to various indentation levels. However, each level of indentation applied necessitates a new call of that function. To make this better, we can use indentation values available in a table column via the from_column() helper function. For the tab_stub_indent() case, you'd invoke this helper at the indent argument and specify the column that has the values.

Usage

from_column(column, na_value = NULL, fn = NULL)

Arguments

column

Column name

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

A single column name in quotation marks. Values will be extracted from this column and provided to compatible arguments.

na_value

Default replacement for NA values

⁠scalar<character|numeric|logical>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A single value to replace any NA values in the column. Take care to provide a value that is of the same type as the column values to avoid any undesirable coercion.

fn

Function to apply

⁠function|formula⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

If a function is provided here, any values extracted from the table column (except NA values) can be mutated.

Value

A list object of class gt_column.

Functions that allow the use of the from_column() helper

Only certain functions (and furthermore a subset of arguments within each) support the use of from_column() for accessing varying parameter values. These functions are:

Within help documents for each of these functions you'll find the Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function section and sections like these describe which arguments support the use of from_column().

Examples

from_column() can be used in a variety of formatting functions so that values for common options don't have to be static, they can change in every row (so long as you have a column of compatible option values). Here's an example where we have a table of repeating numeric values along with a column of currency codes. We can format the numbers to currencies with fmt_currency() and use from_column() to reference the column of currency codes, giving us values that are each formatted as having a different currency.

dplyr::tibble(
  amount = rep(30.75, 6),
  curr = c("USD", "EUR", "GBP", "CAD", "AUD", "JPY"),
) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_currency(currency = from_column(column = "curr"))
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `from_column()` help file.

Let's summarize the gtcars dataset to get a set of rankings of car manufacturer by country of origin. The n column represents the number of cars a manufacturer has within this dataset and we can use that column as a way to size the text. We do that in the tab_style() call; the from_column() function is used within the cell_text() statement to fashion different font sizes from that n column. This is done in conjunction with the fn argument of from_column(), which helps to tweak the values in n to get a useful range of font sizes.

gtcars |>
  dplyr::count(mfr, ctry_origin) |>
  dplyr::arrange(ctry_origin) |>
  gt(groupname_col = "ctry_origin") |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(
      size = from_column(
        column = "n",
        fn = function(x) paste0(5 + (x * 3), "px")
      )
    ),
    locations = cells_body()
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(align = "center"),
    locations = cells_row_groups()
  ) |>
  cols_hide(columns = n) |>
  tab_options(column_labels.hidden = TRUE) |>
  opt_all_caps() |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.25) |>
  cols_align(align = "center", columns = mfr)
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `from_column()` help file.

Function ID

8-5

Function Introduced

v0.10.0 (October 7, 2023)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


Helper function for adding a ggplot

Description

We can add a ggplot2 plot inside of a table with the help of the ggplot_image() function. The function provides a convenient way to generate an HTML fragment with a ggplot object. Because this function is currently HTML-based, it is only useful for HTML table output. To use this function inside of data cells, it is recommended that text_transform() is used. With that function, we can specify which data cells to target and then include a call to ggplot_image() within the required user-defined function (for the fn argument). If we want to include a plot in other places (e.g., in the header, within footnote text, etc.) we need to use ggplot_image() within the html() helper function.

By itself, the function creates an HTML image tag with an image URI embedded within (a 100 dpi PNG). We can easily experiment with any ggplot2 plot object, and using it within ⁠ggplot_image(plot_object = <plot object>⁠ evaluates to:

⁠<img src=<data URI> style=\"height:100px;\">⁠

where a height of ⁠100px⁠ is a default height chosen to work well within the heights of most table rows. There is the option to modify the aspect ratio of the plot (the default aspect_ratio is 1.0) and this is useful for elongating any given plot to fit better within the table construct.

Usage

ggplot_image(plot_object, height = 100, aspect_ratio = 1)

Arguments

plot_object

A ggplot plot object

⁠obj:<ggplot>⁠ // required

A ggplot plot object.

height

Height of image

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 100

The absolute height of the output image in the table cell (in "px" units). By default, this is set to "100px".

aspect_ratio

The final aspect ratio of plot

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 1.0

This is the plot's final aspect ratio. Where the height of the plot is fixed using the height argument, the aspect_ratio will either compress (aspect_ratio < 1.0) or expand (aspect_ratio > 1.0) the plot horizontally. The default value of 1.0 will neither compress nor expand the plot.

Value

A character object with an HTML fragment that can be placed inside of a cell.

Examples

Create a ggplot plot.

library(ggplot2)

plot_object <-
  ggplot(
    data = gtcars,
    aes(x = hp, y = trq, size = msrp)
  ) +
  geom_point(color = "blue") +
  theme(legend.position = "none")

Create a tibble that contains two cells (where one is a placeholder for an image), then, create a gt table. Use the text_transform() function to insert the plot using by calling ggplot_object() within the user- defined function.

dplyr::tibble(
  text = "Here is a ggplot:",
  ggplot = NA
) |>
  gt() |>
  text_transform(
    locations = cells_body(columns = ggplot),
    fn = function(x) {
      plot_object |>
        ggplot_image(height = px(200))
    }
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `ggplot_image()` help file.

Function ID

9-3

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other image addition functions: local_image(), test_image(), web_image()


Weather conditions in Gibraltar, May 2023

Description

The gibraltar dataset has meteorological data for the Gibraltar Airport Station from May 1 to May 31, 2023. Gibraltar is a British Overseas Territory and city located at the southern end of the Iberian Peninsula, on the Bay of Gibraltar. This weather station is located at the airport (GIB), where it's at an elevation of 5 meters above mean sea level (AMSL).

Usage

gibraltar

Format

A tibble with 1,431 rows and 10 variables:

date, time

The date and time of the observation.

temp, dew_point

The air temperature and dew point values, both in degrees Celsius.

humidity

The relative humidity as a value between 0 and 1

wind_dir, wind_speed, wind_gust

Observations related to wind. The wind direction is given as the typical 'blowing from' value, simplified to one of 16 compass directions. The wind speed is provided in units of meters per second. If there was a measurable wind gust, the maximum gust speed is recorded as m/s values (otherwise the value is 0).

pressure

The atmospheric pressure in hectopascals (hPa).

condition

The weather condition.

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-11

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.11.0 (July 9, 2024)

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, exibble, films, gtcars, illness, metro, nuclides, peeps, photolysis, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sp500, sza, towny

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(gibraltar)

Helper function for specifying a font from the Google Fonts service

Description

google_font() can be used wherever a font name should be specified. There are two instances where this helper can be used: the name argument in opt_table_font() (for setting a table font) and in that of cell_text() (used with tab_style()). To get a helpful listing of fonts that work well in tables, call info_google_fonts().

Usage

google_font(name)

Arguments

name

Google Font name

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

The complete name of a font available in Google Fonts.

Value

An object of class font_css.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table of two columns and eight rows. We'll replace missing values with em dashes using sub_missing(). For text in the time column, we will use the font called "IBM Plex Mono" which is available in Google Fonts. This is defined inside the google_font() call, itself part of a vector that includes fonts returned by default_fonts() (those fonts will serve as fallbacks just in case the font supplied by Google Fonts is not accessible). In terms of placement, all of this is given to the font argument of cell_text() which is itself given to the style argument of tab_style().

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(char, time) |>
  gt() |>
  sub_missing() |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(
      font = c(
        google_font(name = "IBM Plex Mono"),
        default_fonts()
      )
    ),
    locations = cells_body(columns = time)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `google_font()` help file.

We can use a subset of the sp500 dataset to create a small gt table. With fmt_currency(), we can display a dollar sign for the first row of the monetary values. Then, we'll set a larger font size for the table and opt to use the "Merriweather" font by calling google_font() within opt_table_font(). In cases where that font may not materialize, we include two font fallbacks: "Cochin" and the catchall "Serif" group.

sp500 |>
  dplyr::slice(1:10) |>
  dplyr::select(-volume, -adj_close) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_currency(
    rows = 1,
    currency = "USD",
    use_seps = FALSE
  ) |>
  tab_options(table.font.size = px(20)) |>
  opt_table_font(
    font = list(
      google_font(name = "Merriweather"),
      "Cochin", "Serif"
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `google_font()` help file.

Function ID

8-31

Function Introduced

v0.2.2 (August 5, 2020)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


Add grand summary rows using aggregation functions

Description

Add grand summary rows by using the table data and any suitable aggregation functions. With grand summary rows, all of the available data in the gt table is incorporated (regardless of whether some of the data are part of row groups). Multiple grand summary rows can be added via expressions given to fns. You can selectively format the values in the resulting grand summary cells by use of formatting expressions in fmt.

Usage

grand_summary_rows(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  fns = NULL,
  fmt = NULL,
  side = c("bottom", "top"),
  missing_text = "---",
  formatter = NULL,
  ...
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The columns for which the summaries should be calculated. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

fns

Aggregation Expressions

⁠<expression|list of expressions>⁠

Functions used for aggregations. This can include base functions like mean, min, max, median, sd, or sum or any other user-defined aggregation function. Multiple functions, each of which would generate a different row, are to be supplied within a list(). We can specify the functions by use of function names in quotes (e.g., "sum"), as bare functions (e.g., sum), or in formula form (e.g., minimum ~ min(.)) where the LHS could be used to supply the summary row label and ID values. More information on this can be found in the Aggregation expressions for fns section.

fmt

Formatting expressions

⁠<expression|list of expressions>⁠

Formatting expressions in formula form. The RHS of ~ should contain a formatting call (e.g., ⁠~ fmt_number(., decimals = 3, use_seps = FALSE⁠). Optionally, the LHS could contain a group-targeting expression (e.g., "group_a" ~ fmt_number(.)). More information on this can be found in the Formatting expressions for fmt section.

side

Side used for placement of grand summary rows

⁠singl-kw:[bottom|top]⁠ // default: "bottom"

Should the grand summary rows be placed at the "bottom" (the default) or the "top" of the table?

missing_text

Replacement text for NA values

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "---"

The text to be used in place of NA values in summary cells with no data outputs.

formatter

Deprecated Formatting function

⁠<expression>⁠

Deprecated, please use fmt instead. This was previously used as a way to input a formatting function name, which could be any of the ⁠fmt_*()⁠ functions available in the package (e.g., fmt_number(), fmt_percent(), etc.), or a custom function using fmt(). The options of a formatter can be accessed through ....

...

Deprecated Formatting arguments

⁠<Named arguments>⁠

Deprecated (along with formatter) but otherwise used for argument values for a formatting function supplied in formatter. For example, if using formatter = fmt_number, options such as decimals = 1, use_seps = FALSE, and the like can be used here.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Using columns to target column data for aggregation

Targeting of column data for which aggregates should be generated is done through the columns argument. We can declare column names in c() (with bare column names or names in quotes) or we can use tidyselect-style expressions. This can be as basic as supplying a select helper like starts_with(), or, providing a more complex incantation like

where(~ is.numeric(.x) & max(.x, na.rm = TRUE) > 1E6)

which targets numeric columns that have a maximum value greater than 1,000,000 (excluding any NAs from consideration).

By default all columns are selected (with the everything() default). This default may be not what's needed unless all columns can undergo useful aggregation by expressions supplied in fns.

Aggregation expressions for fns

There are a number of ways to express how an aggregation should work for each summary row. In addition to that, we have the ability to pass important information such as the summary row ID value and its label (the former necessary for targeting within tab_style() or tab_footnote() and the latter used for display in the rendered table). Here are a number of instructive examples for how to supply such expressions.

Double-sided formula with everything supplied

We can be explicit and provide a double-sided formula (in the form ⁠<LHS> ~ <RHS>⁠) that expresses everything about a summary row. That is, it has an aggregation expression (where . represents the data in the focused column). Here's an example:

list(id = "minimum", label = "min") ~ min(., na.rm = TRUE)

The left side (the list) contains named elements that identify the id and label for the summary row. The right side has an expression for obtaining a minimum value (dropping NA values in the calculation).

The list() can be replaced with c() but the advantage of a list is allowing the use of the md() and html() helper functions. The above example can be written as:

list(id = "minimum", label = md("**Minimum**")) ~ min(., na.rm = TRUE)

and we can have that label value interpreted as Markdown text.

Function names in quotes

With fns = "min" we get the equivalent of the fuller expression:

list(id = "min", label = "min") ~ min(., na.rm = TRUE)

For sake of convenience, common aggregation functions with the na.rm argument will be rewritten with the na.rm = TRUE option. These functions are: "min", "max", "mean", "median", "sd", and "sum".

Should you need to specify multiple aggregation functions in this way (giving you multiple summary rows), use c() or list().

RHS formula expressions

With fns = ~ min(.) or fns = list(~ min(.)), gt will use the function name as the id and label. The expansion of this shorthand to full form looks like this:

list(id = "min", label = "min") ~ min(.)

The RHS expression is kept as written and the name portion is both the id and the label.

Named vector or list with RHS formula expression

Using fns = c(minimum = ~ min(.)) or fns = list(minimum = ~ min(.)) expands to this:

list(id = "minimum", label = "minimum") ~ min(.)

Unnamed vector or list with RHS formula expression

With fns = c("minimum", "min") ~ min(.) or fns = list("minimum", "min") ~ min(.) the LHS contains the label and id values and, importantly, the order is label first and id second. This can be rewritten as:

list(id = "min", label = "minimum") ~ min(.)

If the vector or list is partially named, gt has enough to go on to disambiguate the unnamed element. So with fns = c("minimum", label = "min") ~ min(.), "min" is indeed the label and "minimum" is taken as the id value.

A fully named list with three specific elements

We can avoid using a formula if we are satisfied with the default options of a function (except some of those functions with the na.rm options, see above). Instead, a list with the named elements id, label, and fn could be used. It can look like this:

fns = list(id = "mean_id", label = "average", fn = "mean")

which translates to

list(id = "mean_id", label = "average") ~ mean(., na.rm = TRUE)

Formatting expressions for fmt

Given that we are generating new data in a table, we might also want to take the opportunity to format those new values right away. We can do this in the fmt argument, either with a single expression or a number of them in a list.

We can supply a one-sided (RHS only) expression to fmt, and, several can be provided in a list. The expression uses a formatting function (e.g., fmt_number(), fmt_currency(), etc.) and it must contain an initial . that stands for the data object. If performing numeric formatting on all columns in the new grand summary rows, it might look something like this:

fmt = ~ fmt_number(., decimals = 1, use_seps = FALSE)

We can use the columns and rows arguments that are available in every formatting function. This allows us to format only a subset of columns or rows. Summary rows can be targeted by using their ID values and these are settable within expressions given to fns (see the Aggregation expressions for fns section for details on this). Here's an example with hypothetical column and row names:

fmt = ~ fmt_number(., columns = num, rows = "mean", decimals = 3)

Extraction of summary rows

Should we need to obtain the summary data for external purposes, extract_summary() can be used with a gt_tbl object where summary rows were added via grand_summary_rows() or summary_rows().

Examples

Use a modified version of the sp500 dataset to create a gt table with row groups and row labels. Create the grand summary rows min, max, and avg for the table with grand_summary_rows().

sp500 |>
  dplyr::filter(date >= "2015-01-05" & date <= "2015-01-16") |>
  dplyr::arrange(date) |>
  dplyr::mutate(week = paste0("W", strftime(date, format = "%V"))) |>
  dplyr::select(-adj_close, -volume) |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "date",
    groupname_col = "week"
  ) |>
  grand_summary_rows(
    columns = c(open, high, low, close),
    fns = list(
      min ~ min(.),
      max ~ max(.),
      avg ~ mean(.)
    ),
    fmt = ~ fmt_number(., use_seps = FALSE)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `grand_summary_rows()` help file.

Let's take the countrypops dataset and process that a bit before handing it off to gt. We can create a single grand summary row with totals that appears at the top of the table body (with side = "top"). We can define the aggregation with a list that contains parameters for the grand summary row label ("TOTALS"), the ID value of that row ("totals"), and the aggregation function (expressed as "sum", which gt recognizes as the sum() function). Finally, we'll add a background fill to the grand summary row with tab_style().

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(country_code_2 %in% c("BE", "NL", "LU")) |>
  dplyr::filter(year %% 10 == 0) |>
  dplyr::select(country_name, year, population) |>
  tidyr::pivot_wider(names_from = year, values_from = population) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "country_name") |>
  tab_header(title = "Populations of the Benelux Countries") |>
  tab_spanner(columns = everything(), label = "Year") |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  grand_summary_rows(
    fns =  list(label = "TOTALS", id = "totals", fn = "sum"),
    fmt = ~ fmt_integer(.),
    side = "top"
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    locations = cells_grand_summary(),
    style = cell_fill(color = "lightblue" |> adjust_luminance(steps = +1))
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `grand_summary_rows()` help file.

Function ID

6-2

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other row addition/modification functions: row_group_order(), rows_add(), summary_rows()


Add one or more gt tables to a gt_group container object

Description

Should you have a gt_group object, created through use of the gt_group() function, you might want to add more gt tables to that container. While it's common to generate a gt_group object with a collection of gt_tbl objects, one can also create an 'empty' gt_group object. Whatever your workflow might be, the grp_add() function makes it possible to flexibly add one or more new gt tables, returning a refreshed gt_group object.

Usage

grp_add(.data, ..., .list = list2(...), .before = NULL, .after = NULL)

Arguments

.data

The gt table group object

⁠obj:<gt_group>⁠ // required

This is a gt_group container object. It is typically generated through use of gt_group() along with one or more gt_tbl objects, or, made by splitting a gt table with gt_split().

...

One or more gt table objects

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required (or, use .list)

One or more gt table (gt_tbl) objects, typically generated via the gt() function.

.list

Alternative to ...

⁠<list of multiple expressions>⁠ // (or, use ...)

Allows for the use of a list as an input alternative to ....

.before, .after

Table used as anchor

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A single index for either .before or .after, specifying where the supplied gt_tbl objects should be placed amongst the existing collection of gt tables. If nothing is provided for either argument the incoming gt_tbl objects will be appended.

Value

An object of class gt_group.

Function ID

14-4

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other table group functions: grp_clone(), grp_options(), grp_pull(), grp_replace(), grp_rm(), gt_group(), gt_split()


Clone one or more gt tables in a gt_group container object

Description

Should you have a gt_group object, created through use of the gt_group() function, you may in certain circumstances want to create replicas of gt_tbl objects in that collection. This can be done with the grp_clone() function and the placement of the cloned gt tables can be controlled with either the before or after arguments.

Usage

grp_clone(data, which = NULL, before = NULL, after = NULL)

Arguments

data

The gt table group object

⁠obj:<gt_group>⁠ // required

This is a gt_group container object. It is typically generated through use of gt_group() along with one or more gt_tbl objects, or, made by splitting a gt table with gt_split().

which

The tables to clone

⁠vector<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A vector of index values denoting which gt tables should be cloned inside of the gt_group object.

before, after

Table used as anchor

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A single index for either before or after, specifies where the cloned gt_tbl objects should be placed amongst the existing collection of gt tables. If nothing is provided for either argument, the incoming gt_tbl objects will be appended.

Value

An object of class gt_group.

Function ID

14-5

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other table group functions: grp_add(), grp_options(), grp_pull(), grp_replace(), grp_rm(), gt_group(), gt_split()


Modify table options for all tables within a gt_group object

Description

Modify the options for a collection of gt tables in a gt_group object. These options are named by the components, the subcomponents, and the element that can adjusted.

Usage

grp_options(
  data,
  table.width = NULL,
  table.layout = NULL,
  table.align = NULL,
  table.margin.left = NULL,
  table.margin.right = NULL,
  table.background.color = NULL,
  table.additional_css = NULL,
  table.font.names = NULL,
  table.font.size = NULL,
  table.font.weight = NULL,
  table.font.style = NULL,
  table.font.color = NULL,
  table.font.color.light = NULL,
  table.border.top.style = NULL,
  table.border.top.width = NULL,
  table.border.top.color = NULL,
  table.border.right.style = NULL,
  table.border.right.width = NULL,
  table.border.right.color = NULL,
  table.border.bottom.style = NULL,
  table.border.bottom.width = NULL,
  table.border.bottom.color = NULL,
  table.border.left.style = NULL,
  table.border.left.width = NULL,
  table.border.left.color = NULL,
  heading.background.color = NULL,
  heading.align = NULL,
  heading.title.font.size = NULL,
  heading.title.font.weight = NULL,
  heading.subtitle.font.size = NULL,
  heading.subtitle.font.weight = NULL,
  heading.padding = NULL,
  heading.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  heading.border.bottom.style = NULL,
  heading.border.bottom.width = NULL,
  heading.border.bottom.color = NULL,
  heading.border.lr.style = NULL,
  heading.border.lr.width = NULL,
  heading.border.lr.color = NULL,
  column_labels.background.color = NULL,
  column_labels.font.size = NULL,
  column_labels.font.weight = NULL,
  column_labels.text_transform = NULL,
  column_labels.padding = NULL,
  column_labels.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  column_labels.vlines.style = NULL,
  column_labels.vlines.width = NULL,
  column_labels.vlines.color = NULL,
  column_labels.border.top.style = NULL,
  column_labels.border.top.width = NULL,
  column_labels.border.top.color = NULL,
  column_labels.border.bottom.style = NULL,
  column_labels.border.bottom.width = NULL,
  column_labels.border.bottom.color = NULL,
  column_labels.border.lr.style = NULL,
  column_labels.border.lr.width = NULL,
  column_labels.border.lr.color = NULL,
  column_labels.hidden = NULL,
  column_labels.units_pattern = NULL,
  row_group.background.color = NULL,
  row_group.font.size = NULL,
  row_group.font.weight = NULL,
  row_group.text_transform = NULL,
  row_group.padding = NULL,
  row_group.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  row_group.border.top.style = NULL,
  row_group.border.top.width = NULL,
  row_group.border.top.color = NULL,
  row_group.border.bottom.style = NULL,
  row_group.border.bottom.width = NULL,
  row_group.border.bottom.color = NULL,
  row_group.border.left.style = NULL,
  row_group.border.left.width = NULL,
  row_group.border.left.color = NULL,
  row_group.border.right.style = NULL,
  row_group.border.right.width = NULL,
  row_group.border.right.color = NULL,
  row_group.default_label = NULL,
  row_group.as_column = NULL,
  table_body.hlines.style = NULL,
  table_body.hlines.width = NULL,
  table_body.hlines.color = NULL,
  table_body.vlines.style = NULL,
  table_body.vlines.width = NULL,
  table_body.vlines.color = NULL,
  table_body.border.top.style = NULL,
  table_body.border.top.width = NULL,
  table_body.border.top.color = NULL,
  table_body.border.bottom.style = NULL,
  table_body.border.bottom.width = NULL,
  table_body.border.bottom.color = NULL,
  stub.background.color = NULL,
  stub.font.size = NULL,
  stub.font.weight = NULL,
  stub.text_transform = NULL,
  stub.border.style = NULL,
  stub.border.width = NULL,
  stub.border.color = NULL,
  stub.indent_length = NULL,
  stub_row_group.font.size = NULL,
  stub_row_group.font.weight = NULL,
  stub_row_group.text_transform = NULL,
  stub_row_group.border.style = NULL,
  stub_row_group.border.width = NULL,
  stub_row_group.border.color = NULL,
  data_row.padding = NULL,
  data_row.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  summary_row.background.color = NULL,
  summary_row.text_transform = NULL,
  summary_row.padding = NULL,
  summary_row.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  summary_row.border.style = NULL,
  summary_row.border.width = NULL,
  summary_row.border.color = NULL,
  grand_summary_row.background.color = NULL,
  grand_summary_row.text_transform = NULL,
  grand_summary_row.padding = NULL,
  grand_summary_row.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  grand_summary_row.border.style = NULL,
  grand_summary_row.border.width = NULL,
  grand_summary_row.border.color = NULL,
  footnotes.background.color = NULL,
  footnotes.font.size = NULL,
  footnotes.padding = NULL,
  footnotes.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  footnotes.border.bottom.style = NULL,
  footnotes.border.bottom.width = NULL,
  footnotes.border.bottom.color = NULL,
  footnotes.border.lr.style = NULL,
  footnotes.border.lr.width = NULL,
  footnotes.border.lr.color = NULL,
  footnotes.marks = NULL,
  footnotes.spec_ref = NULL,
  footnotes.spec_ftr = NULL,
  footnotes.multiline = NULL,
  footnotes.sep = NULL,
  source_notes.background.color = NULL,
  source_notes.font.size = NULL,
  source_notes.padding = NULL,
  source_notes.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  source_notes.border.bottom.style = NULL,
  source_notes.border.bottom.width = NULL,
  source_notes.border.bottom.color = NULL,
  source_notes.border.lr.style = NULL,
  source_notes.border.lr.width = NULL,
  source_notes.border.lr.color = NULL,
  source_notes.multiline = NULL,
  source_notes.sep = NULL,
  row.striping.background_color = NULL,
  row.striping.include_stub = NULL,
  row.striping.include_table_body = NULL,
  container.width = NULL,
  container.height = NULL,
  container.padding.x = NULL,
  container.padding.y = NULL,
  container.overflow.x = NULL,
  container.overflow.y = NULL,
  ihtml.active = NULL,
  ihtml.use_pagination = NULL,
  ihtml.use_pagination_info = NULL,
  ihtml.use_sorting = NULL,
  ihtml.use_search = NULL,
  ihtml.use_filters = NULL,
  ihtml.use_resizers = NULL,
  ihtml.use_highlight = NULL,
  ihtml.use_compact_mode = NULL,
  ihtml.use_text_wrapping = NULL,
  ihtml.use_page_size_select = NULL,
  ihtml.page_size_default = NULL,
  ihtml.page_size_values = NULL,
  ihtml.pagination_type = NULL,
  page.orientation = NULL,
  page.numbering = NULL,
  page.header.use_tbl_headings = NULL,
  page.footer.use_tbl_notes = NULL,
  page.width = NULL,
  page.height = NULL,
  page.margin.left = NULL,
  page.margin.right = NULL,
  page.margin.top = NULL,
  page.margin.bottom = NULL,
  page.header.height = NULL,
  page.footer.height = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table group object

⁠obj:<gt_group>⁠ // required

This is a gt_group container object. It is typically generated through use of gt_group() along with one or more gt_tbl objects, or, made by splitting a gt table with gt_split().

table.width

Table width

The table width can be specified as a single-length character with units of pixels or as a percentage. If provided as a single-length numeric vector, it is assumed that the value is given in units of pixels. The px() and pct() helper functions can also be used to pass in numeric values and obtain values as pixel or percent units.

table.layout

The table-layout property

This is the value for the table-layout CSS style in the HTML output context. By default, this is "fixed" but another valid option is "auto".

table.align

Horizontal alignment of table

The table.align option lets us set the horizontal alignment of the table in its container. By default, this is "center". Other options are "left" and "right". This will automatically set table.margin.left and table.margin.right to the appropriate values.

table.margin.left, table.margin.right

Left and right table margins

The size of the margins on the left and right of the table within the container can be set with table.margin.left and table.margin.right. Can be specified as a single-length character with units of pixels or as a percentage. If provided as a single-length numeric vector, it is assumed that the value is given in units of pixels. The px() and pct() helper functions can also be used to pass in numeric values and obtain values as pixel or percent units. Using table.margin.left or table.margin.right will overwrite any values set by table.align.

table.background.color, heading.background.color, column_labels.background.color, row_group.background.color, stub.background.color, summary_row.background.color, grand_summary_row.background.color, footnotes.background.color, source_notes.background.color

Background colors

These options govern background colors for the parent element table and the following child elements: heading, column_labels, row_group, stub, summary_row, grand_summary_row, footnotes, and source_notes. A color name or a hexadecimal color code should be provided.

table.additional_css

Additional CSS

The table.additional_css option can be used to supply an additional block of CSS rules to be applied after the automatically generated table CSS.

table.font.names

Default table fonts

The names of the fonts used for the table can be supplied through table.font.names. This is a vector of several font names. If the first font isn't available, then the next font is tried (and so on).

table.font.size, heading.title.font.size, heading.subtitle.font.size, column_labels.font.size, row_group.font.size, stub.font.size, footnotes.font.size, source_notes.font.size

Table font sizes

The font sizes for the parent text element table and the following child elements: heading.title, heading.subtitle, column_labels, row_group, footnotes, and source_notes. Can be specified as a single-length character vector with units of pixels (e.g., ⁠12px⁠) or as a percentage (e.g., ⁠80%⁠). If provided as a single-length numeric vector, it is assumed that the value is given in units of pixels. The px() and pct() helper functions can also be used to pass in numeric values and obtain values as pixel or percentage units.

table.font.weight, heading.title.font.weight, heading.subtitle.font.weight, column_labels.font.weight, row_group.font.weight, stub.font.weight

Table font weights

The font weights of the table, heading.title, heading.subtitle, column_labels, row_group, and stub text elements. Can be a text-based keyword such as "normal", "bold", "lighter", "bolder", or, a numeric value between 1 and 1000, inclusive. Note that only variable fonts may support the numeric mapping of weight.

table.font.style

Default table font style

This is the default font style for the table. Can be one of either "normal", "italic", or "oblique".

table.font.color, table.font.color.light

Default dark and light text for the table

These options define text colors used throughout the table. There are two variants: table.font.color is for text overlaid on lighter background colors, and table.font.color.light is automatically used when text needs to be overlaid on darker background colors. A color name or a hexadecimal color code should be provided.

table.border.top.style, table.border.top.width, table.border.top.color, table.border.right.style, table.border.right.width, table.border.right.color, table.border.bottom.style, table.border.bottom.width, table.border.bottom.color, table.border.left.style, table.border.left.width, table.border.left.color

Top border properties

The style, width, and color properties of the table's absolute top and absolute bottom borders.

heading.align

Horizontal alignment in the table header

Controls the horizontal alignment of the heading title and subtitle. We can either use "center", "left", or "right".

heading.padding, column_labels.padding, data_row.padding, row_group.padding, summary_row.padding, grand_summary_row.padding, footnotes.padding, source_notes.padding

Vertical padding throughout the table

The amount of vertical padding to incorporate in the heading (title and subtitle), the column_labels (this includes the column spanners), the row group labels (row_group.padding), in the body/stub rows (data_row.padding), in summary rows (summary_row.padding or grand_summary_row.padding), or in the footnotes and source notes (footnotes.padding and source_notes.padding).

heading.padding.horizontal, column_labels.padding.horizontal, data_row.padding.horizontal, row_group.padding.horizontal, summary_row.padding.horizontal, grand_summary_row.padding.horizontal, footnotes.padding.horizontal, source_notes.padding.horizontal

Horizontal padding throughout the table

The amount of horizontal padding to incorporate in the heading (title and subtitle), the column_labels (this includes the column spanners), the row group labels (row_group.padding.horizontal), in the body/stub rows (data_row.padding), in summary rows (summary_row.padding.horizontal or grand_summary_row.padding.horizontal), or in the footnotes and source notes (footnotes.padding.horizontal and source_notes.padding.horizontal).

heading.border.bottom.style, heading.border.bottom.width, heading.border.bottom.color

Properties of the header's bottom border

The style, width, and color properties of the header's bottom border. This border shares space with that of the column_labels location. If the width of this border is larger, then it will be the visible border.

heading.border.lr.style, heading.border.lr.width, heading.border.lr.color

Properties of the header's left and right borders

The style, width, and color properties for the left and right borders of the heading location.

column_labels.text_transform, row_group.text_transform, stub.text_transform, summary_row.text_transform, grand_summary_row.text_transform

Text transforms throughout the table

Options to apply text transformations to the column_labels, row_group, stub, summary_row, and grand_summary_row text elements. Either of the "uppercase", "lowercase", or "capitalize" keywords can be used.

column_labels.vlines.style, column_labels.vlines.width, column_labels.vlines.color

Properties of all vertical lines by the column labels

The style, width, and color properties for all vertical lines ('vlines') of the column_labels.

column_labels.border.top.style, column_labels.border.top.width, column_labels.border.top.color

Properties of the border above the column labels

The style, width, and color properties for the top border of the column_labels location. This border shares space with that of the heading location. If the width of this border is larger, then it will be the visible border.

column_labels.border.bottom.style, column_labels.border.bottom.width, column_labels.border.bottom.color

Properties of the border below the column labels

The style, width, and color properties for the bottom border of the column_labels location.

column_labels.border.lr.style, column_labels.border.lr.width, column_labels.border.lr.color

Properties of the left and right borders next to the column labels

The style, width, and color properties for the left and right borders of the column_labels location.

column_labels.hidden

Hiding all column labels

An option to hide the column labels. If providing TRUE then the entire column_labels location won't be seen and the table header (if present) will collapse downward.

column_labels.units_pattern

Pattern to combine column labels and units

The default pattern for combining column labels with any defined units for column labels. The pattern is initialized as "{1}, {2}", where "{1}" refers to the column label text and "{2}" is the text related to the associated units. When using cols_units(), there is the opportunity to provide a specific pattern that overrides the units pattern unit. Further to this, if specifying units directly in cols_label() (through the units syntax surrounded by "{{"/"}}") there is no need for a units pattern and any value here will be disregarded.

row_group.border.top.style, row_group.border.top.width, row_group.border.top.color, row_group.border.bottom.style, row_group.border.bottom.width, row_group.border.bottom.color, row_group.border.left.style, row_group.border.left.width, row_group.border.left.color, row_group.border.right.style, row_group.border.right.width, row_group.border.right.color

Border properties associated with the row_group location

The style, width, and color properties for all top, bottom, left, and right borders of the row_group location.

row_group.default_label

The default row group label

An option to set a default row group label for any rows not formally placed in a row group named by group in any call of tab_row_group(). If this is set as NA_character_ and there are rows that haven't been placed into a row group (where one or more row groups already exist), those rows will be automatically placed into a row group without a label.

row_group.as_column

Structure row groups with a column

How should row groups be structured? By default, they are separate rows that lie above the each of the groups. Setting this to TRUE will structure row group labels as a separate column in the table stub.

table_body.hlines.style, table_body.hlines.width, table_body.hlines.color, table_body.vlines.style, table_body.vlines.width, table_body.vlines.color

Properties of all horizontal and vertical lines in the table body

The style, width, and color properties for all horizontal lines ('hlines') and vertical lines ('vlines') in the table_body.

table_body.border.top.style, table_body.border.top.width, table_body.border.top.color, table_body.border.bottom.style, table_body.border.bottom.width, table_body.border.bottom.color

Properties of top and bottom borders in the table body

The style, width, and color properties for all top and bottom borders of the table_body location.

stub.border.style, stub.border.width, stub.border.color

Properties of the vertical border of the table stub

The style, width, and color properties for the vertical border of the table stub.

stub.indent_length

Width of each indentation

The width of each indentation level for row labels in the stub. The indentation can be set by using tab_stub_indent(). By default this is "5px".

stub_row_group.font.size, stub_row_group.font.weight, stub_row_group.text_transform, stub_row_group.border.style, stub_row_group.border.width, stub_row_group.border.color

Properties of the row group column in the table stub

Options for the row group column in the table stub (made possible when using row_group.as_column = TRUE). The defaults for these options mirror that of the ⁠stub.*⁠ variants (except for stub_row_group.border.width, which is "1px" instead of "2px").

summary_row.border.style, summary_row.border.width, summary_row.border.color

Properties of horizontal borders belonging to summary rows

The style, width, and color properties for all horizontal borders of the summary_row location.

grand_summary_row.border.style, grand_summary_row.border.width, grand_summary_row.border.color

Properties of horizontal borders belonging to grand summary rows

The style, width, and color properties for the top borders of the grand_summary_row location.

footnotes.border.bottom.style, footnotes.border.bottom.width, footnotes.border.bottom.color

Properties of the bottom border belonging to the footnotes

The style, width, and color properties for the bottom border of the footnotes location.

footnotes.border.lr.style, footnotes.border.lr.width, footnotes.border.lr.color

Properties of left and right borders belonging to the footnotes

The style, width, and color properties for the left and right borders of the footnotes location.

footnotes.marks

Sequence of footnote marks

The set of sequential marks used to reference and identify each of the footnotes (same input as opt_footnote_marks()). We can supply a vector that represents the series of footnote marks. This vector is recycled when its usage goes beyond the length of the set. At each cycle, the marks are simply combined (e.g., * -> ⁠**⁠ -> ⁠***⁠). The option exists for providing keywords for certain types of footnote marks. The keyword "numbers" (the default, indicating that we want to use numeric marks). We can use lowercase "letters" or uppercase "LETTERS". There is the option for using a traditional symbol set where "standard" provides four symbols, and, "extended" adds two more symbols, making six.

footnotes.spec_ref, footnotes.spec_ftr

Specifications for formatting of footnote marks

Optional specifications for formatting of footnote references (footnotes.spec_ref) and their associated marks the footer section (footnotes.spec_ftr) (same input as opt_footnote_spec()). This is a string containing specification control characters. The default is the spec string "^i", which is superscript text set in italics. Other control characters that can be used are: (1) "b" for bold text, and (2) "(" / ")" for the enclosure of footnote marks in parentheses.

footnotes.multiline, source_notes.multiline

Typesetting of multiple footnotes and source notes

An option to either put footnotes and source notes in separate lines (the default, or TRUE) or render them as a continuous line of text with footnotes.sep providing the separator (by default " ") between notes.

footnotes.sep, source_notes.sep

Separator characters between adjacent footnotes and source notes

The separating characters between adjacent footnotes and source notes in their respective footer sections when rendered as a continuous line of text (when footnotes.multiline == FALSE). The default value is a single space character (" ").

source_notes.border.bottom.style, source_notes.border.bottom.width, source_notes.border.bottom.color

Properties of the bottom border belonging to the source notes

The style, width, and color properties for the bottom border of the source_notes location.

source_notes.border.lr.style, source_notes.border.lr.width, source_notes.border.lr.color

Properties of left and right borders belonging to the source notes

The style, width, and color properties for the left and right borders of the source_notes location.

row.striping.background_color

Background color for row stripes

The background color for striped table body rows. A color name or a hexadecimal color code should be provided.

row.striping.include_stub

Inclusion of the table stub for row stripes

An option for whether to include the stub when striping rows.

row.striping.include_table_body

Inclusion of the table body for row stripes

An option for whether to include the table body when striping rows.

container.width, container.height, container.padding.x, container.padding.y

Table container dimensions and padding

The width and height of the table's container, and, the vertical and horizontal padding of the table's container. The container width and height can be specified with units of pixels or as a percentage. The padding is to be specified as a length with units of pixels. If provided as a numeric value, it is assumed that the value is given in units of pixels. The px() and pct() helper functions can also be used to pass in numeric values and obtain values as pixel or percent units.

container.overflow.x, container.overflow.y

Table container overflow

Options to enable scrolling in the horizontal and vertical directions when the table content overflows the container dimensions. Using TRUE (the default for both) means that horizontal or vertical scrolling is enabled to view the entire table in those directions. With FALSE, the table may be clipped if the table width or height exceeds the container.width or container.height.

ihtml.active

Display interactive HTML table

The option for displaying an interactive version of an HTML table (rather than an otherwise 'static' table). This enables the use of controls for pagination, global search, filtering, and sorting. The individual features are controlled by the other ⁠table.*⁠ options. By default, the pagination (ihtml.use_pagination) and sorting (ihtml.use_sorting) features are enabled. The ihtml.active option, however, is FALSE by default.

ihtml.use_pagination, ihtml.use_pagination_info

Use pagination

For interactive HTML output, the option for using pagination controls (below the table body) can be controlled with ihtml.use_pagination. By default, this is TRUE and it will allow the use to page through table content. The informational display text regarding the current page can be set with ihtml.use_pagination_info (which is TRUE by default).

ihtml.use_sorting

Provide column sorting controls

For interactive HTML output, the option to provide controls for sorting column values. By default, this is TRUE.

ihtml.use_search

Provide a global search field

For interactive HTML output, an option that places a search field for globally filtering rows to the requested content. By default, this is FALSE.

ihtml.use_filters

Display filtering fields

For interactive HTML output, this places search fields below each column header and allows for filtering by column. By default, this is FALSE.

ihtml.use_resizers

Allow column resizing

For interactive HTML output, this allows for interactive resizing of columns. By default, this is FALSE.

ihtml.use_highlight

Enable row highlighting on hover

For interactive HTML output, this highlights individual rows upon hover. By default, this is FALSE.

ihtml.use_compact_mode

Use compact mode

For interactive HTML output, an option to reduce vertical padding and thus make the table consume less vertical space. By default, this is FALSE.

ihtml.use_text_wrapping

Use text wrapping

For interactive HTML output, an option to control text wrapping. By default (TRUE), text will be wrapped to multiple lines; if FALSE, text will be truncated to a single line.

ihtml.use_page_size_select, ihtml.page_size_default, ihtml.page_size_values

Change page size properties

For interactive HTML output, ihtml.use_page_size_select provides the option to display a dropdown menu for the number of rows to show per page of data. By default, this is the vector c(10, 25, 50, 100) which corresponds to options for 10, 25, 50, and 100 rows of data per page. To modify these page-size options, provide a numeric vector to ihtml.page_size_values. The default page size (initially set as 10) can be modified with ihtml.page_size_default and this works whether or not ihtml.use_page_size_select is set to TRUE.

ihtml.pagination_type

Change pagination mode

For interactive HTML output and when using pagination, one of three options for presentation pagination controls. The default is "numbers", where a series of page-number buttons is presented along with 'previous' and 'next' buttons. The "jump" option provides an input field with a stepper for the page number. With "simple", only the 'previous' and 'next' buttons are displayed.

page.orientation

Set RTF page orientation

For RTF output, this provides two options for page orientation: "portrait" (the default) and "landscape".

page.numbering

Enable RTF page numbering

Within RTF output, should page numbering be displayed? By default, this is set to FALSE but if TRUE then page numbering text will be added to the document header.

page.header.use_tbl_headings

Place table headings in RTF page header

If TRUE then RTF output tables will migrate all table headings (including the table title and all column labels) to the page header. This page header content will repeat across pages. By default, this is FALSE.

page.footer.use_tbl_notes

Place table footer in RTF page footer

If TRUE then RTF output tables will migrate all table footer content (this includes footnotes and source notes) to the page footer. This page footer content will repeat across pages. By default, this is FALSE.

page.width, page.height

Set RTF page dimensions

The page width and height in the standard portrait orientation. This is for RTF table output and the default values (in inches) are ⁠8.5in⁠ and ⁠11.0in⁠.

page.margin.left, page.margin.right, page.margin.top, page.margin.bottom

Set RTF page margins

For RTF table output, these options correspond to the left, right, top, and bottom page margins. The default values for each of these is ⁠1.0in⁠.

page.header.height, page.footer.height

Set RTF page header and footer distances

The heights of the page header and footer for RTF table outputs. Default values for both are ⁠0.5in⁠.

Value

An object of class gt_group.

Function ID

14-8

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other table group functions: grp_add(), grp_clone(), grp_pull(), grp_replace(), grp_rm(), gt_group(), gt_split()


Pull out a gt table from a gt_group container object

Description

Should you have a gt_group object, created through use of gt_group(), you may have a need to extract a gt table from that container. grp_pull() makes this possible, returning a gt_tbl object. The only thing you need to provide is the index value for the gt table within the gt_group object.

Usage

grp_pull(data, which)

Arguments

data

The gt table group object

⁠obj:<gt_group>⁠ // required

This is a gt_group container object. It is typically generated through use of gt_group() along with one or more gt_tbl objects, or, made by splitting a gt table with gt_split().

which

The table to pull from the group

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // required

A single index value denoting which gt_tbl table should be obtained from the gt_group object.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Function ID

14-3

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other table group functions: grp_add(), grp_clone(), grp_options(), grp_replace(), grp_rm(), gt_group(), gt_split()


Replace one or more gt tables in a gt_group container object

Description

gt_group() can be used to create a container for multiple gt tables. In some circumstances, you might want to replace a specific gt_tbl object (or multiple) with a different one. This can be done with grp_replace(). The important thing is that the number of gt tables provided must equal the number of indices for tables present in the gt_group object.

Usage

grp_replace(.data, ..., .list = list2(...), .which)

Arguments

.data

The gt table group object

⁠obj:<gt_group>⁠ // required

This is a gt_group container object. It is typically generated through use of gt_group() along with one or more gt_tbl objects, or, made by splitting a gt table with gt_split().

...

One or more gt table objects

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required (or, use .list)

One or more gt table (gt_tbl) objects, typically generated via the gt() function.

.list

Alternative to ...

⁠<list of multiple expressions>⁠ // (or, use ...)

Allows for the use of a list as an input alternative to ....

.which

The tables to replace

⁠vector<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A vector of index values denoting which gt tables should be replaced inside of the gt_group object.

Value

An object of class gt_group.

Function ID

14-6

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other table group functions: grp_add(), grp_clone(), grp_options(), grp_pull(), grp_rm(), gt_group(), gt_split()


Remove one or more gt tables from a gt_group container object

Description

A gt_group object, created through use of the gt_group() function, can hold a multiple of gt tables. However, you might want to delete one or more gt_tbl objects table from that container. With grp_rm(), this is possible and safe to perform. What's returned is a gt_group object with the specified gt_tbl objects gone. The only thing you need to provide is the index value for the gt table within the gt_group object.

Usage

grp_rm(data, which)

Arguments

data

The gt table group object

⁠obj:<gt_group>⁠ // required

This is a gt_group container object. It is typically generated through use of gt_group() along with one or more gt_tbl objects, or, made by splitting a gt table with gt_split().

which

The table to remove from the group

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // required

A single index value denoting which gt_tbl table should be removed from the gt_group object.

Value

An object of class gt_group.

Function ID

14-7

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other table group functions: grp_add(), grp_clone(), grp_options(), grp_pull(), grp_replace(), gt_group(), gt_split()


Create a gt table object

Description

The gt() function creates a gt table object when provided with table data. Using this function is the first step in a typical gt workflow. Once we have the gt table object, we can perform styling transformations before rendering to a display table of various formats.

Usage

gt(
  data,
  rowname_col = "rowname",
  groupname_col = dplyr::group_vars(data),
  process_md = FALSE,
  caption = NULL,
  rownames_to_stub = FALSE,
  row_group_as_column = FALSE,
  auto_align = TRUE,
  id = NULL,
  locale = getOption("gt.locale"),
  row_group.sep = getOption("gt.row_group.sep", " - ")
)

Arguments

data

Input data table

⁠obj:<data.frame>|obj:<tbl_df>⁠ // required

A data.frame object or a tibble (tbl_df).

rowname_col

Column for row names/labels from data

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The column name in the input data table to use as row labels to be placed in the table stub. If the rownames_to_stub option is TRUE then any column name provided to rowname_col will be ignored.

groupname_col

Column for group names/labels from data

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The column name in the input data table to use as group labels for generation of row groups. If the input data table has the grouped_df class (through use of dplyr::group_by() or associated ⁠group_by*()⁠ functions) then any input here is ignored.

process_md

Process Markdown in rowname_col and groupname_col

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the contents of the rowname_col and groupname_col be interpreted as Markdown? By default this won't happen.

caption

Table caption text

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional table caption to use for cross-referencing in R Markdown, Quarto, or bookdown.

rownames_to_stub

Use data frame row labels in the stub

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option to take rownames from the input data table (should they be available) as row labels in the display table stub.

row_group_as_column

Mode for displaying row group labels in the stub

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option that alters the display of row group labels. By default this is FALSE and row group labels will appear in dedicated rows above their respective groups of rows. If TRUE row group labels will occupy a secondary column in the table stub.

auto_align

Automatic alignment of column values and labels

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

Optionally have column data be aligned depending on the content contained in each column of the input data. Internally, this calls cols_align(align = "auto") for all columns.

id

The table ID

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

By default (with NULL) this will be a random, ten-letter ID as generated by using random_id(). A custom table ID can be used here by providing a character value.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: getOption("gt.locale") (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be set as the default locale for all functions that take a locale argument. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() as a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported. If set, options(gt.locale) is also consulted.

row_group.sep

Separator text for multiple row group labels

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: getOption("gt.row_group.sep", " - ")

The separator to use between consecutive group names (a possibility when providing data as a grouped_df with multiple groups) in the displayed row group label.

Details

There are a few data ingest options we can consider at this stage. We can choose to create a table stub containing row labels through the use of the rowname_col argument. Further to this, stub row groups can be created with the groupname_col argument. Both arguments take the name of a column in the input table data. Typically, the data in the groupname_col column will consist of categorical text whereas the data in the rowname_col column will contain unique labels (could be unique across the entire table or unique within the different row groups).

Row groups can also be created by passing a grouped_df to gt() by using dplyr::group_by() on the table data. In this way, two or more columns of categorical data can be used to make row groups. The row_group.sep argument allows for control in how the row group labels will appear in the display table.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Let's use the exibble dataset for the next few examples, we'll learn how to make simple gt tables with the gt() function. The most basic thing to do is to just use gt() with the dataset as the input.

exibble |> gt()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `gt()` help file.

This dataset has the row and group columns. The former contains unique values that are ideal for labeling rows, and this often happens in what is called the 'stub' (a reserved area that serves to label rows). With the gt() function, we can immediately place the contents of the row column into the stub column. To do this, we use the rowname_col argument with the name of the column to use in quotes.

exibble |> gt(rowname_col = "row")
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `gt()` help file.

This sets up a table with a stub, the row labels are placed within the stub column, and a vertical dividing line has been placed on the right-hand side.

The group column can be used to divide the rows into discrete groups. Within that column, we see repetitions of the values grp_a and grp_b. These serve both as ID values and the initial label for the groups. With the groupname_col argument in gt(), we can set up the row groups immediately upon creation of the table.

exibble |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "row",
    groupname_col = "group"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `gt()` help file.

If you'd rather perform the set up of row groups later (i.e., not in the gt() call), this is possible with tab_row_group() (and row_group_order() can help with the arrangement of row groups).

One more thing to consider with row groups is their layout. By default, row group labels reside in separate rows the appear above the group. However, we can use row_group_as_column = TRUE to put the row group labels within a secondary column within the table stub.

exibble |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "row",
    groupname_col = "group",
    row_group_as_column = TRUE
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `gt()` help file.

This could be done later if need be, and using tab_options(row_group.as_column = TRUE) would be the way to do it outside of the gt() call.

Some datasets have rownames built in; mtcars famously has the car model names as the rownames. To use those rownames as row labels in the stub, the rownames_to_stub = TRUE option will prove to be useful.

head(mtcars, 10) |> gt(rownames_to_stub = TRUE)
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `gt()` help file.

By default, values in the body of a gt table (and their column labels) are automatically aligned. The alignment is governed by the types of values in a column. If you'd like to disable this form of auto-alignment, the auto_align = FALSE option can be taken.

exibble |> gt(rowname_col = "row", auto_align = FALSE)
This image of a table was generated from the sixth code example in the `gt()` help file.

What you'll get from that is center-alignment of all table body values and all column labels. Note that row labels in the stub are still left-aligned; and auto_align has no effect on alignment within the table stub.

However which way you generate the initial gt table object, you can use it with a huge variety of functions in the package to further customize the presentation. Formatting body cells is commonly done with the family of formatting functions (e.g., fmt_number(), fmt_date(), etc.). The package supports formatting with internationalization ('i18n' features) and so locale-aware functions come with a locale argument. To avoid having to use that argument repeatedly, the gt() function has its own locale argument. Setting a locale in that will make it available globally. Here's an example of how that works in practice when setting locale = "fr" in gt() and using formatting functions:

exibble |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "row",
    groupname_col = "group",
    locale = "fr"
  ) |>
  fmt_number() |>
  fmt_date(
    columns = date,
    date_style = "yMEd"
  ) |>
  fmt_datetime(
    columns = datetime,
    format = "EEEE, MMMM d, y",
    locale = "en"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the seventh code example in the `gt()` help file.

In this example, fmt_number() and fmt_date() understand that the locale for this table is "fr" (French), so the appropriate formatting for that locale is apparent in the num, currency, and date columns. However in fmt_datetime(), we explicitly use the "en" (English) locale. This overrides the "fr" default set for this table and the end result is dates formatted with the English locale in the datetime column.

Function ID

1-1

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other table creation functions: gt_preview()


Create a gt_group container for holding multiple gt table objects

Description

gt_group() creates a container for storage of multiple gt tables. This type of object allows for flexibility in printing multiple tables in different output formats. For example, if printing multiple tables in a paginated output environment (e.g., RTF, Word, etc.), each gt table can be printed independently and table separation (usually a page break) occurs between each of those.

Usage

gt_group(..., .list = list2(...), .use_grp_opts = FALSE)

Arguments

...

One or more gt table data objects

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // (optional)

One or more gt table (gt_tbl) objects, typically generated via the gt() function.

.list

Alternative to ...

⁠<list of multiple expressions>⁠ // (or, use ...)

Allows for the use of a list as an input alternative to ....

.use_grp_opts

Apply options to all contained tables?

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should options specified in the gt_group object be applied to all contained gt tables? By default this is FALSE.

Value

An object of class gt_group.

Function ID

14-1

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other table group functions: grp_add(), grp_clone(), grp_options(), grp_pull(), grp_replace(), grp_rm(), gt_split()


Get the LaTeX dependencies required for a gt table

Description

When working with Rnw (Sweave) files or otherwise writing LaTeX code, including a gt table can be problematic if we don't have knowledge of the LaTeX dependencies. For the most part, these dependencies are the LaTeX packages that are required for rendering a gt table. gt_latex_dependencies() provides an object that can be used to provide the LaTeX in an Rnw file, allowing gt tables to work and not yield errors due to missing packages.

Usage

gt_latex_dependencies()

Details

Here is an example Rnw document that shows how gt_latex_dependencies() can be used in conjunction with a gt table:

%!sweave=knitr

\documentclass{article}

<<echo=FALSE>>=
library(gt)
 @

<<results='asis', echo=FALSE>>=
gt_latex_dependencies()
 @

\begin{document}

<<results='asis', echo=FALSE>>=
gt(exibble)
 @

\end{document}

Value

An object of class knit_asis.

Function ID

8-30

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


Create a gt display table output element for Shiny

Description

Using gt_output() we can render a reactive gt table, a process initiated by using render_gt() in the server component of a Shiny app. gt_output() is to be used in the Shiny ui component, the position and context wherein this call is made determines the where the gt table is rendered on the app page. It's important to note that the ID given during render_gt() is needed as the outputId in gt_output() (e.g., server: ⁠output$<id> <- render_gt(...)⁠; ui: gt_output(outputId = "<id>")).

Usage

gt_output(outputId)

Arguments

outputId

Shiny output ID

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

An output variable from which to read the table.

Value

An object of class shiny.tag.

Examples

Here is a Shiny app (contained within a single file) that (1) prepares a gt table, (2) sets up the ui with gt_output(), and (3) sets up the server with a render_gt() that uses the gt_tbl object as the input expression.

library(shiny)

gt_tbl <-
  gtcars |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_currency(columns = msrp, decimals = 0) |>
  cols_hide(columns = -c(mfr, model, year, mpg_c, msrp)) |>
  cols_label_with(columns = everything(), fn = toupper) |>
  data_color(columns = msrp, method = "numeric", palette = "viridis") |>
  sub_missing() |>
  opt_interactive(use_compact_mode = TRUE)

ui <- fluidPage(
  gt_output(outputId = "table")
)

server <- function(input, output, session) {
  output$table <- render_gt(expr = gt_tbl)
}

shinyApp(ui = ui, server = server)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `render_gt()` help file.

Function ID

12-2

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other Shiny functions: render_gt()


Generate a special gt table for previewing a dataset

Description

Sometimes you may want to see just a small portion of your input data. We can use gt_preview() in place of gt() to get the first x rows of data and the last y rows of data (which can be set by the top_n and bottom_n arguments). It's not advised to use additional gt functions to further modify the output of gt_preview(). Furthermore, you cannot pass a gt object to gt_preview().

Usage

gt_preview(data, top_n = 5, bottom_n = 1, incl_rownums = TRUE)

Arguments

data

Input data table

⁠obj:<data.frame>|obj:<tbl_df>⁠ // required

A data.frame object or a tibble (tbl_df).

top_n

Top n rows to display

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 5

The top_n value will be used as the number of rows from the top of the table to display. The default, 5, will show the first five rows of the table.

bottom_n

Bottom n rows to display

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 1

The bottom_n value will be used as the number of rows from the bottom of the table to display. The default, 1, will show the final row of the table.

incl_rownums

Display row numbers

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to include the row numbers for data in the table stub.

Details

By default, the output table will include row numbers in a stub (including a range of row numbers for the omitted rows). This row numbering option can be deactivated by setting incl_rownums to FALSE.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

With three columns from the gtcars dataset, let's create a gt table preview with the gt_preview() function. You'll get only the first five rows and the last row.

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, year) |>
  gt_preview()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `gt_preview()` help file.

Function ID

1-2

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other table creation functions: gt()


Split a table into a group of tables (a gt_group)

Description

With a gt table, you can split it into multiple tables and get that collection in a gt_group object. This function is useful for those cases where you want to section up a table in a specific way and print those smaller tables across multiple pages (in RTF and Word outputs, primarily via gtsave()), or, with breaks between them when the output context is HTML.

Usage

gt_split(data, row_every_n = NULL, row_slice_i = NULL, col_slice_at = NULL)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

row_every_n

Split at every n rows

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A directive to split at every n number of rows. This argument expects a single numerical value.

row_slice_i

Row-slicing indices

⁠vector<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An argument for splitting at specific row indices. Here, we expect either a vector of index values or a function that evaluates to a numeric vector.

col_slice_at

Column-slicing locations

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Any columns where vertical splitting across should occur. The splits occur to the right of the resolved column names. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

Value

An object of class gt_group.

Examples

Use a subset of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. Format the msrp column to display numbers as currency values, set column widths with cols_width(), and split the table at every five rows with gt_split(). This creates a gt_group object containing two tables. Printing this object yields two tables separated by a line break.

gtcars |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, year, msrp) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_currency(columns = msrp) |>
  cols_width(
    year ~ px(80),
    everything() ~ px(150)
  ) |>
  gt_split(row_every_n = 5)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `gt_split()` help file.

Use a smaller subset of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. Format the msrp column to display numbers as currency values, set the table width with tab_options() and split the table at the model column This creates a gt_group object again containing two tables but this time we get a vertical split. Printing this object yields two tables of the same width.

gtcars |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 5) |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, year, msrp) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_currency(columns = msrp) |>
  tab_options(table.width = px(400)) |>
  gt_split(col_slice_at = "model")
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `gt_split()` help file.

Function ID

14-2

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other table group functions: grp_add(), grp_clone(), grp_options(), grp_pull(), grp_replace(), grp_rm(), gt_group()


Deluxe automobiles from the 2014-2017 period

Description

Expensive and fast cars. Not your father's mtcars. Each row describes a car of a certain make, model, year, and trim. Basic specifications such as horsepower, torque, EPA MPG ratings, type of drivetrain, and transmission characteristics are provided. The country of origin for the car manufacturer is also given.

Usage

gtcars

Format

A tibble with 47 rows and 15 variables:

mfr

The name of the car manufacturer.

model

The car's model name.

year

The car's model year.

trim

A short description of the car model's trim.

bdy_style

An identifier of the car's body style, which is either "coupe", "convertible", "sedan", or "hatchback".

hp, hp_rpm

The car's horsepower and the associated RPM level.

trq, trq_rpm

The car's torque and the associated RPM level.

mpg_c, mpg_h

The miles per gallon fuel efficiency rating for city and highway driving.

drivetrain

The car's drivetrain which, for this dataset, is either "rwd" (Rear Wheel Drive) or "awd" (All Wheel Drive).

trsmn

An encoding of the transmission type, where the number part is the number of gears. The car could have automatic transmission ("a"), manual transmission ("m"), an option to switch between both types ("am"), or, direct drive ("dd")

ctry_origin

The country name for where the vehicle manufacturer is headquartered.

msrp

Manufacturer's suggested retail price in U.S. dollars (USD).

Details

All of the gtcars have something else in common (aside from the high asking prices): they are all grand tourer vehicles. These are proper GT cars that blend pure driving thrills with a level of comfort that is more expected from a fine limousine (e.g., a Rolls-Royce Phantom EWB). You'll find that, with these cars, comfort is emphasized over all-out performance. Nevertheless, the driving experience should also mean motoring at speed, doing so in style and safety.

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-3

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, exibble, films, gibraltar, illness, metro, nuclides, peeps, photolysis, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sp500, sza, towny

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(gtcars)

Save a gt table as a file

Description

gtsave() makes it easy to save a gt table to a file. The function guesses the file type by the extension provided in the output filename, producing either an HTML, PDF, PNG, LaTeX, RTF, or Word (.docx) file.

Usage

gtsave(data, filename, path = NULL, ...)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

filename

Output filename

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

The file name to create on disk. Ensure that an extension compatible with the output types is provided (.html, .tex, .ltx, .rtf, .docx). If a custom save function is provided then the file extension is disregarded.

path

Output path

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional path to which the file should be saved (combined with filename).

...

Additional options

⁠<named arguments>⁠

All other options passed to the appropriate internal saving function.

Details

Output filenames with either the .html or .htm extensions will produce an HTML document. In this case, we can pass a TRUE or FALSE value to the inline_css option to obtain an HTML document with inlined CSS styles (the default is FALSE). More details on CSS inlining are available at as_raw_html(). We can pass values to arguments in htmltools::save_html() through the .... Those arguments are either background or libdir, please refer to the htmltools documentation for more details on the use of these arguments.

If the output filename is expressed with the .rtf extension then an RTF file will be generated. In this case, there is an option that can be passed through ...: page_numbering. This controls RTF document page numbering and, by default, page numbering is not enabled (i.e., page_numbering = "none").

We can create an image file based on the HTML version of the gt table. With the filename extension .png, we get a PNG image file. A PDF document can be generated by using the .pdf extension. This process is facilitated by the webshot2 package, so, this package needs to be installed before attempting to save any table as an image file. There is the option of passing values to the underlying webshot2::webshot() function through .... Some of the more useful arguments for PNG saving are zoom (defaults to a scale level of 2) and expand (adds whitespace pixels around the cropped table image, and has a default value of 5), and selector (the default value is "table"). There are several more options available so have a look at the webshot2 documentation for further details.

If the output filename extension is either of .tex, .ltx, or .rnw, a LaTeX document is produced. An output filename of .rtf will generate an RTF document. The LaTeX and RTF saving functions don't have any options to pass to ....

If the output filename extension is .docx, a Word document file is produced. This process is facilitated by the rmarkdown package, so this package needs to be installed before attempting to save any table as a .docx document.

Value

The file name (invisibly) if the export process is successful.

Examples

Using a small subset of the gtcars dataset, we can create a gt table with row labels. We'll add a stubhead label with the tab_stubhead() function to describe what is in the stub.

tab_1 <-
  gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(model, year, hp, trq) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:5) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "model") |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "car")

Export the gt table to an HTML file with inlined CSS (which is necessary for including the table as part of an HTML email) using gtsave() and the inline_css = TRUE option.

tab_1 |> gtsave(filename = "tab_1.html", inline_css = TRUE)

By leaving out the inline_css option, we get a more conventional HTML file with embedded CSS styles.

tab_1 |> gtsave(filename = "tab_1.html")

Saving as a PNG file results in a cropped image of an HTML table. The amount of whitespace can be set with the expand option.

tab_1 |> gtsave("tab_1.png", expand = 10)

Any use of the .tex, .ltx, or .rnw will result in the output of a LaTeX document.

tab_1 |> gtsave("tab_1.tex")

With the .rtf extension, we'll get an RTF document.

tab_1 |> gtsave("tab_1.rtf")

With the .docx extension, we'll get a word/docx document.

tab_1 |> gtsave("tab_1.docx")

Function ID

13-1

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other table export functions: as_gtable(), as_latex(), as_raw_html(), as_rtf(), as_word(), extract_body(), extract_cells(), extract_summary()


Interpret input text as HTML-formatted text

Description

For certain pieces of text (like in column labels or table headings) we may want to express them as raw HTML. In fact, with HTML, anything goes so it can be much more than just text. The html() function will guard the input HTML against escaping, so, your HTML tags will come through as HTML when rendered... to HTML.

Usage

html(text, ...)

Arguments

text

HTML text

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

The text that is understood to be HTML text, which is to be preserved in the HTML output context.

...

Optional parameters for htmltools::HTML()

⁠<multiple expressions>⁠ // (optional)

The htmltools::HTML() function contains ... and anything provided here will be passed to that internal function call.

Value

A character object of class html. It's tagged as an HTML fragment that is not to be sanitized.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table. When adding a title through tab_header(), we'll use the html() helper to signify to gt that we're using HTML formatting.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(currency, char) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(title = html("<em>HTML</em>"))
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `html()` help file.

Function ID

8-2

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


Lab tests for one suffering from an illness

Description

A dataset with artificial daily lab data for a patient with Yellow Fever (YF). The table comprises laboratory findings for the patient from day 3 of illness onset until day 9 (after which the patient died). YF viral DNA was found in serum samples from day 3, where the viral load reached 14,000 copies per mL. Several medical interventions were taken to help the patient, including the administration of fresh frozen plasma, platelets, red cells, and coagulation factor VIII. The patient also received advanced support treatment in the form of mechanical ventilation and plasmapheresis. Though the patient's temperature remained stable during their illness, unfortunately, the patient's condition did not improve. On days 7 and 8, the patient's health declined further, with symptoms such as nosebleeds, gastrointestinal bleeding, and hematoma.

Usage

illness

Format

A tibble with 39 rows and 11 variables:

test

The name of the test.

units

The measurement units for the test.

day_3,day_4,day_5,day_6,day_7,day_8,day_9

Measurement values associated with each test administered from days 3 to 9. An NA value indicates that the test could not be performed that day.

norm_l,norm_u

Lower and upper bounds for the normal range associated with the test.

Details

The various tests are identified in the test column. The following listing provides the full names of any abbreviations seen in that column.

  • "WBC": white blood cells.

  • "RBC": red blood cells.

  • "Hb": hemoglobin.

  • "PLT": platelets.

  • "ALT": alanine aminotransferase.

  • "AST": aspartate aminotransferase.

  • "TBIL": total bilirubin.

  • "DBIL": direct bilirubin.

  • "NH3": hydrogen nitride.

  • "PT": prothrombin time.

  • "APTT": activated partial thromboplastin time.

  • "PTA": prothrombin time activity.

  • "DD": D-dimer.

  • "FDP": fibrinogen degradation products.

  • "LDH": lactate dehydrogenase.

  • "HBDH": hydroxybutyrate dehydrogenase.

  • "CK": creatine kinase.

  • "CKMB": the MB fraction of creatine kinase.

  • "BNP": B-type natriuetic peptide.

  • "MYO": myohemoglobin.

  • "TnI": troponin inhibitory.

  • "CREA": creatinine.

  • "BUN": blood urea nitrogen.

  • "AMY": amylase.

  • "LPS": lipase.

  • "K": kalium.

  • "Na": sodium.

  • "Cl": chlorine.

  • "Ca": calcium.

  • "P": phosphorus.

  • "Lac": lactate, blood.

  • "CRP": c-reactive protein.

  • "PCT": procalcitonin.

  • "IL-6": interleukin-6.

  • "CD3+CD4+": CD4+T lymphocytes.

  • "CD3+CD8+": CD8+T lymphocytes.

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-13

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.10.0 (October 7, 2023)

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, exibble, films, gibraltar, gtcars, metro, nuclides, peeps, photolysis, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sp500, sza, towny

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(illness)

View a table with info on supported currencies

Description

fmt_currency() lets us format numeric values as currencies. The table generated by info_currencies() provides a quick reference to all the available currencies. The currency identifiers are provided (name, 3-letter currency code, and 3-digit currency code) along with the each currency's exponent value (number of digits of the currency subunits). A formatted example is provided (based on the value of 49.95) to demonstrate the default formatting of each currency.

Usage

info_currencies(type = c("code", "symbol"), begins_with = NULL)

Arguments

type

Type of currency

⁠singl-kw:[code|symbol]⁠ // default: "code"

The type of currency information provided. Can either be "code" where currency information corresponding to 3-letter/3-number currency codes is provided, or "symbol" where currency info for common currency names/symbols (e.g., dollar, pound, yen, etc.) is returned.

begins_with

Show currencies beginning with a specific letter

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Providing a single letter will filter currencies to only those that begin with that letter in their currency code. The default (NULL) will produce a table with all currencies displayed. This option only constrains the information table where type == "code".

Details

There are 172 currencies, which can lead to a verbose display table. To make this presentation more focused on retrieval, we can provide an initial letter corresponding to the 3-letter currency code to begins_with. This will filter currencies in the info table to just the set beginning with the supplied letter.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Get a table of info on all of the currencies where the three-letter code begins with an "h".

info_currencies(begins_with = "h")
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `info_currencies()` help file.

Get a table of info on all of the common currency name/symbols that can be used with fmt_currency().

info_currencies(type = "symbol")
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `info_currencies()` help file.

Function ID

11-3

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other information functions: info_date_style(), info_flags(), info_google_fonts(), info_icons(), info_locales(), info_paletteer(), info_time_style(), info_unit_conversions()


View a table with info on date styles

Description

fmt_date() lets us format date-based values in a convenient manner using preset styles. The table generated by info_date_style() provides a quick reference to all styles, with associated format names and example outputs using a fixed date (2000-02-29).

Usage

info_date_style(locale = NULL)

Arguments

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for displaying formatted date values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Get a table of info on the different date-formatting styles (which are used by supplying a number code to fmt_date()).

info_date_style()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `info_date_style()` help file.

Function ID

11-1

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other information functions: info_currencies(), info_flags(), info_google_fonts(), info_icons(), info_locales(), info_paletteer(), info_time_style(), info_unit_conversions()


View a table with all available flags for fmt_flag()

Description

fmt_flag() can be used to render flag icons within body cells that have 2-letter country codes. There are a lot of countries, so, calling info_flags() can be helpful in showing all of the valid and supported country codes along with their flag icons.

Usage

info_flags()

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Get a table of info on all the available flag icons.

info_flags()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `info_flags()` help file.

Function ID

11-7

Function Introduced

v0.10.0 (October 7, 2023)

See Also

Other information functions: info_currencies(), info_date_style(), info_google_fonts(), info_icons(), info_locales(), info_paletteer(), info_time_style(), info_unit_conversions()


View a table on recommended Google Fonts

Description

The google_font() helper function can be used wherever a font name should be specified. There are two instances where this helper can be used: the name argument in opt_table_font() (for setting a table font) and in that of cell_text() (used with tab_style()). Because there is an overwhelming number of fonts available in the Google Fonts catalog, the info_google_fonts() provides a table with a set of helpful font recommendations. These fonts look great in the different parts of a gt table. Why? For the most part they are suitable for body text, having large counters, large x-height, reasonably low contrast, and open apertures. These font features all make for high legibility at smaller sizes.

Usage

info_google_fonts()

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Get a table of info on some of the recommended Google Fonts for tables.

info_google_fonts()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `info_google_fonts()` help file.

Function ID

11-6

Function Introduced

v0.2.2 (August 5, 2020)

See Also

Other information functions: info_currencies(), info_date_style(), info_flags(), info_icons(), info_locales(), info_paletteer(), info_time_style(), info_unit_conversions()


View a table with all available Font Awesome icons for fmt_icon()

Description

fmt_icon() can be used to render Font Awesome icons within body cells that reference the icon names. Further to this, the text transformation functions (e.g., text_case_match()) allow for the insertion of these icons as replacement text (so long as you use the fa() function from the fontawesome package). Because there is a very large number of icons available to use in Font Awesome, info_icons() can be used to provide us with a table that lists all the icons along with their short and full names (either can be used with fmt_icon()). It also contains acceptable codes for fmt_country()

Usage

info_icons()

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Get a table of info on all the available Font Awesome icons.

info_icons()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `info_icons()` help file.

Function ID

11-8

Function Introduced

v0.10.0 (October 7, 2023)

See Also

Other information functions: info_currencies(), info_date_style(), info_flags(), info_google_fonts(), info_locales(), info_paletteer(), info_time_style(), info_unit_conversions()


View a table with info on supported locales

Description

Many of the ⁠fmt_*()⁠ functions have a locale argument that makes locale-based formatting easier. The table generated by the info_locales() function provides a quick reference to all the available locales. The locale identifiers are provided (base locale ID, common display name) along with the each locale's group and decimal separator marks. A formatted numeric example is provided (based on the value of 11027) to demonstrate the default formatting of each locale.

Usage

info_locales(begins_with = NULL)

Arguments

begins_with

Show locales beginning with a specific letter

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Providing a single letter will filter locales to only those that begin with that letter in their locale ID. The default (NULL) will produce a table with all locales displayed

Details

There are 574 locales, which means that a very long display table is provided by default. To trim down the output table size, we can provide an initial letter corresponding to the base locale ID to begins_with. This will filter locales in the info table to just the set that begins with the supplied letter.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Get a table of info on all of the locales supported by gt.

info_locales()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `info_locales()` help file.

Function ID

11-4

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other information functions: info_currencies(), info_date_style(), info_flags(), info_google_fonts(), info_icons(), info_paletteer(), info_time_style(), info_unit_conversions()


View a table with info on color palettes

Description

While data_color() allows us to flexibly color data cells in our gt table, the harder part of this process is discovering and choosing color palettes that are suitable for the table output. We can make this process much easier in two ways: (1) by using the paletteer package, which makes a wide range of palettes from various R packages readily available, and (2) calling info_paletteer() to give us an information table that serves as a quick reference for all of the discrete color palettes available in paletteer.

Usage

info_paletteer(color_pkgs = NULL)

Arguments

color_pkgs

Filter to specific color packages

⁠vector<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A vector of color packages that determines which sets of palettes should be displayed in the information table. If this is NULL (the default) then all of the discrete palettes from all of the color packages represented in paletteer will be displayed.

Details

The palettes displayed are organized by package and by palette name. These values are required when obtaining a palette (as a vector of hexadecimal colors), from paletteer::paletteer_d(). Once we are familiar with the names of the color palette packages (e.g., RColorBrewer, ggthemes, wesanderson), we can narrow down the content of this information table by supplying a vector of such package names to color_pkgs.

Colors from the following color packages (all supported by paletteer) are shown by default with info_paletteer():

  • awtools, 5 palettes

  • dichromat, 17 palettes

  • dutchmasters, 6 palettes

  • ggpomological, 2 palettes

  • ggsci, 42 palettes

  • ggthemes, 31 palettes

  • ghibli, 27 palettes

  • grDevices, 1 palette

  • jcolors, 13 palettes

  • LaCroixColoR, 21 palettes

  • NineteenEightyR, 12 palettes

  • nord, 16 palettes

  • ochRe, 16 palettes

  • palettetown, 389 palettes

  • pals, 8 palettes

  • Polychrome, 7 palettes

  • quickpalette, 17 palettes

  • rcartocolor, 34 palettes

  • RColorBrewer, 35 palettes

  • Redmonder, 41 palettes

  • wesanderson, 19 palettes

  • yarrr, 21 palettes

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Get a table of info on just the "ggthemes" color palette (easily accessible from the paletteer package).

info_paletteer(color_pkgs = "ggthemes")
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `info_paletteer()` help file.

Function ID

11-5

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other information functions: info_currencies(), info_date_style(), info_flags(), info_google_fonts(), info_icons(), info_locales(), info_time_style(), info_unit_conversions()


View a table with info on time styles

Description

fmt_time() lets us format time-based values in a convenient manner using preset styles. The table generated by info_time_style() provides a quick reference to all styles, with associated format names and example outputs using a fixed time (14:35).

Usage

info_time_style(locale = NULL)

Arguments

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for displaying formatted time values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Get a table of info on the different time-formatting styles (which are used by supplying a number code to fmt_time()).

info_time_style()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `info_time_style()` help file.

Function ID

11-2

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other information functions: info_currencies(), info_date_style(), info_flags(), info_google_fonts(), info_icons(), info_locales(), info_paletteer(), info_unit_conversions()


View a table with all units that can be converted by unit_conversion()

Description

unit_conversion() can be used to yield conversion factors across compatible pairs of units. This is useful for expressing values in different units and the conversion can be performed via the scale_by argument available in several formatting functions. When calling unit_conversion(), one must supply two string-based keywords to specify the value's current units and the desired units. All of these keywords are provided in the table shown by calling info_unit_conversions().

Usage

info_unit_conversions()

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Get a table of info on all the available keywords for unit conversions.

info_unit_conversions()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `info_unit_conversions()` help file.

Function ID

11-9

Function Introduced

v0.11.0 (July 9, 2024)

See Also

Other information functions: info_currencies(), info_date_style(), info_flags(), info_google_fonts(), info_icons(), info_locales(), info_paletteer(), info_time_style()


Helper function for adding a local image

Description

We can flexibly add a local image (i.e., an image residing on disk) inside of a table with local_image() function. The function provides a convenient way to generate an HTML fragment using an on-disk PNG or SVG. Because this function is currently HTML-based, it is only useful for HTML table output. To use this function inside of data cells, it is recommended to use text_transform() first. With that function, we can specify which data cells to target and then include a local_image() call within the required user-defined function (for the fn argument). If we want to include an image in other places (e.g., in the header, within footnote text, etc.) we need to use local_image() within the html() helper function.

By itself, the function creates an HTML image tag with an image URI embedded within. We can easily experiment with a local PNG or SVG image that's available in the gt package using the test_image() function. Using that, the call local_image(file = test_image(type = "png")) evaluates to:

⁠<img src=<data URI> style=\"height:30px;\">⁠

where a height of ⁠30px⁠ is a default height chosen to work well within the heights of most table rows.

Usage

local_image(filename, height = 30)

Arguments

filename

Path to image file

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

A local path to an image file on disk.

height

Height of image

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 30

The absolute height of the image in the table cell (in "px" units). By default, this is set to "30px".

Value

A character object with an HTML fragment that can be placed inside of a cell.

Examples

Create a tibble that contains heights of an image in pixels (one column as a string, the other as numerical values), then, create a gt table. Use text_transform() to insert a local test image (PNG) image with the various sizes.

dplyr::tibble(
  pixels = px(seq(10, 35, 5)),
  image = seq(10, 35, 5)
) |>
  gt() |>
  text_transform(
    locations = cells_body(columns = image),
    fn = function(x) {
      local_image(
        filename = test_image(type = "png"),
        height = as.numeric(x)
      )
    }
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `local_image()` help file.

Function ID

9-2

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other image addition functions: ggplot_image(), test_image(), web_image()


Localize formatting and symbols

Description

Localize formatting and symbols

Specify locale

gt(), some ⁠cols_*()⁠ and ⁠fmt_*()⁠ functions have a locale argument. You can pass locale as a 2 letters string or 4. (e.g. "fr" for French, "pt-BR" for Brazilian Portuguese). gt also resolves different spellings internally as much as possible. For example "en_GB" will work out of the box.

Range of action of locale

One of the advantage of using gt its consistency in using symbols and currencies in multiple languages

There are two ways to localize your results with gt.

  • Passing it globally gt(locale = "<locale>")

Will localize everything possible in the gt() pipeline.

Will only affect the output of one specific function (or override global setting).

locale has very low precedence usually. As soon as you override some parameters, sep_mark, dec_mark, incl_space, they will be override locale.

See Also

info_locales(), info_flags()

Examples

# The Spanish locale uses `.` as thousands sep (English uses ,), and
# uses , as the decimal mark

# Using the locale in gt() will format automatically all output in subsequent
# fmt_*() calls.
exibble %>%
  gt(locale = "es-AR") %>%
  fmt_number()

# Only format currency as mexican peso

exibble %>%
  gt(locale = "fr") %>%
  fmt_currency(currency, locale = "es-MX")

# will use sep_mark provided
exibble %>%
  gt(locale = "fr") %>%
  fmt_currency(currency, sep_mark = "", locale = "es-MX")
# Use your imagination, and mix and match.

Interpret input text as Markdown-formatted text

Description

Markdown text can be used in certain places in a gt table, and this is wherever new text is defined (e.g., footnotes, source notes, the table title, etc.). Using Markdown is advantageous for styling text since it will be rendered correctly to the output format of the gt table. There is also the html() helper that allows you use HTML exclusively (for tables expressly meant for HTML output) but md() allows for both; you get to use Markdown plus any HTML fragments at the same time.

Usage

md(text)

Arguments

text

Markdown text

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

The text that is understood to contain Markdown formatting.

Value

A character object of class from_markdown. It's tagged as being Markdown text and it will undergo conversion to the desired output context.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table. When adding a title through tab_header(), we'll use the md() helper to signify to gt that we're using Markdown formatting.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(currency, char) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(title = md("Using *Markdown*"))
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `md()` help file.

Function ID

8-1

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


The stations of the Paris Metro

Description

A dataset with information on all 320 Paris Metro stations as of June 2024. Each record represents a station, describing which Metro lines are serviced by the station, which other connections are available, and annual passenger volumes. Basic location information is provided for each station in terms of where they reside on a municipal level, and, through latitude/longitude coordinate values.

The system has 16 lines (numbered from 1 to 14, with two additional lines: 3bis and 7bis) and covers over 200 kilometers of track. The Metro runs on standard gauge tracks (1,435 mm) and operates using a variety of rolling stock, including rubber-tired trains and steel-wheeled trains (which are far more common).

The Metro is operated by the RATP, which also operates other transit systems in the region, including buses, trams, and the RER. The RER is an important component of the region's transit infrastructure, and several RER stations have connectivity with the Metro. This integration allows passengers to transfer between those two systems seamlessly. The Metro also has connections to the Transilien rail network, tramway stations, several major train stations (e.g., Gare du Nord, Gare de l'Est, etc.), and many bus lines.

Usage

metro

Format

A tibble with 320 rows and 11 variables:

name

The name of the station.

caption

In some cases, a station will have a caption that might describe a nearby place of interest. This is NA if there isn't a caption for the station name.

lines

All Metro lines associated with the station. This is a character-based, comma-separated series of line names.

connect_rer

Station connections with the RER. The RER system has five lines (A, B, C, D, and E) with 257 stations and several interchanges with the Metro.

connect_tram

Connections with tramway lines. This system has twelve lines in operation (T1, T2, T3a, T3b, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T11, and T13) with 235 stations.

connect_transilien

Connections with Transilien lines. This system has eight lines in operation (H, J, K, L, N, P, R, and U).

connect_other

Other connections with transportation infrastructure such as regional, intercity, night, and high-speed trains (typically at railway stations).

latitude, longitude

The location of the station, given as latitude and longitude values in decimal degrees.

location

The arrondissement of Paris or municipality in which the station resides. For some stations located at borders, the grouping of locations will be presented as a comma-separated series

passengers

The total number of Metro station entries during 2021. Some of the newest stations in the Metro system do not have this data, thus they show NA values.

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-10

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, exibble, films, gibraltar, gtcars, illness, nuclides, peeps, photolysis, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sp500, sza, towny

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(metro)

Supply nanoplot options to cols_nanoplot()

Description

When using cols_nanoplot(), the defaults for the generated nanoplots can be modified with nanoplot_options() within the options argument.

Usage

nanoplot_options(
  data_point_radius = NULL,
  data_point_stroke_color = NULL,
  data_point_stroke_width = NULL,
  data_point_fill_color = NULL,
  data_line_type = NULL,
  data_line_stroke_color = NULL,
  data_line_stroke_width = NULL,
  data_area_fill_color = NULL,
  data_bar_stroke_color = NULL,
  data_bar_stroke_width = NULL,
  data_bar_fill_color = NULL,
  data_bar_negative_stroke_color = NULL,
  data_bar_negative_stroke_width = NULL,
  data_bar_negative_fill_color = NULL,
  reference_line_color = NULL,
  reference_area_fill_color = NULL,
  vertical_guide_stroke_color = NULL,
  vertical_guide_stroke_width = NULL,
  show_data_points = NULL,
  show_data_line = NULL,
  show_data_area = NULL,
  show_reference_line = NULL,
  show_reference_area = NULL,
  show_vertical_guides = NULL,
  show_y_axis_guide = NULL,
  interactive_data_values = NULL,
  y_val_fmt_fn = NULL,
  y_axis_fmt_fn = NULL,
  y_ref_line_fmt_fn = NULL,
  currency = NULL
)

Arguments

data_point_radius

Radius of data points

⁠scalar<numeric>|vector<numeric>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The data_point_radius option lets you set the radius for each of the data points. By default this is set to 10. Individual radius values can be set by using a vector of numeric values; however, the vector provided must match the number of data points.

data_point_stroke_color

Color of data points

⁠scalar<character>|vector<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The default stroke color of the data points is "#FFFFFF" ("white"). This works well when there is a visible data line combined with data points with a darker fill color. The stroke color can be modified with data_point_stroke_color for all data points by supplying a single color value. With a vector of colors, each data point's stroke color can be changed (ensure that the vector length matches the number of data points).

data_point_stroke_width

Width of surrounding line on data points

⁠scalar<numeric>|vector<numeric>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The width of the outside stroke for the data points can be modified with the data_point_stroke_width option. By default, a value of 4 (as in '4px') is used.

data_point_fill_color

Fill color for data points

⁠scalar<character>|vector<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

By default, all data points have a fill color of "#FF0000" ("red"). This can be changed for all data points by providing a different color to data_point_fill_color. And, a vector of different colors can be supplied so long as the length is equal to the number of data points; the fill color values will be applied in order of left to right.

data_line_type

Type of data line: curved or straight

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

This can accept either "curved" or "straight". Curved lines are recommended when the nanoplot has less than 30 points and data points are evenly spaced. In most other cases, straight lines might present better.

data_line_stroke_color

Color of the data line

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The color of the data line can be modified from its default "#4682B4" ("steelblue") color by supplying a color to the data_line_stroke_color option.

data_line_stroke_width

Width of the data line

⁠scalar<numeric>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The width of the connecting data line can be modified with the data_line_stroke_width option. By default, a value of 4 (as in '4px') is used.

data_area_fill_color

Fill color for the data-point-bounded area

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The fill color for the area that bounds the data points in line plot. The default is "#FF0000" ("red") but can be changed by providing a color value to data_area_fill_color.

data_bar_stroke_color

Color of a data bar's outside line

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The color of the stroke used for the data bars can be modified from its default "#3290CC" color by supplying a color to the data_bar_stroke_color option.

data_bar_stroke_width

Width of a data bar's outside line

⁠scalar<numeric>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The width of the stroke used for the data bars can be modified with the data_bar_stroke_width option. By default, a value of 4 (as in '4px') is used.

data_bar_fill_color

Fill color for data bars

⁠scalar<character>|vector<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

By default, all data bars have a fill color of "#3FB5FF". This can be changed for all data bars by providing a different color to data_bar_fill_color. And, a vector of different colors can be supplied so long as the length is equal to the number of data bars; the fill color values will be applied in order of left to right.

data_bar_negative_stroke_color

Stroke color for negative values

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The color of the stroke used for the data bars that have negative values. The default color is "#CC3243" but this can be changed by supplying a color value to the data_bar_negative_stroke_color option.

data_bar_negative_stroke_width

Stroke width for negative values

⁠scalar<numeric>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The width of the stroke used for negative value data bars. This has the same default as data_bar_stroke_width with a value of 4 (as in '4px'). This can be changed by giving a numeric value to the data_bar_negative_stroke_width option.

data_bar_negative_fill_color

Fill color for negative values

⁠scalar<character>|vector<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

By default, all negative data bars have a fill color of "#D75A68". This can however be changed by providing a color value to the data_bar_negative_fill_color option.

reference_line_color

Color for the reference line

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The reference line will have a color of "#75A8B0" if it is set to appear. This color can be changed by providing a single color value to reference_line_color.

reference_area_fill_color

Fill color for the reference area

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

If a reference area has been defined and is visible it has by default a fill color of "#A6E6F2". This can be modified by declaring a color value in the reference_area_fill_color option.

vertical_guide_stroke_color

Color of vertical guides

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Vertical guides appear when hovering in the vicinity of data points. Their default color is "#911EB4" (a strong magenta color) and a fill opacity value of 0.4 is automatically applied to this. However, the base color can be changed with the vertical_guide_stroke_color option.

vertical_guide_stroke_width

Line widths for vertical guides

⁠scalar<numeric>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The vertical guide's stroke width, by default, is relatively large at 12 (this is '12px'). This is modifiable by setting a different value with the vertical_guide_stroke_width option.

show_data_points

Should the data points be shown?

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

By default, all data points in a nanoplot are shown but this layer can be hidden by setting show_data_points to FALSE.

show_data_line

Should a data line be shown?

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The data line connects data points together and it is shown by default. This data line layer can be hidden by setting show_data_line to FALSE.

show_data_area

Should a data-point-bounded area be shown?

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The data area layer is adjacent to the data points and the data line. It is shown by default but can be hidden with show_data_area = FALSE.

show_reference_line

Should a reference line be shown?

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The layer with a horizontal reference line appears underneath that of the data points and the data line. Like vertical guides, hovering over a reference will show its value. The reference line (if available) is shown by default but can be hidden by setting show_reference_line to FALSE.

show_reference_area

Should a reference area be shown?

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The reference area appears at the very bottom of the layer stack, if it is available (i.e., defined in cols_nanoplot()). It will be shown in the default case but can be hidden by using show_reference_area = FALSE.

show_vertical_guides

Should there be vertical guides?

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Vertical guides appear when hovering over data points. This hidden layer is active by default but can be deactivated by using show_vertical_guides = FALSE.

show_y_axis_guide

Should there be a y-axis guide?

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The y-axis guide will appear when hovering over the far left side of a nanoplot. This hidden layer is active by default but can be deactivated by using show_y_axis_guide = FALSE.

interactive_data_values

Should data values be interactively shown?

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

By default, numeric data values will be shown only when the user interacts with certain regions of a nanoplot. This is because the values may be numerous (i.e., clutter the display when all are visible) and it can be argued that the values themselves are secondary to the presentation. However, for some types of plots (like horizontal bar plots), a persistent display of values alongside the plot marks may be desirable. By setting interactive_data_values = FALSE we can opt for always displaying the data values alongside the plot components.

y_val_fmt_fn, y_axis_fmt_fn, y_ref_line_fmt_fn

Custom formatting for y values

function // default: NULL (optional)

If providing a function to y_val_fmt_fn, y_axis_fmt_fn, or y_ref_line_fmt_fn then customized formatting of the y values associated with the data points/bars, the y-axis labels, and the reference line can be performed.

currency

Define values as currencies of a specific type

⁠scalar<character>|obj:<gt_currency>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

If the values are to be displayed as currency values, supply either: (1) a 3-letter currency code (e.g., "USD" for U.S. Dollars, "EUR" for the Euro currency), (2) a common currency name (e.g., "dollar", "pound", "yen", etc.), or (3) an invocation of the currency() helper function for specifying a custom currency (where the string could vary across output contexts). Use info_currencies() to get an information table with all of the valid currency codes, and examples of each, for the first two cases.

Value

A list object of class nanoplot_options.

Function ID

8-8

Function Introduced

v0.10.0 (October 7, 2023)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


Nuclide data

Description

The nuclides dataset contains information on all known nuclides, providing data on nuclear structure and decay modes across 118 elements. There is data here on natural abundances, atomic mass, spin, half-life, and more. The typical users for such a dataset include researchers in fields such as nuclear physics, radiochemistry, and nuclear medicine.

Usage

nuclides

Format

A tibble with 3,383 rows and 29 variables:

nuclide

The symbol for the nuclide.

z, n

The number of protons and neutrons.

element

The element symbol.

radius, radius_uncert

The charge radius and its associated uncertainty. In units of fm.

abundance, abundance_uncert

The abundance of the stable isotope as a mole fraction (in relation to other stable isotopes of the same element). Values are provided for the nuclide only if is_stable is TRUE.

is_stable

Is the nuclide a stable isotope?

half_life, half_life_uncert

The nuclide's half life represented as seconds.

isospin

The isospin, or the quantum number related to the up and down quark content of the particle.

decay_1, decay_2, decay_3

The 1st, 2nd, and 3rd decay modes.

decay_1_pct, decay_1_pct_uncert, decay_2_pct, decay_2_pct_uncert, decay_3_pct, decay_3_pct_uncert

The branching proportions for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd decays (along with uncertainty values).

magnetic_dipole, magnetic_dipole_uncert

The magnetic dipole and its associated uncertainty. Expressed in units of micro N, or nuclear magneton values.

electric_quadrupole, electric_quadrupole_uncert

The electric quadrupole and its associated uncertainty. In units of barn (b).

atomic_mass, atomic_mass_uncert

The atomic mass and its associated uncertainty. In units of micro AMU.

mass_excess, mass_excess_uncert

The mass excess and its associated uncertainty. In units of keV.

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-16

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.11.0 (July 9, 2024)

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, exibble, films, gibraltar, gtcars, illness, metro, peeps, photolysis, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sp500, sza, towny

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(nuclides)

Option to align the table header

Description

By default, a table header added to a gt table has center alignment for both the title and the subtitle elements. This function allows us to easily set the horizontal alignment of the title and subtitle to the left or right by using the "align" argument. This function serves as a convenient shortcut for ⁠<gt_tbl> |> tab_options(heading.align = <align>)⁠.

Usage

opt_align_table_header(data, align = c("left", "center", "right"))

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

align

Header alignment

⁠singl-kw:[left|center|right]⁠ // default: "left"

The alignment of the title and subtitle elements in the table header. Options are "left" (the default), "center", or "right".

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table with a number of table parts added (using functions like summary_rows(), grand_summary_rows(), and more). Following that, we'll align the header contents (consisting of the title and the subtitle) to the left with the opt_align_table_header() function.

exibble |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row", groupname_col = "group") |>
  summary_rows(
    groups = "grp_a",
    columns = c(num, currency),
    fns = c("min", "max")
  ) |>
  grand_summary_rows(
    columns = currency,
    fns = total ~ sum(., na.rm = TRUE)
  ) |>
  tab_source_note(source_note = "This is a source note.") |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "This is a footnote.",
    locations = cells_body(columns = 1, rows = 1)
  ) |>
  tab_header(
    title = "The title of the table",
    subtitle = "The table's subtitle"
  ) |>
  opt_align_table_header(align = "left")
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `opt_align_table_header()` help file.

Function ID

10-6

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other table option functions: opt_all_caps(), opt_css(), opt_footnote_marks(), opt_footnote_spec(), opt_horizontal_padding(), opt_interactive(), opt_row_striping(), opt_stylize(), opt_table_font(), opt_table_lines(), opt_table_outline(), opt_vertical_padding()


Option to use all caps in select table locations

Description

Sometimes an all-capitalized look is suitable for a table. With the opt_all_caps() function, we can transform characters in the column labels, the stub, and in all row groups in this way (and there's control over which of these locations are transformed).

This function serves as a convenient shortcut for ⁠<gt_tbl> |> tab_options(<location>.text_transform = "uppercase", <location>.font.size = pct(80), <location>.font.weight = "bolder")⁠ (for all locations selected).

Usage

opt_all_caps(
  data,
  all_caps = TRUE,
  locations = c("column_labels", "stub", "row_group")
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

all_caps

Use all-caps transformation

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value to indicate whether the text transformation to all caps should be performed (TRUE, the default) or reset to default values (FALSE) for the locations targeted.

locations

Locations to target

⁠mult-kw:[column_labels|stub|row_group]⁠ // default: c("column_labels", "stub", "row_group")

Which locations should undergo this text transformation? By default it includes all of the "column_labels", the "stub", and the "row_group" locations. However, we could just choose one or two of those.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table with a number of table parts added (using functions like summary_rows(), grand_summary_rows(), and more). Following that, we'll ensure that all text in the column labels, the stub, and in all row groups is transformed to all caps using opt_all_caps().

exibble |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row", groupname_col = "group") |>
  summary_rows(
    groups = "grp_a",
    columns = c(num, currency),
    fns = c("min", "max")
  ) |>
  grand_summary_rows(
    columns = currency,
    fns = total ~ sum(., na.rm = TRUE)
  ) |>
  tab_source_note(source_note = "This is a source note.") |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "This is a footnote.",
    locations = cells_body(columns = 1, rows = 1)
  ) |>
  tab_header(
    title = "The title of the table",
    subtitle = "The table's subtitle"
  ) |>
  opt_all_caps()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `opt_all_caps()` help file.

Function ID

10-9

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other table option functions: opt_align_table_header(), opt_css(), opt_footnote_marks(), opt_footnote_spec(), opt_horizontal_padding(), opt_interactive(), opt_row_striping(), opt_stylize(), opt_table_font(), opt_table_lines(), opt_table_outline(), opt_vertical_padding()


Option to add custom CSS for the table

Description

opt_css() makes it possible to add CSS to a gt table. This CSS will be added after the compiled CSS that gt generates automatically when the object is transformed to an HTML output table. You can supply css as a vector of lines or as a single string.

Usage

opt_css(data, css, add = TRUE, allow_duplicates = FALSE)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

css

CSS declarations

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

The CSS to include as part of the rendered table's ⁠<style>⁠ element.

add

Add to existing CSS

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

If TRUE, the default, the CSS is added to any already-defined CSS (typically from previous calls of opt_table_font(), opt_css(), or, directly setting CSS the table.additional_css value in tab_options()). If this is set to FALSE, the CSS provided here will replace any previously-stored CSS.

allow_duplicates

Allow for CSS duplication

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

When this is FALSE (the default), the CSS provided here won't be added (provided that add = TRUE) if it is seen in the already-defined CSS.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Let's use the exibble dataset to create a simple, two-column gt table (keeping only the num and currency columns). Through use of the opt_css() function, we can insert CSS rulesets as as string. We need to ensure that the table ID is set explicitly (we've done so here with the ID value of "one", setting it in the gt() function).

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(num, currency) |>
  gt(id = "one") |>
  fmt_currency(
    columns = currency,
    currency = "HKD"
  ) |>
  fmt_scientific(columns = num) |>
  opt_css(
    css = "
    #one .gt_table {
      background-color: skyblue;
    }
    #one .gt_row {
      padding: 20px 30px;
    }
    #one .gt_col_heading {
      text-align: center !important;
    }
    "
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `opt_css()` help file.

Function ID

10-13

Function Introduced

v0.2.2 (August 5, 2020)

See Also

Other table option functions: opt_align_table_header(), opt_all_caps(), opt_footnote_marks(), opt_footnote_spec(), opt_horizontal_padding(), opt_interactive(), opt_row_striping(), opt_stylize(), opt_table_font(), opt_table_lines(), opt_table_outline(), opt_vertical_padding()


Option to modify the set of footnote marks

Description

Alter the footnote marks for any footnotes that may be present in the table. Either a vector of marks can be provided (including Unicode characters), or, a specific keyword could be used to signify a preset sequence. This function serves as a shortcut for using tab_options(footnotes.marks = {marks})

Usage

opt_footnote_marks(data, marks = "numbers")

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

marks

Sequence of footnote marks

⁠vector<character>⁠ // default: "numbers"

Either a character vector of length greater than 1 (that will represent the series of marks) or a single keyword that represents a preset sequence of marks. The valid keywords are: "numbers" (for numeric marks), "letters" and "LETTERS" (for lowercase and uppercase alphabetic marks), "standard" (for a traditional set of four symbol marks), and "extended" (which adds two more symbols to the standard set).

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Specification of footnote marks

We can supply a vector that will represent the series of marks. The series of footnote marks is recycled when its usage goes beyond the length of the set. At each cycle, the marks are simply doubled, tripled, and so on (e.g., * -> ⁠**⁠ -> ⁠***⁠). The option exists for providing keywords for certain types of footnote marks. The keywords are:

  • "numbers": numeric marks, they begin from 1 and these marks are not subject to recycling behavior

  • "letters": minuscule alphabetic marks, internally uses the letters vector which contains 26 lowercase letters of the Roman alphabet

  • "LETTERS": majuscule alphabetic marks, using the LETTERS vector which has 26 uppercase letters of the Roman alphabet

  • "standard": symbolic marks, four symbols in total

  • "extended": symbolic marks, extends the standard set by adding two more symbols, making six

The symbolic marks are the: (1) Asterisk, (2) Dagger, (3) Double Dagger, (4) Section Sign, (5) Double Vertical Line, and (6) Paragraph Sign; the "standard" set has the first four, "extended" contains all.

Examples

Use a summarized version of the sza dataset to create a gt table, adding three footnotes (with three calls of tab_footnote()). We can modify the footnote marks to use with the opt_footnote_marks() function. With the keyword "standard" we get four commonly-used typographic marks.

sza |>
  dplyr::filter(latitude == 30) |>
  dplyr::group_by(tst) |>
  dplyr::summarize(
    SZA.Max = if (
      all(is.na(sza))) {
      NA
    } else {
      max(sza, na.rm = TRUE)
    },
    SZA.Min = if (
      all(is.na(sza))) {
      NA
    } else {
      min(sza, na.rm = TRUE)
    },
    .groups = "drop"
  ) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "tst") |>
  tab_spanner_delim(delim = ".") |>
  sub_missing(
    columns = everything(),
    missing_text = "90+"
  ) |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "TST") |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "True solar time.",
    locations = cells_stubhead()
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Solar zenith angle.",
    locations = cells_column_spanners(
      spanners = "spanner-SZA.Max"
    )
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "The Lowest SZA.",
    locations = cells_stub(rows = "1200")
  ) |>
  opt_footnote_marks(marks = "standard")
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `opt_footnote_marks()` help file.

Function ID

10-3

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other table option functions: opt_align_table_header(), opt_all_caps(), opt_css(), opt_footnote_spec(), opt_horizontal_padding(), opt_interactive(), opt_row_striping(), opt_stylize(), opt_table_font(), opt_table_lines(), opt_table_outline(), opt_vertical_padding()


Option to specify the formatting of footnote marks

Description

Modify the way footnote marks are formatted. This can be performed for those footnote marks that alight to the targeted text in cells in various locations in the table or the footnote marks that appear in the table footer. A simple specification string can be provided for either or both types of marks in opt_footnote_spec() . This function serves as a shortcut for using either of tab_options(footnotes.spec_ref = {spec}) or tab_options(footnotes.spec_ftr = {spec}).

Usage

opt_footnote_spec(data, spec_ref = NULL, spec_ftr = NULL)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

spec_ref, spec_ftr

Specifications for formatting of footnote marks

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Specification of the footnote marks when behaving as footnote references and as marks in the footer section of the table. This is a string containing spec characters. The default is the spec string "^i", which is superscript text set in italics.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Specification rules for the formatting of footnote marks

A footnote spec consists of a string containing control characters for formatting. Not every type of formatting makes sense for footnote marks so the specification is purposefully constrained to the following:

  • as superscript text (with the "^" control character) or regular-sized text residing on the baseline

  • bold text (with "b"), italicized text (with "i"), or unstyled text (don't use either of the "b" or "i" control characters)

  • enclosure in parentheses (use "(" / ")") or square brackets (with "[" / "]")

  • a period following the mark (using "."); this is most commonly used in the table footer

With the aforementioned control characters we could, for instance, format the footnote marks to be superscript text in bold type with "^b". We might want the marks in the footer to be regular-sized text in parentheses, so the spec could be either "()" or "(x)" (you can optionally use "x" as a helpful placeholder for the marks).

Examples

Use a modified version of sp500 the dataset to create a gt table with row labels. We'll add two footnotes using the tab_footnote() function. We can call opt_footnote_spec() to specify that the marks of the footnote reference should be superscripts in bold, and, the marks in the footer section should be enclosed in parentheses.

sp500 |>
  dplyr::filter(date >= "1987-10-14" & date <= "1987-10-25") |>
  dplyr::select(date, open, close, volume) |>
  dplyr::mutate(difference = close - open) |>
  dplyr::mutate(change = (close - open) / open) |>
  dplyr::mutate(day = vec_fmt_datetime(date, format = "E")) |>
  dplyr::arrange(-dplyr::row_number()) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "date") |>
  fmt_currency() |>
  fmt_number(columns = volume, suffixing = TRUE) |>
  fmt_percent(columns = change) |>
  cols_move_to_start(columns = day) |>
  cols_width(
    stub() ~ px(130),
    day ~ px(50),
    everything() ~ px(100)
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Commerce report on trade deficit.",
    locations = cells_stub(rows = 1)
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Black Monday market crash, representing the greatest
    one-day percentage decline in U.S. stock market history.",
    locations = cells_body(columns = change, rows = change < -0.15)
  ) |>
  opt_footnote_spec(spec_ref = "^xb", spec_ftr = "(x)")
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `opt_footnote_spec()` help file.

Function ID

10-4

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other table option functions: opt_align_table_header(), opt_all_caps(), opt_css(), opt_footnote_marks(), opt_horizontal_padding(), opt_interactive(), opt_row_striping(), opt_stylize(), opt_table_font(), opt_table_lines(), opt_table_outline(), opt_vertical_padding()


Option to expand or contract horizontal padding

Description

Increase or decrease the horizontal padding throughout all locations of a gt table by use of a scale factor, which here is defined by a real number between 0 and 3. This function serves as a shortcut for setting the following eight options in tab_options():

  • heading.padding.horizontal

  • column_labels.padding.horizontal

  • data_row.padding.horizontal

  • row_group.padding.horizontal

  • summary_row.padding.horizontal

  • grand_summary_row.padding.horizontal

  • footnotes.padding.horizontal

  • source_notes.padding.horizontal

Usage

opt_horizontal_padding(data, scale = 1)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

scale

Scale factor

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>(0>=val>=3)⁠ // default: 1

A scale factor by which the horizontal padding will be adjusted. Must be a number between 0 and 3.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table with a number of table parts added (using functions like summary_rows(), grand_summary_rows(), and more). Following that, we'll increase the amount of horizontal padding across the entire table with opt_horizontal_padding(). Using a scale value of 3 (up from the default of 1) means the horizontal space will be greatly increased, resulting in a more spacious table.

exibble |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row", groupname_col = "group") |>
  summary_rows(
    groups = "grp_a",
    columns = c(num, currency),
    fns = c("min", "max")
  ) |>
  grand_summary_rows(
    columns = currency,
    fns = total ~ sum(., na.rm = TRUE)
  ) |>
  tab_source_note(source_note = "This is a source note.") |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "This is a footnote.",
    locations = cells_body(columns = 1, rows = 1)
  ) |>
  tab_header(
    title = "The title of the table",
    subtitle = "The table's subtitle"
  ) |>
  opt_horizontal_padding(scale = 3)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `opt_horizontal_padding()` help file.

Function ID

10-8

Function Introduced

v0.4.0 (February 15, 2022)

See Also

Other table option functions: opt_align_table_header(), opt_all_caps(), opt_css(), opt_footnote_marks(), opt_footnote_spec(), opt_interactive(), opt_row_striping(), opt_stylize(), opt_table_font(), opt_table_lines(), opt_table_outline(), opt_vertical_padding()


Option to put interactive elements in an HTML table

Description

By default, a gt table rendered as HTML will essentially be a 'static' table. However, we can make it 'interactive' and configure those interactive HTML options through the opt_interactive() function. Making an HTML table interactive entails the enabling of controls for pagination, global search, filtering, sorting, and more.

This function serves as a shortcut for setting the following options in tab_options():

  • ihtml.active

  • ihtml.use_pagination

  • ihtml.use_pagination_info

  • ihtml.use_sorting

  • ihtml.use_search

  • ihtml.use_filters

  • ihtml.use_resizers

  • ihtml.use_highlight

  • ihtml.use_compact_mode

  • ihtml.use_page_size_select

  • ihtml.page_size_default

  • ihtml.page_size_values

  • ihtml.pagination_type

  • ihtml.height

Usage

opt_interactive(
  data,
  active = TRUE,
  use_pagination = TRUE,
  use_pagination_info = TRUE,
  use_sorting = TRUE,
  use_search = FALSE,
  use_filters = FALSE,
  use_resizers = FALSE,
  use_highlight = FALSE,
  use_compact_mode = FALSE,
  use_text_wrapping = TRUE,
  use_page_size_select = FALSE,
  page_size_default = 10,
  page_size_values = c(10, 25, 50, 100),
  pagination_type = c("numbers", "jump", "simple"),
  height = "auto"
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

active

Display interactive HTML table

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

The active option will either enable or disable interactive features for an HTML table. The individual features of an interactive HTML table are controlled by the other options.

use_pagination

Display pagination controls

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

This is the option for using pagination controls (below the table body). By default, this is TRUE and it will allow the use to page through table content.

use_pagination_info

Display pagination info

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

If use_pagination is TRUE then the use_pagination_info option can be used to display informational text regarding the current page view (this is set to TRUE by default).

use_sorting

Provide column sorting controls

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

This option provides controls for sorting column values. By default, this is TRUE.

use_search

Provide a global search field

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

The use_search option places a search field for globally filtering rows to the requested content. By default, this is FALSE.

use_filters

Display filtering fields

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

The use_filters option places search fields below each column header and allows for filtering by column. By default, this is FALSE.

use_resizers

Allow column resizing

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

This option allows for the interactive resizing of columns. By default, this is FALSE.

use_highlight

Enable row highlighting on hover

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

The use_highlight option highlights individual rows upon hover. By default, this is FALSE.

use_compact_mode

Use compact mode

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

To reduce vertical padding and thus make the table consume less vertical space the use_compact_mode option can be used. By default, this is FALSE.

use_text_wrapping

Use text wrapping

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

The use_text_wrapping option controls whether text wrapping occurs throughout the table. This is TRUE by default and with that text will be wrapped to multiple lines. If FALSE, text will be truncated to a single line.

use_page_size_select

Allow for page size selection

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

The use_page_size_select option lets us display a dropdown menu for the number of rows to show per page of data.

page_size_default

Change the default page size

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 10

The default page size (initially set as 10) can be modified with page_size_default and this works whether or not use_page_size_select is set to TRUE.

page_size_values

Set of page-size values

⁠vector<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: c(10, 25, 50, 100)

By default, this is the vector c(10, 25, 50, 100) which corresponds to options for 10, 25, 50, and 100 rows of data per page. To modify these page-size options, provide a numeric vector to page_size_values.

pagination_type

Change pagination mode

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "numbers"

When using pagination the pagination_type option lets us select between one of three options for the layout of pagination controls. The default is "numbers", where a series of page-number buttons is presented along with 'previous' and 'next' buttons. The "jump" option provides an input field with a stepper for the page number. With "simple", only the 'previous' and 'next' buttons are displayed.

height

Height of interactive HTML table

Height of the table in pixels. Defaults to "auto" for automatic sizing.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use select columns from the towny dataset to create a gt table with a header (through tab_header()) and a source note (through tab_source_note()). Next, we will add interactive HTML features (and otherwise activate interactive HTML mode) through opt_interactive(). It'll just be the default set of interactive options.

towny |>
  dplyr::select(name, census_div, starts_with("population")) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  cols_label_with(fn = function(x) sub("population_", "", x)) |>
  cols_width(
    name ~ px(200),
    census_div ~ px(200)
  ) |>
  tab_header(
    title = "Populations of Municipalities",
    subtitle = "Census values from 1996 to 2021."
  ) |>
  tab_source_note(source_note = md("Data taken from the `towny` dataset.")) |>
  opt_interactive()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `opt_interactive()` help file.

Interactive tables can have styled body cells. Here, we use the gtcars dataset to create an interactive gt table. Using tab_style() and data_color() we can flexibly style body cells throughout the table.

gtcars |>
  gt() |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(130)) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_fill(color = "gray95"),
    locations = cells_body(columns = c(mfr, model))
  ) |>
  data_color(
    columns = c(starts_with("hp"), starts_with("trq")),
    method = "numeric",
    palette = "viridis"
  ) |>
  cols_hide(columns = trim) |>
  opt_interactive()
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `opt_interactive()` help file.

Function ID

10-2

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other table option functions: opt_align_table_header(), opt_all_caps(), opt_css(), opt_footnote_marks(), opt_footnote_spec(), opt_horizontal_padding(), opt_row_striping(), opt_stylize(), opt_table_font(), opt_table_lines(), opt_table_outline(), opt_vertical_padding()


Option to add or remove row striping

Description

By default, a gt table does not have row striping enabled. However, this function allows us to easily enable or disable striped rows in the table body. This function serves as a convenient shortcut for ⁠<gt_tbl> |> tab_options(row.striping.include_table_body = TRUE|FALSE)⁠.

Usage

opt_row_striping(data, row_striping = TRUE)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

row_striping

Use alternating row stripes

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value to indicate whether row striping should be added or removed.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table with a number of table parts added (using functions like summary_rows(), grand_summary_rows(), and more). Following that, we'll add row striping to every second row with opt_row_striping().

exibble |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row", groupname_col = "group") |>
  summary_rows(
    groups = "grp_a",
    columns = c(num, currency),
    fns = c("min", "max")
  ) |>
  grand_summary_rows(
    columns = currency,
    fns = total ~ sum(., na.rm = TRUE)
  ) |>
  tab_source_note(source_note = "This is a source note.") |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "This is a footnote.",
    locations = cells_body(columns = 1, rows = 1)
  ) |>
  tab_header(
    title = "The title of the table",
    subtitle = "The table's subtitle"
  ) |>
  opt_row_striping()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `opt_row_striping()` help file.

Function ID

10-5

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other table option functions: opt_align_table_header(), opt_all_caps(), opt_css(), opt_footnote_marks(), opt_footnote_spec(), opt_horizontal_padding(), opt_interactive(), opt_stylize(), opt_table_font(), opt_table_lines(), opt_table_outline(), opt_vertical_padding()


Stylize your table with a colorful look

Description

With opt_stylize() you can quickly style your gt table with a carefully curated set of background colors, line colors, and line styles. There are six styles to choose from and they largely vary in the extent of coloring applied to different table locations. Some have table borders applied, some apply darker colors to the table stub and summary sections, and, some even have vertical lines. In addition to choosing a style preset, there are six color variations that each use a range of five color tints. Each of the color tints have been fine-tuned to maximize the contrast between text and its background. There are 36 combinations of style and color to choose from.

Usage

opt_stylize(data, style = 1, color = "blue", add_row_striping = TRUE)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

style

Table style

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>(1>=val>=6)⁠ // default: 1

Six numbered styles are available. Simply provide a number from 1 (the default) to 6 to choose a distinct look.

color

Color variation

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "blue"

There are six color variations: "blue", "cyan", "pink", "green", "red", and "gray".

add_row_striping

Allow row striping

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to enable row striping in the table body for the style chosen.

Value

an object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use exibble to create a gt table with a number of table parts added. Then, use opt_stylize() to give the table some additional style (using the "cyan" color variation and style number 6).

exibble |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row", groupname_col = "group") |>
  summary_rows(
    groups = "grp_a",
    columns = c(num, currency),
    fns = c("min", "max")
  ) |>
  grand_summary_rows(
    columns = currency,
    fns = total ~ sum(., na.rm = TRUE)
  ) |>
  tab_source_note(source_note = "This is a source note.") |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "This is a footnote.",
    locations = cells_body(columns = 1, rows = 1)
  ) |>
  tab_header(
    title = "The title of the table",
    subtitle = "The table's subtitle"
  ) |>
  opt_stylize(style = 6, color = "cyan")
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `opt_stylize()` help file.

Function ID

10-1

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

Other table option functions: opt_align_table_header(), opt_all_caps(), opt_css(), opt_footnote_marks(), opt_footnote_spec(), opt_horizontal_padding(), opt_interactive(), opt_row_striping(), opt_table_font(), opt_table_lines(), opt_table_outline(), opt_vertical_padding()


Options to define font choices for the entire table

Description

opt_table_font() makes it possible to define fonts used for an entire gt table. Any font names supplied in font will (by default, with add = TRUE) be placed before the names present in the existing font stack (i.e., they will take precedence). You can choose to base the font stack on those provided by system_fonts() by providing a valid keyword for a themed set and optionally prepending font values to that.

Take note that you could still have entirely different fonts in specific locations of the table. For that you would need to use tab_style() or tab_style_body() in conjunction with cell_text().

Usage

opt_table_font(
  data,
  font = NULL,
  stack = NULL,
  size = NULL,
  weight = NULL,
  style = NULL,
  color = NULL,
  add = TRUE
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

font

Default table fonts

⁠vector<character>|list|obj:<font_css>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

One or more font names available as system or web fonts. These can be combined with a c() or a list(). To choose fonts from the Google Fonts service, we can call the google_font() helper function.

stack

Name of font stack

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A name that is representative of a font stack (obtained via internally via the system_fonts() helper function). If provided, this new stack will replace any defined fonts and any font values will be prepended.

size

Text size

⁠scalar<character|numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The text size for the entire table can be set by providing a size value. Can be specified as a single-length character vector with units of pixels (e.g., ⁠12px⁠) or as a percentage (e.g., ⁠80%⁠). If provided as a single-length numeric vector, it is assumed that the value is given in units of pixels. The px() and pct() helper functions can also be used to pass in numeric values and obtain values as pixel or percentage units.

weight

Text weight

⁠scalar<character|numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Option to set the weight of the font. Can be a text-based keyword such as "normal", "bold", "lighter", "bolder", or, a numeric value between 1 and 1000, inclusive. Please note that typefaces have varying support for the numeric mapping of weight.

style

Text style

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An option to modify the text style. Can be one of either "normal", "italic", or "oblique".

color

Text color

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The color option defines the text color used throughout the table. A color name or a hexadecimal color code should be provided.

add

Add to existing fonts

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

Should fonts be added to the beginning of any already-defined fonts for the table? By default, this is TRUE and is recommended since those fonts already present can serve as fallbacks when everything specified in font is not available. If a stack is provided, then add will automatically set to FALSE.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Possibilities for the font argument

We have the option to supply one or more font names for the font argument. They can be enclosed in c() or a list(). You can generate this list or vector with a combination of font names, and you can freely use google_font(), default_fonts(), and system_fonts() to help compose your font family.

Possibilities for the stack argument

There are several themed font stacks available via the system_fonts() helper function. That function can be used to generate all or a segment of a vector supplied to the font argument. However, using the stack argument with one of the 15 keywords for the font stacks available in system_fonts(), we could be sure that the typeface class will work across multiple computer systems. Any of the following keywords can be used:

  • "system-ui"

  • "transitional"

  • "old-style"

  • "humanist"

  • "geometric-humanist"

  • "classical-humanist"

  • "neo-grotesque"

  • "monospace-slab-serif"

  • "monospace-code"

  • "industrial"

  • "rounded-sans"

  • "slab-serif"

  • "antique"

  • "didone"

  • "handwritten"

Examples

Use a subset of the sp500 dataset to create a small gt table. We'll use fmt_currency() to display a dollar sign for the first row of monetary values. The "Merriweather" font (from Google Fonts, via google_font()) with two system font fallbacks ("Cochin" and the generic "serif").

sp500 |>
  dplyr::slice(1:10) |>
  dplyr::select(-volume, -adj_close) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_currency(
    rows = 1,
    use_seps = FALSE
  ) |>
  opt_table_font(
    font = list(
      google_font(name = "Merriweather"),
      "Cochin", "serif"
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `opt_table_font()` help file.

With the sza dataset we'll create a two-column, eleven-row table. Within opt_table_font(), the stack argument will be supplied with the "rounded-sans" font stack. This sets up a family of fonts with rounded, curved letterforms that should be locally available in different computing environments.

sza |>
  dplyr::filter(
    latitude == 20 &
      month == "jan" &
      !is.na(sza)
  ) |>
  dplyr::select(-latitude, -month) |>
  gt() |>
  opt_table_font(stack = "rounded-sans") |>
  opt_all_caps()
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `opt_table_font()` help file.

Function ID

10-12

Function Introduced

v0.2.2 (August 5, 2020)

See Also

Other table option functions: opt_align_table_header(), opt_all_caps(), opt_css(), opt_footnote_marks(), opt_footnote_spec(), opt_horizontal_padding(), opt_interactive(), opt_row_striping(), opt_stylize(), opt_table_lines(), opt_table_outline(), opt_vertical_padding()


Option to set table lines to different extents

Description

opt_table_lines() sets table lines in one of three possible ways: (1) all possible table lines drawn ("all"), (2) no table lines at all ("none"), and (3) resetting to the default line styles ("default"). This is great if you want to start off with lots of lines and subtract just a few of them with tab_options() or tab_style(). Or, use it to start with a completely lineless table, adding individual lines as needed.

Usage

opt_table_lines(data, extent = c("all", "none", "default"))

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

extent

Extent of lines added

⁠singl-kw:[all|none|default]⁠ // default: "all"

The extent to which lines will be visible in the table. Options are "all", "none", or "default".

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table with a number of table parts added (using functions like summary_rows(), grand_summary_rows(), and more). Following that, we'll use the opt_table_lines() function to generate lines everywhere there can possibly be lines (the default for the extent argument is "all").

exibble |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row", groupname_col = "group") |>
  summary_rows(
    groups = "grp_a",
    columns = c(num, currency),
    fns = c("min", "max")
  ) |>
  grand_summary_rows(
    columns = currency,
    fns = total ~ sum(., na.rm = TRUE)
  ) |>
  tab_source_note(source_note = "This is a source note.") |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "This is a footnote.",
    locations = cells_body(columns = 1, rows = 1)
  ) |>
  tab_header(
    title = "The title of the table",
    subtitle = "The table's subtitle"
  ) |>
  opt_table_lines()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `opt_table_lines()` help file.

Function ID

10-10

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other table option functions: opt_align_table_header(), opt_all_caps(), opt_css(), opt_footnote_marks(), opt_footnote_spec(), opt_horizontal_padding(), opt_interactive(), opt_row_striping(), opt_stylize(), opt_table_font(), opt_table_outline(), opt_vertical_padding()


Option to wrap an outline around the entire table

Description

This function puts an outline of consistent style, width, and color around the entire table. It'll write over any existing outside lines so long as the width is larger that of the existing lines. The default value of style ("solid") will draw a solid outline, whereas a value of "none" will remove any present outline.

Usage

opt_table_outline(data, style = "solid", width = px(3), color = "#D3D3D3")

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

style

Outline style property

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "solid"

The style property for the table outline. By default, this is "solid". If "none" is used then the outline is removed and any values provided for width and color will be ignored (i.e., not set).

width

Outline width value

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: px(3)

The width property for the table outline. By default, this is px(3) (or, "3px").

color

Color of outline

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "#D3D3D3"

The color of the table outline. By default, this is "#D3D3D3".

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table with a number of table parts added (using functions like summary_rows(), grand_summary_rows(), and more). Following that, let's make it so that we have an outline wrap around the entire table by using the opt_table_outline() function.

tab_1 <-
  exibble |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row", groupname_col = "group") |>
  summary_rows(
    groups = "grp_a",
    columns = c(num, currency),
    fns = c("min", "max")
  ) |>
  grand_summary_rows(
    columns = currency,
    fns = total ~ sum(., na.rm = TRUE)
  ) |>
  tab_source_note(source_note = "This is a source note.") |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "This is a footnote.",
    locations = cells_body(columns = 1, rows = 1)
  ) |>
  tab_header(
    title = "The title of the table",
    subtitle = "The table's subtitle"
  ) |>
  opt_table_outline()

tab_1
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `opt_table_outline()` help file.

Remove the table outline with the style = "none" option.

tab_1 |> opt_table_outline(style = "none")
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `opt_table_outline()` help file.

Function ID

10-11

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other table option functions: opt_align_table_header(), opt_all_caps(), opt_css(), opt_footnote_marks(), opt_footnote_spec(), opt_horizontal_padding(), opt_interactive(), opt_row_striping(), opt_stylize(), opt_table_font(), opt_table_lines(), opt_vertical_padding()


Option to expand or contract vertical padding

Description

Increase or decrease the vertical padding throughout all locations of a gt table by use of a scale factor, which here is defined by a real number between 0 and 3. This function serves as a shortcut for setting the following eight options in tab_options():

  • heading.padding

  • column_labels.padding

  • data_row.padding

  • row_group.padding

  • summary_row.padding

  • grand_summary_row.padding

  • footnotes.padding

  • source_notes.padding

Usage

opt_vertical_padding(data, scale = 1)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

scale

Scale factor

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>(0>=val>=3)⁠ // default: 1

A scale factor by which the vertical padding will be adjusted. Must be a number between 0 and 3.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table with a number of table parts added (using functions like summary_rows(), grand_summary_rows(), and more). Following that, we'll lessen the amount of vertical padding across the entire table with opt_vertical_padding(). Using a scale value of 0.25 (down from the default of 1) means the vertical space will be greatly reduced, resulting in a more compact table.

exibble |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row", groupname_col = "group") |>
  summary_rows(
    groups = "grp_a",
    columns = c(num, currency),
    fns = c("min", "max")
  ) |>
  grand_summary_rows(
    columns = currency,
    fns = total ~ sum(., na.rm = TRUE)
  ) |>
  tab_source_note(source_note = "This is a source note.") |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "This is a footnote.",
    locations = cells_body(columns = 1, rows = 1)
  ) |>
  tab_header(
    title = "The title of the table",
    subtitle = "The table's subtitle"
  ) |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.25)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `opt_vertical_padding()` help file.

Function ID

10-7

Function Introduced

v0.4.0 (February 15, 2022)

See Also

Other table option functions: opt_align_table_header(), opt_all_caps(), opt_css(), opt_footnote_marks(), opt_footnote_spec(), opt_horizontal_padding(), opt_interactive(), opt_row_striping(), opt_stylize(), opt_table_font(), opt_table_lines(), opt_table_outline()


Helper for providing a numeric value as percentage

Description

A percentage value acts as a length value that is relative to an initial state. For instance an 80 percent value for something will size the target to 80 percent the size of its 'previous' value. This type of sizing is useful for sizing up or down a length value with an intuitive measure. This helper function can be used for the setting of font sizes (e.g., in cell_text()) and altering the thicknesses of lines (e.g., in cell_borders()). Should a more exact definition of size be required, the analogous helper function pct() will be more useful.

Usage

pct(x)

Arguments

x

Numeric value in percent

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // required

The numeric value to format as a string percentage for some tab_options() arguments that can take percentage values (e.g., table.width).

Value

A character vector with a single value in percentage units.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table. Inside of the cell_text() call (which is itself inside of tab_style()), we'll use the pct() helper function to define the font size for the column labels as a percentage value.

exibble |>
  gt() |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(size = pct(75)),
    locations = cells_column_labels()
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `pct()` help file.

Function ID

8-4

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


A table of personal information for people all over the world

Description

The peeps dataset contains records for one hundred people residing in ten different countries. Each person in the table has address information along with their email address and phone number. There are also personal characteristics like date of birth, height, and weight. This data has been synthesized, and so the names within the table have not been taken or based on individuals in real life. The street addresses were generated from actual street names within real geographic localities, however, the street numbers were assigned randomly from a constrained number set. While these records do not relate to real people, efforts were made to make the data as realistic as possible.

Usage

peeps

Format

A tibble with 100 rows and 14 variables:

name_given, name_family

The given and family name of individual.

address

The street address of the individual.

city

The name of the city or locality in which the individual resides.

state_prov

The state or province associated with the city and address. This is NA for individuals residing in countries where subdivision data is not needed for generating a valid mailing address.

postcode

The post code associated with the city and address.

country

The 3-letter ISO 3166-1 country code representative of the individual's country.

email_addr

The individual's email address.

phone_number, country_code

The individual's phone number and the country code associated with the phone number.

gender

The gender of the individual.

dob

The individual's date of birth (DOB) in the ISO 8601 form of YYYY-MM-DD.

height_cm, weight_kg

The height and weight of the individual in centimeters (cm) and kilograms (kg), respectively.

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-8

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.11.0 (July 9, 2024)

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, exibble, films, gibraltar, gtcars, illness, metro, nuclides, photolysis, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sp500, sza, towny

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(peeps)

Data on photolysis rates for gas-phase organic compounds

Description

The photolysis dataset contains numerical values for describing the photolytic degradation pathways of 25 compounds of relevance in atmospheric chemistry. Many volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are emitted in substantial quantities from both biogenic and anthropogenic sources, and they can have a major influence on the chemistry of the lower atmosphere. A portion of these can be transformed into other VOCs via the energy provided from light.

In order to realistically predict the composition of the atmosphere and how it evolves over time, we need accurate estimates of photolysis rates. The data provided here in photolysis allows for computations of photolysis rates (J, having units of s^-1) as a function of the solar zenith angle (SZA). Having such values is essential when deploying atmospheric chemistry models.

Usage

photolysis

Format

A tibble with 34 rows and 10 variables:

compd_name

The name of the primary compound undergoing photolysis.

cmpd_formula

The chemical formula of the compound.

products

A product pathway for the photolysis of the compound.

type

The type of organic compound undergoing photolysis.

l, m, n

The parameter values given in the l, m, and n columns can be used to calculate the photolysis rate (J) as a function of the solar zenith angle (X, in radians) through the expression: J = l * cos(X)^m * exp(-n * sec(X)).

quantum_yield

In the context of photolysis reactions, this is the efficiency of a given photolytic reaction. In other words, it's the number of product molecules formed over the number of photons absorbed.

wavelength_nm, sigma_298_cm2

The wavelength_nm and sigma_298_cm2 columns provide photoabsorption data for the compound undergoing photolysis. The values in wavelength_nm provide the wavelength of light in nanometer units; the sigma_298_cm2 values are paired with the wavelength_nm values and they are in units of ⁠cm^2 molecule^-1⁠.

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-15

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.11.0 (July 9, 2024)

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, exibble, films, gibraltar, gtcars, illness, metro, nuclides, peeps, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sp500, sza, towny

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(photolysis)

A year of pizza sales from a pizza place

Description

A synthetic dataset that describes pizza sales for a pizza place somewhere in the US. While the contents are artificial, the ingredients used to make the pizzas are far from it. There are 32 different pizzas that fall into 4 different categories: "classic" (classic pizzas: 'You probably had one like it before, but never like this!'), "chicken" (pizzas with chicken as a major ingredient: 'Try the Southwest Chicken Pizza! You'll love it!'), "supreme" (pizzas that try a little harder: 'My Soppressata pizza uses only the finest salami from my personal salumist!'), and, "veggie" (pizzas without any meats whatsoever: 'My Five Cheese pizza has so many cheeses, I can only offer it in Large Size!').

Usage

pizzaplace

Format

A tibble with 49,574 rows and 7 variables:

id

The ID for the order, which consists of one or more pizzas at a given date and time.

date

A character representation of the order date, expressed in the ISO 8601 date format (YYYY-MM-DD).

time

A character representation of the order time, expressed as a 24-hour time the ISO 8601 extended time format (HH:MM:SS).

name

The short name for the pizza.

size

The size of the pizza, which can either be "S", "M", "L", "XL" (rare!), or "XXL" (even rarer!); most pizzas are available in the "S", "M", and "L" sizes but exceptions apply.

type

The category or type of pizza, which can either be "classic", "chicken", "supreme", or "veggie".

price

The price of the pizza and the amount that it sold for (in USD).

Details

Each pizza in the dataset is identified by a short name. The following listings provide the full names of each pizza and their main ingredients.

Classic Pizzas:

  • "classic_dlx": The Classic Deluxe Pizza (Pepperoni, Mushrooms, Red Onions, Red Peppers, Bacon)

  • "big_meat": The Big Meat Pizza (Bacon, Pepperoni, Italian Sausage, Chorizo Sausage)

  • "pepperoni": The Pepperoni Pizza (Mozzarella Cheese, Pepperoni)

  • "hawaiian": The Hawaiian Pizza (Sliced Ham, Pineapple, Mozzarella Cheese)

  • "pep_msh_pep": The Pepperoni, Mushroom, and Peppers Pizza (Pepperoni, Mushrooms, and Green Peppers)

  • "ital_cpcllo": The Italian Capocollo Pizza (Capocollo, Red Peppers, Tomatoes, Goat Cheese, Garlic, Oregano)

  • "napolitana": The Napolitana Pizza (Tomatoes, Anchovies, Green Olives, Red Onions, Garlic)

  • "the_greek": The Greek Pizza (Kalamata Olives, Feta Cheese, Tomatoes, Garlic, Beef Chuck Roast, Red Onions)

Chicken Pizzas:

  • "thai_ckn": The Thai Chicken Pizza (Chicken, Pineapple, Tomatoes, Red Peppers, Thai Sweet Chilli Sauce)

  • "bbq_ckn": The Barbecue Chicken Pizza (Barbecued Chicken, Red Peppers, Green Peppers, Tomatoes, Red Onions, Barbecue Sauce)

  • "southw_ckn": The Southwest Chicken Pizza (Chicken, Tomatoes, Red Peppers, Red Onions, Jalapeno Peppers, Corn, Cilantro, Chipotle Sauce)

  • "cali_ckn": The California Chicken Pizza (Chicken, Artichoke, Spinach, Garlic, Jalapeno Peppers, Fontina Cheese, Gouda Cheese)

  • "ckn_pesto": The Chicken Pesto Pizza (Chicken, Tomatoes, Red Peppers, Spinach, Garlic, Pesto Sauce)

  • "ckn_alfredo": The Chicken Alfredo Pizza (Chicken, Red Onions, Red Peppers, Mushrooms, Asiago Cheese, Alfredo Sauce)

Supreme Pizzas:

  • "brie_carre": The Brie Carre Pizza (Brie Carre Cheese, Prosciutto, Caramelized Onions, Pears, Thyme, Garlic)

  • "calabrese": The Calabrese Pizza ('Nduja Salami, Pancetta, Tomatoes, Red Onions, Friggitello Peppers, Garlic)

  • "soppressata": The Soppressata Pizza (Soppressata Salami, Fontina Cheese, Mozzarella Cheese, Mushrooms, Garlic)

  • "sicilian": The Sicilian Pizza (Coarse Sicilian Salami, Tomatoes, Green Olives, Luganega Sausage, Onions, Garlic)

  • "ital_supr": The Italian Supreme Pizza (Calabrese Salami, Capocollo, Tomatoes, Red Onions, Green Olives, Garlic)

  • "peppr_salami": The Pepper Salami Pizza (Genoa Salami, Capocollo, Pepperoni, Tomatoes, Asiago Cheese, Garlic)

  • "prsc_argla": The Prosciutto and Arugula Pizza (Prosciutto di San Daniele, Arugula, Mozzarella Cheese)

  • "spinach_supr": The Spinach Supreme Pizza (Spinach, Red Onions, Pepperoni, Tomatoes, Artichokes, Kalamata Olives, Garlic, Asiago Cheese)

  • "spicy_ital": The Spicy Italian Pizza (Capocollo, Tomatoes, Goat Cheese, Artichokes, Peperoncini verdi, Garlic)

Vegetable Pizzas

  • "mexicana": The Mexicana Pizza (Tomatoes, Red Peppers, Jalapeno Peppers, Red Onions, Cilantro, Corn, Chipotle Sauce, Garlic)

  • "four_cheese": The Four Cheese Pizza (Ricotta Cheese, Gorgonzola Piccante Cheese, Mozzarella Cheese, Parmigiano Reggiano Cheese, Garlic)

  • "five_cheese": The Five Cheese Pizza (Mozzarella Cheese, Provolone Cheese, Smoked Gouda Cheese, Romano Cheese, Blue Cheese, Garlic)

  • "spin_pesto": The Spinach Pesto Pizza (Spinach, Artichokes, Tomatoes, Sun-dried Tomatoes, Garlic, Pesto Sauce)

  • "veggie_veg": The Vegetables + Vegetables Pizza (Mushrooms, Tomatoes, Red Peppers, Green Peppers, Red Onions, Zucchini, Spinach, Garlic)

  • "green_garden": The Green Garden Pizza (Spinach, Mushrooms, Tomatoes, Green Olives, Feta Cheese)

  • "mediterraneo": The Mediterranean Pizza (Spinach, Artichokes, Kalamata Olives, Sun-dried Tomatoes, Feta Cheese, Plum Tomatoes, Red Onions)

  • "spinach_fet": The Spinach and Feta Pizza (Spinach, Mushrooms, Red Onions, Feta Cheese, Garlic)

  • "ital_veggie": The Italian Vegetables Pizza (Eggplant, Artichokes, Tomatoes, Zucchini, Red Peppers, Garlic, Pesto Sauce)

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-5

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, exibble, films, gibraltar, gtcars, illness, metro, nuclides, peeps, photolysis, reactions, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sp500, sza, towny

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(pizzaplace)

Helper for providing a numeric value as pixels value

Description

For certain parameters, a length value is required. Examples include the setting of font sizes (e.g., in cell_text()) and thicknesses of lines (e.g., in cell_borders()). Setting a length in pixels with px() allows for an absolute definition of size as opposed to the analogous helper function pct().

Usage

px(x)

Arguments

x

Numeric length in pixels

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // required

The numeric value to format as a string (e.g., "12px") for some tab_options() arguments that can take values as units of pixels (e.g., table.font.size).

Value

A character vector with a single value in pixel units.

Examples

Use the exibble dataset to create a gt table. Inside of the cell_text() call (which is itself inside of tab_style()), we'll use the px() helper function to define the font size for the column labels in units of pixels.

exibble |>
  gt() |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(size = px(20)),
    locations = cells_column_labels()
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `px()` help file.

Function ID

8-3

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


Helper for creating a random id for a gt table

Description

random_id() can be used to create a random, character-based ID value argument of variable length (the default is 10 letters).

Usage

random_id(n = 10)

Arguments

n

Number of letters

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 10

The n argument defines the number of lowercase letters to use for the random ID.

Value

A character vector containing a single, random ID.

Function ID

8-28

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


Reaction rates for gas-phase atmospheric reactions of organic compounds

Description

The reactions dataset contains kinetic data for second-order (two body) gas-phase chemical reactions for 1,683 organic compounds. The reaction-rate values and parameters within this dataset are useful for studies of the atmospheric environment. Organic pollutants, which are present in trace amounts in the atmosphere, have been extensively studied by research groups since their persistence in the atmosphere requires specific attention. Many researchers have reported kinetic data on specific gas-phase reactions and these mainly involve oxidation reactions with OH, nitrate radicals, ozone, and chlorine atoms.

This compilation of rate constant (k) data as contains the values for rate constants at 298 K (in units of ⁠cm^3 molecules^-1 s^-1⁠) as well as parameters that allow for the calculation of rate constants at different temperatures (the temperature dependence parameters: A, B, and n). Uncertainty values/factors and temperature limits are also provided here where information is available.

Usage

reactions

Format

A tibble with 1,683 rows and 39 variables:

compd_name

The name of the primary compound undergoing reaction with OH, ozone, NO3, or Cl.

cmpd_mwt

The molecular weight of the compound in units of g/mol.

cmpd_formula

The chemical formula of the compound.

cmpd_type

The category of compounds that the compd_name falls under.

cmpd_smiles

The SMILES (simplified molecular-input line-entry system) representation for the compound.

cmpd_inchi

The InChI (International Chemical Identifier) representation for the compound.

cmpd_inchikey

The InChIKey, which is a hashed InChI value, has a fixed length of 27 characters. These values can be used to more easily perform database searches of chemical compounds.

OH_k298

Rate constant at 298 K for OH reactions.

OH_uncert

Uncertainty as a percentage for certain OH reactions.

OH_u_fac

Uncertainty as a plus/minus difference for certain OH reactions.

OH_a, OH_b, OH_n

Extended temperature dependence parameters for bimolecular OH reactions, to be used in the Arrhenius expression: ⁠k(T)=A exp(-B/T) (T/300)^n⁠. In that, A is expressed as cm^3 molecules^-1 s^-1, B is in units of K, and n is dimensionless. Any NA values indicate that data is not available.

OH_t_low, OH_t_high

The low and high temperature boundaries (in units of K) for which the OH_a, OH_b, and OH_n parameters are valid.

O3_k298

Rate constant at 298 K for ozone reactions.

O3_uncert

Uncertainty as a percentage for certain ozone reactions.

O3_u_fac

Uncertainty as a plus/minus difference for certain ozone reactions.

O3_a, O3_b, O3_n

Extended temperature dependence parameters for bimolecular ozone reactions, to be used in the Arrhenius expression: ⁠k(T)=A exp(-B/T) (T/300)^n⁠. In that, A is expressed as cm^3 molecules^-1 s^-1, B is in units of K, and n is dimensionless. Any NA values indicate that data is not available.

O3_t_low, O3_t_high

The low and high temperature boundaries (in units of K) for which the O3_a, O3_b, and O3_n parameters are valid.

NO3_k298

Rate constant at 298 K for NO3 reactions.

NO3_uncert

Uncertainty as a percentage for certain NO3 reactions.

NO3_u_fac

Uncertainty as a plus/minus difference for certain NO3 reactions.

NO3_a, NO3_b, NO3_n

Extended temperature dependence parameters for bimolecular NO3 reactions, to be used in the Arrhenius expression: ⁠k(T)=A exp(-B/T) (T/300)^n⁠. In that, A is expressed as cm^3 molecules^-1 s^-1, B is in units of K, and n is dimensionless. Any NA values indicate that data is not available.

NO3_t_low, NO3_t_high

The low and high temperature boundaries (in units of K) for which the NO3_a, NO3_b, and NO3_n parameters are valid.

Cl_k298

Rate constant at 298 K for Cl reactions.

Cl_uncert

Uncertainty as a percentage for certain Cl reactions.

Cl_u_fac

Uncertainty as a plus/minus difference for certain Cl reactions.

Cl_a, Cl_b, Cl_n

Extended temperature dependence parameters for bimolecular Cl reactions, to be used in the Arrhenius expression: ⁠k(T)=A exp(-B/T) (T/300)^n⁠. In that, A is expressed as cm^3 molecules^-1 s^-1, B is in units of K, and n is dimensionless. Any NA values indicate that data is not available.

Cl_t_low, Cl_t_high

The low and high temperature boundaries (in units of K) for which the Cl_a, Cl_b, and Cl_n parameters are valid.

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-14

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.11.0 (July 9, 2024)

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, exibble, films, gibraltar, gtcars, illness, metro, nuclides, peeps, photolysis, pizzaplace, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sp500, sza, towny

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(reactions)

A gt display table render function for use in Shiny

Description

With render_gt() we can create a reactive gt table that works wonderfully once assigned to an output slot (with gt_output()). This function is to be used within Shiny's server() component. We have some options for controlling the size of the container holding the gt table. The width and height arguments allow for sizing the container, and the align argument allows us to align the table within the container (some other fine-grained options for positioning are available in tab_options()).

Usage

render_gt(
  expr,
  width = NULL,
  height = NULL,
  align = NULL,
  env = parent.frame(),
  quoted = FALSE,
  outputArgs = list()
)

Arguments

expr

Expression

⁠<expression>|obj:<data.frame>|obj:<tbl_df>⁠

An expression that creates a gt table object. For sake of convenience, a data frame or tibble can be used here (it will be automatically introduced to gt() with its default options).

width, height

Dimensions of table container

⁠scalar<numeric|integer|character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The width and height of the table's container. Either can be specified as a single-length character vector with units of pixels or as a percentage. If provided as a single-length numeric vector, it is assumed that the value is given in units of pixels. The px() and pct() helper functions can also be used to pass in numeric values and obtain values as pixel or percent units.

align

Table alignment

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The alignment of the table in its container. If NULL, the table will be center-aligned. Valid options for this are: "center", "left", and "right".

env

Evaluation environment

⁠<environment>⁠ // default: parent.frame()

The environment in which to evaluate the expr.

quoted

Option to quote() expr

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Is expr a quoted expression (with quote())? This is useful if you want to save an expression in a variable.

outputArgs

Output arguments

list // default: list()

A list of arguments to be passed through to the implicit call to gt_output() when render_gt() is used in an interactive R Markdown document.

Value

An object of class shiny.render.function.

Examples

Here is a Shiny app (contained within a single file) that (1) prepares a gt table, (2) sets up the ui with gt_output(), and (3) sets up the server with a render_gt() that uses the gt_tbl object as the input expression.

library(shiny)

gt_tbl <-
  gtcars |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_currency(columns = msrp, decimals = 0) |>
  cols_hide(columns = -c(mfr, model, year, mpg_c, msrp)) |>
  cols_label_with(columns = everything(), fn = toupper) |>
  data_color(columns = msrp, method = "numeric", palette = "viridis") |>
  sub_missing() |>
  opt_interactive(use_compact_mode = TRUE)

ui <- fluidPage(
  gt_output(outputId = "table")
)

server <- function(input, output, session) {
  output$table <- render_gt(expr = gt_tbl)
}

shinyApp(ui = ui, server = server)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `render_gt()` help file.

Function ID

12-1

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other Shiny functions: gt_output()


Remove the table caption

Description

We can easily remove the caption text from a gt table with rm_caption(). The caption may exist if it were set through the gt() caption argument or via tab_caption().

This function for removal is useful if you have received a gt table (perhaps through an API that returns gt objects) but would prefer that the table not have a caption at all. This function is safe to use even if there is no table caption set in the input gt_tbl object.

Usage

rm_caption(data)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use a portion of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. We'll add a header part with tab_header(), and, a caption will also be added via tab_caption().

gt_tbl <-
  gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, msrp) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:5) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("Data listing from **gtcars**"),
    subtitle = md("`gtcars` is an R dataset")
  ) |>
  tab_caption(caption = md("**gt** table example."))

gt_tbl
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `rm_caption()` help file.

If you decide that you don't want the caption in the gt_tbl object, it can be removed with rm_caption().

rm_caption(data = gt_tbl)
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `rm_caption()` help file.

Function ID

7-6

Function Introduced

v0.8.0 (November 16, 2022)

See Also

Other part removal functions: rm_footnotes(), rm_header(), rm_source_notes(), rm_spanners(), rm_stubhead()


Remove table footnotes

Description

If you have one or more footnotes that ought to be removed, rm_footnotes() allows for such a selective removal. The table footer is an optional table part that is positioned below the table body, containing areas for both the footnotes and source notes.

This function for removal is useful if you have received a gt table (perhaps through an API that returns gt objects) but would prefer that some or all of the footnotes be removed. This function is safe to use even if there are no footnotes in the input gt_tbl object so long as select helpers (such as the default everything()) are used instead of explicit integer values.

Usage

rm_footnotes(data, footnotes = everything())

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

footnotes

Footnotes to remove

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>|everything()⁠ // default: everything()

A specification of which footnotes should be removed. The footnotes to be removed can be given as a vector of integer values (they are stored as integer positions, in order of creation, starting at 1). A select helper can also be used and, by default, this is everything() (whereby all footnotes will be removed).

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use a subset of the sza dataset to create a gt table. Color the sza column using data_color(), then, use tab_footnote() twice to add two footnotes (each one targeting a different column label).

gt_tbl <-
  sza |>
  dplyr::filter(
    latitude == 20 &
      month == "jan" &
      !is.na(sza)
  ) |>
  dplyr::select(-latitude, -month) |>
  gt() |>
  data_color(
    columns = sza,
    palette = c("white", "yellow", "navyblue"),
    domain = c(0, 90)
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Color indicates height of sun.",
    locations = cells_column_labels(
      columns = sza
    )
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "
    The true solar time at the given latitude
    and date (first of month) for which the
    solar zenith angle is calculated.
    ",
    locations = cells_column_labels(
      columns = tst
    )
  ) |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(150))

gt_tbl
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `rm_footnotes()` help file.

If you decide that you don't want the footnotes in the gt_tbl object, they can be removed with rm_footnotes().

rm_footnotes(data = gt_tbl)
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `rm_footnotes()` help file.

Individual footnotes can be selectively removed. Footnotes are identified by their index values. To remove the footnote concerning true solar time (footnote 2, since it was supplied to gt after the other footnote) we would give the correct index value to footnotes.

rm_footnotes(data = gt_tbl, footnotes = 2)
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `rm_footnotes()` help file.

Function ID

7-4

Function Introduced

v0.8.0 (November 16, 2022)

See Also

Other part removal functions: rm_caption(), rm_header(), rm_source_notes(), rm_spanners(), rm_stubhead()


Remove the table header

Description

We can remove the table header from a gt table quite easily with rm_header(). The table header is an optional table part (positioned above the column labels) that can be added through tab_header().

This function for removal is useful if you have received a gt table (perhaps through an API that returns gt objects) but would prefer that the table not contain a header. This function is safe to use even if there is no header part in the input gt_tbl object.

Usage

rm_header(data)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Let's use a subset of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. A header part can be added with tab_header(); with that, we get a title and a subtitle for the table.

gt_tbl <-
  gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, msrp) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:5) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("Data listing from **gtcars**"),
    subtitle = md("`gtcars` is an R dataset")
  )

gt_tbl
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `rm_header()` help file.

If you decide that you don't want the header in the gt_tbl object, it can be removed with rm_header().

rm_header(data = gt_tbl)
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `rm_header()` help file.

Function ID

7-1

Function Introduced

v0.8.0 (November 16, 2022)

See Also

Other part removal functions: rm_caption(), rm_footnotes(), rm_source_notes(), rm_spanners(), rm_stubhead()


Remove table source notes

Description

If you have one or more source notes that ought to be removed, rm_source_notes() allows for such a selective removal. The table footer is an optional table part that is positioned below the table body, containing areas for both the source notes and footnotes.

This function for removal is useful if you have received a gt table (perhaps through an API that returns gt objects) but would prefer that some or all of the source notes be removed. This function is safe to use even if there are no source notes in the input gt_tbl object so long as select helpers (such as the default everything()) are used instead of explicit integer values.

Usage

rm_source_notes(data, source_notes = everything())

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

source_notes

Source notes to remove

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>|everything()⁠ // default: everything()

A specification of which source notes should be removed. The source notes to be removed can be given as a vector of integer values (they are stored as integer positions, in order of creation, starting at 1). A select helper can also be used and, by default, this is everything() (whereby all source notes will be removed).

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use a subset of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. tab_source_note() is used to add a source note to the table footer that cites the data source (or, it could just be arbitrary text). We'll use the function twice, in effect adding two source notes to the footer.

gt_tbl <-
  gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, msrp) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:5) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_source_note(source_note = "Data from the 'edmunds.com' site.") |>
  tab_source_note(source_note = "Showing only the first five rows.") |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(120))

gt_tbl
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `rm_source_notes()` help file.

If you decide that you don't want the source notes in the gt_tbl object, they can be removed with rm_source_notes().

rm_source_notes(data = gt_tbl)
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `rm_source_notes()` help file.

Individual source notes can be selectively removed. Source notes are identified by their index values. To remove the source note concerning the extent of the data (source note 2, since it was supplied to gt after the other source note) we would give the correct index value to source_notes.

rm_source_notes(data = gt_tbl, source_notes = 2)
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `rm_source_notes()` help file.

Function ID

7-5

Function Introduced

v0.8.0 (November 16, 2022)

See Also

Other part removal functions: rm_caption(), rm_footnotes(), rm_header(), rm_spanners(), rm_stubhead()


Remove column spanner labels

Description

If you would like to remove column spanner labels then the rm_spanners() function can make this possible. Column spanner labels appear above the column labels and can occupy several levels via stacking either through tab_spanner() or tab_spanner_delim(). Spanner column labels are distinguishable and accessible by their ID values.

This function for removal is useful if you have received a gt table (perhaps through an API that returns gt objects) but would prefer that some or all of the column spanner labels be removed. This function is safe to use even if there are no column spanner labels in the input gt_tbl object so long as select helpers (such as the default everything()) are used instead of explicit ID values.

Usage

rm_spanners(data, spanners = everything(), levels = NULL)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

spanners

Spanners to remove

⁠<spanner-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

A specification of which spanner column labels should be removed. Those to be removed can be given as a vector of spanner ID values (every spanner column label has one, either set by the user or by gt when using tab_spanner_delim()). A select helper can also be used and, by default, this is everything() (whereby all spanner column labels will be removed).

levels

Spanner levels to remove

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Instead of removing spanner column labels by ID values, entire levels of spanners can instead be removed. Supply a numeric vector of level values (the first level is 1) and, if they are present, they will be removed. Any input given to level will mean that spanners is ignored.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use a portion of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. With tab_spanner(), we can group several related columns together under a spanner column. In this example, that is done with several tab_spanner() calls in order to create two levels of spanner column labels.

gt_tbl <-
  gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(
    -mfr, -trim, bdy_style, drivetrain,
    -drivetrain, -trsmn, -ctry_origin
  ) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:8) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "model") |>
  tab_spanner(label = "HP", columns = c(hp, hp_rpm)) |>
  tab_spanner(label = "Torque", columns = c(trq, trq_rpm)) |>
  tab_spanner(label = "MPG", columns = c(mpg_c, mpg_h)) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Performance",
    columns = c(
      hp, hp_rpm, trq, trq_rpm,
      mpg_c, mpg_h
    )
  )

gt_tbl
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `rm_spanners()` help file.

If you decide that you don't want any of the spanners in the gt_tbl object, they can all be removed with rm_spanners().

rm_spanners(data = gt_tbl)
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `rm_spanners()` help file.

Individual spanner column labels can be removed by ID value. In all the above uses of tab_spanner(), the label value is the ID value (you can alternately set a different ID value though the id argument). Let's remove the "HP" and "MPG" spanner column labels with rm_spanners().

rm_spanners(data = gt_tbl, spanners = c("HP", "MPG"))
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `rm_spanners()` help file.

We can also remove spanner column labels by level with rm_spanners(). Provide a vector of one or more values greater than or equal to 1 (the first level starts there). In the next example, we'll remove the first level of spanner column labels. Any levels not being removed will collapse down accordingly.

rm_spanners(data = gt_tbl, levels = 1)
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `rm_spanners()` help file.

Function ID

7-3

Function Introduced

v0.8.0 (November 16, 2022)

See Also

Other part removal functions: rm_caption(), rm_footnotes(), rm_header(), rm_source_notes(), rm_stubhead()


Remove the stubhead label

Description

We can easily remove the stubhead label from a gt table with rm_stubhead(). The stubhead location only exists if there is a table stub and the text in that cell is added with tab_stubhead().

This function for removal is useful if you have received a gt table (perhaps through an API that returns gt objects) but would prefer that the table not contain any content in the stubhead. This function is safe to use even if there is no stubhead label in the input gt_tbl object.

Usage

rm_stubhead(data)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Using the gtcars dataset, we'll create a gt table. With tab_stubhead(), it's possible to add a stubhead label. This appears in the top-left and can be used to describe what is in the stub.

gt_tbl <-
  gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(model, year, hp, trq) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:5) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "model") |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "car")

gt_tbl
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `rm_stubhead()` help file.

If you decide that you don't want the stubhead label in the gt_tbl object, it can be removed with rm_stubhead().

rm_stubhead(data = gt_tbl)
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `rm_stubhead()` help file.

Function ID

7-2

Function Introduced

v0.8.0 (November 16, 2022)

See Also

Other part removal functions: rm_caption(), rm_footnotes(), rm_header(), rm_source_notes(), rm_spanners()


Select helper for targeting the row group column

Description

Should you need to target only the row group column for column-width declarations (i.e., when row_group_as_column = TRUE is set in the initial gt() call), the row_group() select helper can be used. This shorthand makes it so you don't have to use the name of the column that was selected as the row group column.

Usage

row_group()

Value

A character vector of class "row_group_column".

Examples

Create a tibble that has a row column (values from 1 to 6), a group column, and a vals column (containing the same values as in row).

tbl <-
  dplyr::tibble(
    row = 1:6,
    group = c(rep("Group A", 3), rep("Group B", 3)),
    vals = 1:6
  )

Create a gt table with a two-column stub (incorporating the row and group columns in that). We can set the widths of the two columns in the stub with the row_group() and stub() helpers on the LHS of the expressions passed to cols_width().

tbl |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "row",
    groupname_col = "group",
    row_group_as_column = TRUE
  ) |>
  fmt_roman(columns = stub()) |>
  cols_width(
    row_group() ~ px(200),
    stub() ~ px(100),
    vals ~ px(50)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `row_group()` help file.

Function ID

8-11

Function Introduced

v0.11.0 (July 9, 2024)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), stub(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


Modify the ordering of any row groups

Description

We can modify the display order of any row groups in a gt object with row_group_order(). The groups argument takes a vector of row group ID values. After this function is invoked, the row groups will adhere to this revised ordering. It isn't necessary to provide all row ID values in groups, rather, what is provided will assume the specified ordering at the top of the table and the remaining row groups will follow in their original ordering.

Usage

row_group_order(data, groups)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

groups

Specification of row group IDs

⁠vector<character>⁠ // required

A character vector of row group ID values corresponding to the revised ordering. While this vector must contain valid group ID values, it is not required to have all of the row group IDs within it; any omitted values will be added to the end while preserving the original ordering.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Let's use exibble to create a gt table with a stub and with row groups. We can modify the order of the row groups with row_group_order(), specifying the new ordering in groups.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(char, currency, row, group) |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "row",
    groupname_col = "group"
  ) |>
  row_group_order(groups = c("grp_b", "grp_a"))
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `row_group_order()` help file.

Function ID

6-3

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other row addition/modification functions: grand_summary_rows(), rows_add(), summary_rows()


Add one or more rows to a gt table

Description

It's possible to add new rows to your table with rows_add() by supplying the new row data through name-value pairs or two-sided formula expressions. The new rows are added to the bottom of the table by default but can be added internally by using either the .before or .after arguments. If entirely empty rows need to be added, the .n_empty option provides a means to specify the number of blank (i.e., all NA) rows to be inserted into the table.

Usage

rows_add(
  .data,
  ...,
  .list = list2(...),
  .before = NULL,
  .after = NULL,
  .n_empty = NULL
)

Arguments

.data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

...

Cell data assignments

⁠<multiple expressions>⁠ // (or, use .list)

Expressions for the assignment of cell values to the new rows by column name in .data. Name-value pairs, in the form of ⁠<column> = <value vector>⁠ will work, so long as the ⁠<column>⁠ value exists in the table. Two-sided formulas with column-resolving expressions (e.g, ⁠<expr> ~ <value vector>⁠) can also be used, where the left-hand side corresponds to selections of columns. Column names should be enclosed in c() and select helpers like starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), and everything() can be used in the LHS. The length of the longest vector in ⁠<value vector>⁠ determines how many new rows will be added. Single values in ⁠<value vector>⁠ will be repeated down in cases where there are multiple rows to be added.

.list

Alternative to ...

⁠<list of multiple expressions>⁠ // (or, use ...)

Allows for the use of a list as an input alternative to ....

.before, .after

Row used as anchor

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A single row-resolving expression or row index an be given to either .before or .after. The row specifies where the new rows should be positioned among the existing rows in the input data table. While select helper functions such as starts_with() and ends_with() can be used for row targeting, it's recommended that a single row name or index be used. This is to ensure that exactly one row is provided to either of these arguments (otherwise, the function will be stopped). If nothing is provided for either argument then any new rows will be placed at the bottom of the table.

.n_empty

Number of empty rows to add

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=0) // default: NULL (optional)

An option to add empty rows in lieu of rows containing data that would otherwise be supplied to ... or .list. If the option is taken, provide an integer value here.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Targeting the row for insertion with .before or .after

The targeting of a row for insertion is done through the .before or .after arguments (only one of these options should be be used). This can be done in a variety of ways. If a stub is present, then we potentially have row identifiers. This is the ideal method to use for establishing a row target. We can use tidyselect-style expressions to target a row. It's also possible to use row indices (e.g., c(3, 5, 6)) though these index values must correspond to the row numbers of the input data (the indices won't necessarily match those of rearranged rows if row groups are present). One more type of expression is possible, an expression that takes column values (can involve any of the available columns in the table) and returns a logical vector.

Examples

Let's make a simple gt table with the exibble dataset, using the row column for labels in the stub. We'll add a single row to the bottom of the table with rows_add(). With name-value pairs, it's possible to add values for the new body cells that correspond to columns available in the table. For any columns that are missed, the related body cells will receive NA values.

exibble |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row") |>
  rows_add(
    row = "row_9",
    num = 9.999E7,
    char = "ilama",
    fctr = "nine",
    group = "grp_b"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `rows_add()` help file.

If you wanted to place a row somewhere in the middle of the table, we can use either of the .before or .after arguments in rows_add():

exibble |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row") |>
  rows_add(
    row = "row_4.5",
    num = 9.923E3,
    char = "elderberry",
    fctr = "eighty",
    group = "grp_a",
    .after = "row_4"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `rows_add()` help file.

Putting a row at the beginning requires the use of the .before argument. We can use an index value for the row as in .before = 1 for maximum easiness:

exibble |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row") |>
  rows_add(
    row = "row_0",
    num = 0,
    char = "apple",
    fctr = "zero",
    group = "grp_a",
    .before = 1
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `rows_add()` help file.

Again with exibble, we can create an example where we insert 'spacer' rows. These are rows without any content and merely serve to add extra vertical space to the table in specific locations. In this case, we'll have a stub with row names and row groups (set up in the gt() call). The two rows being added will occupy the bottom row of each group. The only data defined for the two rows involves values for the row and group columns. It's important that the data for group uses the group names already present in the data ("grp_a" and "grp_b"). The corresponding values for row will be "row_a_end" and "row_b_end", these will be used later expressions for targeting the rows. Here's the code needed to generate spacer rows at the end of each row group:

exibble |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row", groupname_col = "group") |>
  rows_add(
    row = c("row_a_end", "row_b_end"),
    group = c("grp_a", "grp_b")
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_borders(sides = "top", style = "hidden"),
    locations = list(
      cells_body(rows = ends_with("end")),
      cells_stub(rows = ends_with("end"))
    )
  ) |>
  sub_missing(missing_text = "") |>
  text_case_when(
    grepl("end", x) ~ "",
    .locations = cells_stub()
  ) |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.5)
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `rows_add()` help file.

All missing values were substituted with an empty string (""), and that was done by using sub_missing(). We removed the top border of the new rows with a call to tab_style(), targeting those rows where the row labels end with "end". Finally, we get rid of the row labels with the use of text_case_when(), using a similar strategy of targeting the name of the row label.

Another application is starting from nothing (really just the definition of columns) and building up a table using several invocations of rows_add(). This might be useful in interactive or programmatic applications. Here's an example where two columns are defined with dplyr::tibble() (and no rows are present initially); with two calls of rows_add(), two separate rows are added.

dplyr::tibble(
  time = lubridate::POSIXct(),
  event = character(0L)
) |>
  gt() |>
  rows_add(
    time = lubridate::ymd_hms("2022-01-23 12:36:10"),
    event = "start"
  ) |>
  rows_add(
    time = lubridate::ymd_hms("2022-01-23 13:41:26"),
    event = "completed"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `rows_add()` help file.

It's possible to use formula syntax in rows_add() to perform column resolution along with attaching values for new rows. If we wanted to use an equivalent value for multiple cells in a new row, a valid input would be in the form of ⁠<expr> ~ <value vector>⁠. In the following example, we create a simple table with six columns (the rendered gt table displays four columns and a stub column since the group column is used for row group labels). Let's add a single row where some of the cell values added correspond to columns are resolved on the LHS of the formula expressions:

dplyr::tibble(
  group = c("Group A", "Group B", "Group B"),
  id = c("WG-025360", "WG-025361", "WG-025362"),
  a = c(1, 6, 2),
  b = c(2, 6, 2),
  quantity_x = c(83.58, 282.71, 92.20),
  quantity_y = c(36.82, 282.71, 87.34)
) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "id", groupname_col = "group") |>
  rows_add(
    starts_with("gr") ~ "Group A",
    id = "WG-025363",
    c(a, b) ~ 5,
    starts_with("quantity") ~ 72.63
  )
This image of a table was generated from the sixth code example in the `rows_add()` help file.

We can see that using starts_with("gr") yields a successful match to the group column with the tangible result being an addition of a row to the "Group A" group (the added row is the second one in the rendered gt table). Through the use of c(a, b), it was possible to add the value 5 to both the a and b columns. A similar approach was taken with adding the 72.63 value to the quantity_x and quantity_y columns though we used the starts_with("quantity") expression to get gt to resolve those two columns.

You can start with an empty table (i.e., no columns and no rows) and add one or more rows to it. In the completely empty table scenario, where you would use something like dplyr::tibble() or data.frame() with gt(), the first rows_add() could have rows of arbitrary width. In other words, you get to generate table columns (and rows) with a completely empty table via rows_add(). Here's an example of that:

gt(dplyr::tibble()) |>
  rows_add(
    msrp = c(29.95, 49.95, 79.95),
    item = c("Klax", "Rez", "Ys"),
    type = c("A", "B", "X")
  ) |>
  rows_add(
    msrp = 14.95,
    item = "D",
    type = "Z"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the seventh code example in the `rows_add()` help file.

In the above, three columns and three rows were generated. The second usage of rows_add() had to use of a subset of those columns (all three were used to create a complete, new row).

We can also start with a virtually empty table: one that has columns but no actual rows. With this type of multi-column, zero-row table, one needs to use a subset of the columns when generating new rows through rows_add().

dplyr::tibble(
  msrp = numeric(0L),
  item = character(0L),
  type = character(0L)
) |>
  gt() |>
  rows_add(
    msrp = c(29.95, 49.95, 79.95, 14.95),
    item = c("Klax", "Rez", "Ys", "D"),
    type = c("A", "B", "X", "Z")
  ) |>
  cols_add(
    genre = c("puzzle", "action", "RPG", "adventure")
  ) |>
  fmt_currency() |>
  cols_move_to_end(columns = msrp)
This image of a table was generated from the eighth code example in the `rows_add()` help file.

Function ID

6-4

Function Introduced

v0.10.0 (October 7, 2023)

See Also

Other row addition/modification functions: grand_summary_rows(), row_group_order(), summary_rows()


Apply conditional formatting to cells with rows and columns

Description

To apply styling or formatting, you can use the columns and rows arguments. The syntax should be very familiar for dplyr users as you can use the tidyselect specification.

Targeting of values is done through columns and additionally by rows (if nothing is provided for rows then entire columns are selected). The columns argument allows us to target a subset of cells contained in the resolved columns. We say resolved because aside from declaring column names in c() (with bare column names or names in quotes) we can use tidyselect-style expressions. This can be as basic as supplying a select helper like starts_with(), or, providing a more complex incantation like

where(~ is.numeric(.x) & max(.x, na.rm = TRUE) > 1E6)

which targets numeric columns that have a maximum value greater than 1,000,000 (excluding any NAs from consideration).

By default all columns and rows are selected (with the everything() defaults). Cell values that are incompatible with a given formatting function will be skipped over, like character values and numeric ⁠fmt_*()⁠ functions. So it's safe to select all columns with a particular formatting function (only those values that can be formatted will be formatted), but, you may not want that. One strategy is to format the bulk of cell values with one formatting function and then constrain the columns for later passes with other types of formatting (the last formatting done to a cell is what you get in the final output).

Once the columns are targeted, we may also target the rows within those columns. This can be done in a variety of ways. If a stub is present, then we potentially have row identifiers. Those can be used much like column names in the columns-targeting scenario. We can use simpler tidyselect-style expressions (the select helpers should work well here) and we can use quoted row identifiers in c(). It's also possible to use row indices (e.g., c(3, 5, 6)) though these index values must correspond to the row numbers of the input data (the indices won't necessarily match those of rearranged rows if row groups are present). One more type of expression is possible, an expression that takes column values (can involve any of the available columns in the table) and returns a logical vector. This is nice if you want to base formatting on values in the column or another column, or, you'd like to use a more complex predicate expression.

Examples

gt_tbl <- gt(exibble)
gt_tbl %>%
  fmt_time(
    columns = contains("time") & !starts_with("date"),
     rows = num > 100 & group == "grp_b"
  )

# Styling numeric columns based on range

gt_tbl %>% tab_style(
  style = cell_text(weight = "bold"),
  locations = cells_body(
  columns =  where(is.factor)
  )
)

# Naming rows

gt_tbl_rows <- gt(exibble, rowname_col = "row")
gt_tbl_rows %>%
  fmt_datetime(
    columns = datetime,
    rows = c("row_1", "row_8")
  )

An ADDV-flavored clinical trial toy dataset

Description

This tibble contains artificial protocol deviation data for 180 subjects in the Intent-to-Treat (ITT) population of the GT01 study. The dataset contains the usual parameters (PARAM, PARAMCD) for an addv. There is summary parameter (PARCAT1 == "OVERALL") for each subject of the GT01 ITT-population, indicating whether or not at least one major protocol deviation (PD) occurred throughout the course of the study for the respective subject. Individual records for protocol deviations per subject exist, indicating which specific type of PD occurred. The additional flag CRIT1FL, shows whether a PD was related to COVID-19 or not.

Although the data was intentionally created to mimic a typical clinical trial dataset following the CDISC format, it might not strictly comply with CDISC ADaM rules. The intent is to showcase the workflow for clinical table creation rather than creating a fully CDISC-compliant ADaM dataset.

Usage

rx_addv

Format

A tibble with 291 rows and 20 variables:

STUDYID, STUDYIDN

The unique study identifier and its numeric version.

USUBJID

The unique subject identifier.

TRTA, TRTAN

The study intervention and its numeric version, which is either "Placebo" (1), "Drug 1" (2), or NA (3), missing for screen failures).

ITTFL

Intent-to-Treat (ITT) population flag, where "Y" indicates a subject belongs to the ITT population and "N" indicates a subject is not in the ITT population.

AGE

The age of a subject at baseline in years.

AAGEGR1

The analysis age group, indicating if a subject was strictly younger than 40 years at baseline or older.

SEX

Sex of a subject. Can be either "Male", "Female" or "Undifferentiated".

ETHNIC

Ethnicity of a subject. Can be either "Hispanic or Latino", "Not Hispanic or Latino" or missing ("").

BLBMI

Body Mass Index (BMI) of a subject at baseline in kg/m2.

DVTERM

The Protocol Deviation Term.

PARAMCD, PARAM

The Parameter Code and decoded parameter description for the protocol deviation.

PARCAT1

Parameter category. Can be "OVERALL" for derived PD summaries or "PROTOCOL DEVIATION" for individual PDs.

DVCAT

Category for PD, indicating whether the PD is a major one or not.

ACAT1

Analysis category 1. Only populated for individual PDs, not for summary scores. High level category for PDs.

AVAL

Analysis Value. Either 0 or 1.

CRIT1, CRIT1FL

Analysis Criterion 1 and analysis criterion 1 flag, indicating whether PD is related to COVID-19 or not.

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-18

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, exibble, films, gibraltar, gtcars, illness, metro, nuclides, peeps, photolysis, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_adsl, sp500, sza, towny

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(rx_addv)

An ADSL-flavored clinical trial toy dataset

Description

This tibble contains artificial data for 182 subjects of the GT01 study. Each row corresponds to demographic characteristics of a single trial participant. Two out of 182 study participants were screen failures and thus not treated, the rest of the study population was randomized with a 1:1 ratio to receive either "Placebo" (as comparator) or "Drug 1". The dataset entails subject level demographics such as age, age group, sex, ethnicity, and body mass index (BMI) at baseline, as well as an event flag, indicating whether the subject experienced a specific event throughout the course of the study or not.

Although the data was intentionally created to mimic a typical clinical trial dataset following the CDISC format, it might not strictly comply with CDISC ADaM rules. The intent is to showcase the workflow for clinical table creation rather than creating a fully CDISC-compliant ADaM dataset.

Usage

rx_adsl

Format

A tibble with 182 rows and 14 variables:

STUDYID, STUDYIDN

The unique study identifier and its numeric version.

USUBJID

The unique subject identifier.

TRTA, TRTAN

The study intervention and its numeric version, which is either "Placebo" (1), "Drug 1" (2) or NA (3), missing for screen failures).

ITTFL

Intent-to-Treat (ITT) population flag, where "Y" indicates a subject belongs to the ITT population and "N" indicates a subject is not in the ITT population.

RANDFL

Randomization flag, where "Y" indicates a subject was randomized to receive either "Placebo" or "Drug 1" and "N" indicates a subject was not randomized at all.

SCRFREAS

The reason for screen failure. This is either missing ("") for non-screen failure subjects or indicates the reason for screen failure

AGE

The age of a subject at baseline in years.

AAGEGR1

The analysis age group, indicating if a subject was strictly younger than 40 years at baseline or older.

SEX

Sex of a subject. Can be either "Male", "Female" or "Undifferentiated".

ETHNIC

Ethnicity of a subject. Can be either "Hispanic or Latino", "Not Hispanic or Latino" or missing ("").

BLBMI

Body Mass Index (BMI) of a subject at baseline in kg/m2.

EVNTFL

Event Flag. Indicates whether the subject experienced a specific event during the course of the study or not. Can be either "Y" (if if the subject had the event) or "N".

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-17

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, exibble, films, gibraltar, gtcars, illness, metro, nuclides, peeps, photolysis, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_addv, sp500, sza, towny

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(rx_adsl)

Daily S&P 500 Index data from 1950 to 2015

Description

This dataset provides daily price indicators for the S&P 500 index from the beginning of 1950 to the end of 2015. The index includes 500 leading companies and captures about 80 percent coverage of available market capitalization.

Usage

sp500

Format

A tibble with 16,607 rows and 7 variables:

date

The date expressed as Date values.

open, high, low, close

The day's opening, high, low, and closing prices in USD. The close price is adjusted for splits.

volume

The number of trades for the given date.

adj_close

The close price adjusted for both dividends and splits.

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-4

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, exibble, films, gibraltar, gtcars, illness, metro, nuclides, peeps, photolysis, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sza, towny

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(sp500)

Select helper for targeting the stub column

Description

Should you need to target only the stub column for formatting or other operations, the stub() select helper can be used. This obviates the need to use the name of the column that was selected as the stub column.

Usage

stub()

Value

A character vector of class "stub_column".

Examples

Create a tibble that has a row column (values from 1 to 6), a group column, and a vals column (containing the same values as in row).

tbl <-
  dplyr::tibble(
    row = 1:6,
    group = c(rep("Group A", 3), rep("Group B", 3)),
    vals = 1:6
  )

Create a gt table with a two-column stub (incorporating the row and group columns in that). Format the row labels of the stub with fmt_roman() to obtain Roman numerals in the stub; we're selecting the stub column here with the stub() select helper.

tbl |>
  gt(rowname_col = "row", groupname_col = "group") |>
  fmt_roman(columns = stub()) |>
  tab_options(row_group.as_column = TRUE)
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `stub()` help file.

Function ID

8-10

Function Introduced

v0.8.0 (November 16, 2022)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), system_fonts(), unit_conversion()


Substitute large values in the table body

Description

Wherever there are numerical data that are very large in value, replacement text may be better for explanatory purposes. sub_large_vals() allows for this replacement through specification of a threshold, a large_pattern, and the sign (positive or negative) of the values to be considered.

Usage

sub_large_vals(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  threshold = 1e+12,
  large_pattern = ">={x}",
  sign = "+"
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

The columns to which substitution operations are constrained. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should form a constraint for targeting operations. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

threshold

Threshold value

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 1E12

The threshold value with which values should be considered large enough for replacement.

large_pattern

Pattern specification for large values

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ">={x}"

The pattern text to be used in place of the suitably large values in the rendered table.

sign

Consider positive or negative values?

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "+"

The sign of the numbers to be considered in the replacement. By default, we only consider positive values ("+"). The other option ("-") can be used to consider only negative values.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Let's generate a simple, single-column tibble that contains an assortment of values that could potentially undergo some substitution.

tbl <- dplyr::tibble(num = c(0, NA, 10^(8:14)))

tbl
#> # A tibble: 9 x 1
#>     num
#>   <dbl>
#> 1  0   
#> 2 NA   
#> 3  1e 8
#> 4  1e 9
#> 5  1e10
#> 6  1e11
#> 7  1e12
#> 8  1e13
#> 9  1e14

The tbl object contains a variety of larger numbers and some might be larger enough to reformat with a threshold value. With sub_large_vals() we can do just that:

tbl |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_number(columns = num) |>
  sub_large_vals()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `sub_large_vals()` help file.

Large negative values can also be handled but they are handled specially by the sign parameter. Setting that to "-" will format only the large values that are negative. Notice that with the default large_pattern value of ">={x}" the ">=" is automatically changed to "<=".

tbl |>
  dplyr::mutate(num = -num) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_number(columns = num) |>
  sub_large_vals(sign = "-")
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `sub_large_vals()` help file.

You don't have to settle with the default threshold value or the default replacement pattern (in large_pattern). This can be changed and the "{x}" in large_pattern (which uses the threshold value) can even be omitted.

tbl |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_number(columns = num) |>
  sub_large_vals(
    threshold = 5E10,
    large_pattern = "hugemongous"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `sub_large_vals()` help file.

Function ID

3-34

Function Introduced

v0.6.0 (May 24, 2022)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Substitute missing values in the table body

Description

Wherever there is missing data (i.e., NA values) customizable content may present better than the standard NA text that would otherwise appear. sub_missing() allows for this replacement through its missing_text argument (where an em dash serves as the default).

Usage

sub_missing(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  missing_text = "---"
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

The columns to which substitution operations are constrained. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should form a constraint for targeting operations. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

missing_text

Replacement text for NA values

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "---"

The text to be used in place of NA values in the rendered table. We can optionally use md() or html() to style the text as Markdown or to retain HTML elements in the text.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use select columns from the exibble dataset to create a gt table. The NA values in different columns (here, we are using column indices in columns) will be given two variations of replacement text with two separate calls of sub_missing().

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(-row, -group) |>
  gt() |>
  sub_missing(
    columns = 1:2,
    missing_text = "missing"
  ) |>
  sub_missing(
    columns = 4:7,
    missing_text = "nothing"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `sub_missing()` help file.

Function ID

3-31

Function Introduced

v0.6.0 (May 24, 2022)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Substitute small values in the table body

Description

Wherever there is numerical data that are very small in value, replacement text may be better for explanatory purposes. sub_small_vals() allows for this replacement through specification of a threshold, a small_pattern, and the sign of the values to be considered. The substitution will occur for those values found to be between 0 and the threshold value. This is possible for small positive and small negative values (this can be explicitly set by the sign option). Note that the interval does not include the 0 or the threshold value. Should you need to include zero values, use sub_zero().

Usage

sub_small_vals(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  threshold = 0.01,
  small_pattern = if (sign == "+") "<{x}" else md("<*abs*(-{x})"),
  sign = "+"
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

The columns to which substitution operations are constrained. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should form a constraint for targeting operations. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

threshold

Threshold value

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 0.01

The threshold value with which values should be considered small enough for replacement.

small_pattern

Pattern specification for small values

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: if (sign == "+") "<{x}" else md("<*abs*(-{x})")

The pattern text to be used in place of the suitably small values in the rendered table.

sign

Consider positive or negative values?

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "+"

The sign of the numbers to be considered in the replacement. By default, we only consider positive values ("+"). The other option ("-") can be used to consider only negative values.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Let's generate a simple, single-column tibble that contains an assortment of values that could potentially undergo some substitution.

tbl <- dplyr::tibble(num = c(10^(-4:2), 0, NA))

tbl
#> # A tibble: 9 x 1
#>        num
#>      <dbl>
#> 1   0.0001
#> 2   0.001 
#> 3   0.01  
#> 4   0.1   
#> 5   1     
#> 6  10     
#> 7 100     
#> 8   0     
#> 9  NA

The tbl contains a variety of smaller numbers and some might be small enough to reformat with a threshold value. With sub_small_vals() we can do just that:

tbl |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_number(columns = num) |>
  sub_small_vals()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `sub_small_vals()` help file.

Small and negative values can also be handled but they are handled specially by the sign parameter. Setting that to "-" will format only the small, negative values.

tbl |>
  dplyr::mutate(num = -num) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_number(columns = num) |>
  sub_small_vals(sign = "-")
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `sub_small_vals()` help file.

You don't have to settle with the default threshold value or the default replacement pattern (in small_pattern). This can be changed and the "{x}" in small_pattern (which uses the threshold value) can even be omitted.

tbl |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_number(columns = num) |>
  sub_small_vals(
    threshold = 0.0005,
    small_pattern = "smol"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `sub_small_vals()` help file.

Function ID

3-33

Function Introduced

v0.6.0 (May 24, 2022)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_values(), sub_zero()


Substitute targeted values in the table body

Description

Should you need to replace specific cell values with custom text, sub_values() can be good choice. We can target cells for replacement through value, regex, and custom matching rules.

Usage

sub_values(
  data,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  values = NULL,
  pattern = NULL,
  fn = NULL,
  replacement = NULL,
  escape = TRUE
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

The columns to which substitution operations are constrained. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should form a constraint for targeting operations. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

values

Values to match on

⁠scalar<character|numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The specific value or values that should be replaced with a replacement value. If pattern is also supplied then values will be ignored.

pattern

Regex pattern to match with

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A regex pattern that can target solely those values in character-based columns. If values is also supplied, pattern will take precedence.

fn

Function to return logical values

⁠<function>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A supplied function that operates on x (the data in a column) and should return a logical vector that matches the length of x (i.e., number of rows in the input table). If either of values or pattern is also supplied, fn will take precedence.

replacement

Replacement value for matches

⁠scalar<character|numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The replacement value for any cell values matched by either values or pattern. Must be a character or numeric vector of length 1.

escape

Text escaping

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to escape replacement text according to the final output format of the table. For example, if a LaTeX table is to be generated then LaTeX escaping would be performed on the replacements during rendering. By default this is set to TRUE but setting to FALSE would be useful in the case where replacement text is crafted for a specific output format in mind.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Let's create an input table with three columns. This contains an assortment of values that could potentially undergo some substitution via sub_values().

tbl <-
  dplyr::tibble(
    num_1 = c(-0.01, 74, NA, 0, 500, 0.001, 84.3),
    int_1 = c(1L, -100000L, 800L, 5L, NA, 1L, -32L),
    lett = LETTERS[1:7]
  )

tbl
#> # A tibble: 7 x 3
#>     num_1   int_1 lett 
#>     <dbl>   <int> <chr>
#> 1  -0.01        1 A    
#> 2  74     -100000 B    
#> 3  NA         800 C    
#> 4   0           5 D    
#> 5 500          NA E    
#> 6   0.001       1 F    
#> 7  84.3       -32 G

Values in the table body cells can be replaced by specifying which values should be replaced (in values) and what the replacement value should be. It's okay to search for numerical or character values across all columns and the replacement value can also be of the numeric or character types.

tbl |>
  gt() |>
  sub_values(values = c(74, 500), replacement = 150) |>
  sub_values(values = "B", replacement = "Bee") |>
  sub_values(values = 800, replacement = "Eight hundred")
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `sub_values()` help file.

We can also use the pattern argument to target cell values for replacement in character-based columns.

tbl |>
  gt() |>
  sub_values(pattern = "A|C|E", replacement = "Ace")
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `sub_values()` help file.

For the most flexibility, it's best to use the fn argument. With that you need to ensure that the function you provide will return a logical vector when invoked on a column of cell values, taken as x (and, the length of that vector must match the length of x).

tbl |>
  gt() |>
  sub_values(
    fn = function(x) x >= 0 & x < 50,
    replacement = "Between 0 and 50"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `sub_values()` help file.

Function ID

3-35

Function Introduced

v0.8.0 (November 16, 2022)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_zero()


Substitute zero values in the table body

Description

Wherever there is numerical data that are zero in value, replacement text may be better for explanatory purposes. sub_zero() allows for this replacement through its zero_text argument.

Usage

sub_zero(data, columns = everything(), rows = everything(), zero_text = "nil")

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

The columns to which substitution operations are constrained. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should form a constraint for targeting operations. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

zero_text

Replacement text for zero values

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "nil"

The text to be used in place of zero values in the rendered table. We can optionally use md() or html() to style the text as Markdown or to retain HTML elements in the text.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Let's generate a simple, single-column tibble that contains an assortment of values that could potentially undergo some substitution.

tbl <- dplyr::tibble(num = c(10^(-1:2), 0, 0, 10^(4:6)))

tbl
#> # A tibble: 9 x 1
#>         num
#>       <dbl>
#> 1       0.1
#> 2       1  
#> 3      10  
#> 4     100  
#> 5       0  
#> 6       0  
#> 7   10000  
#> 8  100000  
#> 9 1000000

With this table, the zero values in will be given replacement text with a single call of sub_zero().

tbl |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_number(columns = num) |>
  sub_zero()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `sub_zero()` help file.

Function ID

3-32

Function Introduced

v0.6.0 (May 24, 2022)

See Also

Other data formatting functions: data_color(), fmt(), fmt_auto(), fmt_bins(), fmt_bytes(), fmt_chem(), fmt_country(), fmt_currency(), fmt_date(), fmt_datetime(), fmt_duration(), fmt_email(), fmt_engineering(), fmt_flag(), fmt_fraction(), fmt_icon(), fmt_image(), fmt_index(), fmt_integer(), fmt_markdown(), fmt_number(), fmt_partsper(), fmt_passthrough(), fmt_percent(), fmt_roman(), fmt_scientific(), fmt_spelled_num(), fmt_tf(), fmt_time(), fmt_units(), fmt_url(), sub_large_vals(), sub_missing(), sub_small_vals(), sub_values()


Add group-wise summary rows using aggregation functions

Description

Add summary rows to one or more row groups by using the table data and any suitable aggregation functions. Multiple summary rows can be added for selected groups via expressions given to fns. You can selectively format the values in the resulting summary cells by use of formatting expressions in fmt.

Usage

summary_rows(
  data,
  groups = everything(),
  columns = everything(),
  fns = NULL,
  fmt = NULL,
  side = c("bottom", "top"),
  missing_text = "---",
  formatter = NULL,
  ...
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

groups

Specification of row group IDs

⁠<row-group-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The row groups to which targeting operations are constrained. Can either be a series of row group ID values provided in c() or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). By default this is set to everything(), which means that all available groups will obtain summary rows.

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The columns for which the summaries should be calculated. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

fns

Aggregation Expressions

⁠<expression|list of expressions>⁠

Functions used for aggregations. This can include base functions like mean, min, max, median, sd, or sum or any other user-defined aggregation function. Multiple functions, each of which would generate a different row, are to be supplied within a list(). We can specify the functions by use of function names in quotes (e.g., "sum"), as bare functions (e.g., sum), or in formula form (e.g., minimum ~ min(.)) where the LHS could be used to supply the summary row label and ID values. More information on this can be found in the Aggregation expressions for fns section.

fmt

Formatting expressions

⁠<expression|list of expressions>⁠

Formatting expressions in formula form. The RHS of ~ should contain a formatting call (e.g., ⁠~ fmt_number(., decimals = 3, use_seps = FALSE⁠). Optionally, the LHS could contain a group-targeting expression (e.g., "group_a" ~ fmt_number(.)). More information on this can be found in the Formatting expressions for fmt section.

side

Side used for placement of summary rows

⁠singl-kw:[bottom|top]⁠ // default: "bottom"

Should the summary rows be placed at the "bottom" (the default) or the "top" of the row group?

missing_text

Replacement text for NA values

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "---"

The text to be used in place of NA values in summary cells with no data outputs.

formatter

Deprecated Formatting function

⁠<expression>⁠

Deprecated, please use fmt instead. This was previously used as a way to input a formatting function name, which could be any of the ⁠fmt_*()⁠ functions available in the package (e.g., fmt_number(), fmt_percent(), etc.), or a custom function using fmt(). The options of a formatter can be accessed through ....

...

Deprecated Formatting arguments

⁠<Named arguments>⁠

Deprecated (along with formatter) but otherwise used for argument values for a formatting function supplied in formatter. For example, if using formatter = fmt_number, options such as decimals = 1, use_seps = FALSE, and the like can be used here.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Using columns to target column data for aggregation

Targeting of column data for which aggregates should be generated is done through the columns argument. We can declare column names in c() (with bare column names or names in quotes) or we can use tidyselect-style expressions. This can be as basic as supplying a select helper like starts_with(), or, providing a more complex incantation like

where(~ is.numeric(.x) & max(.x, na.rm = TRUE) > 1E6)

which targets numeric columns that have a maximum value greater than 1,000,000 (excluding any NAs from consideration).

By default all columns are selected (with the everything() default). This default may be not what's needed unless all columns can undergo useful aggregation by expressions supplied in fns.

Aggregation expressions for fns

There are a number of ways to express how an aggregation should work for each summary row. In addition to that, we have the ability to pass important information such as the summary row ID value and its label (the former necessary for targeting within tab_style() or tab_footnote() and the latter used for display in the rendered table). Here are a number of instructive examples for how to supply such expressions.

Double-sided formula with everything supplied

We can be explicit and provide a double-sided formula (in the form ⁠<LHS> ~ <RHS>⁠) that expresses everything about a summary row. That is, it has an aggregation expression (where . represents the data in the focused column). Here's an example:

list(id = "minimum", label = "min") ~ min(., na.rm = TRUE)

The left side (the list) contains named elements that identify the id and label for the summary row. The right side has an expression for obtaining a minimum value (dropping NA values in the calculation).

The list() can be replaced with c() but the advantage of a list is allowing the use of the md() and html() helper functions. The above example can be written as:

list(id = "minimum", label = md("**Minimum**")) ~ min(., na.rm = TRUE)

and we can have that label value interpreted as Markdown text.

Function names in quotes

With fns = "min" we get the equivalent of the fuller expression:

list(id = "min", label = "min") ~ min(., na.rm = TRUE)

For sake of convenience, common aggregation functions with the na.rm argument will be rewritten with the na.rm = TRUE option. These functions are: "min", "max", "mean", "median", "sd", and "sum".

Should you need to specify multiple aggregation functions in this way (giving you multiple summary rows), use c() or list().

RHS formula expressions

With fns = ~ min(.) or fns = list(~ min(.)), gt will use the function name as the id and label. The expansion of this shorthand to full form looks like this:

list(id = "min", label = "min") ~ min(.)

The RHS expression is kept as written and the name portion is both the id and the label.

Named vector or list with RHS formula expression

Using fns = c(minimum = ~ min(.)) or fns = list(minimum = ~ min(.)) expands to this:

list(id = "minimum", label = "minimum") ~ min(.)

Unnamed vector or list with RHS formula expression

With fns = c("minimum", "min") ~ min(.) or fns = list("minimum", "min") ~ min(.) the LHS contains the label and id values and, importantly, the order is label first and id second. This can be rewritten as:

list(id = "min", label = "minimum") ~ min(.)

If the vector or list is partially named, gt has enough to go on to disambiguate the unnamed element. So with fns = c("minimum", label = "min") ~ min(.), "min" is indeed the label and "minimum" is taken as the id value.

A fully named list with three specific elements

We can avoid using a formula if we are satisfied with the default options of a function (except some of those functions with the na.rm options, see above). Instead, a list with the named elements id, label, and fn could be used. It can look like this:

fns = list(id = "mean_id", label = "average", fn = "mean")

which translates to

list(id = "mean_id", label = "average") ~ mean(., na.rm = TRUE)

Formatting expressions for fmt

Given that we are generating new data in a table, we might also want to take the opportunity to format those new values right away. We can do this in the fmt argument, either with a single expression or a number of them in a list.

Formatting cells across all groups

We can supply a one-sided (RHS only) or two-sided expression (targeting groups) to fmt, and, several can be provided in a list. The RHS will always contain an expression that uses a formatting function (e.g., fmt_number(), fmt_currency(), etc.) and it must contain an initial . that stands for the data object. If performing numeric formatting on all columns in the new summary rows, it might look something like this:

fmt = ~ fmt_number(., decimals = 1, use_seps = FALSE)

We can use the columns and rows arguments that are available in every formatting function. This allows us to format only a subset of columns or rows. Summary rows can be targeted by using their ID values and these are settable within expressions given to fns (see the Aggregation expressions for fns section for details on this). Here's an example with hypothetical column and row names:

fmt = ~ fmt_number(., columns = num, rows = "mean", decimals = 3)

Formatting cells in specific groups

A two-sided expression is needed for targeting the formatting directives to specific summary row groups. In this format, the LHS should contain an expression that resolves to a set of available groups. We can use a single row group name in quotes, several of those in a vector, or a select helper expression like starts_with() or matches().

In a situation where summary rows were generated across the row groups named "group_1", "group_2", and "group_3", we could format all summary cells in "group_2" with the following:

fmt = "group_2" ~ fmt_number(., decimals = 1, use_seps = FALSE)

If you wanted to target the latter two groups, this can be done:

fmt = matches("2|3") ~ fmt_number(., decimals = 1, use_seps = FALSE)

Should you need to target a single cell, the LHS expression for group targeting could be paired with single values for columns and rows on the RHS formatting expression. Like this:

fmt = "group_1" ~ fmt_number(., columns = num, rows = "mean")

Extraction of summary rows

Should we need to obtain the summary data for external purposes, extract_summary() can be used with a gt_tbl object where summary rows were added via summary_rows() or grand_summary_rows().

Examples

Use a modified version of sp500 dataset to create a gt table with row groups and row labels. Create the summary rows labeled min, max, and avg by row group (where each each row group is a week number) with summary_rows().

sp500 |>
  dplyr::filter(date >= "2015-01-05" & date <= "2015-01-16") |>
  dplyr::arrange(date) |>
  dplyr::mutate(week = paste0("W", strftime(date, format = "%V"))) |>
  dplyr::select(-adj_close, -volume) |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "date",
    groupname_col = "week"
  ) |>
  summary_rows(
    fns = list(
      "min",
      "max",
      list(label = "avg", fn = "mean")
    ),
    fmt = ~ fmt_number(., use_seps = FALSE)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `summary_rows()` help file.

Using the countrypops dataset, let's process that a bit before giving it to gt. We can create a summary rows with totals that appear at the top of each row group (with side = "top"). We can define the aggregation with a list that contains parameters for the summary row label (md("**ALL**")), the shared ID value of those rows across groups ("totals"), and the aggregation function (expressed as "sum", which gt recognizes as the sum() function). To top it all off, we'll add background fills to the summary rows with tab_style().

countrypops |>
  dplyr::filter(
    country_code_2 %in% c("BR", "RU", "IN", "CN", "FR", "DE", "IT", "GB")
  ) |>
  dplyr::filter(year %% 10 == 0) |>
  dplyr::select(country_name, year, population) |>
  tidyr::pivot_wider(names_from = year, values_from = population) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "country_name") |>
  tab_row_group(
    label = md("*BRIC*"),
    rows = c("Brazil", "Russia", "India", "China"),
    id = "bric"
  ) |>
  tab_row_group(
    label = md("*Big Four*"),
    rows = c("France", "Germany", "Italy", "United Kingdom"),
    id = "big4"
  ) |>
  row_group_order(groups = c("bric", "big4")) |>
  tab_stub_indent(rows = everything()) |>
  tab_header(title = "Populations of the BRIC and Big Four Countries") |>
  tab_spanner(columns = everything(), label = "Year") |>
  fmt_number(n_sigfig = 3, suffixing = TRUE) |>
  summary_rows(
    fns =  list(label = md("**ALL**"), id = "totals", fn = "sum"),
    fmt = ~ fmt_number(., n_sigfig = 3, suffixing = TRUE),
    side = "top"
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    locations = cells_summary(),
    style = cell_fill(color = "lightblue" |> adjust_luminance(steps = +1))
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `summary_rows()` help file.

Function ID

6-1

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other row addition/modification functions: grand_summary_rows(), row_group_order(), rows_add()


Get a themed font stack that works well across systems

Description

A font stack can be obtained from system_fonts() using one of various keywords such as "system-ui", "old-style", and "humanist" (there are 15 in total) representing a themed set of fonts. These sets comprise a font family that has been tested to work across a wide range of computer systems. This is useful when specifying font values in cell_text() (itself used inside tab_style()). If using opt_table_font(), we can invoke this function in its stack argument.

Usage

system_fonts(name)

Arguments

name

Name of font stack

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

The name of a font stack. Must be drawn from the set of "system-ui", "transitional", "old-style", "humanist", "geometric-humanist", "classical-humanist", "neo-grotesque", "monospace-slab-serif", "monospace-code", "industrial", "rounded-sans", "slab-serif", "antique", "didone", and "handwritten".

Value

A character vector of font names.

The font stacks and the individual fonts used by platform

System UI ("system-ui")

font-family: system-ui, sans-serif;

The operating system interface's default typefaces are known as system UI fonts. They contain a variety of font weights, are quite readable at small sizes, and are perfect for UI elements. These typefaces serve as a great starting point for text in data tables and so this font stack is the default for gt.

Transitional ("transitional")

font-family: Charter, 'Bitstream Charter', 'Sitka Text', Cambria, serif;

The Enlightenment saw the development of transitional typefaces, which combine Old Style and Modern typefaces. Times New Roman, a transitional typeface created for the Times of London newspaper, is among the most well-known instances of this style.

Old Style ("old-style")

font-family: 'Iowan Old Style', 'Palatino Linotype', 'URW Palladio L', P052, serif;

Old style typefaces were created during the Renaissance and are distinguished by diagonal stress, a lack of contrast between thick and thin strokes, and rounded serifs. Garamond is among the most well-known instances of an antique typeface.

Humanist ("humanist")

font-family: Seravek, 'Gill Sans Nova', Ubuntu, Calibri, 'DejaVu Sans', source-sans-pro, sans-serif;

Low contrast between thick and thin strokes and organic, calligraphic forms are traits of humanist typefaces. These typefaces, which draw their inspiration from Renaissance calligraphy, are frequently regarded as being more readable and easier to read than other sans serif typefaces.

Geometric Humanist ("geometric-humanist")

font-family: Avenir, Montserrat, Corbel, 'URW Gothic', source-sans-pro, sans-serif;

Clean, geometric forms and consistent stroke widths are characteristics of geometric humanist typefaces. These typefaces, which are frequently used for headlines and other display purposes, are frequently thought to be contemporary and slick in appearance. A well-known example of this classification is Futura.

Classical Humanist ("classical-humanist")

font-family: Optima, Candara, 'Noto Sans', source-sans-pro, sans-serif;

The way the strokes gradually widen as they approach the stroke terminals without ending in a serif is what distinguishes classical humanist typefaces. The stone carving on Renaissance-era tombstones and classical Roman capitals served as inspiration for these typefaces.

Neo-Grotesque ("neo-grotesque")

font-family: Inter, Roboto, 'Helvetica Neue', 'Arial Nova', 'Nimbus Sans', Arial, sans-serif;

Neo-grotesque typefaces are a form of sans serif that originated in the late 19th and early 20th centuries. They are distinguished by their crisp, geometric shapes and regular stroke widths. Helvetica is among the most well-known examples of a Neo-grotesque typeface.

Monospace Slab Serif ("monospace-slab-serif")

font-family: 'Nimbus Mono PS', 'Courier New', monospace;

Monospace slab serif typefaces are distinguished by their fixed-width letters, which are the same width irrespective of their shape, and their straightforward, geometric forms. For reports, tabular work, and technical documentation, this technique is used to simulate typewriter output.

Monospace Code ("monospace-code")

font-family: ui-monospace, 'Cascadia Code', 'Source Code Pro', Menlo, Consolas, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', monospace;

Specifically created for use in programming and other technical applications, monospace code typefaces are used in these fields. These typefaces are distinguished by their clear, readable forms and monospaced design, which ensures that all letters and characters are the same width.

Industrial ("industrial")

font-family: Bahnschrift, 'DIN Alternate', 'Franklin Gothic Medium', 'Nimbus Sans Narrow', sans-serif-condensed, sans-serif;

The development of industrial typefaces began in the late 19th century and was greatly influenced by the industrial and technological advancements of the time. Industrial typefaces are distinguished by their strong sans serif letterforms, straightforward appearance, and use of geometric shapes and straight lines.

Rounded Sans ("rounded-sans")

font-family: ui-rounded, 'Hiragino Maru Gothic ProN', Quicksand, Comfortaa, Manjari, 'Arial Rounded MT', 'Arial Rounded MT Bold', Calibri, source-sans-pro, sans-serif;

The rounded, curved letterforms that define rounded typefaces give them a softer, friendlier appearance. The typeface's rounded edges give it a more natural and playful feel, making it appropriate for use in casual or kid-friendly designs. Since the 1950s, the rounded sans-serif design has gained popularity and is still frequently used in branding, graphic design, and other fields.

Slab Serif ("slab-serif")

font-family: Rockwell, 'Rockwell Nova', 'Roboto Slab', 'DejaVu Serif', 'Sitka Small', serif;

Slab Serif typefaces are distinguished by the thick, block-like serifs that appear at the ends of each letterform. Typically, these serifs are unbracketed, which means that they do not have any curved or tapered transitions to the letter's main stroke.

Antique ("antique")

font-family: Superclarendon, 'Bookman Old Style', 'URW Bookman', 'URW Bookman L', 'Georgia Pro', Georgia, serif;

Serif typefaces that were popular in the 19th century include antique typefaces, also referred to as Egyptians. They are distinguished by their thick, uniform stroke weight and block-like serifs.

Didone ("didone")

font-family: Didot, 'Bodoni MT', 'Noto Serif Display', 'URW Palladio L', P052, Sylfaen, serif;

Didone typefaces, also referred to as Modern typefaces, are distinguished by their vertical stress, sharp contrast between thick and thin strokes, and hairline serifs without bracketing. The Didone style first appeared in the late 18th century and became well-known in the early 19th century.

Handwritten ("handwritten")

font-family: 'Segoe Print', 'Bradley Hand', Chilanka, TSCu_Comic, casual, cursive;

The appearance and feel of handwriting are replicated by handwritten typefaces. Although there are a wide variety of handwriting styles, this font stack tends to use a more casual and commonplace style.

Examples

Use a subset of the sp500 dataset to create a gt table with 10 rows. For the date column and the column labels, let's use a different font stack (the "industrial" one). The system fonts used in this particular stack are "Bahnschrift", "DIN Alternate", "Franklin Gothic Medium", and "Nimbus Sans Narrow" (the generic "sans-serif-condensed" and "sans-serif" are used if the aforementioned fonts aren't available).

sp500 |>
  dplyr::slice(1:10) |>
  dplyr::select(-volume, -adj_close) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_currency() |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(
      font = system_fonts(name = "industrial"),
      size = px(18)
    ),
    locations = list(
      cells_body(columns = date),
      cells_column_labels()
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `system_fonts()` help file.

Function ID

8-33

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), unit_conversion()


Twice hourly solar zenith angles by month & latitude

Description

This dataset contains solar zenith angles (in degrees, with the range of 0-90) every half hour from 04:00 to 12:00, true solar time. This set of values is calculated on the first of every month for 4 different northern hemisphere latitudes. For determination of afternoon values, the presented tabulated values are symmetric about noon.

Usage

sza

Format

A tibble with 816 rows and 4 variables:

latitude

The latitude in decimal degrees for the observations.

month

The measurement month. All calculations where conducted for the first day of each month.

tst

The true solar time at the given latitude and date (first of month) for which the solar zenith angle is calculated.

sza

The solar zenith angle in degrees, where NAs indicate that sunrise hadn't yet occurred by the tst value.

Details

The solar zenith angle (SZA) is one measure that helps to describe the sun's path across the sky. It's defined as the angle of the sun relative to a line perpendicular to the earth's surface. It is useful to calculate the SZA in relation to the true solar time. True solar time relates to the position of the sun with respect to the observer, which is different depending on the exact longitude. For example, two hours before the sun crosses the meridian (the highest point it would reach that day) corresponds to a true solar time of 10 a.m. The SZA has a strong dependence on the observer's latitude. For example, at a latitude of 50 degrees N at the start of January, the noontime SZA is 73.0 but a different observer at 20 degrees N would measure the noontime SZA to be 43.0 degrees.

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-2

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

Source

Calculated Actinic Fluxes (290 - 700 nm) for Air Pollution Photochemistry Applications (Peterson, 1976), available at: https://nepis.epa.gov/Exe/ZyPURL.cgi?Dockey=9100JA26.txt.

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, exibble, films, gibraltar, gtcars, illness, metro, nuclides, peeps, photolysis, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sp500, towny

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(sza)

Add a table caption

Description

Add a caption to a gt table, which is handled specially for a table within an R Markdown, Quarto, or bookdown context. The addition of captions makes tables cross-referencing across the containing document. The caption location (i.e., top, bottom, margin) is handled at the document level in each of these systems.

Usage

tab_caption(data, caption)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

caption

Table caption text

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

The table caption to use for cross-referencing in R Markdown, Quarto, or bookdown.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

With three columns from the gtcars dataset, let's create a gt table. First, we'll add a header part with tab_header(). After that, a caption is added with tab_caption().

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, msrp) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:5) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("Data listing from **gtcars**"),
    subtitle = md("`gtcars` is an R dataset")
  ) |>
  tab_caption(caption = md("**gt** table example."))
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `tab_caption()` help file.

Function ID

2-9

Function Introduced

v0.8.0 (November 16, 2022)

See Also

Other part creation/modification functions: tab_footnote(), tab_header(), tab_info(), tab_options(), tab_row_group(), tab_source_note(), tab_spanner(), tab_spanner_delim(), tab_stub_indent(), tab_stubhead(), tab_style(), tab_style_body()


Add a table footnote

Description

tab_footnote() can make it a painless process to add a footnote to a gt table. There are commonly two components to a footnote: (1) a footnote mark that is attached to the targeted cell content, and (2) the footnote text itself that is placed in the table's footer area. Each unit of footnote text in the footer is linked to an element of text or otherwise through the footnote mark. The footnote system in gt presents footnotes in a way that matches the usual expectations, where:

  1. footnote marks have a sequence, whether they are symbols, numbers, or letters

  2. multiple footnotes can be applied to the same content (and marks are always presented in an ordered fashion)

  3. footnote text in the footer is never exactly repeated, gt reuses footnote marks where needed throughout the table

  4. footnote marks are ordered across the table in a consistent manner (left to right, top to bottom)

Each call of tab_footnote() will either add a different footnote to the footer or reuse existing footnote text therein. One or more cells outside of the footer are targeted using the cells_*() helper functions (e.g., cells_body(), cells_column_labels(), etc.). You can choose to not attach a footnote mark by simply not specifying anything in the locations argument.

By default, gt will choose which side of the text to place the footnote mark via the placement = "auto" option. You are, however, always free to choose the placement of the footnote mark (either to the ⁠"left⁠ or "right" of the targeted cell content).

Usage

tab_footnote(
  data,
  footnote,
  locations = NULL,
  placement = c("auto", "right", "left")
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

footnote

Footnote text

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

The text to be used in the footnote. We can optionally use md() or html() to style the text as Markdown or to retain HTML elements in the footnote text.

locations

Locations to target

<locations expressions> // default: NULL (optional)

The cell or set of cells to be associated with the footnote. Supplying any of the ⁠cells_*()⁠ helper functions is a useful way to target the location cells that are associated with the footnote text. These helper functions are: cells_title(), cells_stubhead(), cells_column_spanners(), cells_column_labels(), cells_row_groups(), cells_stub(), cells_body(), cells_summary(), cells_grand_summary(), cells_stub_summary(), and cells_stub_grand_summary(). Additionally, we can enclose several ⁠cells_*()⁠ calls within a list() if we wish to link the footnote text to different types of locations (e.g., body cells, row group labels, the table title, etc.).

placement

Placement of the footnote mark

⁠singl-kw:[auto|right|left]⁠ // default: "auto"

Where to affix footnote marks to the table content. Two options for this are ⁠"left⁠ or "right", where the placement is either to the absolute left or right of the cell content. By default, however, this option is set to "auto" whereby gt will choose a preferred left-or-right placement depending on the alignment of the cell content.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Formatting of footnote text and marks

There are several options for controlling the formatting of the footnotes, their marks, and related typesetting in the footer. All of these options are available within tab_options() and a subset of these are exposed in their own ⁠opt_*()⁠ functions.

Choosing the footnote marks

We can modify the set of footnote marks with tab_options(..., footnotes.marks) or opt_footnote_marks(..., ). What that argument needs is a vector that will represent the series of marks. The series of footnote marks is recycled when its usage goes beyond the length of the set. At each cycle, the marks are simply doubled, tripled, and so on (e.g., * -> ⁠**⁠ -> ⁠***⁠). The option exists for providing keywords for certain types of footnote marks. The keywords are:

  • "numbers": numeric marks, they begin from 1 and these marks are not subject to recycling behavior (this is the default)

  • "letters": minuscule alphabetic marks, internally uses the letters vector which contains 26 lowercase letters of the Roman alphabet

  • "LETTERS": majuscule alphabetic marks, using the LETTERS vector which has 26 uppercase letters of the Roman alphabet

  • "standard": symbolic marks, four symbols in total

  • "extended": symbolic marks, extends the standard set by adding two more symbols, making six

The symbolic marks are the: (1) Asterisk, (2) Dagger, (3) Double Dagger, (4) Section Sign, (5) Double Vertical Line, and (6) Paragraph Sign; the "standard" set has the first four, "extended" contains all.

Defining footnote typesetting specifications

A footnote spec consists of a string containing control characters for formatting. They are separately defined for footnote marks beside footnote text in the table footer (the 'spec_ftr') and for marks beside the targeted cell content (the 'spec_ref').

Not every type of formatting makes sense for footnote marks so the specification is purposefully constrained to the following:

  • as superscript text (with the "^" control character) or regular-sized text residing on the baseline

  • bold text (with "b"), italicized text (with "i"), or unstyled text (don't use either of the "b" or "i" control characters)

  • enclosure in parentheses (use "(" / ")") or square brackets (with "[" / "]")

  • a period following the mark (using "."); this is most commonly used in the table footer

With the aforementioned control characters we could, for instance, format the footnote marks to be superscript text in bold type with "^b". We might want the marks in the footer to be regular-sized text in parentheses, so the spec could be either "()" or "(x)" (you can optionally use "x" as a helpful placeholder for the marks).

These options can be set either in a tab_options() call (with the footnotes.spec_ref and footnotes.spec_ftr arguments) or with opt_footnote_spec() (using the spec_ref or spec_ftr arguments).

Additional typesetting options for footnote text residing in the footer

Within tab_options() there are two arguments that control the typesetting of footnotes. With footnotes.multiline, we have a setting that determines whether each footnote will start on a new line, or, whether they are combined into a single block of text. The default for this is TRUE, but, if FALSE we can control the separator between consecutive footnotes with the footnotes.sep argument. By default, this is set to a single space character (" ").

Examples

Using a subset of the sza dataset, let's create a new gt table. The body cells in the sza column will receive background color fills according to their data values (with data_color()). After that, the use of tab_footnote() lets us add a footnote to the sza column label (explaining what the color gradient signifies).

sza |>
  dplyr::filter(
    latitude == 20 &
      month == "jan" &
      !is.na(sza)
  ) |>
  dplyr::select(-latitude, -month) |>
  gt() |>
  data_color(
    columns = sza,
    palette = c("white", "yellow", "navyblue"),
    domain = c(0, 90)
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Color indicates the solar zenith angle.",
    locations = cells_column_labels(columns = sza)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `tab_footnote()` help file.

Of course, we can add more than one footnote to the table, but, we have to use several calls of tab_footnote(). This variation of the sza table has three footnotes: one on the "TST" column label and two on the "SZA" column label (these were capitalized with opt_all_caps()). We will ultimately have three calls of tab_footnote() and while the order of calls usually doesn't matter, it does have a subtle effect here since two footnotes are associated with the same text content (try reversing the second and third calls and observe the effect in the footer).

sza |>
  dplyr::filter(
    latitude == 20 &
      month == "jan" &
      !is.na(sza)
  ) |>
  dplyr::select(-latitude, -month) |>
  gt() |>
  opt_all_caps() |>
  cols_align(align = "center") |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(200)) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = md("TST stands for *True Solar Time*."),
    locations = cells_column_labels(columns = tst)
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = md("SZA stands for *Solar Zenith Angle*."),
    locations = cells_column_labels(columns = sza)
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Higher Values indicate sun closer to horizon.",
    locations = cells_column_labels(columns = sza)
  ) |>
  tab_options(footnotes.multiline = FALSE)
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `tab_footnote()` help file.

Text in the footer (both from footnotes and also from source notes) tends to widen the table and, by extension, all the columns within it. We can limit that by explicitly setting column width values, which is what was done above with cols_width(). There can also be a correspondingly large amount of vertical space taken up by the footer since footnotes will, by default, each start on a new line. In the above example, we used tab_options(footnotes.multiline = FALSE) to make it so that all footer text is contained in a single block of text.

Let's move on to another footnote-laden table, this one based on the towny dataset. We have a header part, with a title and a subtitle. We can choose which of these could be associated with a footnote and in this case it is the "subtitle" (one of two options in the cells_title() helper function). This table has a stub with row labels and some of those labels are associated with a footnote. So long as row labels are unique, they can be easily used as row identifiers in cells_stub(). The third footnote is placed on the "Density" column label. Here, changing the order of the tab_footnote() calls has no effect on the final table rendering.

towny |>
  dplyr::filter(csd_type == "city") |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(population_2021)) |>
  dplyr::select(name, density_2021, population_2021) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "name") |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("The 10 Largest Municipalities in `towny`"),
    subtitle = "Population values taken from the 2021 census."
  ) |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  cols_label(
    density_2021 = "Density",
    population_2021 = "Population"
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Part of the Greater Toronto Area.",
    locations = cells_stub(rows = c(
      "Toronto", "Mississauga", "Brampton", "Markham", "Vaughan"
    ))
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = md("Density is in terms of persons per km^2^."),
    locations = cells_column_labels(columns = density_2021)
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Census results made public on February 9, 2022.",
    locations = cells_title(groups = "subtitle")
  ) |>
  tab_source_note(source_note = md(
    "Data taken from the `towny` dataset (in the **gt** package)."
  )) |>
  opt_footnote_marks(marks = "letters")
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `tab_footnote()` help file.

In the above table, we elected to change the footnote marks to letters instead of the default numbers (done through opt_footnote_marks()). A source note was also added; this was mainly to demonstrate that source notes will be positioned beneath footnotes in the footer section.

For our final example, let's make a relatively small table deriving from the sp500 dataset. The set of tab_footnote() calls used here (four of them) have minor variations that allow for interesting expressions of footnotes. Two of the footnotes target values in the body of the table (using the cells_body() helper function to achieve this). On numeric values that right-aligned, gt will opt to place the footnote on the left of the content so as to not disrupt the alignment. However, the placement argument can be used to force the positioning of the footnote mark after the content. We can also opt to include footnotes that have no associated footnote marks whatsoever. This is done by not providing anything to locations. These 'markless' footnotes will precede the other footnotes in the footer section.

sp500 |>
  dplyr::filter(date >= "2015-01-05" & date <="2015-01-10") |>
  dplyr::select(-c(adj_close, volume, high, low)) |>
  dplyr::mutate(change = close - open) |>
  dplyr::arrange(date) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(title = "S&P 500") |>
  fmt_date(date_style = "m_day_year") |>
  fmt_currency() |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(150)) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "More red days than green in this period.",
    locations = cells_column_labels(columns = change)
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Lowest opening value.",
    locations = cells_body(columns = open, rows = 3),
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Devastating losses on this day.",
    locations = cells_body(columns = change, rows = 1),
    placement = "right"
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(footnote = "All values in USD.") |>
  opt_footnote_marks(marks = "LETTERS") |>
  opt_footnote_spec(spec_ref = "i[x]", spec_ftr = "x.")
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `tab_footnote()` help file.

Aside from changing the footnote marks to consist of "LETTERS", we've also changed the way the marks are formatted. In our use of opt_footnote_spec(), the spec_ref option governs the footnote marks across the table. Here, we describe marks that are italicized and set between square brackets (with "i[x]"). The spec_ftr argument is used for the footer representation of the footnote marks. As described in the example with "x.", it is rendered as a footnote mark followed by a period.

Function ID

2-7

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other part creation/modification functions: tab_caption(), tab_header(), tab_info(), tab_options(), tab_row_group(), tab_source_note(), tab_spanner(), tab_spanner_delim(), tab_stub_indent(), tab_stubhead(), tab_style(), tab_style_body()


Add a table header

Description

We can add a table header to the gt table with a title and even a subtitle using tab_header(). A table header is an optional table part that is positioned just above the column labels table part. We have the flexibility to use Markdown or HTML formatting for the header's title and subtitle with the md() and html() helper functions.

Usage

tab_header(data, title, subtitle = NULL, preheader = NULL)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

title

Header title

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

Text to be used in the table title. We can elect to use the md() and html() helper functions to style the text as Markdown or to retain HTML elements in the text.

subtitle

Header subtitle

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Text to be used in the table subtitle. We can elect to use md() or html() helper functions to style the text as Markdown or to retain HTML elements in the text.

preheader

RTF preheader text

⁠vector<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Optional preheader content that is rendered above the table for RTF output. Can be supplied as a vector of text.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Let's use a small portion of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. A header part can be added to the table with the tab_header() function. We'll add a title and the optional subtitle as well. With md(), we can make sure the Markdown formatting is interpreted and transformed.

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, msrp) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:5) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("Data listing from **gtcars**"),
    subtitle = md("`gtcars` is an R dataset")
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `tab_header()` help file.

If the table is intended solely as an HTML table, you could introduce your own HTML elements into the header. You can even use the htmltools package to help arrange and generate the HTML. Here's an example of that, where two ⁠<div>⁠ elements are placed in a htmltools::tagList().

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, msrp) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:5) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(
    title =
      htmltools::tagList(
        htmltools::tags$div(
          htmltools::HTML(
            web_image("https://www.r-project.org/logo/Rlogo.png")
          ),
          style = htmltools::css(`text-align` = "center")
        ),
        htmltools::tags$div(
          "Data listing from ", htmltools::tags$strong("gtcars")
        )
      )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `tab_header()` help file.

If using HTML but doing something far simpler, we can wrap our title or subtitle inside html() to declare that the text provided is HTML.

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, msrp) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:5) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(
    title = html("Data listing from <strong>gtcars</strong>"),
    subtitle = html("From <span style='color:red;'>gtcars</span>")
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `tab_header()` help file.

Sometimes, aligning the heading elements to the left can improve the presentation of a table. Here, we use the nuclides dataset to generate a display of natural abundance values for several stable isotopes. opt_align_table_header() is used with align = "left" to make it so the title and subtitle are left aligned in the header area.

nuclides |>
  dplyr::filter(!is.na(abundance)) |>
  dplyr::filter(abundance != 1) |>
  dplyr::filter(z >= 1 & z <= 8) |>
  dplyr::mutate(element = paste0(element, ", **z = ", z, "**")) |>
  dplyr::mutate(nuclide = gsub("[0-9]+$", "", nuclide)) |>
  dplyr::select(nuclide, element, atomic_mass, abundance, abundance_uncert) |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "nuclide",
    groupname_col = "element",
    process_md = TRUE
  ) |>
  tab_header(
    title = "Natural Abundance Values",
    subtitle = md("For elements having atomic numbers from `1` to `8`.")
  ) |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "Isotope") |>
  tab_stub_indent(
    rows = everything(),
    indent = 1
  ) |>
  fmt_chem(columns = stub()) |>
  fmt_number(
    columns = atomic_mass,
    decimals = 4,
    scale_by = 1 / 1e6
  ) |>
  fmt_percent(
    columns = contains("abundance"),
    decimals = 4
  ) |>
  cols_merge_uncert(
    col_val = abundance,
    col_uncert = abundance_uncert
  ) |>
  cols_label_with(fn = function(x) tools::toTitleCase(gsub("_", " ", x))) |>
  cols_width(
    stub() ~ px(70),
    atomic_mass ~ px(120),
    abundance ~ px(200)
  ) |>
  opt_align_table_header(align = "left") |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.5)
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `tab_header()` help file.

Function ID

2-1

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other part creation/modification functions: tab_caption(), tab_footnote(), tab_info(), tab_options(), tab_row_group(), tab_source_note(), tab_spanner(), tab_spanner_delim(), tab_stub_indent(), tab_stubhead(), tab_style(), tab_style_body()


Understand what's been set inside of a gt table object

Description

It can become increasingly difficult to recall the ID values associated with different labels in a gt table. Further to this, there are also situations where gt will generate ID values on your behalf (e.g., with tab_spanner_delim(), etc.) while ensuring that duplicate ID values aren't produced. For the latter case, it is impossible to know what those ID values are unless one were to carefully examine to correct component of the gt_tbl object.

Because it's so essential to know these ID values for targeting purposes (when styling with tab_style(), adding footnote marks with tab_footnote(), etc.), tab_info() can help with all of this. It summarizes (by location) all of the table's ID values and their associated labels. The product is an informational gt table, designed for easy retrieval of the necessary values.

Usage

tab_info(data)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Let's use a portion of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. We'll use tab_spanner() to group two columns together under a spanner column with the ID and label "performance". Finally, we can usetab_info() in a separate, interactive statement so that we can inspect a table that summarizes the ID values any associated label text for all parts of the table.

gt_tbl <-
  gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(model, year, starts_with("hp"), msrp) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:4) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "model") |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "performance",
    columns = starts_with("hp")
  )

gt_tbl |> tab_info()
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `tab_info()` help file.

Function ID

2-12

Function Introduced

v0.8.0 (November 16, 2022)

See Also

Other part creation/modification functions: tab_caption(), tab_footnote(), tab_header(), tab_options(), tab_row_group(), tab_source_note(), tab_spanner(), tab_spanner_delim(), tab_stub_indent(), tab_stubhead(), tab_style(), tab_style_body()


Modify the table output options

Description

Modify the options available in a table. These options are named by the components, the subcomponents, and the element that can adjusted.

Usage

tab_options(
  data,
  table.width = NULL,
  table.layout = NULL,
  table.align = NULL,
  table.margin.left = NULL,
  table.margin.right = NULL,
  table.background.color = NULL,
  table.additional_css = NULL,
  table.font.names = NULL,
  table.font.size = NULL,
  table.font.weight = NULL,
  table.font.style = NULL,
  table.font.color = NULL,
  table.font.color.light = NULL,
  table.border.top.style = NULL,
  table.border.top.width = NULL,
  table.border.top.color = NULL,
  table.border.right.style = NULL,
  table.border.right.width = NULL,
  table.border.right.color = NULL,
  table.border.bottom.style = NULL,
  table.border.bottom.width = NULL,
  table.border.bottom.color = NULL,
  table.border.left.style = NULL,
  table.border.left.width = NULL,
  table.border.left.color = NULL,
  heading.background.color = NULL,
  heading.align = NULL,
  heading.title.font.size = NULL,
  heading.title.font.weight = NULL,
  heading.subtitle.font.size = NULL,
  heading.subtitle.font.weight = NULL,
  heading.padding = NULL,
  heading.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  heading.border.bottom.style = NULL,
  heading.border.bottom.width = NULL,
  heading.border.bottom.color = NULL,
  heading.border.lr.style = NULL,
  heading.border.lr.width = NULL,
  heading.border.lr.color = NULL,
  column_labels.background.color = NULL,
  column_labels.font.size = NULL,
  column_labels.font.weight = NULL,
  column_labels.text_transform = NULL,
  column_labels.padding = NULL,
  column_labels.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  column_labels.vlines.style = NULL,
  column_labels.vlines.width = NULL,
  column_labels.vlines.color = NULL,
  column_labels.border.top.style = NULL,
  column_labels.border.top.width = NULL,
  column_labels.border.top.color = NULL,
  column_labels.border.bottom.style = NULL,
  column_labels.border.bottom.width = NULL,
  column_labels.border.bottom.color = NULL,
  column_labels.border.lr.style = NULL,
  column_labels.border.lr.width = NULL,
  column_labels.border.lr.color = NULL,
  column_labels.hidden = NULL,
  column_labels.units_pattern = NULL,
  row_group.background.color = NULL,
  row_group.font.size = NULL,
  row_group.font.weight = NULL,
  row_group.text_transform = NULL,
  row_group.padding = NULL,
  row_group.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  row_group.border.top.style = NULL,
  row_group.border.top.width = NULL,
  row_group.border.top.color = NULL,
  row_group.border.bottom.style = NULL,
  row_group.border.bottom.width = NULL,
  row_group.border.bottom.color = NULL,
  row_group.border.left.style = NULL,
  row_group.border.left.width = NULL,
  row_group.border.left.color = NULL,
  row_group.border.right.style = NULL,
  row_group.border.right.width = NULL,
  row_group.border.right.color = NULL,
  row_group.default_label = NULL,
  row_group.as_column = NULL,
  table_body.hlines.style = NULL,
  table_body.hlines.width = NULL,
  table_body.hlines.color = NULL,
  table_body.vlines.style = NULL,
  table_body.vlines.width = NULL,
  table_body.vlines.color = NULL,
  table_body.border.top.style = NULL,
  table_body.border.top.width = NULL,
  table_body.border.top.color = NULL,
  table_body.border.bottom.style = NULL,
  table_body.border.bottom.width = NULL,
  table_body.border.bottom.color = NULL,
  stub.background.color = NULL,
  stub.font.size = NULL,
  stub.font.weight = NULL,
  stub.text_transform = NULL,
  stub.border.style = NULL,
  stub.border.width = NULL,
  stub.border.color = NULL,
  stub.indent_length = NULL,
  stub_row_group.font.size = NULL,
  stub_row_group.font.weight = NULL,
  stub_row_group.text_transform = NULL,
  stub_row_group.border.style = NULL,
  stub_row_group.border.width = NULL,
  stub_row_group.border.color = NULL,
  data_row.padding = NULL,
  data_row.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  summary_row.background.color = NULL,
  summary_row.text_transform = NULL,
  summary_row.padding = NULL,
  summary_row.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  summary_row.border.style = NULL,
  summary_row.border.width = NULL,
  summary_row.border.color = NULL,
  grand_summary_row.background.color = NULL,
  grand_summary_row.text_transform = NULL,
  grand_summary_row.padding = NULL,
  grand_summary_row.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  grand_summary_row.border.style = NULL,
  grand_summary_row.border.width = NULL,
  grand_summary_row.border.color = NULL,
  footnotes.background.color = NULL,
  footnotes.font.size = NULL,
  footnotes.padding = NULL,
  footnotes.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  footnotes.border.bottom.style = NULL,
  footnotes.border.bottom.width = NULL,
  footnotes.border.bottom.color = NULL,
  footnotes.border.lr.style = NULL,
  footnotes.border.lr.width = NULL,
  footnotes.border.lr.color = NULL,
  footnotes.marks = NULL,
  footnotes.spec_ref = NULL,
  footnotes.spec_ftr = NULL,
  footnotes.multiline = NULL,
  footnotes.sep = NULL,
  source_notes.background.color = NULL,
  source_notes.font.size = NULL,
  source_notes.padding = NULL,
  source_notes.padding.horizontal = NULL,
  source_notes.border.bottom.style = NULL,
  source_notes.border.bottom.width = NULL,
  source_notes.border.bottom.color = NULL,
  source_notes.border.lr.style = NULL,
  source_notes.border.lr.width = NULL,
  source_notes.border.lr.color = NULL,
  source_notes.multiline = NULL,
  source_notes.sep = NULL,
  row.striping.background_color = NULL,
  row.striping.include_stub = NULL,
  row.striping.include_table_body = NULL,
  container.width = NULL,
  container.height = NULL,
  container.padding.x = NULL,
  container.padding.y = NULL,
  container.overflow.x = NULL,
  container.overflow.y = NULL,
  ihtml.active = NULL,
  ihtml.use_pagination = NULL,
  ihtml.use_pagination_info = NULL,
  ihtml.use_sorting = NULL,
  ihtml.use_search = NULL,
  ihtml.use_filters = NULL,
  ihtml.use_resizers = NULL,
  ihtml.use_highlight = NULL,
  ihtml.use_compact_mode = NULL,
  ihtml.use_text_wrapping = NULL,
  ihtml.use_page_size_select = NULL,
  ihtml.page_size_default = NULL,
  ihtml.page_size_values = NULL,
  ihtml.pagination_type = NULL,
  ihtml.height = NULL,
  page.orientation = NULL,
  page.numbering = NULL,
  page.header.use_tbl_headings = NULL,
  page.footer.use_tbl_notes = NULL,
  page.width = NULL,
  page.height = NULL,
  page.margin.left = NULL,
  page.margin.right = NULL,
  page.margin.top = NULL,
  page.margin.bottom = NULL,
  page.header.height = NULL,
  page.footer.height = NULL,
  quarto.use_bootstrap = NULL,
  quarto.disable_processing = NULL,
  latex.use_longtable = NULL,
  latex.tbl.pos = NULL
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

table.width

Table width

The table width can be specified as a single-length character with units of pixels or as a percentage. If provided as a single-length numeric vector, it is assumed that the value is given in units of pixels. The px() and pct() helper functions can also be used to pass in numeric values and obtain values as pixel or percent units.

table.layout

The table-layout property

This is the value for the table-layout CSS style in the HTML output context. By default, this is "fixed" but another valid option is "auto".

table.align

Horizontal alignment of table

The table.align option lets us set the horizontal alignment of the table in its container. By default, this is "center". Other options are "left" and "right". This will automatically set table.margin.left and table.margin.right to the appropriate values.

table.margin.left, table.margin.right

Left and right table margins

The size of the margins on the left and right of the table within the container can be set with table.margin.left and table.margin.right. Can be specified as a single-length character with units of pixels or as a percentage. If provided as a single-length numeric vector, it is assumed that the value is given in units of pixels. The px() and pct() helper functions can also be used to pass in numeric values and obtain values as pixel or percent units. Using table.margin.left or table.margin.right will overwrite any values set by table.align.

table.background.color, heading.background.color, column_labels.background.color, row_group.background.color, stub.background.color, summary_row.background.color, grand_summary_row.background.color, footnotes.background.color, source_notes.background.color

Background colors

These options govern background colors for the parent element table and the following child elements: heading, column_labels, row_group, stub, summary_row, grand_summary_row, footnotes, and source_notes. A color name or a hexadecimal color code should be provided.

table.additional_css

Additional CSS

The table.additional_css option can be used to supply an additional block of CSS rules to be applied after the automatically generated table CSS.

table.font.names

Default table fonts

The names of the fonts used for the table can be supplied through table.font.names. This is a vector of several font names. If the first font isn't available, then the next font is tried (and so on).

table.font.size, heading.title.font.size, heading.subtitle.font.size, column_labels.font.size, row_group.font.size, stub.font.size, footnotes.font.size, source_notes.font.size

Table font sizes

The font sizes for the parent text element table and the following child elements: heading.title, heading.subtitle, column_labels, row_group, footnotes, and source_notes. Can be specified as a single-length character vector with units of pixels (e.g., ⁠12px⁠) or as a percentage (e.g., ⁠80%⁠). If provided as a single-length numeric vector, it is assumed that the value is given in units of pixels. The px() and pct() helper functions can also be used to pass in numeric values and obtain values as pixel or percentage units.

table.font.weight, heading.title.font.weight, heading.subtitle.font.weight, column_labels.font.weight, row_group.font.weight, stub.font.weight

Table font weights

The font weights of the table, heading.title, heading.subtitle, column_labels, row_group, and stub text elements. Can be a text-based keyword such as "normal", "bold", "lighter", "bolder", or, a numeric value between 1 and 1000, inclusive. Note that only variable fonts may support the numeric mapping of weight.

table.font.style

Default table font style

This is the default font style for the table. Can be one of either "normal", "italic", or "oblique".

table.font.color, table.font.color.light

Default dark and light text for the table

These options define text colors used throughout the table. There are two variants: table.font.color is for text overlaid on lighter background colors, and table.font.color.light is automatically used when text needs to be overlaid on darker background colors. A color name or a hexadecimal color code should be provided.

table.border.top.style, table.border.top.width, table.border.top.color, table.border.right.style, table.border.right.width, table.border.right.color, table.border.bottom.style, table.border.bottom.width, table.border.bottom.color, table.border.left.style, table.border.left.width, table.border.left.color

Top border properties

The style, width, and color properties of the table's absolute top and absolute bottom borders.

heading.align

Horizontal alignment in the table header

Controls the horizontal alignment of the heading title and subtitle. We can either use "center", "left", or "right".

heading.padding, column_labels.padding, data_row.padding, row_group.padding, summary_row.padding, grand_summary_row.padding, footnotes.padding, source_notes.padding

Vertical padding throughout the table

The amount of vertical padding to incorporate in the heading (title and subtitle), the column_labels (this includes the column spanners), the row group labels (row_group.padding), in the body/stub rows (data_row.padding), in summary rows (summary_row.padding or grand_summary_row.padding), or in the footnotes and source notes (footnotes.padding and source_notes.padding).

heading.padding.horizontal, column_labels.padding.horizontal, data_row.padding.horizontal, row_group.padding.horizontal, summary_row.padding.horizontal, grand_summary_row.padding.horizontal, footnotes.padding.horizontal, source_notes.padding.horizontal

Horizontal padding throughout the table

The amount of horizontal padding to incorporate in the heading (title and subtitle), the column_labels (this includes the column spanners), the row group labels (row_group.padding.horizontal), in the body/stub rows (data_row.padding), in summary rows (summary_row.padding.horizontal or grand_summary_row.padding.horizontal), or in the footnotes and source notes (footnotes.padding.horizontal and source_notes.padding.horizontal).

heading.border.bottom.style, heading.border.bottom.width, heading.border.bottom.color

Properties of the header's bottom border

The style, width, and color properties of the header's bottom border. This border shares space with that of the column_labels location. If the width of this border is larger, then it will be the visible border.

heading.border.lr.style, heading.border.lr.width, heading.border.lr.color

Properties of the header's left and right borders

The style, width, and color properties for the left and right borders of the heading location.

column_labels.text_transform, row_group.text_transform, stub.text_transform, summary_row.text_transform, grand_summary_row.text_transform

Text transforms throughout the table

Options to apply text transformations to the column_labels, row_group, stub, summary_row, and grand_summary_row text elements. Either of the "uppercase", "lowercase", or "capitalize" keywords can be used.

column_labels.vlines.style, column_labels.vlines.width, column_labels.vlines.color

Properties of all vertical lines by the column labels

The style, width, and color properties for all vertical lines ('vlines') of the column_labels.

column_labels.border.top.style, column_labels.border.top.width, column_labels.border.top.color

Properties of the border above the column labels

The style, width, and color properties for the top border of the column_labels location. This border shares space with that of the heading location. If the width of this border is larger, then it will be the visible border.

column_labels.border.bottom.style, column_labels.border.bottom.width, column_labels.border.bottom.color

Properties of the border below the column labels

The style, width, and color properties for the bottom border of the column_labels location.

column_labels.border.lr.style, column_labels.border.lr.width, column_labels.border.lr.color

Properties of the left and right borders next to the column labels

The style, width, and color properties for the left and right borders of the column_labels location.

column_labels.hidden

Hiding all column labels

An option to hide the column labels. If providing TRUE then the entire column_labels location won't be seen and the table header (if present) will collapse downward.

column_labels.units_pattern

Pattern to combine column labels and units

The default pattern for combining column labels with any defined units for column labels. The pattern is initialized as "{1}, {2}", where "{1}" refers to the column label text and "{2}" is the text related to the associated units. When using cols_units(), there is the opportunity to provide a specific pattern that overrides the units pattern unit. Further to this, if specifying units directly in cols_label() (through the units syntax surrounded by "{{"/"}}") there is no need for a units pattern and any value here will be disregarded.

row_group.border.top.style, row_group.border.top.width, row_group.border.top.color, row_group.border.bottom.style, row_group.border.bottom.width, row_group.border.bottom.color, row_group.border.left.style, row_group.border.left.width, row_group.border.left.color, row_group.border.right.style, row_group.border.right.width, row_group.border.right.color

Border properties associated with the row_group location

The style, width, and color properties for all top, bottom, left, and right borders of the row_group location.

row_group.default_label

The default row group label

An option to set a default row group label for any rows not formally placed in a row group named by group in any call of tab_row_group(). If this is set as NA_character_ and there are rows that haven't been placed into a row group (where one or more row groups already exist), those rows will be automatically placed into a row group without a label.

row_group.as_column

Structure row groups with a column

How should row groups be structured? By default, they are separate rows that lie above the each of the groups. Setting this to TRUE will structure row group labels as a separate column in the table stub.

table_body.hlines.style, table_body.hlines.width, table_body.hlines.color, table_body.vlines.style, table_body.vlines.width, table_body.vlines.color

Properties of all horizontal and vertical lines in the table body

The style, width, and color properties for all horizontal lines ('hlines') and vertical lines ('vlines') in the table_body.

table_body.border.top.style, table_body.border.top.width, table_body.border.top.color, table_body.border.bottom.style, table_body.border.bottom.width, table_body.border.bottom.color

Properties of top and bottom borders in the table body

The style, width, and color properties for all top and bottom borders of the table_body location.

stub.border.style, stub.border.width, stub.border.color

Properties of the vertical border of the table stub

The style, width, and color properties for the vertical border of the table stub.

stub.indent_length

Width of each indentation

The width of each indentation level for row labels in the stub. The indentation can be set by using tab_stub_indent(). By default this is "5px".

stub_row_group.font.size, stub_row_group.font.weight, stub_row_group.text_transform, stub_row_group.border.style, stub_row_group.border.width, stub_row_group.border.color

Properties of the row group column in the table stub

Options for the row group column in the table stub (made possible when using row_group.as_column = TRUE). The defaults for these options mirror that of the ⁠stub.*⁠ variants (except for stub_row_group.border.width, which is "1px" instead of "2px").

summary_row.border.style, summary_row.border.width, summary_row.border.color

Properties of horizontal borders belonging to summary rows

The style, width, and color properties for all horizontal borders of the summary_row location.

grand_summary_row.border.style, grand_summary_row.border.width, grand_summary_row.border.color

Properties of horizontal borders belonging to grand summary rows

The style, width, and color properties for the top borders of the grand_summary_row location.

footnotes.border.bottom.style, footnotes.border.bottom.width, footnotes.border.bottom.color

Properties of the bottom border belonging to the footnotes

The style, width, and color properties for the bottom border of the footnotes location.

footnotes.border.lr.style, footnotes.border.lr.width, footnotes.border.lr.color

Properties of left and right borders belonging to the footnotes

The style, width, and color properties for the left and right borders of the footnotes location.

footnotes.marks

Sequence of footnote marks

The set of sequential marks used to reference and identify each of the footnotes (same input as opt_footnote_marks()). We can supply a vector that represents the series of footnote marks. This vector is recycled when its usage goes beyond the length of the set. At each cycle, the marks are simply combined (e.g., * -> ⁠**⁠ -> ⁠***⁠). The option exists for providing keywords for certain types of footnote marks. The keyword "numbers" (the default, indicating that we want to use numeric marks). We can use lowercase "letters" or uppercase "LETTERS". There is the option for using a traditional symbol set where "standard" provides four symbols, and, "extended" adds two more symbols, making six.

footnotes.spec_ref, footnotes.spec_ftr

Specifications for formatting of footnote marks

Optional specifications for formatting of footnote references (footnotes.spec_ref) and their associated marks the footer section (footnotes.spec_ftr) (same input as opt_footnote_spec()). This is a string containing specification control characters. The default is the spec string "^i", which is superscript text set in italics. Other control characters that can be used are: (1) "b" for bold text, and (2) "(" / ")" for the enclosure of footnote marks in parentheses.

footnotes.multiline, source_notes.multiline

Typesetting of multiple footnotes and source notes

An option to either put footnotes and source notes in separate lines (the default, or TRUE) or render them as a continuous line of text with footnotes.sep providing the separator (by default " ") between notes.

footnotes.sep, source_notes.sep

Separator characters between adjacent footnotes and source notes

The separating characters between adjacent footnotes and source notes in their respective footer sections when rendered as a continuous line of text (when footnotes.multiline == FALSE). The default value is a single space character (" ").

source_notes.border.bottom.style, source_notes.border.bottom.width, source_notes.border.bottom.color

Properties of the bottom border belonging to the source notes

The style, width, and color properties for the bottom border of the source_notes location.

source_notes.border.lr.style, source_notes.border.lr.width, source_notes.border.lr.color

Properties of left and right borders belonging to the source notes

The style, width, and color properties for the left and right borders of the source_notes location.

row.striping.background_color

Background color for row stripes

The background color for striped table body rows. A color name or a hexadecimal color code should be provided.

row.striping.include_stub

Inclusion of the table stub for row stripes

An option for whether to include the stub when striping rows.

row.striping.include_table_body

Inclusion of the table body for row stripes

An option for whether to include the table body when striping rows.

container.width, container.height, container.padding.x, container.padding.y

Table container dimensions and padding

The width and height of the table's container, and, the vertical and horizontal padding of the table's container. The container width and height can be specified with units of pixels or as a percentage. The padding is to be specified as a length with units of pixels. If provided as a numeric value, it is assumed that the value is given in units of pixels. The px() and pct() helper functions can also be used to pass in numeric values and obtain values as pixel or percent units.

container.overflow.x, container.overflow.y

Table container overflow

Options to enable scrolling in the horizontal and vertical directions when the table content overflows the container dimensions. Using TRUE (the default for both) means that horizontal or vertical scrolling is enabled to view the entire table in those directions. With FALSE, the table may be clipped if the table width or height exceeds the container.width or container.height.

ihtml.active

Display interactive HTML table

The option for displaying an interactive version of an HTML table (rather than an otherwise 'static' table). This enables the use of controls for pagination, global search, filtering, and sorting. The individual features are controlled by the other ⁠table.*⁠ options. By default, the pagination (ihtml.use_pagination) and sorting (ihtml.use_sorting) features are enabled. The ihtml.active option, however, is FALSE by default.

ihtml.use_pagination, ihtml.use_pagination_info

Use pagination

For interactive HTML output, the option for using pagination controls (below the table body) can be controlled with ihtml.use_pagination. By default, this is TRUE and it will allow the use to page through table content. The informational display text regarding the current page can be set with ihtml.use_pagination_info (which is TRUE by default).

ihtml.use_sorting

Provide column sorting controls

For interactive HTML output, the option to provide controls for sorting column values. By default, this is TRUE.

ihtml.use_search

Provide a global search field

For interactive HTML output, an option that places a search field for globally filtering rows to the requested content. By default, this is FALSE.

ihtml.use_filters

Display filtering fields

For interactive HTML output, this places search fields below each column header and allows for filtering by column. By default, this is FALSE.

ihtml.use_resizers

Allow column resizing

For interactive HTML output, this allows for interactive resizing of columns. By default, this is FALSE.

ihtml.use_highlight

Enable row highlighting on hover

For interactive HTML output, this highlights individual rows upon hover. By default, this is FALSE.

ihtml.use_compact_mode

Use compact mode

For interactive HTML output, an option to reduce vertical padding and thus make the table consume less vertical space. By default, this is FALSE.

ihtml.use_text_wrapping

Use text wrapping

For interactive HTML output, an option to control text wrapping. By default (TRUE), text will be wrapped to multiple lines; if FALSE, text will be truncated to a single line.

ihtml.use_page_size_select, ihtml.page_size_default, ihtml.page_size_values

Change page size properties

For interactive HTML output, ihtml.use_page_size_select provides the option to display a dropdown menu for the number of rows to show per page of data. By default, this is the vector c(10, 25, 50, 100) which corresponds to options for 10, 25, 50, and 100 rows of data per page. To modify these page-size options, provide a numeric vector to ihtml.page_size_values. The default page size (initially set as 10) can be modified with ihtml.page_size_default and this works whether or not ihtml.use_page_size_select is set to TRUE.

ihtml.pagination_type

Change pagination mode

For interactive HTML output and when using pagination, one of three options for presentation pagination controls. The default is "numbers", where a series of page-number buttons is presented along with 'previous' and 'next' buttons. The "jump" option provides an input field with a stepper for the page number. With "simple", only the 'previous' and 'next' buttons are displayed.

ihtml.height

Height of interactive HTML table

Height of the table in pixels. Defaults to "auto" for automatic sizing.

page.orientation

Set RTF page orientation

For RTF output, this provides two options for page orientation: "portrait" (the default) and "landscape".

page.numbering

Enable RTF page numbering

Within RTF output, should page numbering be displayed? By default, this is set to FALSE but if TRUE then page numbering text will be added to the document header.

page.header.use_tbl_headings

Place table headings in RTF page header

If TRUE then RTF output tables will migrate all table headings (including the table title and all column labels) to the page header. This page header content will repeat across pages. By default, this is FALSE.

page.footer.use_tbl_notes

Place table footer in RTF page footer

If TRUE then RTF output tables will migrate all table footer content (this includes footnotes and source notes) to the page footer. This page footer content will repeat across pages. By default, this is FALSE.

page.width, page.height

Set RTF page dimensions

The page width and height in the standard portrait orientation. This is for RTF table output and the default values (in inches) are ⁠8.5in⁠ and ⁠11.0in⁠.

page.margin.left, page.margin.right, page.margin.top, page.margin.bottom

Set RTF page margins

For RTF table output, these options correspond to the left, right, top, and bottom page margins. The default values for each of these is ⁠1.0in⁠.

page.header.height, page.footer.height

Set RTF page header and footer distances

The heights of the page header and footer for RTF table outputs. Default values for both are ⁠0.5in⁠.

quarto.use_bootstrap, quarto.disable_processing

Modify Quarto properties

When rendering a gt table with Quarto, the table can undergo transformations to support advanced Quarto features. Setting quarto.use_bootstrap to TRUE (FALSE by default) will allow Quarto to add Bootstrap classes to the table, allowing those styles to permeate the table. Quarto performs other alterations as well but they can all be deactivated with quarto.disable_processing = TRUE (this option is FALSE by default).

latex.use_longtable

Use longtable latex environment

By default, tables produced using latex code will be embedded in the table floating environment. Setting this parameter to TRUE will instead use the longtable environment which will not float and may span multiple pages.

latex.tbl.pos

Specify latex floating position

The latex position indicator for a floating environment (e.g., "!t", "H"). It should be specified without square brackets. Quarto users should instead set the floating position within the code chunk argument tbl-pos. The output table will only float if latex.use_longtable = FALSE.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use select columns from the exibble dataset to create a gt table with a number of table parts added (using functions like summary_rows(), grand_summary_rows(), and more). We can use this gt object going forward to demo some of tab_options() features.

tab_1 <-
  exibble |>
  dplyr::select(-c(fctr, date, time, datetime)) |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "row",
    groupname_col = "group"
  ) |>
  tab_header(
    title = md("Data listing from **exibble**"),
    subtitle = md("`exibble` is an R dataset")
  ) |>
  fmt_number(columns = num) |>
  fmt_currency(columns = currency) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Using commas for separators.",
    locations = cells_body(
      columns = num,
      rows = num > 1000
    )
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Using commas for separators.",
    locations = cells_body(
      columns = currency,
      rows = currency > 1000
    )
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Alphabetical fruit.",
    locations = cells_column_labels(columns = char)
  )

tab_1
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `tab_options()` help file.

We can modify the table width to be set as '100%'. In effect, this spans the table to entirely fill the content width area. This is done with the table.width option and we take advantage of the pct() helper function.

tab_1 |> tab_options(table.width = pct(100))
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `tab_options()` help file.

With the table.background.color option, we can modify the table's background color. Here, we want that to be "lightcyan".

tab_1 |> tab_options(table.background.color = "lightcyan")
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `tab_options()` help file.

We have footnotes residing in the footer section of tab_1. By default, each footnote takes up a new line of text. This can be changed with the footnotes.multiline option. Using FALSE with that means that all footnotes will be placed into one continuous span of text. Speaking of footnotes, we can change the 'marks' used to identify them. Here, we'll use letters as the marks for footnote references (instead of the default, which is numbers). This is accomplished with the footnotes.marks option, and we are going to supply the letters vector to that.

tab_1 |>
  tab_options(
    footnotes.multiline = FALSE,
    footnotes.marks = letters
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `tab_options()` help file.

The data rows of a table typically take up the most physical space but we have some control over the extent of that. With the data_row.padding option, it's possible to modify the top and bottom padding of data rows. We'll do just that in the following example, reducing the padding to a value of 5 px (note that we are using the px() helper function here).

tab_1 |> tab_options(data_row.padding = px(5))
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `tab_options()` help file.

The size of the title and the subtitle text in the header of the table can be altered with the heading.title.font.size and heading.subtitle.font.size options. Here, we'll use the "small" keyword as a value for both options.

tab_1 |>
  tab_options(
    heading.title.font.size = "small",
    heading.subtitle.font.size = "small"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the sixth code example in the `tab_options()` help file.

Function ID

2-12

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other part creation/modification functions: tab_caption(), tab_footnote(), tab_header(), tab_info(), tab_row_group(), tab_source_note(), tab_spanner(), tab_spanner_delim(), tab_stub_indent(), tab_stubhead(), tab_style(), tab_style_body()


Add a row group to a gt table

Description

We can create a row group from a collection of rows with tab_row_group(). This requires specification of the rows to be included, either by supplying row labels, row indices, or through use of a select helper function like starts_with(). To modify the order of row groups, we can use row_group_order().

To set a default row group label for any rows not formally placed in a row group, we can use a separate call to ⁠tab_options(row_group.default_label = <label>)⁠. If this is not done and there are rows that haven't been placed into a row group (where one or more row groups already exist), those rows will be automatically placed into a row group without a label.

Usage

tab_row_group(data, label, rows, id = label, others_label = NULL, group = NULL)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

label

Row group label text

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

The text to use for the row group label. We can optionally use md() or html() to style the text as Markdown or to retain HTML elements in the text.

rows

Rows to target

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // required

The rows to be made components of the row group. We can supply a vector of row ID values within c(), a vector of row indices, or use select helpers (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

id

Row group ID

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: label

The ID for the row group. When accessing a row group through cells_row_groups() (when using tab_style() or tab_footnote()) the id value is used as the reference (and not the label). If an id is not explicitly provided here, it will be taken from the label value. It is advisable to set an explicit id value if you plan to access this cell in a later function call and the label text is complicated (e.g., contains markup, is lengthy, or both). Finally, when providing an id value you must ensure that it is unique across all ID values set for row groups (the function will stop if id isn't unique).

others_label

Deprecated Label for default row group

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

This argument is deprecated. Instead use ⁠tab_options(row_group.default_label = <label>)⁠.

group

Deprecated The group label

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

This argument is deprecated. Instead use label.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Using a subset of the gtcars dataset, let's create a simple gt table with row labels (from the model column) inside of a stub. This eight-row table begins with no row groups at all but with a single use of tab_row_group(), we can specify a row group that will contain any rows where the car model begins with a number.

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(model, year, hp, trq) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:8) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "model") |>
  tab_row_group(
    label = "numbered",
    rows = matches("^[0-9]")
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `tab_row_group()` help file.

This actually makes two row groups since there are row labels that don't begin with a number. That second row group is a catch-all NA group, and it doesn't display a label at all. Rather, it is set off from the other group with a double line. This may be a preferable way to display the arrangement of one distinct group and an 'others' or default group. If that's the case but you'd like the order reversed, you can use row_group_order().

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(model, year, hp, trq) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:8) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "model") |>
  tab_row_group(
    label = "numbered",
    rows = matches("^[0-9]")
  ) |>
  row_group_order(groups = c(NA, "numbered"))
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `tab_row_group()` help file.

Two more options include: (1) setting a default label for the 'others' group (done through tab_options()), and (2) creating row groups until there are no more unaccounted for rows. Let's try the first option in the next example:

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(model, year, hp, trq) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:8) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "model") |>
  tab_row_group(
    label = "numbered",
    rows = matches("^[0-9]")
  ) |>
  row_group_order(groups = c(NA, "numbered")) |>
  tab_options(row_group.default_label = "others")
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `tab_row_group()` help file.

The above use of the row_group.default_label in tab_options() gets the job done and provides a default label. One drawback is that the default/NA group doesn't have an ID, so it can't as easily be styled with tab_style(); however, row groups have indices and the index for the "others" group here is 1.

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(model, year, hp, trq) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:8) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "model") |>
  tab_row_group(
    label = "numbered",
    rows = matches("^[0-9]")
  ) |>
  row_group_order(groups = c(NA, "numbered")) |>
  tab_options(row_group.default_label = "others") |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_fill(color = "bisque"),
    locations = cells_row_groups(groups = 1)
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_fill(color = "lightgreen"),
    locations = cells_row_groups(groups = "numbered")
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `tab_row_group()` help file.

Now let's try using tab_row_group() with our gtcars-based table such that all rows are formally assigned to different row groups. We'll define two row groups with the (Markdown-infused) labels "**Powerful Cars**" and "**Super Powerful Cars**". The distinction between the groups is whether hp is lesser or greater than 600 (and this is governed by the expressions provided to the rows argument).

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(model, year, hp, trq) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:8) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "model") |>
  tab_row_group(
    label = md("**Powerful Cars**"),
    rows = hp < 600,
    id = "powerful"
  ) |>
  tab_row_group(
    label = md("**Super Powerful Cars**"),
    rows = hp >= 600,
    id = "v_powerful"
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_fill(color = "gray85"),
    locations = cells_row_groups(groups = "powerful")
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = list(
      cell_fill(color = "gray95"),
      cell_text(size = "larger")
    ),
    locations = cells_row_groups(groups = "v_powerful")
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `tab_row_group()` help file.

Setting the id values for each of the row groups makes things easier since you will have clean, markup-free ID values to reference in later calls (as was done with the tab_style() invocations in the example above). The use of the md() helper function makes it so that any Markdown provided for the label of a row group is faithfully rendered.

Function ID

2-4

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other part creation/modification functions: tab_caption(), tab_footnote(), tab_header(), tab_info(), tab_options(), tab_source_note(), tab_spanner(), tab_spanner_delim(), tab_stub_indent(), tab_stubhead(), tab_style(), tab_style_body()


Add a source note citation

Description

Add a source note to the footer part of the gt table. A source note is useful for citing the data included in the table. Several can be added to the footer, simply use multiple calls of tab_source_note() and they will be inserted in the order provided. We can use Markdown formatting for the note, or, if the table is intended for HTML output, we can include HTML formatting.

Usage

tab_source_note(data, source_note)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

source_note

Source note text

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

Text to be used in the source note. We can optionally use md() and html() to style the text as Markdown or to retain HTML elements in the text.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

With three columns from the gtcars dataset, let's create a gt table. We can use tab_source_note() to add a source note to the table footer. Here we are citing the data source but this function can be used for any text you'd prefer to display in the footer section.

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(mfr, model, msrp) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:5) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_source_note(source_note = "From edmunds.com")
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `tab_source_note()` help file.

Function ID

2-8

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other part creation/modification functions: tab_caption(), tab_footnote(), tab_header(), tab_info(), tab_options(), tab_row_group(), tab_spanner(), tab_spanner_delim(), tab_stub_indent(), tab_stubhead(), tab_style(), tab_style_body()


Add a spanner label

Description

With tab_spanner(), you can insert a spanner in the column labels part of a gt table. This part of the table contains, at a minimum, column labels and, optionally, an unlimited number of levels for spanners. A spanner will occupy space over any number of contiguous column labels and it will have an associated label and ID value. This function allows for mapping to be defined by column names, existing spanner ID values, or a mixture of both. The spanners are placed in the order of calling tab_spanner() so if a later call uses the same columns in its definition (or even a subset) as the first invocation, the second spanner will be overlaid atop the first. Options exist for forcibly inserting a spanner underneath other (with level as space permits) and with replace, which allows for full or partial spanner replacement.

Usage

tab_spanner(
  data,
  label,
  columns = NULL,
  spanners = NULL,
  level = NULL,
  id = label,
  gather = TRUE,
  replace = FALSE
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

label

Spanner label text

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

The text to use for the spanner label. We can optionally use md() or html() to style the text as Markdown or to retain HTML elements in the text.

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The columns to serve as components of the spanner. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). This argument works in tandem with the spanners argument.

spanners

Spanners to target

⁠vector<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The spanners that should be spanned over, should they already be defined. One or more spanner ID values (in quotes) can be supplied here. This argument works in tandem with the columns argument.

level

Spanner level for insertion

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An explicit level to which the spanner should be placed. If not provided, gt will choose the level based on the inputs provided within columns and spanners, placing the spanner label where it will fit. The first spanner level (right above the column labels) is 1.

In combination with opt_interactive() or ihtml.active = TRUE in tab_options() only level 1 is supported, additional levels would be discarded.

id

Spanner ID

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: label

The ID for the spanner. When accessing a spanner through the spanners argument of tab_spanner() or cells_column_spanners() (when using tab_style() or tab_footnote()) the id value is used as the reference (and not the label). If an id is not explicitly provided here, it will be taken from the label value. It is advisable to set an explicit id value if you plan to access this cell in a later function call and the label text is complicated (e.g., contains markup, is lengthy, or both). Finally, when providing an id value you must ensure that it is unique across all ID values set for spanner labels (the function will stop if id isn't unique).

gather

Gather columns together

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to move the specified columns such that they are unified under the spanner. Ordering of the moved-into-place columns will be preserved in all cases. By default, this is set to TRUE.

replace

Replace existing spanners

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should new spanners be allowed to partially or fully replace existing spanners? (This is a possibility if setting spanners at an already populated level.) By default, this is set to FALSE and an error will occur if some replacement is attempted.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Targeting columns with the columns argument

The columns argument allows us to target a subset of columns contained in the table. We can declare column names in c() (with bare column names or names in quotes) or we can use tidyselect-style expressions. This can be as basic as supplying a select helper like starts_with(), or, providing a more complex incantation like

where(~ is.numeric(.x) & max(.x, na.rm = TRUE) > 1E6)

which targets numeric columns that have a maximum value greater than 1,000,000 (excluding any NAs from consideration).

Details on spanner placement

Let's take a hypothetical table that includes the following column names in order from left to right: year, len.pop, m.pop, len.dens, and m.dens. We'd like to have some useful spanners, but don't want to have any over the year column (so we'll avoid using that column when defining spanners). Let's start by creating a schematic representation of what is wanted in terms of spanners:

       | ------- `"Two Provinces of Ireland"` ------ <- level 2 spanner
       | ---- `"Leinster"` ---- | --- `"Munster"` -- <- level 1 spanners
`year` | `len.pop` | `len.dens` | `m.pop` | `m.dens` <- column names
----------------------------------------------------

To make this arrangement happen, we need three separate calls of tab_spanner():

  • tab_spanner(., label = "Leinster", columns = starts_with("len"))

  • tab_spanner(., label = "Munster", columns = starts_with("m"))

  • tab_spanner(., label = "Two Provinces of Ireland", columns = -year)

This will give us the spanners we need with the appropriate labels. The ID values will be derived from the labels in this case, but they can directly supplied via the id argument.

An important thing to keep aware of is that the order of calls matters. The first two can be in any order but the third one must happen last since we build spanners from the bottom up. Also note that the first calls will rearrange columns! This is by design as the gather = TRUE default will purposefully gather columns together so that the columns will be united under a single spanner. More complex definitions of spanners can be performed and the Examples section demonstrates some of the more advanced calls of tab_spanner().

As a final note, the column labels (by default deriving from the column names) will likely need to change and that's especially true in the above case. This can be done with either of cols_label() or cols_label_with().

Incorporating units with gt's units notation

Measurement units are often seen as part of spanner labels and indeed it can be much more straightforward to include them here rather than using other devices to make readers aware of units for specific columns. Any text pertaining units is to be defined alongside the spanner label. To do this, we have to surround the portion of text in the label that corresponds to the units definition with "{{"/"}}".

Now that we know how to mark text for units definition, we know need to know how to write proper units with the notation. Such notation uses a succinct method of writing units and it should feel somewhat familiar though it is particular to the task at hand. Each unit is treated as a separate entity (parentheses and other symbols included) and the addition of subscript text and exponents is flexible and relatively easy to formulate. This is all best shown with a few examples:

  • "m/s" and "m / s" both render as "m/s"

  • "m s^-1" will appear with the "-1" exponent intact

  • "m /s" gives the same result, as "/<unit>" is equivalent to "<unit>^-1"

  • "E_h" will render an "E" with the "h" subscript

  • "t_i^2.5" provides a t with an "i" subscript and a "2.5" exponent

  • "m[_0^2]" will use overstriking to set both scripts vertically

  • "g/L %C6H12O6%" uses a chemical formula (enclosed in a pair of "%" characters) as a unit partial, and the formula will render correctly with subscripted numbers

  • Common units that are difficult to write using ASCII text may be implicitly converted to the correct characters (e.g., the "u" in "ug", "um", "uL", and "umol" will be converted to the Greek mu symbol; "degC" and "degF" will render a degree sign before the temperature unit)

  • We can transform shorthand symbol/unit names enclosed in ":" (e.g., ":angstrom:", ":ohm:", etc.) into proper symbols

  • Greek letters can added by enclosing the letter name in ":"; you can use lowercase letters (e.g., ":beta:", ":sigma:", etc.) and uppercase letters too (e.g., ":Alpha:", ":Zeta:", etc.)

  • The components of a unit (unit name, subscript, and exponent) can be fully or partially italicized/emboldened by surrounding text with "*" or "**"

Examples

Let's create a gt table using a small portion of the gtcars dataset. Over several columns (hp, hp_rpm, trq, trq_rpm, mpg_c, mpg_h) we'll use tab_spanner() to add a spanner with the label "performance". This effectively groups together several columns related to car performance under a unifying label.

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(
    -mfr, -trim, bdy_style,
    -drivetrain, -trsmn, -ctry_origin
  ) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:8) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "model") |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "performance",
    columns = c(
      hp, hp_rpm, trq, trq_rpm, mpg_c, mpg_h
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `tab_spanner()` help file.

With the default gather = TRUE option, columns selected for a particular spanner will be moved so that there is no separation between them. This can be seen with the example below that uses a subset of the towny dataset. The starting column order is name, latitude, longitude, population_2016, density_2016, population_2021, and density_2021. The first two uses of tab_spanner() deal with making separate spanners for the two population and two density columns. After their use, the columns are moved to this new ordering: name, latitude, longitude, population_2016, population_2021, density_2016, and density_2021. The third and final call of tab_spanner() doesn't further affect the ordering of columns.

towny |>
  dplyr::slice_max(population_2021, n = 5) |>
  dplyr::select(
    name, latitude, longitude,
    ends_with("2016"), ends_with("2021")
  ) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Population",
    columns = starts_with("pop")
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Density",
    columns = starts_with("den")
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = md("*Location*"),
    columns = ends_with("itude"),
    id = "loc"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `tab_spanner()` help file.

While columns are moved, it is only the minimal amount of moving required (pulling in columns from the right) to ensure that columns are gathered under the appropriate spanners. With the last call, there are two more things to note: (1) label values can use the md() (or html()) helper functions to help create styled text, and (2) an id value may be supplied for reference later (e.g., for styling with tab_style() or applying footnotes with tab_footnote()).

It's possible to stack multiple spanners atop each other with consecutive calls of tab_spanner(). It's a bit like playing Tetris: putting a spanner down anywhere there is another spanner (i.e., there are one or more shared columns) means that second spanner will reside a level above the prior. Let's look at a few examples to see how this works, and we'll also explore a few lesser-known placement tricks. We'll use a cut down version of exibble for this, set up a few level-1 spanners, and then place a level-2 spanner over two other spanners.

exibble_narrow <- exibble |> dplyr::slice_head(n = 3)

exibble_narrow |>
  gt() |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Row Information",
    columns = c(row, group)
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Numeric Values",
    columns = where(is.numeric),
    id = "num_spanner"
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Text Values",
    columns = c(char, fctr),
    id = "text_spanner"
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Numbers and Text",
    spanners = c("num_spanner", "text_spanner")
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `tab_spanner()` help file.

In the above example, we used the spanners argument to define where the "Numbers and Text"-labeled spanner should reside. For that, we supplied the "num_spanner" and "text_spanner" ID values for the two spanners associated with the num, currency, char, and fctr columns. Alternatively, we could have given those column names to the columns argument and achieved the same result. You could actually use a combination of spanners and columns to define where the spanner should be placed. Here is an example of just that:

exibble_narrow_gt <-
  exibble_narrow |>
  gt() |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Numeric Values",
    columns = where(is.numeric),
    id = "num_spanner"
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Text Values",
    columns = c(char, fctr),
    id = "text_spanner"
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Text, Dates, Times, Datetimes",
    columns = contains(c("date", "time")),
    spanners = "text_spanner"
  )

exibble_narrow_gt
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `tab_spanner()` help file.

And, again, we could have solely supplied all of the column names to columns instead of using this hybrid approach, but it is interesting to express the definition of spanners with this flexible combination.

What if you wanted to extend the above example and place a spanner above the date, time, and datetime columns? If you tried that in the manner as exemplified above, the spanner will be placed in the third level of spanners:

exibble_narrow_gt |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Date and Time Columns",
    columns = contains(c("date", "time")),
    id = "date_time_spanner"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `tab_spanner()` help file.

Remember that the approach taken by tab_spanner() is to keep stacking atop existing spanners. But, there is space next to the "Text Values" spanner on the first level. You can either revise the order of tab_spanner() calls, or, use the level argument to force the spanner into that level (so long as there is space).

exibble_narrow_gt |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Date and Time Columns",
    columns = contains(c("date", "time")),
    level = 1,
    id = "date_time_spanner"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the sixth code example in the `tab_spanner()` help file.

That puts the spanner in the intended level. If there aren't free locations available in the level specified you'll get an error stating which columns cannot be used for the new spanner (this can be circumvented, if necessary, with the replace = TRUE option). If you choose a level higher than the maximum occupied, then the spanner will be dropped down. Again, these behaviors are indicative of Tetris-like rules which tend to work well for the application of spanners.

Using a subset of the towny dataset, we can create an interesting gt table. First, only certain columns are selected from the dataset, some filtering of rows is done, rows are sorted, and then only the first 10 rows are kept. After the data is introduced to gt(), we then apply some spanner labels using two calls of tab_spanner(). In the second of those, we incorporate unit notation text (within "{{"/"}}") in the label to get a display of nicely-formatted units.

towny |>
  dplyr::select(
    name, ends_with(c("2001", "2006")), matches("2001_2006")
  ) |>
  dplyr::filter(population_2001 > 100000) |>
  dplyr::slice_max(pop_change_2001_2006_pct, n = 10) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  fmt_percent(columns = matches("change"), decimals = 1) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Population",
    columns = starts_with("population")
  ) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Density, {{*persons* km^-2}}",
    columns = starts_with("density")
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    ends_with("01") ~ "2001",
    ends_with("06") ~ "2006",
    matches("change") ~ md("Population Change,<br>2001 to 2006")
  ) |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(120))
This image of a table was generated from the seventh code example in the `tab_spanner()` help file.

Function ID

2-2

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

tab_spanner_delim() to create spanners and new column labels with delimited column names.

Other part creation/modification functions: tab_caption(), tab_footnote(), tab_header(), tab_info(), tab_options(), tab_row_group(), tab_source_note(), tab_spanner_delim(), tab_stub_indent(), tab_stubhead(), tab_style(), tab_style_body()


Create column labels and spanners via delimited column names

Description

tab_spanner_delim() can take specially-crafted column names and generate one or more spanners (and revise column labels at the same time). This is done by splitting the column name by the specified delimiter text (delim) and placing the fragments from top to bottom (i.e., higher-level spanners to the column labels) or vice versa. Furthermore, neighboring text fragments on different spanner levels that have the same text will be coalesced together. For instance, having the three side-by-side column names rating_1, rating_2, and rating_3 will (in the default case at least) result in a spanner with the label "rating" above columns with the labels "1", "2", and "3". There are many options in cols_spanner_delim() to slice and dice delimited column names in different ways:

  • delimiter text: choose the delimiter text to use for the fragmentation of column names into spanners with the delim argument

  • direction and amount of splitting: we can choose to split n times according to a limit argument, and, we get to specify from which side of the column name the splitting should commence

  • reversal of fragments: we can reverse the order the fragments we get from the splitting procedure with the reverse argument

  • column constraints: it's possible to constrain which columns in a gt table should participate in spanner creation using vectors or tidyselect-style expressions

Usage

tab_spanner_delim(
  data,
  delim,
  columns = everything(),
  split = c("last", "first"),
  limit = NULL,
  reverse = FALSE
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

delim

Delimiter for splitting

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

The delimiter text to use to split one of more column names (i.e., those that are targeted via the columns argument).

columns

Columns to target

⁠<column-targeting expression>⁠ // default: everything()

The columns to consider for the splitting, relabeling, and spanner setting operations. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g., starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

split

Splitting side

⁠singl-kw:[last|first]⁠ // default: "last"

Should the delimiter splitting occur from the "last" instance of the delim character or from the "first"? The default here uses the "last" keyword, and splitting begins at the last instance of the delimiter in the column name. This option only has some consequence when there is a limit value applied that is lesser than the number of delimiter characters for a given column name (i.e., number of splits is not the maximum possible number).

limit

Limit for splitting

⁠scalar<numeric|integer|character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional limit to place on the splitting procedure. The default NULL means that a column name will be split as many times are there are delimiter characters. In other words, the default means there is no limit. If an integer value is given to limit then splitting will cease at the iteration given by limit. This works in tandem with split since we can adjust the number of splits from either the right side (split = "last") or left side (split = "first") of the column name.

reverse

Reverse vector of split names

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the order of split names be reversed? By default, this is FALSE.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Details on column splitting

If we take a hypothetical table that includes the column names province.NL_ZH.pop, province.NL_ZH.gdp, province.NL_NH.pop, and province.NL_NH.gdp, we can see that we have a naming system that has a well-defined structure. We start with the more general to the left ("province") and move to the more specific on the right ("pop"). If the columns are in the table in this exact order, then things are in an ideal state as the eventual spanner labels will form from this neighboring. When using tab_spanner_delim() here with delim set as "." we get the following text fragments:

  • province.NL_ZH.pop -> "province", "NL_ZH", "pop"

  • province.NL_ZH.gdp -> "province", "NL_ZH", "gdp"

  • province.NL_NH.pop -> "province", "NL_NH", "pop"

  • province.NL_NH.gdp -> "province", "NL_NH", "gdp"

This gives us the following arrangement of column labels and spanner labels:

--------- `"province"` ---------- <- level 2 spanner
---`"NL_ZH"`--- | ---`"NL_NH"`--- <- level 1 spanners
`"pop"`|`"gdp"` | `"pop"`|`"gdp"` <- column labels
---------------------------------

There might be situations where the same delimiter is used throughout but only the last instance requires a splitting. With a pair of column names like north_holland_pop and north_holland_area you would only want "pop" and "area" to be column labels underneath a single spanner ("north_holland"). To achieve this, the split and limit arguments are used and the values for each need to be split = "last" and limit = 1. This will give us the following arrangement:

--`"north_holland"`-- <- level 1 spanner
 `"pop"`  |  `"area"` <- column labels
---------------------

Examples

With a subset of the towny dataset, we can create a gt table and then use tab_spanner_delim() to automatically generate column spanner labels. In this case we have some column names in the form ⁠population_<year>⁠. The underscore character is the delimiter that separates a common word "population" and a year value. In this default way of splitting, fragments to the right are lowest (really they become new column labels) and moving left we get spanners. Let's have a look at how tab_spanner_delim() handles these column names:

towny_subset_gt <-
  towny |>
  dplyr::select(name, starts_with("population")) |>
  dplyr::filter(grepl("^F", name)) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_spanner_delim(delim = "_") |>
  fmt_integer()

towny_subset_gt
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `tab_spanner_delim()` help file.

The spanner created through this use of tab_spanner_delim() is automatically given an ID value by gt. Because it's hard to know what the ID value is, we can use tab_info() to inspect the table's indices and ID values.

towny_subset_gt |> tab_info()
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `tab_spanner_delim()` help file.

From this informational table, we see that the ID for the spanner is "spanner-population_1996". Also, the columns are still accessible by the original column names (tab_spanner_delim() did change their labels though). Let's use tab_style() along with cells_column_spanners() to add some styling to the spanner label of the towny_subset_gt table.

towny_subset_gt |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(weight = "bold", transform = "capitalize"),
    locations = cells_column_spanners(spanners = "spanner-population_1996")
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `tab_spanner_delim()` help file.

We can plan ahead a bit and refashion the column names with dplyr before introducing the table to gt() and tab_spanner_delim(). Here the column labels have underscore delimiters where splitting is not wanted (so a period or space character is used instead). The usage of tab_spanner_delim() gives two levels of spanners. We can further touch up the labels after that with cols_label_with() and text_transform().

towny |>
  dplyr::slice_max(population_2021, n = 5) |>
  dplyr::select(name, ends_with("pct")) |>
  dplyr::rename_with(
    .fn = function(x) {
      x |>
        sub("pop_change_", "Population Change.", x = _) |>
        sub("_pct", ".pct", x = _)
    }
  ) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "name") |>
  tab_spanner_delim(delim = ".") |>
  fmt_number(decimals = 1, scale_by = 100) |>
  cols_label_with(
    fn = function(x) gsub("pct", "%", x)
  ) |>
  text_transform(
    fn = function(x) gsub("_", " - ", x, fixed = TRUE),
    locations = cells_column_spanners()
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(align = "center"),
    locations = cells_column_labels()
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = "padding-right: 36px;",
    locations = cells_body()
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `tab_spanner_delim()` help file.

With a summarized, filtered, and pivoted version of the pizzaplace dataset, we can create another gt table and then use tab_spanner_delim() with the delimiter/separator also used in tidyr::pivot_wider(). We can also process the generated column labels with cols_label_with().

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::select(name, date, type, price) |>
  dplyr::group_by(name, date, type) |>
  dplyr::summarize(
    revenue = sum(price),
    sold = dplyr::n(),
    .groups = "drop"
  ) |>
  dplyr::filter(date %in% c("2015-01-01", "2015-01-02", "2015-01-03")) |>
  dplyr::filter(type %in% c("classic", "veggie")) |>
  tidyr::pivot_wider(
    names_from = date,
    names_sep = ".",
    values_from = c(revenue, sold),
    values_fn = sum,
    names_sort = TRUE
  ) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "name", groupname_col = "type") |>
  tab_spanner_delim(delim = ".") |>
  sub_missing(missing_text = "") |>
  fmt_currency(columns = starts_with("revenue")) |>
  data_color(
    columns = starts_with("revenue"),
    method = "numeric",
    palette = c("white", "lightgreen")
  ) |>
  cols_label_with(
    fn = function(x) {
      paste0(x, " (", vec_fmt_datetime(x, format = "E"), ")")
    }
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `tab_spanner_delim()` help file.

Function ID

2-3

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

tab_spanner() to manually create spanners with more control over spanner labels.

Other part creation/modification functions: tab_caption(), tab_footnote(), tab_header(), tab_info(), tab_options(), tab_row_group(), tab_source_note(), tab_spanner(), tab_stub_indent(), tab_stubhead(), tab_style(), tab_style_body()


Control indentation of row labels in the stub

Description

Indentation of row labels is an effective way for establishing structure in a table stub. tab_stub_indent() allows for fine control over row label indentation in the stub. We can use an explicit definition of an indentation level (with a number between 0 and 5), or, employ an indentation directive using keywords ("increase"/"decrease").

Usage

tab_stub_indent(data, rows, indent = "increase")

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

rows

Rows to target

⁠<row-targeting expression>⁠ // required

The rows to consider for the indentation change. We can supply a vector of row ID values within c(), a vector of row indices, or use select helpers here (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

indent

Indentation directive

⁠scalar<character|numeric|integer>⁠ // default: "increase"

An indentation directive either as a keyword describing the indentation change or as an explicit integer value for directly setting the indentation level. The keyword "increase" (the default) will increase the indentation level by one; "decrease" will do the same in the reverse direction. The starting indentation level of 0 means no indentation and this values serves as a lower bound. The upper bound for indentation is at level 5.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Compatibility of arguments with the from_column() helper function

from_column() can be used with the indent argument of tab_stub_indent() to obtain varying parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that each row label could be indented a little bit differently.

Please note that for this argument (indent), a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the numeric or integer type. Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide().

Examples

Using a subset of the photolysis dataset within a gt table, we can provide some indentation to all of the row labels in the stub via tab_stub_indent(). Here we provide an indent value of 3 for a very prominent indentation that clearly shows that the row labels are subordinate to the two row group labels in this table ("inorganic reactions" and "carbonyls").

photolysis |>
  dplyr::select(cmpd_name, products, type, l, m, n) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt(groupname_col = "type", rowname_col = "cmpd_name") |>
  fmt_chem(columns = products) |>
  fmt_scientific(columns = l) |>
  tab_stub_indent(
    rows = everything(),
    indent = 3
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `tab_stub_indent()` help file.

Let's use a summarized version of the pizzaplace dataset to create a another gt table with row groups and row labels. With summary_rows(), we'll generate summary rows at the top of each row group. Using tab_stub_indent() we can add indentation to the row labels in the stub.

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::group_by(type, size) |>
  dplyr::summarize(
    sold = dplyr::n(),
    income = sum(price),
    .groups = "drop"
  ) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "size", groupname_col = "type") |>
  tab_header(title = "Pizzas Sold in 2015") |>
  fmt_integer(columns = sold) |>
  fmt_currency(columns = income) |>
  summary_rows(
    fns = list(label = "All Sizes", fn = "sum"),
    side = "top",
    fmt = list(
      ~ fmt_integer(., columns = sold),
      ~ fmt_currency(., columns = income)
    )
  ) |>
  tab_options(
    summary_row.background.color = "gray95",
    row_group.background.color = "#FFEFDB",
    row_group.as_column = TRUE
  ) |>
  tab_stub_indent(
    rows = everything(),
    indent = 2
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `tab_stub_indent()` help file.

Indentation of entries in the stub can be controlled by values within a column. Here's an example of that using the constants dataset, where variations of a row label are mutated to eliminate the common leading text (replacing it with "..."). At the same time, the indentation for those rows is set to 4 in the indent column (value is 0 otherwise). The tab_stub_indent() statement uses from_column(), which passes values from the indent column to the namesake argument. We hide the indent column from view by use of cols_hide().

constants |>
  dplyr::select(name, value, uncert, units) |>
  dplyr::filter(
    grepl("^atomic mass constant", name) |
      grepl("^Rydberg constant", name) |
      grepl("^Bohr magneton", name)
  ) |>
  dplyr::mutate(
    indent = ifelse(grepl("constant |magneton ", name), 4, 0),
    name = gsub(".*constant |.*magneton ", "...", name)
  ) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "name") |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "Physical Constant") |>
  tab_stub_indent(
    rows = everything(),
    indent = from_column(column = "indent")
  ) |>
  fmt_scientific(columns = c(value, uncert)) |>
  fmt_units(columns = units) |>
  cols_hide(columns = indent) |>
  cols_label(
    value = "Value",
    uncert = "Uncertainty",
    units = "Units"
  ) |>
  cols_width(
    stub() ~ px(250),
    c(value, uncert) ~ px(150),
    units ~ px(80)
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(indent = px(10)),
    locations = list(
      cells_column_labels(columns = units),
      cells_body(columns = units)
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `tab_stub_indent()` help file.

Function ID

2-6

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

Other part creation/modification functions: tab_caption(), tab_footnote(), tab_header(), tab_info(), tab_options(), tab_row_group(), tab_source_note(), tab_spanner(), tab_spanner_delim(), tab_stubhead(), tab_style(), tab_style_body()


Add label text to the stubhead

Description

We can add a label to the stubhead of a gt table with tab_stubhead(). The stubhead is the lone part of the table that is positioned left of the column labels, and above the stub. If a stub does not exist, then there is no stubhead (so no visible change will be made when using this function in that case). We have the flexibility to use Markdown formatting for the stubhead label via the md() helper function. Furthermore, if the table is intended for HTML output, we can use HTML inside of html() for the stubhead label.

Usage

tab_stubhead(data, label)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

label

Stubhead label text

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

The text to be used as the stubhead label. We can optionally use md() or html() to style the text as Markdown or to retain HTML elements in the text.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Using a small subset of the gtcars dataset, we can create a gt table with row labels. Since we have row labels in the stub (via use of rowname_col = "model" in the gt() function call) we have a stubhead, so, let's add a stubhead label ("car") with tab_stubhead() to describe what's in the stub.

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(model, year, hp, trq) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:5) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "model") |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "car")
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `tab_stubhead()` help file.

The stuhead can contain all sorts of interesting content. How about an icon for a car? We can make this happen with help from the fontawesome package.

gtcars |>
  dplyr::select(model, year, hp, trq) |>
  dplyr::slice(1:5) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "model") |>
  tab_stubhead(label = fontawesome::fa("car"))
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `tab_stubhead()` help file.

If the stub is two columns wide (made possible by using row_group_as_column = TRUE in the gt() statement), the stubhead will be a merged cell atop those two stub columns representing the row group and the row label. Here's an example of that type of situation in a table that uses the peeps dataset.

peeps |>
  dplyr::filter(country %in% c("POL", "DEU")) |>
  dplyr::group_by(country) |>
  dplyr::filter(dplyr::row_number() %in% 1:5) |>
  dplyr::ungroup() |>
  dplyr::mutate(name = paste0(toupper(name_family), ", ", name_given)) |>
  dplyr::select(name, address, city, postcode, country) |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "name",
    groupname_col = "country",
    row_group_as_column = TRUE
  ) |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "Country Code / Person") |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(transform = "capitalize"),
    locations = cells_column_labels()
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `tab_stubhead()` help file.

The stubhead cell and its text can be styled using tab_style() with cells_stubhead(). In this example, using the reactions dataset, we style the stubhead label so that it is vertically centered with text that is highly emboldened.

reactions |>
  dplyr::filter(cmpd_type == "nitrophenol") |>
  dplyr::select(cmpd_name, OH_k298, Cl_k298) |>
  dplyr::filter(!(is.na(OH_k298) & is.na(Cl_k298))) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "cmpd_name") |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Rate constant at 298 K, in {{cm^3 molecules^-1 s^-1}}",
    columns = ends_with("k298")
  ) |>
  tab_stubhead(label = "Nitrophenol Compound") |>
  fmt_scientific() |>
  sub_missing() |>
  cols_label_with(fn = function(x) sub("_k298", "", x)) |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(200)) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(v_align = "middle", weight = "800"),
    locations = cells_stubhead()
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `tab_stubhead()` help file.

Function ID

2-5

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other part creation/modification functions: tab_caption(), tab_footnote(), tab_header(), tab_info(), tab_options(), tab_row_group(), tab_source_note(), tab_spanner(), tab_spanner_delim(), tab_stub_indent(), tab_style(), tab_style_body()


Add custom styles to one or more cells

Description

With tab_style() we can target specific cells and apply styles to them. This is best done in conjunction with the helper functions cell_text(), cell_fill(), and cell_borders(). Currently, this function is focused on the application of styles for HTML output only (as such, other output formats will ignore all tab_style() calls). Using the aforementioned helper functions, here are some of the styles we can apply:

  • the background color of the cell (cell_fill(): color)

  • the cell's text color, font, and size (cell_text(): color, font, size)

  • the text style (cell_text(): style), enabling the use of italics or oblique text.

  • the text weight (cell_text(): weight), allowing the use of thin to bold text (the degree of choice is greater with variable fonts)

  • the alignment and indentation of text (cell_text(): align and indent)

  • the cell borders (cell_borders())

Usage

tab_style(data, style, locations)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

style

Style declarations

⁠<style expressions>⁠ // required

The styles to use for the cells at the targeted locations. The cell_text(), cell_fill(), and cell_borders() helper functions can be used here to more easily generate valid styles. If using more than one helper function to define styles, all calls must be enclosed in a list(). Custom CSS declarations can be used for HTML output by including a css()-based statement as a list item.

locations

Locations to target

<locations expressions> // required

The cell or set of cells to be associated with the style. Supplying any of the ⁠cells_*()⁠ helper functions is a useful way to target the location cells that are associated with the styling. These helper functions are: cells_title(), cells_stubhead(), cells_column_spanners(), cells_column_labels(), cells_row_groups(), cells_stub(), cells_body(), cells_summary(), cells_grand_summary(), cells_stub_summary(), cells_stub_grand_summary(), cells_footnotes(), and cells_source_notes(). Additionally, we can enclose several ⁠cells_*()⁠ calls within a list() if we wish to apply styling to different types of locations (e.g., body cells, row group labels, the table title, etc.).

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Using from_column() with ⁠cell_*()⁠ styling functions

from_column() can be used with certain arguments of cell_fill() and cell_text(); this allows you to get parameter values from a specified column within the table. This means that body cells targeted for styling could be formatted a little bit differently, using options taken from a column. For cell_fill(), we can use from_column() for its color argument. cell_text() allows the use of from_column() in the following arguments:

  • color

  • size

  • align

  • v_align

  • style

  • weight

  • stretch

  • decorate

  • transform

  • whitespace

  • indent

Please note that for all of the aforementioned arguments, a from_column() call needs to reference a column that has data of the correct type (this is different for each argument). Additional columns for parameter values can be generated with cols_add() (if not already present). Columns that contain parameter data can also be hidden from final display with cols_hide().

Importantly, a tab_style() call with any use of from_column() within styling expressions must only use cells_body() within locations. This is because we cannot map multiple options taken from a column onto other locations.

Examples

Let's use the exibble dataset to create a simple, two-column gt table (keeping only the num and currency columns). With tab_style() (called twice), we'll selectively add style to the values formatted by fmt_number(). In the style argument of each tab_style() call, we can define multiple types of styling with cell_fill() and cell_text() (enclosed in a list). The cells to be targeted for styling require the use of helpers like cells_body(), which is used here with different columns and rows being targeted.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(num, currency) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_number(decimals = 1) |>
  tab_style(
    style = list(
      cell_fill(color = "lightcyan"),
      cell_text(weight = "bold")
      ),
    locations = cells_body(
      columns = num,
      rows = num >= 5000
    )
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = list(
      cell_fill(color = "#F9E3D6"),
      cell_text(style = "italic")
      ),
    locations = cells_body(
      columns = currency,
      rows = currency < 100
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `tab_style()` help file.

With a subset of the sp500 dataset, we'll create a different gt table. Here, we'll color the background of entire rows of body cells and do so on the basis of value expressions involving the open and close columns.

sp500 |>
  dplyr::filter(
    date >= "2015-12-01" &
    date <= "2015-12-15"
  ) |>
  dplyr::select(-c(adj_close, volume)) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_fill(color = "lightgreen"),
    locations = cells_body(rows = close > open)
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = list(
      cell_fill(color = "red"),
      cell_text(color = "white")
      ),
    locations = cells_body(rows = open > close)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `tab_style()` help file.

With another two-column table based on the exibble dataset, let's create a gt table. First, we'll replace missing values with sub_missing(). Next, we'll add styling to the char column. This styling will be HTML-specific and it will involve (all within a list): (1) a cell_fill() call (to set a "lightcyan" background), and (2) a string containing a CSS style declaration ("font-variant: small-caps;").

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(char, fctr) |>
  gt() |>
  sub_missing() |>
  tab_style(
    style = list(
      cell_fill(color = "lightcyan"),
      "font-variant: small-caps;"
    ),
    locations = cells_body(columns = char)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `tab_style()` help file.

In the following table based on the towny dataset, we'll use a larger number of tab_style() calls with the aim of styling each location available in the table. Over six separate uses of tab_style(), different body cells are styled with background colors, the header and the footer also receive background color fills, borders are applied to a column of body cells and also to the column labels, and, the row labels in the stub receive a custom text treatment.

towny |>
  dplyr::filter(csd_type == "city") |>
  dplyr::select(
    name, land_area_km2, density_2016, density_2021,
    population_2016, population_2021
  ) |>
  dplyr::slice_max(population_2021, n = 5) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "name") |>
  tab_header(
    title = md(paste("Largest Five", fontawesome::fa("city") , "in `towny`")),
    subtitle = "Changes in vital numbers from 2016 to 2021."
  ) |>
  fmt_number(
    columns = starts_with("population"),
    n_sigfig = 3,
    suffixing = TRUE
  ) |>
  fmt_integer(columns = starts_with("density")) |>
  fmt_number(columns = land_area_km2, decimals = 1) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = starts_with("density"),
    pattern = paste("{1}", fontawesome::fa("arrow-right"), "{2}")
  ) |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = starts_with("population"),
    pattern = paste("{1}", fontawesome::fa("arrow-right"), "{2}")
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    land_area_km2 = md("Area, km^2^"),
    starts_with("density") ~ md("Density, ppl/km^2^"),
    starts_with("population") ~ "Population"
  ) |>
  cols_align(align = "center", columns = -name) |>
  cols_width(
    stub() ~ px(125),
    everything() ~ px(150)
  ) |>
  tab_footnote(
    footnote = "Data was used from their respective census-year publications.",
    locations = cells_title(groups = "subtitle")
  ) |>
  tab_source_note(source_note = md(
    "All figures are compiled in the `towny` dataset (in the **gt** package)."
  )) |>
  opt_footnote_marks(marks = "letters") |>
  tab_style(
    style = list(
      cell_fill(color = "gray95"),
      cell_borders(sides = c("l", "r"), color = "gray50", weight = px(3))
    ),
    locations = cells_body(columns = land_area_km2)
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_fill(color = "lightblue" |> adjust_luminance(steps = 2)),
    locations = cells_body(columns = -land_area_km2)
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = list(cell_fill(color = "gray35"), cell_text(color = "white")),
    locations = list(cells_footnotes(), cells_source_notes())
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_fill(color = "gray98"),
    locations = cells_title()
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(
      size = "smaller",
      weight = "bold",
      transform = "uppercase"
    ),
    locations = cells_stub()
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_borders(
      sides = c("t", "b"),
      color = "powderblue",
      weight = px(3)
    ),
    locations = list(cells_column_labels(), cells_stubhead())
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `tab_style()` help file.

from_column() can be used to get values from a column. We'll use it in the next example, which begins with a table having a color name column and a column with the associated hexadecimal color code. To show the color in a separate column, we first create one with cols_add() (ensuring that missing values are replaced with "" via sub_missing()). Then, tab_style() is used to style that column, using color = from_column() within cell_fill().

dplyr::tibble(
  name = c(
    "red", "green", "blue", "yellow", "orange",
    "cyan", "purple", "magenta", "lime", "pink"
  ),
  hex = c(
    "#E6194B", "#3CB44B", "#4363D8", "#FFE119", "#F58231",
    "#42D4F4", "#911EB4", "#F032E6", "#BFEF45", "#FABED4"
  )
) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "name") |>
  cols_add(color = rep(NA_character_, 10)) |>
  sub_missing(missing_text = "") |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_fill(color = from_column(column = "hex")),
    locations = cells_body(columns = color)
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(font = system_fonts(name = "monospace-code")),
    locations = cells_body()
  ) |>
  opt_all_caps() |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(100)) |>
  tab_options(table_body.hlines.style = "none")
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `tab_style()` help file.

cell_text() also allows the use of from_column() for many of its arguments. Let's take a small portion of data from sp500 and add an up or down arrow based on the values in the open and close columns. Within cols_add() we can create a new column (dir) with an expression to get either "red" or "green" text from a comparison of the open and close values. These values are transformed to up or down arrows with text_case_match(), using fontawesome icons in the end. However, the text values are still present and can be used by cell_text() within tab_style(). from_column() makes it possible to use the text in the cells of the dir column as color input values.

sp500 |>
  dplyr::filter(date > "2015-01-01") |>
  dplyr::slice_min(date, n = 5) |>
  dplyr::select(date, open, close) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "date") |>
  fmt_currency(columns = c(open, close)) |>
  cols_add(dir = ifelse(close < open, "red", "forestgreen")) |>
  cols_label(dir = "") |>
  text_case_match(
    "red" ~ fontawesome::fa("arrow-down"),
    "forestgreen" ~ fontawesome::fa("arrow-up")
  ) |>
  tab_style(
    style = cell_text(color = from_column("dir")),
    locations = cells_body(columns = dir)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the sixth code example in the `tab_style()` help file.

Function ID

2-10

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

cell_text(), cell_fill(), and cell_borders() as helpers for defining custom styles and cells_body() as one of many useful helper functions for targeting the locations to be styled.

Other part creation/modification functions: tab_caption(), tab_footnote(), tab_header(), tab_info(), tab_options(), tab_row_group(), tab_source_note(), tab_spanner(), tab_spanner_delim(), tab_stub_indent(), tab_stubhead(), tab_style_body()


Target cells in the table body and style accordingly

Description

With tab_style_body() we can target cells through value, regex, and custom matching rules and apply styles to them and their surrounding context (i.e., styling an entire row or column wherein the match is found). Just as with the general tab_style() function, this function is focused on the application of styles for HTML output only (as such, other output formats will ignore all tab_style() calls).

With the collection of ⁠cell_*()⁠ helper functions available in gt, we can modify:

  • the background color of the cell (cell_fill(): color)

  • the cell's text color, font, and size (cell_text(): color, font, size)

  • the text style (cell_text(): style), enabling the use of italics or oblique text.

  • the text weight (cell_text(): weight), allowing the use of thin to bold text (the degree of choice is greater with variable fonts)

  • the alignment and indentation of text (cell_text(): align and indent)

  • the cell borders (cell_borders())

Usage

tab_style_body(
  data,
  style,
  columns = everything(),
  rows = everything(),
  values = NULL,
  pattern = NULL,
  fn = NULL,
  targets = "cell",
  extents = "body"
)

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

style

Style declarations

⁠<style expressions>⁠ // required

The styles to use for the targeted cells. cell_text(), cell_fill(), and cell_borders() can be used here to more easily generate valid styles. If using more than one helper function to define styles, all calls must be enclosed in a list(). Custom CSS declarations can be used for HTML output by including a css()-based statement as a list item.

columns

Columns to target

<column-targeting expression> // default: everything()

The columns to which substitution operations are constrained. Can either be a series of column names provided in c(), a vector of column indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()).

rows

Rows to target

<row-targeting expression> // default: everything()

In conjunction with columns, we can specify which of their rows should form a constraint for targeting operations. The default everything() results in all rows in columns being formatted. Alternatively, we can supply a vector of row IDs within c(), a vector of row indices, or a select helper function (e.g. starts_with(), ends_with(), contains(), matches(), num_range(), and everything()). We can also use expressions to filter down to the rows we need (e.g., ⁠[colname_1] > 100 & [colname_2] < 50⁠).

values

Values for targeting

⁠vector<character|numeric|integer>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The specific value or values that should be targeted for styling. If pattern is also supplied then values will be ignored.

pattern

Regex pattern for targeting

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A regex pattern that can target solely those values in character-based columns. If values is also supplied, pattern will take precedence.

fn

Function to return logical values

⁠<function>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

A supplied function that operates on each cell of each column specified through columns and rows. The function should be fashioned such that a single logical value is returned. If either of values or pattern is also supplied, fn will take precedence.

targets

Styling targets

⁠vector<character>⁠ // default: "cell"

A vector of styling target keywords to contain or expand the target of each cell. By default, this is a vector just containing "cell". However, the keywords "row" and "column" may be used separately or in combination to style the target cells' associated rows or columns.

extents

Styling extents

⁠vector<character>⁠ // default: "body"

A vector of locations to project styling. By default, this is a vector just containing "body", whereby styled rows or columns (facilitated via inclusion of the "row" and "column" keywords in targets) will not permeate into the stub. The additional keyword "stub" may be used alone or in conjunction with "body" to project or expand the styling into the stub.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use exibble to create a gt table with a stub and row groups. This contains an assortment of values that could potentially undergo some styling via tab_style_body().

gt_tbl <-
  exibble |>
  gt(
    rowname_col = "row",
    groupname_col = "group"
  )

Cells in the table body can be styled through specification of literal values in the values argument of tab_style_body(). It's okay to search for numerical, character, or logical values across all columns. Let's target the values 49.95 and 33.33 and style those cells with an orange fill.

gt_tbl |>
  tab_style_body(
    style = cell_fill(color = "orange"),
    values = c(49.95, 33.33)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `tab_style_body()` help file.

Multiple styles can be combined in a list, here's an example of that using the same cell targets:

gt_tbl |>
  tab_style_body(
    style = list(
      cell_text(font = google_font("Inter"), color = "white"),
      cell_fill(color = "red"),
      cell_borders(
        sides = c("left", "right"),
        color = "steelblue",
        weight = px(4)
      )
    ),
    values = c(49.95, 33.33)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `tab_style_body()` help file.

You can opt to color entire rows or columns (or both, should you want to) with those specific keywords in the targets argument. For the 49.95 value we will style the entire row and with 33.33 the entire column will get the same styling.

gt_tbl |>
  tab_style_body(
    style = cell_fill(color = "lightblue"),
    values = 49.95,
    targets = "row"
  ) |>
  tab_style_body(
    style = cell_fill(color = "lightblue"),
    values = 33.33,
    targets = "column"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `tab_style_body()` help file.

In a minor variation to the prior example, it's possible to extend the styling to other locations, or, entirely project the styling elsewhere. This is done with the extents argument. Valid keywords that can be included in the vector are: "body" (the default) and "stub". Let's take the previous example and extend the styling of the row into the stub.

gt_tbl |>
  tab_style_body(
    style = cell_fill(color = "lightblue"),
    values = 49.95,
    targets = "row",
    extents = c("body", "stub")
  ) |>
  tab_style_body(
    style = cell_fill(color = "lightblue"),
    values = 33.33,
    targets = "column"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fourth code example in the `tab_style_body()` help file.

We can also use the pattern argument to target cell values in character-based columns. The "fctr" column is skipped because it is in fact a factor-based column.

gt_tbl |>
  tab_style_body(
    style = cell_fill(color = "green"),
    pattern = "ne|na"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the fifth code example in the `tab_style_body()` help file.

For the most flexibility in targeting, it's best to use the fn argument. The function you give to fn will be invoked separately on all cells so the columns argument of tab_style_body() might be useful to limit which cells should be evaluated. For this next example, the supplied function should only be used on numeric values and we can make sure of this by using columns = where(is.numeric).

gt_tbl |>
  tab_style_body(
    columns = where(is.numeric),
    style = cell_fill(color = "pink"),
    fn = function(x) x >= 0 && x < 50
  )
This image of a table was generated from the sixth code example in the `tab_style_body()` help file.

Styling every NA value in a table is also easily accomplished with the fn argument by way of is.na().

gt_tbl |>
  tab_style_body(
    style = cell_text(color = "red3"),
    fn = function(x) is.na(x)
  ) |>
  sub_missing(missing_text = "Not Available")
This image of a table was generated from the seventh code example in the `tab_style_body()` help file.

Function ID

2-11

Function Introduced

v0.8.0 (November 16, 2022)

See Also

Other part creation/modification functions: tab_caption(), tab_footnote(), tab_header(), tab_info(), tab_options(), tab_row_group(), tab_source_note(), tab_spanner(), tab_spanner_delim(), tab_stub_indent(), tab_stubhead(), tab_style()


Generate a path to a test image

Description

Two test images are available within the gt package. Both contain the same imagery (sized at 200px by 200px) but one is a PNG file while the other is an SVG file. This function is most useful when paired with local_image() since we test various sizes of the test image within that function.

Usage

test_image(type = c("png", "svg"))

Arguments

type

The image type

⁠singl-kw:[png|svg]⁠ // default: "png"

The type of image to produce here can either be "png" (the default) or "svg".

Value

A character vector with a single path to an image file.

Function ID

9-4

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other image addition functions: ggplot_image(), local_image(), web_image()


Perform whole or partial text replacements with a 'switch'-like approach

Description

text_case_match() provides a useful interface for a approach to replacing table cells that behaves much like a switch statement. The targeting of cell for transformation happens with the .locations argument. Once overall targeting is handled, you need to supply a sequence of two-sided formulas matching of the general form: ⁠<vector_old_text> ~ <new_text>⁠. In the left hand side (LHS) there should be a character vector containing strings to match on. The right hand side (RHS) should contain a single string (or something coercible to a length one character vector). There's also the .replace argument that changes the matching and replacing behavior. By default, text_case_match() will try to match on entire strings and replace those strings. This can be changed to a partial matching and replacement strategy with the alternate option.

Usage

text_case_match(
  .data,
  ...,
  .default = NULL,
  .replace = c("all", "partial"),
  .locations = cells_body()
)

Arguments

.data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

...

Matching expressions

⁠<multiple expressions>⁠ // required

A sequence of two-sided formulas matching this general construction: ⁠<old_text> ~ <new_text>⁠. The left hand side (LHS) determines which values to match on and it can be any length (allowing for new_text to replace different values of old_text). The right hand side (RHS) provides the replacement text (it must resolve to a single value of the character class).

.default

Default replacement text

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The replacement text to use when cell values aren't matched by any of the LHS inputs. If NULL, the default, no replacement text will be used.

.replace

Method for text replacement

⁠singl-kw:[all|partial]⁠ // default: "all"

A choice in how the matching is to be done. The default "all" means that the old_text (on the LHS of formulas given in ...) must match the cell text completely. With that option, the replacement will completely replace that matched text. With "partial", the match will occur in all substrings of old_text. In this way, the replacements will act on those matched substrings.

.locations

Locations to target

<locations expressions> // default: cells_body()

The cell or set of cells to be associated with the text transformation. Only cells_column_spanners(), cells_column_labels(), cells_row_groups(), cells_stub(), and cells_body() can be used here. We can enclose several of these calls within a list() if we wish to make the transformation happen at different locations.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Let's use the exibble dataset to create a simple, two-column gt table (keeping only the char and fctr columns). In the char column, we'll transform the NA value to "elderberry" using the text_case_match() function. Over in the fctr column, some more sophisticated matches will be performed using text_case_match(). That column has spelled out numbers and we can produce these on the LHS with help from vec_fmt_spelled_num(). The replacements will contain descriptive text. In this last call of text_case_match(), we use a .default to replace text for any of those non-matched cases.

exibble |>
  dplyr::select(char, fctr) |>
  gt() |>
  text_case_match(
    NA ~ "elderberry",
    .locations = cells_body(columns = char)
  ) |>
  text_case_match(
    vec_fmt_spelled_num(1:4) ~ "one to four",
    vec_fmt_spelled_num(5:6) ~ "five or six",
    .default = "seven or more",
    .locations = cells_body(columns = fctr)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `text_case_match()` help file.

Next, let's use a transformed version of the towny dataset to create a gt table. Transform the text in the csd_type column using two-sided formulas supplied to text_case_match(). We can replace matches on the LHS with Fontawesome icons furnished by the fontawesome R package.

towny |>
  dplyr::select(name, csd_type, population_2021) |>
  dplyr::filter(csd_type %in% c("city", "town")) |>
  dplyr::slice_max(population_2021, n = 5, by = csd_type) |>
  dplyr::arrange(csd_type) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_integer() |>
  text_case_match(
    "city" ~ fontawesome::fa("city"),
    "town" ~ fontawesome::fa("house-chimney")
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    name = "City/Town",
    csd_type = "",
    population_2021 = "Population"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `text_case_match()` help file.

Function ID

4-3

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other text transforming functions: text_case_when(), text_replace(), text_transform()


Perform whole text replacements using a 'case-when'-expression approach

Description

text_case_when() provides a useful interface for a case-by-case approach to replacing entire table cells. First off, you have to make sure you're targeting the appropriate cells with the .locations argument. Following that, you supply a sequence of two-sided formulas matching of the general form: ⁠<logical_stmt> ~ <new_text>⁠. In the left hand side (LHS) there should be a predicate statement that evaluates to a logical vector of length one (i.e., either TRUE or FALSE). To refer to the values undergoing transformation, you need to use the x variable.

Usage

text_case_when(.data, ..., .default = NULL, .locations = cells_body())

Arguments

.data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

...

Matching expressions

⁠<multiple expressions>⁠ // required

A sequence of two-sided formulas. The left hand side (LHS) determines which values match this case. The right hand side (RHS) provides the replacement text (it must resolve to a value of the character class). The LHS inputs must evaluate to logical vectors.

.default

Default replacement text

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The replacement text to use when cell values aren't matched by any of the LHS inputs. If NULL, the default, no replacement text will be used.

.locations

Locations to target

<locations expressions> // default: cells_body()

The cell or set of cells to be associated with the text transformation. Only cells_column_spanners(), cells_column_labels(), cells_row_groups(), cells_stub(), and cells_body() can be used here. We can enclose several of these calls within a list() if we wish to make the transformation happen at different locations.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use a portion of the metro dataset to create a gt table. We'll use text_case_when() to supply pairs of predicate statements and replacement text. For the connect_rer column, we will perform a count of pattern matches with stringr::str_count() and determine which cells have 1, 2, or 3 matched patterns. For each of these cases, descriptive replacement text is provided. Here, we use a .default value to replace the non-matched cases with an empty string (""). Finally, we use cols_label() to modify the labels of the three columns.

metro |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(passengers)) |>
  dplyr::select(name, lines, connect_rer) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  gt() |>
  text_case_when(
    stringr::str_count(x, pattern = "[ABCDE]") == 1 ~ "One connection.",
    stringr::str_count(x, pattern = "[ABCDE]") == 2 ~ "Two connections.",
    stringr::str_count(x, pattern = "[ABCDE]") == 3 ~ "Three connections.",
    .default = "", .locations = cells_body(columns = connect_rer)
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    name = "Station",
    lines = "Lines Serviced",
    connect_rer = "RER Connections"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `text_case_when()` help file.

Function ID

4-2

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other text transforming functions: text_case_match(), text_replace(), text_transform()


Perform highly targeted text replacement with a regex pattern

Description

text_replace() provides a specialized interface for replacing text fragments in table cells with literal text. You need to ensure that you're targeting the appropriate cells with the locations argument. Once that is done, the remaining two values to supply are the regex pattern (pattern) and the replacement for all matched text (replacement).

Usage

text_replace(data, pattern, replacement, locations = cells_body())

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

pattern

Regex pattern to match with

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

A regex pattern used to target text fragments in the cells resolved in locations.

replacement

Replacement text

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

The replacement text for any matched text fragments.

locations

Locations to target

<locations expressions> // default: cells_body()

The cell or set of cells to be associated with the text transformation. Only cells_column_spanners(), cells_column_labels(), cells_row_groups(), cells_stub(), and cells_body() can be used here. We can enclose several of these calls within a list() if we wish to make the transformation happen at different locations.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use the metro dataset to create a gt table. With cols_merge(), we'll merge the name and caption columns together but only if caption doesn't have an NA value (the special pattern syntax of "{1}<<({2})>>" takes care of this). This merged content is now part of the name column. We'd like to modify this further wherever there is text in parentheses: (1) make that text italicized, and (2) introduce a line break before the text in parentheses. We can do this with text_replace(). The pattern value of "\\((.*?)\\)" will match on text between parentheses, and the inner "(.*?)" is a capture group. The replacement value of "<br>(<em>\\1</em>)" puts the capture group text "\\1" within ⁠<em>⁠ tags, wraps literal parentheses around it, and prepends a line break tag.

metro |>
  dplyr::select(name, caption, lines) |>
  dplyr::slice(110:120) |>
  gt() |>
  cols_merge(
    columns = c(name, caption),
    pattern = "{1}<< ({2})>>"
  ) |>
  text_replace(
    locations = cells_body(columns = name),
    pattern = "\\((.*?)\\)",
    replacement = "<br>(<em>\\1</em>)"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `text_replace()` help file.

Function ID

4-1

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other text transforming functions: text_case_match(), text_case_when(), text_transform()


Perform text transformations with a custom function

Description

Text transforming in gt is the act of modifying formatted strings in targeted cells. text_transform() provides the most flexibility of all the ⁠text_*()⁠ functions in their family of functions. With it, you target the cells to undergo modification in the locations argument while also supplying a function to the fn argument. The function given to fn should ideally at the very least take x as an input (it stands for the character vector that is essentially the targeted cells) and return a character vector of the same length as the input. Using the construction function(x) { .. } for the function is recommended.

Usage

text_transform(data, fn, locations = cells_body())

Arguments

data

The gt table data object

⁠obj:<gt_tbl>⁠ // required

This is the gt table object that is commonly created through use of the gt() function.

fn

Function for text transformation

⁠<function>⁠ // required

The function to use for text transformation. It should include x as an argument and return a character vector of the same length as the input x.

locations

Locations to target

<locations expressions> // default: cells_body()

The cell or set of cells to be associated with the text transformation. Only cells_column_spanners(), cells_column_labels(), cells_row_groups(), cells_stub(), and cells_body() can be used here. We can enclose several of these calls within a list() if we wish to make the transformation happen at different locations.

Value

An object of class gt_tbl.

Examples

Use a subset of the sp500 dataset to create a gt table. Transform the text in the date column using a function supplied to text_transform() (via the fn argument). Note that the x in the ⁠fn = function (x)⁠ part consists entirely of ISO 8601 date strings (which are acceptable as input to vec_fmt_date() and vec_fmt_datetime()).

sp500 |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  dplyr::select(date, open, close) |>
  dplyr::arrange(-dplyr::row_number()) |>
  gt() |>
  fmt_currency() |>
  text_transform(
    fn = function(x) {
      paste0(
        "<strong>",
        vec_fmt_date(x, date_style = "m_day_year"),
        "</strong>",
        "&mdash;W",
        vec_fmt_datetime(x, format = "w")
      )
    },
    locations = cells_body(columns = date)
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    date = "Date and Week",
    open = "Opening Price",
    close = "Closing Price"
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `text_transform()` help file.

Let's use a summarized version of the gtcars dataset to create a gt table. First, the numeric values in the n column are formatted as spelled-out numbers with fmt_spelled_num(). The output values are indeed spelled out but exclusively with lowercase letters. We actually want these words to begin with a capital letter and end with a period. To make this possible, text_transform() will be used since it can modify already-formatted text. Through the fn argument, we provide a custom function that uses R's toTitleCase() operating on x (the numbers-as-text strings) within paste0() so that a period can be properly placed.

gtcars |>
  dplyr::filter(ctry_origin %in% c("Germany", "Italy", "Japan")) |>
  dplyr::count(mfr, ctry_origin, sort = TRUE) |>
  dplyr::arrange(ctry_origin) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "mfr", groupname_col = "ctry_origin") |>
  cols_label(n = "No. of Entries") |>
  tab_stub_indent(rows = everything(), indent = 2) |>
  cols_align(align = "center", columns = n) |>
  fmt_spelled_num() |>
  text_transform(
    fn = function(x) {
      paste0(tools::toTitleCase(x), ".")
    },
    locations = cells_body(columns = n)
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `text_transform()` help file.

There may be occasions where you'd want to remove all text. Here in this example based on the pizzaplace dataset, we generate a gt table that summarizes an entire year of data by colorizing the daily sales revenue. Individual cell values are not needed here (since the encoding by color suffices), so, text_transform() is used to turn every value to an empty string: "".

pizzaplace |>
  dplyr::group_by(date) |>
  dplyr::summarize(rev = sum(price)) |>
  dplyr::ungroup() |>
  dplyr::mutate(
    month = lubridate::month(date, label = TRUE),
    day_num = lubridate::mday(date)
  ) |>
  dplyr::select(-date) |>
  tidyr::pivot_wider(names_from = month, values_from = rev) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "day_num") |>
  data_color(
    method = "numeric",
    palette = "wesanderson::Zissou1",
    na_color = "white"
  ) |>
  text_transform(
    fn = function(x) "",
    locations = cells_body()
  ) |>
  opt_table_lines(extent = "none") |>
  opt_all_caps() |>
  cols_width(everything() ~ px(35)) |>
  cols_align(align = "center")
This image of a table was generated from the third code example in the `text_transform()` help file.

Function ID

4-4

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other text transforming functions: text_case_match(), text_case_when(), text_replace()


Populations of all municipalities in Ontario from 1996 to 2021

Description

A dataset containing census population data from six census years (1996 to 2021) for all 414 of Ontario's local municipalities. The Municipal Act of Ontario (2001) defines a local municipality as "a single-tier municipality or a lower-tier municipality". There are 173 single-tier municipalities and 241 lower-tier municipalities representing 99 percent of Ontario's population and 17 percent of its land use.

In the towny dataset we include information specific to each municipality such as location (in the latitude and longitude columns), their website URLs, their classifications, and land area sizes according to 2021 boundaries. Additionally, there are computed columns containing population density values for each census year and population change values from adjacent census years.

Usage

towny

Format

A tibble with 414 rows and 25 variables:

name

The name of the municipality.

website

The website for the municipality. This is NA if there isn't an official site.

status

The status of the municipality. This is either "lower-tier" or "single-tier". A single-tier municipality, which takes on all municipal duties outlined in the Municipal Act and other Provincial laws, is independent of an upper-tier municipality. Part of an upper-tier municipality is a lower-tier municipality. The upper-tier and lower-tier municipalities are responsible for carrying out the duties laid out in the Municipal Act and other provincial laws.

csd_type

The Census Subdivision Type. This can be one of "village", "town", "township", "municipality", or "city".

census_div

The Census division, of which there are 49. This is made up of single-tier municipalities, regional municipalities, counties, and districts.

latitude, longitude

The location of the municipality, given as latitude and longitude values in decimal degrees.

land_area_km2

The total area of the local municipality in square kilometers.

population_1996, population_2001, population_2006, population_2011, population_2016, population_2021

Population values for each municipality from the 1996 to 2021 census years.

density_1996, density_2001, density_2006, density_2011, density_2016, density_2021

Population density values, calculated as persons per square kilometer, for each municipality from the 1996 to 2021 census years.

pop_change_1996_2001_pct, pop_change_2001_2006_pct, pop_change_2006_2011_pct, pop_change_2011_2016_pct, pop_change_2016_2021_pct

Population changes between adjacent pairs of census years, from 1996 to 2021.

Dataset ID and Badge

DATA-7

This image of that of a dataset badge.

Dataset Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

Other datasets: constants, countrypops, exibble, films, gibraltar, gtcars, illness, metro, nuclides, peeps, photolysis, pizzaplace, reactions, rx_addv, rx_adsl, sp500, sza

Examples

dplyr::glimpse(towny)

Get a conversion factor across two measurement units of a given class

Description

The unit_conversion() helper function gives us a conversion factor for transforming a value from one form of measurement units to a target form. For example if you have a length value that is expressed in miles you could transform that value to one in kilometers through multiplication of the value by the conversion factor (in this case 1.60934).

For unit_conversion() to understand the source and destination units, you need to provide a keyword value for the from and to arguments. To aid as a reference for this, call info_unit_conversions() to display an information table that contains all of the keywords for every conversion type.

Usage

unit_conversion(from, to)

Arguments

from

Units for the input value

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

The keyword representing the units for the value that requires unit conversion. In the case where the value has units of miles, the necessary input is "length.mile".

to

Desired units for the value

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

The keyword representing the target units for the value with units defined in from. In the case where input value has units of miles and we would rather want the value to be expressed as kilometers, the to value should be "length.kilometer".

Value

A single numerical value.

Examples

Let's use a portion of the towny dataset and create a table showing population, density, and land area for 10 municipalities. The land_area_km2 values are in units of square kilometers, however, we'd rather the values were in square miles. We can convert the numeric values while formatting the values with fmt_number() by using unit_conversion() in the scale_by argument since the return value of that is a conversion factor (which is applied to each value by multiplication). The same is done for converting the 'people per square kilometer' values in density_2021 to 'people per square mile', however, the units to convert are in the denominator so the inverse of the conversion factor must be used.

towny |>
  dplyr::arrange(desc(density_2021)) |>
  dplyr::slice_head(n = 10) |>
  dplyr::select(name, population_2021, density_2021, land_area_km2) |>
  gt(rowname_col = "name") |>
  fmt_integer(columns = population_2021) |>
  fmt_number(
    columns = land_area_km2,
    decimals = 1,
    scale_by = unit_conversion(
      from = "area.square-kilometer",
      to = "area.square-mile"
    )
  ) |>
  fmt_number(
    columns = density_2021,
    decimals = 1,
    scale_by = 1 / unit_conversion(
      from = "area.square-kilometer",
      to = "area.square-mile"
    )
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    land_area_km2 = "Land Area,<br>sq. mi",
    population_2021 = "Population",
    density_2021 = "Density,<br>ppl / sq. mi",
    .fn = md
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `unit_conversion()` help file.

With a small slice of the gibraltar dataset, let's display the temperature values in terms of degrees Celsius (present in the data) and as temperatures in degrees Fahrenheit (achievable via conversion). We can duplicate the temp column through cols_add() (naming the new column as temp_f) and when formatting through fmt_integer() we can call unit_conversion() within the scale_by argument to perform this transformation while formatting the values as integers.

gibraltar |>
  dplyr::filter(
    date == "2023-05-15",
    time >= "06:00",
    time <= "12:00"
  ) |>
  dplyr::select(time, temp) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(
    title = "Air Temperature During Late Morning Hours at LXGB Stn.",
    subtitle = "May 15, 2023"
  ) |>
  cols_add(temp_f = temp) |>
  cols_move(columns = temp_f, after = temp) |>
  tab_spanner(
    label = "Temperature",
    columns = starts_with("temp")
  ) |>
  fmt_number(
    columns = temp,
    decimals = 1
  ) |>
  fmt_integer(
    columns = temp_f,
    scale_by = unit_conversion(
      from = "temperature.C",
      to = "temperature.F"
    )
  ) |>
  cols_label(
    time = "Time",
    temp = "{{degC}}",
    temp_f = "{{degF}}"
  ) |>
  cols_width(
    starts_with("temp") ~ px(80),
    time ~ px(100)
  ) |>
  opt_horizontal_padding(scale = 3) |>
  opt_vertical_padding(scale = 0.5) |>
  opt_align_table_header(align = "left") |>
  tab_options(heading.title.font.size = px(16))
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `unit_conversion()` help file.

Function ID

8-7

Function Introduced

v0.11.0 (July 9, 2024)

See Also

Other helper functions: adjust_luminance(), cell_borders(), cell_fill(), cell_text(), currency(), default_fonts(), escape_latex(), from_column(), google_font(), gt_latex_dependencies(), html(), md(), nanoplot_options(), pct(), px(), random_id(), row_group(), stub(), system_fonts()


Format a vector as values in terms of bytes

Description

With numeric values in a vector, we can transform each into byte values with human readable units. vec_fmt_bytes() allows for the formatting of byte sizes to either of two common representations: (1) with decimal units (powers of 1000, examples being "kB" and "MB"), and (2) with binary units (powers of 1024, examples being "KiB" and "MiB").

It is assumed the input numeric values represent the number of bytes and automatic truncation of values will occur. The numeric values will be scaled to be in the range of 1 to <1000 and then decorated with the correct unit symbol according to the standard chosen. For more control over the formatting of byte sizes, we can use the following options:

  • decimals: choice of the number of decimal places, option to drop trailing zeros, and a choice of the decimal symbol

  • digit grouping separators: options to enable/disable digit separators and provide a choice of separator symbol

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in number formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

vec_fmt_bytes(
  x,
  standard = c("decimal", "binary"),
  decimals = 1,
  n_sigfig = NULL,
  drop_trailing_zeros = TRUE,
  drop_trailing_dec_mark = TRUE,
  use_seps = TRUE,
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  dec_mark = ".",
  force_sign = FALSE,
  incl_space = TRUE,
  locale = NULL,
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

standard

Standard used to express byte sizes

⁠singl-kw:[decimal|binary]⁠ // default: "decimal"

The form of expressing large byte sizes is divided between: (1) decimal units (powers of 1000; e.g., "kB" and "MB"), and (2) binary units (powers of 1024; e.g., "KiB" and "MiB").

decimals

Number of decimal places

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=0) // default: 1

This corresponds to the exact number of decimal places to use. A value such as 2.34 can, for example, be formatted with 0 decimal places and it would result in "2". With 4 decimal places, the formatted value becomes "2.3400". The trailing zeros can be removed with drop_trailing_zeros = TRUE.

n_sigfig

Number of significant figures

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=1) // default: NULL (optional)

A option to format numbers to n significant figures. By default, this is NULL and thus number values will be formatted according to the number of decimal places set via decimals. If opting to format according to the rules of significant figures, n_sigfig must be a number greater than or equal to 1. Any values passed to the decimals and drop_trailing_zeros arguments will be ignored.

drop_trailing_zeros

Drop any trailing zeros

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

A logical value that allows for removal of trailing zeros (those redundant zeros after the decimal mark).

drop_trailing_dec_mark

Drop the trailing decimal mark

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value that determines whether decimal marks should always appear even if there are no decimal digits to display after formatting (e.g., 23 becomes 23. if FALSE). By default trailing decimal marks are not shown.

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

dec_mark

Decimal mark

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "."

The string to be used as the decimal mark. For example, using dec_mark = "," with the value 0.152 would result in a formatted value of "0,152"). This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the positive sign be shown for positive numbers (effectively showing a sign for all numbers except zero)? If so, use TRUE for this option. The default is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a minus sign.

incl_space

Include a space between the value and the units

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option for whether to include a space between the value and the units. The default is to use a space character for separation.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Examples

Let's create a numeric vector for the next few examples:

num_vals <- c(3.24294e14, 8, 1362902, -59027, NA)

Using vec_fmt_bytes() with the default options will create a character vector with values in bytes. Any NA values remain as NA values. The rendering context will be autodetected unless specified in the output argument (here, it is of the "plain" output type).

vec_fmt_bytes(num_vals)
#> [1] "324.3 TB" "8 B" "1.4 MB" "-59 kB" "NA"

We can change the number of decimal places with the decimals option:

vec_fmt_bytes(num_vals, decimals = 2)
#> [1] "324.29 TB" "8 B" "1.36 MB" "-59.03 kB" "NA"

If we are formatting for a different locale, we could supply the locale ID and gt will handle any locale-specific formatting options:

vec_fmt_bytes(num_vals, locale = "fi")
#> [1] "324,3 TB" "8 B" "1,4 MB" "-59 kB" "NA"

Should you need to have positive and negative signs on each of the output values, use force_sign = TRUE:

vec_fmt_bytes(num_vals, force_sign = TRUE)
#> [1] "+324.3 TB" "+8 B" "+1.4 MB" "-59 kB" "NA"

As a last example, one can wrap the values in a pattern with the pattern argument. Note here that NA values won't have the pattern applied.

vec_fmt_bytes(num_vals, pattern = "[{x}]")
#> [1] "[324.3 TB]" "[8 B]" "[1.4 MB]" "[-59 kB]" "NA"

Function ID

15-12

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_bytes().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_spelled_num(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector as currency values

Description

With numeric values in a vector, we can perform currency-based formatting. This function supports both automatic formatting with a three-letter or numeric currency code. We can also specify a custom currency that is formatted according to the output context with the currency() helper function. We have fine control over the conversion from numeric values to currency values, where we could take advantage of the following options:

  • the currency: providing a currency code or common currency name will procure the correct currency symbol and number of currency subunits; we could also use the currency() helper function to specify a custom currency

  • currency symbol placement: the currency symbol can be placed before or after the values

  • decimals/subunits: choice of the number of decimal places, and a choice of the decimal symbol, and an option on whether to include or exclude the currency subunits (decimal portion)

  • negative values: choice of a negative sign or parentheses for values less than zero

  • digit grouping separators: options to enable/disable digit separators and provide a choice of separator symbol

  • scaling: we can choose to scale targeted values by a multiplier value

  • large-number suffixing: larger figures (thousands, millions, etc.) can be autoscaled and decorated with the appropriate suffixes

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted currency values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in currency formatting specific to the chosen locale; it will also retrieve the locale's currency if none is explicitly given

We can call info_currencies() for a useful reference on all of the possible inputs to the currency argument.

Usage

vec_fmt_currency(
  x,
  currency = NULL,
  use_subunits = TRUE,
  decimals = NULL,
  drop_trailing_dec_mark = TRUE,
  use_seps = TRUE,
  accounting = FALSE,
  scale_by = 1,
  suffixing = FALSE,
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  dec_mark = ".",
  force_sign = FALSE,
  placement = "left",
  incl_space = FALSE,
  locale = NULL,
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

currency

Currency to use

⁠scalar<character>|obj:<gt_currency>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The currency to use for the numeric value. This input can be supplied as a 3-letter currency code (e.g., "USD" for U.S. Dollars, "EUR" for the Euro currency). Use info_currencies() to get an information table with all of the valid currency codes and examples of each. Alternatively, we can provide a common currency name (e.g., "dollar", "pound", "yen", etc.) to simplify the process. Use info_currencies() with the type == "symbol" option to view an information table with all of the supported currency symbol names along with examples.

We can also use the currency() helper function to specify a custom currency, where the string could vary across output contexts. For example, using currency(html = "&fnof;", default = "f") would give us a suitable glyph for the Dutch guilder in an HTML output table, and it would simply be the letter "f" in all other output contexts). Please note that decimals will default to 2 when using the currency() helper function.

use_subunits

Show or hide currency subunits

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option for whether the subunits portion of a currency value should be displayed. For example, with an input value of 273.81, the default formatting will produce "$273.81". Removing the subunits (with use_subunits = FALSE) will give us "$273".

decimals

Number of decimal places

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=0) // default: NULL (optional)

The decimals values corresponds to the exact number of decimal places to use. This value is optional as a currency has an intrinsic number of decimal places (i.e., the subunits). A value such as 2.34 can, for example, be formatted with 0 decimal places and if the currency used is "USD" it would result in "$2". With 4 decimal places, the formatted value becomes "$2.3400".

drop_trailing_dec_mark

Drop the trailing decimal mark

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value that determines whether decimal marks should always appear even if there are no decimal digits to display after formatting. For example, when use_subunits = FALSE or decimals = 0 a formatted value such as "$23" can be fashioned as "$23." by setting drop_trailing_dec_mark = FALSE.

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

accounting

Use accounting style

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option to use accounting style for values. Normally, negative values will be shown with a minus sign but using accounting style will instead put any negative values in parentheses.

scale_by

Scale values by a fixed multiplier

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 1

All numeric values will be multiplied by the scale_by value before undergoing formatting. Since the default value is 1, no values will be changed unless a different multiplier value is supplied. This value will be ignored if using any of the suffixing options (i.e., where suffixing is not set to FALSE).

suffixing

Specification for large-number suffixing

⁠scalar<logical>|vector<character>⁠ // default: FALSE

The suffixing option allows us to scale and apply suffixes to larger numbers (e.g., 1924000 can be transformed to ⁠1.92M⁠). This option can accept a logical value, where FALSE (the default) will not perform this transformation and TRUE will apply thousands ("K"), millions ("M"), billions ("B"), and trillions ("T") suffixes after automatic value scaling.

We can alternatively provide a character vector that serves as a specification for which symbols are to used for each of the value ranges. These preferred symbols will replace the defaults (e.g., c("k", "Ml", "Bn", "Tr") replaces "K", "M", "B", and "T").

Including NA values in the vector will ensure that the particular range will either not be included in the transformation (e.g., c(NA, "M", "B", "T") won't modify numbers at all in the thousands range) or the range will inherit a previous suffix (e.g., with c("K", "M", NA, "T"), all numbers in the range of millions and billions will be in terms of millions).

Any use of suffixing (where it is not set expressly as FALSE) means that any value provided to scale_by will be ignored.

If using system = "ind" then the default suffix set provided by suffixing = TRUE will be the equivalent of c(NA, "L", "Cr"). This doesn't apply suffixes to the thousands range, but does express values in lakhs and crores.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

dec_mark

Decimal mark

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "."

The string to be used as the decimal mark. For example, using dec_mark = "," with the value 0.152 would result in a formatted value of "0,152"). This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the positive sign be shown for positive values (effectively showing a sign for all values except zero)? If so, use TRUE for this option. The default is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a minus sign. This option is disregarded when using accounting notation with accounting = TRUE.

placement

Currency symbol placement

⁠singl-kw:[left|right]⁠ // default: "left"

The placement of the currency symbol. This can be either be "left" (as in "$450") or "right" (which yields "450$").

incl_space

Include a space between the value and the currency symbol

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option for whether to include a space between the value and the currency symbol. The default is to not introduce a space character.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Examples

Let's create a numeric vector for the next few examples:

num_vals <- c(5.2, 8.65, 0, -5.3, NA)

Using vec_fmt_currency() with the default options will create a character vector where the numeric values have been transformed to U.S. Dollars ("USD"). Furthermore, the rendering context will be autodetected unless specified in the output argument (here, it is of the "plain" output type).

vec_fmt_currency(num_vals)
#> [1] "$5.20" "$8.65" "$0.00" "-$5.30" "NA"

We can supply a currency code to the currency argument. Let's use British Pounds through currency = "GBP":

vec_fmt_currency(num_vals, currency = "GBP")
#> [1] "GBP5.20" "GBP8.65" "GBP0.00" "-GBP5.30" "NA"

If we are formatting for a different locale, we could supply the locale ID and let gt handle all locale-specific formatting options:

vec_fmt_currency(num_vals, locale = "fr")
#> [1] "EUR5,20" "EUR8,65" "EUR0,00" "-EUR5,30" "NA"

There are many options for formatting values. Perhaps you need to have explicit positive and negative signs? Use force_sign = TRUE for that.

vec_fmt_currency(num_vals, force_sign = TRUE)
#> [1] "+$5.20" "+$8.65" "$0.00" "-$5.30" "NA"

As a last example, one can wrap the values in a pattern with the pattern argument. Note here that NA values won't have the pattern applied.

vec_fmt_currency(num_vals, pattern = "`{x}`")
#> [1] "`$5.20`" "`$8.65`" "`$0.00`" "`-$5.30`" "NA"

Function ID

15-8

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_currency().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_spelled_num(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector as date values

Description

Format vector values to date values using one of 41 preset date styles. Input can be in the form of POSIXt (i.e., datetimes), the Date type, or character (must be in the ISO 8601 form of ⁠YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS⁠ or YYYY-MM-DD).

Usage

vec_fmt_date(
  x,
  date_style = "iso",
  pattern = "{x}",
  locale = NULL,
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

date_style

Predefined style for dates

⁠scalar<character>|scalar<numeric|integer>(1<=val<=41)⁠ // default: "iso"

The date style to use. By default this is the short name "iso" which corresponds to ISO 8601 date formatting. There are 41 date styles in total and their short names can be viewed using info_date_style().

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Formatting with the date_style argument

We need to supply a preset date style to the date_style argument. The date styles are numerous and can handle localization to any supported locale. A large segment of date styles are termed flexible date formats and this means that their output will adapt to any locale provided. That feature makes the flexible date formats a better option for locales other than "en" (the default locale).

The following table provides a listing of all date styles and their output values (corresponding to an input date of 2000-02-29).

Date Style Output Notes
1 "iso" "2000-02-29" ISO 8601
2 "wday_month_day_year" "Tuesday, February 29, 2000"
3 "wd_m_day_year" "Tue, Feb 29, 2000"
4 "wday_day_month_year" "Tuesday 29 February 2000"
5 "month_day_year" "February 29, 2000"
6 "m_day_year" "Feb 29, 2000"
7 "day_m_year" "29 Feb 2000"
8 "day_month_year" "29 February 2000"
9 "day_month" "29 February"
10 "day_m" "29 Feb"
11 "year" "2000"
12 "month" "February"
13 "day" "29"
14 "year.mn.day" "2000/02/29"
15 "y.mn.day" "00/02/29"
16 "year_week" "2000-W09"
17 "year_quarter" "2000-Q1"
18 "yMd" "2/29/2000" flexible
19 "yMEd" "Tue, 2/29/2000" flexible
20 "yMMM" "Feb 2000" flexible
21 "yMMMM" "February 2000" flexible
22 "yMMMd" "Feb 29, 2000" flexible
23 "yMMMEd" "Tue, Feb 29, 2000" flexible
24 "GyMd" "2/29/2000 A" flexible
25 "GyMMMd" "Feb 29, 2000 AD" flexible
26 "GyMMMEd" "Tue, Feb 29, 2000 AD" flexible
27 "yM" "2/2000" flexible
28 "Md" "2/29" flexible
29 "MEd" "Tue, 2/29" flexible
30 "MMMd" "Feb 29" flexible
31 "MMMEd" "Tue, Feb 29" flexible
32 "MMMMd" "February 29" flexible
33 "GyMMM" "Feb 2000 AD" flexible
34 "yQQQ" "Q1 2000" flexible
35 "yQQQQ" "1st quarter 2000" flexible
36 "Gy" "2000 AD" flexible
37 "y" "2000" flexible
38 "M" "2" flexible
39 "MMM" "Feb" flexible
40 "d" "29" flexible
41 "Ed" "29 Tue" flexible

We can call info_date_style() in the console to view a similar table of date styles with example output.

Examples

Let's create a character vector of dates in the ISO-8601 format for the next few examples:

str_vals <- c("2022-06-13", "2019-01-25", "2015-03-23", NA)

Using vec_fmt_date() (here with the "wday_month_day_year" date style) will result in a character vector of formatted dates. Any NA values remain as NA values. The rendering context will be autodetected unless specified in the output argument (here, it is of the "plain" output type).

vec_fmt_date(str_vals, date_style = "wday_month_day_year")
#> [1] "Monday, June 13, 2022" "Friday, January 25, 2019"
#> [3] "Monday, March 23, 2015" NA

We can choose from any of 41 different date formatting styles. Many of these styles are flexible, meaning that the structure of the format will adapt to different locales. Let's use the "yMMMEd" date style to demonstrate this (first in the default locale of "en"):

vec_fmt_date(str_vals, date_style = "yMMMEd")
#> [1] "Mon, Jun 13, 2022" "Fri, Jan 25, 2019" "Mon, Mar 23, 2015" NA

Let's perform the same type of formatting in the French ("fr") locale:

vec_fmt_date(str_vals, date_style = "yMMMEd", locale = "fr")
#> [1] "lun. 13 juin 2022" "ven. 25 janv. 2019" "lun. 23 mars 2015" NA

We can always use info_date_style() to call up an info table that serves as a handy reference to all of the date_style options.

As a last example, one can wrap the date values in a pattern with the pattern argument. Note here that NA values won't have the pattern applied.

vec_fmt_date(str_vals, pattern = "Date: {x}")
#> [1] "Date: 2022-06-13" "Date: 2019-01-25" "Date: 2015-03-23" NA

Function ID

15-13

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_date().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_spelled_num(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector as datetime values

Description

Format values in a vector to datetime values using either presets for the date and time components or a formatting directive (this can either use a CLDR datetime pattern or strptime formatting). Input can be in the form of POSIXct (i.e., datetimes), the Date type, or character (must be in the ISO 8601 form of ⁠YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS⁠ or YYYY-MM-DD).

Usage

vec_fmt_datetime(
  x,
  date_style = "iso",
  time_style = "iso",
  sep = " ",
  format = NULL,
  tz = NULL,
  pattern = "{x}",
  locale = NULL,
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

date_style

Predefined style for dates

⁠scalar<character>|scalar<numeric|integer>(1<=val<=41)⁠ // default: "iso"

The date style to use. By default this is the short name "iso" which corresponds to ISO 8601 date formatting. There are 41 date styles in total and their short names can be viewed using info_date_style().

time_style

Predefined style for times

⁠scalar<character>|scalar<numeric|integer>(1<=val<=25)⁠ // default: "iso"

The time style to use. By default this is the short name "iso" which corresponds to how times are formatted within ISO 8601 datetime values. There are 25 time styles in total and their short names can be viewed using info_time_style().

sep

Separator between date and time components

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: " "

The separator string to use between the date and time components. By default, this is a single space character (" "). Only used when not specifying a format code.

format

Date/time formatting string

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional formatting string used for generating custom dates/times. If used then the arguments governing preset styles (date_style and time_style) will be ignored in favor of formatting via the format string.

tz

Time zone

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

The time zone for printing dates/times (i.e., the output). The default of NULL will preserve the time zone of the input data in the output. If providing a time zone, it must be one that is recognized by the user's operating system (a vector of all valid tz values can be produced with OlsonNames()).

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Formatting with the date_style argument

We can supply a preset date style to the date_style argument to separately handle the date portion of the output. The date styles are numerous and can handle localization to any supported locale. A large segment of date styles are termed flexible date formats and this means that their output will adapt to any locale provided. That feature makes the flexible date formats a better option for locales other than "en" (the default locale).

The following table provides a listing of all date styles and their output values (corresponding to an input date of 2000-02-29).

Date Style Output Notes
1 "iso" "2000-02-29" ISO 8601
2 "wday_month_day_year" "Tuesday, February 29, 2000"
3 "wd_m_day_year" "Tue, Feb 29, 2000"
4 "wday_day_month_year" "Tuesday 29 February 2000"
5 "month_day_year" "February 29, 2000"
6 "m_day_year" "Feb 29, 2000"
7 "day_m_year" "29 Feb 2000"
8 "day_month_year" "29 February 2000"
9 "day_month" "29 February"
10 "day_m" "29 Feb"
11 "year" "2000"
12 "month" "February"
13 "day" "29"
14 "year.mn.day" "2000/02/29"
15 "y.mn.day" "00/02/29"
16 "year_week" "2000-W09"
17 "year_quarter" "2000-Q1"
18 "yMd" "2/29/2000" flexible
19 "yMEd" "Tue, 2/29/2000" flexible
20 "yMMM" "Feb 2000" flexible
21 "yMMMM" "February 2000" flexible
22 "yMMMd" "Feb 29, 2000" flexible
23 "yMMMEd" "Tue, Feb 29, 2000" flexible
24 "GyMd" "2/29/2000 A" flexible
25 "GyMMMd" "Feb 29, 2000 AD" flexible
26 "GyMMMEd" "Tue, Feb 29, 2000 AD" flexible
27 "yM" "2/2000" flexible
28 "Md" "2/29" flexible
29 "MEd" "Tue, 2/29" flexible
30 "MMMd" "Feb 29" flexible
31 "MMMEd" "Tue, Feb 29" flexible
32 "MMMMd" "February 29" flexible
33 "GyMMM" "Feb 2000 AD" flexible
34 "yQQQ" "Q1 2000" flexible
35 "yQQQQ" "1st quarter 2000" flexible
36 "Gy" "2000 AD" flexible
37 "y" "2000" flexible
38 "M" "2" flexible
39 "MMM" "Feb" flexible
40 "d" "29" flexible
41 "Ed" "29 Tue" flexible

We can call info_date_style() in the console to view a similar table of date styles with example output.

Formatting with the time_style argument

We can supply a preset time style to the time_style argument to separately handle the time portion of the output. There are many time styles and all of them can handle localization to any supported locale. Many of the time styles are termed flexible time formats and this means that their output will adapt to any locale provided. That feature makes the flexible time formats a better option for locales other than "en" (the default locale).

The following table provides a listing of all time styles and their output values (corresponding to an input time of 14:35:00). It is noted which of these represent 12- or 24-hour time. Some of the flexible formats (those that begin with "E") include the day of the week. Keep this in mind when pairing such time_style values with a date_style so as to avoid redundant or repeating information.

Time Style Output Notes
1 "iso" "14:35:00" ISO 8601, 24h
2 "iso-short" "14:35" ISO 8601, 24h
3 "h_m_s_p" "2:35:00 PM" 12h
4 "h_m_p" "2:35 PM" 12h
5 "h_p" "2 PM" 12h
6 "Hms" "14:35:00" flexible, 24h
7 "Hm" "14:35" flexible, 24h
8 "H" "14" flexible, 24h
9 "EHm" "Thu 14:35" flexible, 24h
10 "EHms" "Thu 14:35:00" flexible, 24h
11 "Hmsv" "14:35:00 GMT+00:00" flexible, 24h
12 "Hmv" "14:35 GMT+00:00" flexible, 24h
13 "hms" "2:35:00 PM" flexible, 12h
14 "hm" "2:35 PM" flexible, 12h
15 "h" "2 PM" flexible, 12h
16 "Ehm" "Thu 2:35 PM" flexible, 12h
17 "Ehms" "Thu 2:35:00 PM" flexible, 12h
18 "EBhms" "Thu 2:35:00 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
19 "Bhms" "2:35:00 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
20 "EBhm" "Thu 2:35 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
21 "Bhm" "2:35 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
22 "Bh" "2 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
23 "hmsv" "2:35:00 PM GMT+00:00" flexible, 12h
24 "hmv" "2:35 PM GMT+00:00" flexible, 12h
25 "ms" "35:00" flexible

We can call info_time_style() in the console to view a similar table of time styles with example output.

Formatting with a CLDR datetime pattern

We can use a CLDR datetime pattern with the format argument to create a highly customized and locale-aware output. This is a character string that consists of two types of elements:

  • Pattern fields, which repeat a specific pattern character one or more times. These fields are replaced with date and time data when formatting. The character sets of A-Z and a-z are reserved for use as pattern characters.

  • Literal text, which is output verbatim when formatting. This can include:

    • Any characters outside the reserved character sets, including spaces and punctuation.

    • Any text between single vertical quotes (e.g., 'text').

    • Two adjacent single vertical quotes (”), which represent a literal single quote, either inside or outside quoted text.

The number of pattern fields is quite sizable so let's first look at how some CLDR datetime patterns work. We'll use the datetime string "2018-07-04T22:05:09.2358(America/Vancouver)" for all of the examples that follow.

  • "mm/dd/y" -> "05/04/2018"

  • "EEEE, MMMM d, y" -> "Wednesday, July 4, 2018"

  • "MMM d E" -> "Jul 4 Wed"

  • "HH:mm" -> "22:05"

  • "h:mm a" -> "10:05 PM"

  • "EEEE, MMMM d, y 'at' h:mm a" -> "Wednesday, July 4, 2018 at 10:05 PM"

Here are the individual pattern fields:

Year

Calendar Year

This yields the calendar year, which is always numeric. In most cases the length of the "y" field specifies the minimum number of digits to display, zero-padded as necessary. More digits will be displayed if needed to show the full year. There is an exception: "yy" gives use just the two low-order digits of the year, zero-padded as necessary. For most use cases, "y" or "yy" should be good enough.

Field Patterns Output
"y" "2018"
"yy" "18"
"yyy" to "yyyyyyyyy" "2018" to "000002018"
Year in the Week in Year Calendar

This is the year in 'Week of Year' based calendars in which the year transition occurs on a week boundary. This may differ from calendar year "y" near a year transition. This numeric year designation is used in conjunction with pattern character "w" in the ISO year-week calendar as defined by ISO 8601.

Field Patterns Output
"Y" "2018"
"YY" "18"
"YYY" to "YYYYYYYYY" "2018" to "000002018"

Quarter

Quarter of the Year: formatting and standalone versions

The quarter names are identified numerically, starting at 1 and ending at 4. Quarter names may vary along two axes: the width and the context. The context is either 'formatting' (taken as a default), which the form used within a complete date format string, or, 'standalone', the form for date elements used independently (such as in calendar headers). The standalone form may be used in any other date format that shares the same form of the name. Here, the formatting form for quarters of the year consists of some run of "Q" values whereas the standalone form uses "q".

Field Patterns Output Notes
"Q"/"q" "3" Numeric, one digit
"QQ"/"qq" "03" Numeric, two digits (zero padded)
"QQQ"/"qqq" "Q3" Abbreviated
"QQQQ"/"qqqq" "3rd quarter" Wide
"QQQQQ"/"qqqqq" "3" Narrow

Month

Month: formatting and standalone versions

The month names are identified numerically, starting at 1 and ending at 12. Month names may vary along two axes: the width and the context. The context is either 'formatting' (taken as a default), which the form used within a complete date format string, or, 'standalone', the form for date elements used independently (such as in calendar headers). The standalone form may be used in any other date format that shares the same form of the name. Here, the formatting form for months consists of some run of "M" values whereas the standalone form uses "L".

Field Patterns Output Notes
"M"/"L" "7" Numeric, minimum digits
"MM"/"LL" "07" Numeric, two digits (zero padded)
"MMM"/"LLL" "Jul" Abbreviated
"MMMM"/"LLLL" "July" Wide
"MMMMM"/"LLLLL" "J" Narrow

Week

Week of Year

Values calculated for the week of year range from 1 to 53. Week 1 for a year is the first week that contains at least the specified minimum number of days from that year. Weeks between week 1 of one year and week 1 of the following year are numbered sequentially from 2 to 52 or 53 (if needed).

There are two available field lengths. Both will display the week of year value but the "ww" width will always show two digits (where weeks 1 to 9 are zero padded).

Field Patterns Output Notes
"w" "27" Minimum digits
"ww" "27" Two digits (zero padded)
Week of Month

The week of a month can range from 1 to 5. The first day of every month always begins at week 1 and with every transition into the beginning of a week, the week of month value is incremented by 1.

Field Pattern Output
"W" "1"

Day

Day of Month

The day of month value is always numeric and there are two available field length choices in its formatting. Both will display the day of month value but the "dd" formatting will always show two digits (where days 1 to 9 are zero padded).

Field Patterns Output Notes
"d" "4" Minimum digits
"dd" "04" Two digits, zero padded
Day of Year

The day of year value ranges from 1 (January 1) to either 365 or 366 (December 31), where the higher value of the range indicates that the year is a leap year (29 days in February, instead of 28). The field length specifies the minimum number of digits, with zero-padding as necessary.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"D" "185"
"DD" "185" Zero padded to minimum width of 2
"DDD" "185" Zero padded to minimum width of 3
Day of Week in Month

The day of week in month returns a numerical value indicating the number of times a given weekday had occurred in the month (e.g., '2nd Monday in March'). This conveniently resolves to predicable case structure where ranges of day of the month values return predictable day of week in month values:

  • days 1 - 7 -> 1

  • days 8 - 14 -> 2

  • days 15 - 21 -> 3

  • days 22 - 28 -> 4

  • days 29 - 31 -> 5

Field Pattern Output
"F" "1"
Modified Julian Date

The modified version of the Julian date is obtained by subtracting 2,400,000.5 days from the Julian date (the number of days since January 1, 4713 BC). This essentially results in the number of days since midnight November 17, 1858. There is a half day offset (unlike the Julian date, the modified Julian date is referenced to midnight instead of noon).

Field Patterns Output
"g" to "ggggggggg" "58303" -> "000058303"

Weekday

Day of Week Name

The name of the day of week is offered in four different widths.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"E", "EE", or "EEE" "Wed" Abbreviated
"EEEE" "Wednesday" Wide
"EEEEE" "W" Narrow
"EEEEEE" "We" Short

Periods

AM/PM Period of Day

This denotes before noon and after noon time periods. May be upper or lowercase depending on the locale and other options. The wide form may be the same as the short form if the 'real' long form (e.g. 'ante meridiem') is not customarily used. The narrow form must be unique, unlike some other fields.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"a", "aa", or "aaa" "PM" Abbreviated
"aaaa" "PM" Wide
"aaaaa" "p" Narrow
AM/PM Period of Day Plus Noon and Midnight

Provide AM and PM as well as phrases for exactly noon and midnight. May be upper or lowercase depending on the locale and other options. If the locale doesn't have the notion of a unique 'noon' (i.e., 12:00), then the PM form may be substituted. A similar behavior can occur for 'midnight' (00:00) and the AM form. The narrow form must be unique, unlike some other fields.

(a) input_midnight: "2020-05-05T00:00:00" (b) input_noon: "2020-05-05T12:00:00"

Field Patterns Output Notes
"b", "bb", or "bbb" (a) "midnight" Abbreviated
(b) "noon"
"bbbb" (a) "midnight" Wide
(b) "noon"
"bbbbb" (a) "mi" Narrow
(b) "n"
Flexible Day Periods

Flexible day periods denotes things like 'in the afternoon', 'in the evening', etc., and the flexibility comes from a locale's language and script. Each locale has an associated rule set that specifies when the day periods start and end for that locale.

(a) input_morning: "2020-05-05T00:08:30" (b) input_afternoon: "2020-05-05T14:00:00"

Field Patterns Output Notes
"B", "BB", or "BBB" (a) "in the morning" Abbreviated
(b) "in the afternoon"
"BBBB" (a) "in the morning" Wide
(b) "in the afternoon"
"BBBBB" (a) "in the morning" Narrow
(b) "in the afternoon"

Hours, Minutes, and Seconds

Hour 0-23

Hours from 0 to 23 are for a standard 24-hour clock cycle (midnight plus 1 minute is 00:01) when using "HH" (which is the more common width that indicates zero-padding to 2 digits).

Using "2015-08-01T08:35:09":

Field Patterns Output Notes
"H" "8" Numeric, minimum digits
"HH" "08" Numeric, 2 digits (zero padded)
Hour 1-12

Hours from 1 to 12 are for a standard 12-hour clock cycle (midnight plus 1 minute is 12:01) when using "hh" (which is the more common width that indicates zero-padding to 2 digits).

Using "2015-08-01T08:35:09":

Field Patterns Output Notes
"h" "8" Numeric, minimum digits
"hh" "08" Numeric, 2 digits (zero padded)
Hour 1-24

Using hours from 1 to 24 is a less common way to express a 24-hour clock cycle (midnight plus 1 minute is 24:01) when using "kk" (which is the more common width that indicates zero-padding to 2 digits).

Using "2015-08-01T08:35:09":

Field Patterns Output Notes
"k" "9" Numeric, minimum digits
"kk" "09" Numeric, 2 digits (zero padded)
Hour 0-11

Using hours from 0 to 11 is a less common way to express a 12-hour clock cycle (midnight plus 1 minute is 00:01) when using "KK" (which is the more common width that indicates zero-padding to 2 digits).

Using "2015-08-01T08:35:09":

Field Patterns Output Notes
"K" "7" Numeric, minimum digits
"KK" "07" Numeric, 2 digits (zero padded)
Minute

The minute of the hour which can be any number from 0 to 59. Use "m" to show the minimum number of digits, or "mm" to always show two digits (zero-padding, if necessary).

Field Patterns Output Notes
"m" "5" Numeric, minimum digits
"mm" "06" Numeric, 2 digits (zero padded)
Seconds

The second of the minute which can be any number from 0 to 59. Use "s" to show the minimum number of digits, or "ss" to always show two digits (zero-padding, if necessary).

Field Patterns Output Notes
"s" "9" Numeric, minimum digits
"ss" "09" Numeric, 2 digits (zero padded)
Fractional Second

The fractional second truncates (like other time fields) to the width requested (i.e., count of letters). So using pattern "SSSS" will display four digits past the decimal (which, incidentally, needs to be added manually to the pattern).

Field Patterns Output
"S" to "SSSSSSSSS" "2" -> "235000000"
Milliseconds Elapsed in Day

There are 86,400,000 milliseconds in a day and the "A" pattern will provide the whole number. The width can go up to nine digits with "AAAAAAAAA" and these higher field widths will result in zero padding if necessary.

Using "2011-07-27T00:07:19.7223":

Field Patterns Output
"A" to "AAAAAAAAA" "439722" -> "000439722"

Era

The Era Designator

This provides the era name for the given date. The Gregorian calendar has two eras: AD and BC. In the AD year numbering system, AD 1 is immediately preceded by 1 BC, with nothing in between them (there was no year zero).

Field Patterns Output Notes
"G", "GG", or "GGG" "AD" Abbreviated
"GGGG" "Anno Domini" Wide
"GGGGG" "A" Narrow

Time Zones

TZ // Short and Long Specific non-Location Format

The short and long specific non-location formats for time zones are suggested for displaying a time with a user friendly time zone name. Where the short specific format is unavailable, it will fall back to the short localized GMT format ("O"). Where the long specific format is unavailable, it will fall back to the long localized GMT format ("OOOO").

Field Patterns Output Notes
"z", "zz", or "zzz" "PDT" Short Specific
"zzzz" "Pacific Daylight Time" Long Specific
TZ // Common UTC Offset Formats

The ISO8601 basic format with hours, minutes and optional seconds fields is represented by "Z", "ZZ", or "ZZZ". The format is equivalent to RFC 822 zone format (when the optional seconds field is absent). This is equivalent to the "xxxx" specifier. The field pattern "ZZZZ" represents the long localized GMT format. This is equivalent to the "OOOO" specifier. Finally, "ZZZZZ" pattern yields the ISO8601 extended format with hours, minutes and optional seconds fields. The ISO8601 UTC indicator Z is used when local time offset is 0. This is equivalent to the "XXXXX" specifier.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"Z", "ZZ", or "ZZZ" "-0700" ISO 8601 basic format
"ZZZZ" "GMT-7:00" Long localized GMT format
"ZZZZZ" "-07:00" ISO 8601 extended format
TZ // Short and Long Localized GMT Formats

The localized GMT formats come in two widths "O" (which removes the minutes field if it's 0) and "OOOO" (which always contains the minutes field). The use of the GMT indicator changes according to the locale.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"O" "GMT-7" Short localized GMT format
"OOOO" "GMT-07:00" Long localized GMT format
TZ // Short and Long Generic non-Location Formats

The generic non-location formats are useful for displaying a recurring wall time (e.g., events, meetings) or anywhere people do not want to be overly specific. Where either of these is unavailable, there is a fallback to the generic location format ("VVVV"), then the short localized GMT format as the final fallback.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"v" "PT" Short generic non-location format
"vvvv" "Pacific Time" Long generic non-location format
TZ // Short Time Zone IDs and Exemplar City Formats

These formats provide variations of the time zone ID and often include the exemplar city. The widest of these formats, "VVVV", is useful for populating a choice list for time zones, because it supports 1-to-1 name/zone ID mapping and is more uniform than other text formats.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"V" "cavan" Short time zone ID
"VV" "America/Vancouver" Long time zone ID
"VVV" "Vancouver" The tz exemplar city
"VVVV" "Vancouver Time" Generic location format
TZ // ISO 8601 Formats with Z for +0000

The "X"-"XXX" field patterns represent valid ISO 8601 patterns for time zone offsets in datetimes. The final two widths, "XXXX" and "XXXXX" allow for optional seconds fields. The seconds field is not supported by the ISO 8601 specification. For all of these, the ISO 8601 UTC indicator Z is used when the local time offset is 0.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"X" "-07" ISO 8601 basic format (h, optional m)
"XX" "-0700" ISO 8601 basic format (h & m)
"XXX" "-07:00" ISO 8601 extended format (h & m)
"XXXX" "-0700" ISO 8601 basic format (h & m, optional s)
"XXXXX" "-07:00" ISO 8601 extended format (h & m, optional s)
TZ // ISO 8601 Formats (no use of Z for +0000)

The "x"-"xxxxx" field patterns represent valid ISO 8601 patterns for time zone offsets in datetimes. They are similar to the "X"-"XXXXX" field patterns except that the ISO 8601 UTC indicator Z will not be used when the local time offset is 0.

Field Patterns Output Notes
"x" "-07" ISO 8601 basic format (h, optional m)
"xx" "-0700" ISO 8601 basic format (h & m)
"xxx" "-07:00" ISO 8601 extended format (h & m)
"xxxx" "-0700" ISO 8601 basic format (h & m, optional s)
"xxxxx" "-07:00" ISO 8601 extended format (h & m, optional s)

Formatting with a strptime format code

Performing custom date/time formatting with the format argument can also occur with a strptime format code. This works by constructing a string of individual format codes representing formatted date and time elements. These are all indicated with a leading ⁠%⁠, literal characters are interpreted as any characters not starting with a ⁠%⁠ character.

First off, let's look at a few format code combinations that work well together as a strptime format. This will give us an intuition on how these generally work. We'll use the datetime "2015-06-08 23:05:37.48" for all of the examples that follow.

  • "%m/%d/%Y" -> "06/08/2015"

  • "%A, %B %e, %Y" -> "Monday, June 8, 2015"

  • "%b %e %a" -> "Jun 8 Mon"

  • "%H:%M" -> "23:05"

  • "%I:%M %p" -> "11:05 pm"

  • "%A, %B %e, %Y at %I:%M %p" -> "Monday, June 8, 2015 at 11:05 pm"

Here are the individual format codes for the date components:

  • "%a" -> "Mon" (abbreviated day of week name)

  • "%A" -> "Monday" (full day of week name)

  • "%w" -> "1" (day of week number in ⁠0..6⁠; Sunday is 0)

  • "%u" -> "1" (day of week number in ⁠1..7⁠; Monday is 1, Sunday 7)

  • "%y" -> "15" (abbreviated year, using the final two digits)

  • "%Y" -> "2015" (full year)

  • "%b" -> "Jun" (abbreviated month name)

  • "%B" -> "June" (full month name)

  • "%m" -> "06" (month number)

  • "%d" -> "08" (day number, zero-padded)

  • "%e" -> "8" (day number without zero padding)

  • "%j" -> "159" (day of the year, always zero-padded)

  • "%W" -> "23" (week number for the year, always zero-padded)

  • "%V" -> "24" (week number for the year, following the ISO 8601 standard)

  • "%C" -> "20" (the century number)

Here are the individual format codes for the time components:

  • "%H" -> "23" (24h hour)

  • "%I" -> "11" (12h hour)

  • "%M" -> "05" (minute)

  • "%S" -> "37" (second)

  • "%OS3" -> "37.480" (seconds with decimals; 3 decimal places here)

  • ⁠%p⁠ -> "pm" (AM or PM indicator)

Here are some extra formats that you may find useful:

  • "%z" -> "+0000" (signed time zone offset, here using UTC)

  • "%F" -> "2015-06-08" (the date in the ISO 8601 date format)

  • "%%" -> "%" (the literal "⁠%⁠" character, in case you need it)

Examples

Let's create a character vector of datetime values in the ISO-8601 format for the next few examples:

str_vals <- c("2022-06-13 18:36", "2019-01-25 01:08", NA)

Using vec_fmt_datetime() with different date_style and time_style options (here, date_style = "yMMMEd" and time_style = "Hm") will result in a character vector of formatted datetime values. Any NA values remain as NA values. The rendering context will be autodetected unless specified in the output argument (here, it is of the "plain" output type).

vec_fmt_datetime(
  str_vals,
  date_style = "yMMMEd",
  time_style = "Hm"
)
#> [1] "Mon, Jun 13, 2022 18:36" "Fri, Jan 25, 2019 01:08" NA

We can choose from any of 41 different date styles and 25 time formatting styles. Many of these styles are flexible, meaning that the structure of the format will adapt to different locales. Let's use a combination of the "yMMMd" and "hms" date and time styles to demonstrate this (first in the default locale of "en"):

vec_fmt_datetime(
  str_vals,
  date_style = "yMMMd",
  time_style = "hms"
)
#> [1] "Jun 13, 2022 6:36:00 PM" "Jan 25, 2019 1:08:00 AM" NA

Let's perform the same type of formatting in the Italian ("it") locale:

vec_fmt_datetime(
  str_vals,
  date_style = "yMMMd",
  time_style = "hms",
  locale = "it"
)
#> [1] "13 giu 2022 6:36:00 PM" "25 gen 2019 1:08:00 AM" NA

We can always use info_date_style() or info_time_style() to call up info tables that serve as handy references to all of the date_style and time_style options.

It's possible to supply our own time formatting pattern within the format argument. One way is with a CLDR pattern, which is locale-aware:

vec_fmt_datetime(str_vals, format = "EEEE, MMMM d, y, h:mm a")
#> [1] "Monday, June 13, 2022, 06:36 PM"
#> [2] "Friday, January 25, 2019, 01:08 AM"
#> [3] NA

By using the locale argument, this can be formatted as Dutch datetime values:

vec_fmt_datetime(
  str_vals,
  format = "EEEE, MMMM d, y, h:mm a",
  locale = "nl"
)
#> [1] "maandag, juni 13, 2022, 6:36 p.m."
#> [2] "vrijdag, januari 25, 2019, 1:08 a.m."
#> [3] NA

It's also possible to use a strptime format code with format (however, any value provided to locale will be ignored).

vec_fmt_datetime(str_vals, format = "%A, %B %e, %Y at %I:%M %p")
#> [1] "Monday, June 13, 2022 at 06:36 pm"
#> [2] "Friday, January 25, 2019 at 01:08 am"
#> [3] NA

As a last example, one can wrap the datetime values in a pattern with the pattern argument. Note here that NA values won't have the pattern applied.

vec_fmt_datetime(
  str_vals,
  sep = " at ",
  pattern = "Date and Time: {x}"
)
#> [1] "Date and Time: 2022-06-13 at 18:36:00"
#> [2] "Date and Time: 2019-01-25 at 01:08:00"
#> [3] NA

Function ID

15-15

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_datetime().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_spelled_num(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector of numeric or duration values as styled time duration strings

Description

Format input values to time duration values whether those input values are numbers or of the difftime class. We can specify which time units any numeric input values have (as weeks, days, hours, minutes, or seconds) and the output can be customized with a duration style (corresponding to narrow, wide, colon-separated, and ISO forms) and a choice of output units ranging from weeks to seconds.

Usage

vec_fmt_duration(
  x,
  input_units = NULL,
  output_units = NULL,
  duration_style = c("narrow", "wide", "colon-sep", "iso"),
  trim_zero_units = TRUE,
  max_output_units = NULL,
  pattern = "{x}",
  use_seps = TRUE,
  sep_mark = ",",
  force_sign = FALSE,
  locale = NULL,
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

input_units

Declaration of duration units for numerical values

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

If one or more selected columns contains numeric values (not difftime values, which contain the duration units), a keyword must be provided for input_units for gt to determine how those values are to be interpreted in terms of duration. The accepted units are: "seconds", "minutes", "hours", "days", and "weeks".

output_units

Choice of output units

⁠mult-kw:[weeks|days|hours|minutes|seconds]⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

Controls the output time units. The default, NULL, means that gt will automatically choose time units based on the input duration value. To control which time units are to be considered for output (before trimming with trim_zero_units) we can specify a vector of one or more of the following keywords: "weeks", "days", "hours", "minutes", or "seconds".

duration_style

Style for representing duration values

⁠singl-kw:[narrow|wide|colon-sep|iso]⁠ // default: "narrow"

A choice of four formatting styles for the output duration values. With "narrow" (the default style), duration values will be formatted with single letter time-part units (e.g., 1.35 days will be styled as "1d 8h 24m"). With "wide", this example value will be expanded to "1 day 8 hours 24 minutes" after formatting. The "colon-sep" style will put days, hours, minutes, and seconds in the "([D]/)[HH]:[MM]:[SS]" format. The "iso" style will produce a value that conforms to the ISO 8601 rules for duration values (e.g., 1.35 days will become "P1DT8H24M").

trim_zero_units

Trimming of zero values

⁠scalar<logical>|mult-kw:[leading|trailing|internal]⁠ // default: TRUE

Provides methods to remove output time units that have zero values. By default this is TRUE and duration values that might otherwise be formatted as "0w 1d 0h 4m 19s" with trim_zero_units = FALSE are instead displayed as "1d 4m 19s". Aside from using TRUE/FALSE we could provide a vector of keywords for more precise control. These keywords are: (1) "leading", to omit all leading zero-value time units (e.g., "0w 1d" -> "1d"), (2) "trailing", to omit all trailing zero-value time units (e.g., "3d 5h 0s" -> "3d 5h"), and "internal", which removes all internal zero-value time units (e.g., "5d 0h 33m" -> "5d 33m").

max_output_units

Maximum number of time units to display

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=1) // default: NULL (optional)

If output_units is NULL, where the output time units are unspecified and left to gt to handle, a numeric value provided for max_output_units will be taken as the maximum number of time units to display in all output time duration values. By default, this is NULL and all possible time units will be displayed. This option has no effect when duration_style = "colon-sep" (only output_units can be used to customize that type of duration output).

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the positive sign be shown for positive values (effectively showing a sign for all values except zero)? If so, use TRUE for this option. By default only negative values will display a minus sign.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Output units for the colon-separated duration style

The colon-separated duration style (enabled when duration_style = "colon-sep") is essentially a clock-based output format which uses the display logic of chronograph watch functionality. It will, by default, display duration values in the ⁠(D/)HH:MM:SS⁠ format. Any duration values greater than or equal to 24 hours will have the number of days prepended with an adjoining slash mark. While this output format is versatile, it can be changed somewhat with the output_units option. The following combinations of output units are permitted:

  • c("minutes", "seconds") -> MM:SS

  • c("hours", "minutes") -> HH:MM

  • c("hours", "minutes", "seconds") -> HH:MM:SS

  • c("days", "hours", "minutes") -> ⁠(D/)HH:MM⁠

Any other specialized combinations will result in the default set being used, which is c("days", "hours", "minutes", "seconds")

Examples

Let's create a difftime-based vector for the next few examples:

difftimes <-
  difftime(
    lubridate::ymd("2017-01-15"),
    lubridate::ymd(c("2015-06-25", "2016-03-07", "2017-01-10"))
  )

Using vec_fmt_duration() with its defaults provides us with a succinct vector of formatted durations.

vec_fmt_duration(difftimes)
#> [1] "81w 3d" "44w 6d" "5d"

We can elect to use just only the time units of days to describe the duration values.

vec_fmt_duration(difftimes, output_units = "days")
#> [1] "570d" "314d" "5d"

We can also use numeric values in the input vector vec_fmt_duration(). Here's a numeric vector for use with examples:

num_vals <- c(3.235, 0.23, 0.005, NA)

The necessary thing with numeric values as an input is defining what time unit those values have.

vec_fmt_duration(num_vals, input_units = "days")
#> [1] "3d 5h 38m 24s" "5h 31m 12s" "7m 12s" "NA"

We can define a set of output time units that we want to see.

vec_fmt_duration(
  num_vals,
  input_units = "days",
  output_units = c("hours", "minutes")
)
#> [1] "77h 38m" "5h 31m" "7m" "NA"

There are many duration 'styles' to choose from. We could opt for the "wide" style.

vec_fmt_duration(
  num_vals,
  input_units = "days",
  duration_style = "wide"
)
#> [1] "3 days 5 hours 38 minutes 24 seconds"
#> [2] "5 hours 31 minutes 12 seconds"
#> [3] "7 minutes 12 seconds"
#> [4] "NA"

We can always perform locale-specific formatting with vec_fmt_duration(). Let's attempt the same type of duration formatting as before with the "nl" locale.

vec_fmt_duration(
  num_vals,
  input_units = "days",
  duration_style = "wide",
  locale = "nl"
)
#> [1] "3 dagen 5 uur 38 minuten 24 seconden"
#> [2] "5 uur 31 minuten 12 seconden"
#> [3] "7 minuten 12 seconden"
#> [4] "NA"

Function ID

15-16

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_duration().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_spelled_num(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector as values in engineering notation

Description

With numeric values in a vector, we can perform formatting so that the targeted values are rendered in engineering notation, where numbers are written in the form of a mantissa (m) and an exponent (n). When combined the construction is either of the form m x 10^n or mEn. The mantissa is a number between 1 and 1000 and the exponent is a multiple of 3. For example, the number 0.0000345 can be written in engineering notation as ⁠34.50 x 10^-6⁠. This notation helps to simplify calculations and make it easier to compare numbers that are on very different scales.

We have fine control over the formatting task, with the following options:

  • decimals: choice of the number of decimal places, option to drop trailing zeros, and a choice of the decimal symbol

  • scaling: we can choose to scale targeted values by a multiplier value

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

vec_fmt_engineering(
  x,
  decimals = 2,
  drop_trailing_zeros = FALSE,
  drop_trailing_dec_mark = TRUE,
  scale_by = 1,
  exp_style = "x10n",
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  dec_mark = ".",
  force_sign_m = FALSE,
  force_sign_n = FALSE,
  locale = NULL,
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

decimals

Number of decimal places

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=0) // default: 2

This corresponds to the exact number of decimal places to use. A value such as 2.34 can, for example, be formatted with 0 decimal places and it would result in "2". With 4 decimal places, the formatted value becomes "2.3400".

drop_trailing_zeros

Drop any trailing zeros

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

A logical value that allows for removal of trailing zeros (those redundant zeros after the decimal mark).

drop_trailing_dec_mark

Drop the trailing decimal mark

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value that determines whether decimal marks should always appear even if there are no decimal digits to display after formatting (e.g., 23 becomes 23. if FALSE). By default trailing decimal marks are not shown.

scale_by

Scale values by a fixed multiplier

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 1

All numeric values will be multiplied by the scale_by value before undergoing formatting. Since the default value is 1, no values will be changed unless a different multiplier value is supplied.

exp_style

Style declaration for exponent formatting

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "x10n"

Style of formatting to use for the scientific notation formatting. By default this is "x10n" but other options include using a single letter (e.g., "e", "E", etc.), a letter followed by a "1" to signal a minimum digit width of one, or "low-ten" for using a stylized "10" marker.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

dec_mark

Decimal mark

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "."

The string to be used as the decimal mark. For example, using dec_mark = "," with the value 0.152 would result in a formatted value of "0,152"). This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign_m, force_sign_n

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the plus sign be shown for positive values of the mantissa (first component, force_sign_m) or the exponent (force_sign_n)? This would effectively show a sign for all values except zero on either of those numeric components of the notation. If so, use TRUE for either one of these options. The default for both is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a sign.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Examples

Let's create a numeric vector for the next few examples:

num_vals <- c(3.24e-4, 8.65, 1362902.2, -59027.3, NA)

Using vec_fmt_engineering() with the default options will create a character vector with values engineering notation. Any NA values remain as NA values. The rendering context will be autodetected unless specified in the output argument (here, it is of the "plain" output type).

vec_fmt_engineering(num_vals)
#> [1] "324.00 x 10^-6" "8.65" "1.36 x 10^6" "-59.03 x 10^3" "NA"

We can change the number of decimal places with the decimals option:

vec_fmt_engineering(num_vals, decimals = 1)
#> [1] "324.0 x 10^-6" "8.7" "1.4 x 10^6" "-59.0 x 10^3" "NA"

If we are formatting for a different locale, we could supply the locale ID and gt will handle any locale-specific formatting options:

vec_fmt_engineering(num_vals, locale = "da")
#> [1] "324,00 x 10^-6" "8,65" "1,36 x 10^6" "-59,03 x 10^3" "NA"

Should you need to have positive and negative signs for the mantissa component of a given value, use force_sign_m = TRUE:

vec_fmt_engineering(num_vals, force_sign_m = TRUE)
#> [1] "+324.00 x 10^-6" "+8.65" "+1.36 x 10^6" "-59.03 x 10^3" "NA"

As a last example, one can wrap the values in a pattern with the pattern argument. Note here that NA values won't have the pattern applied.

vec_fmt_engineering(num_vals, pattern = "/{x}/")
#> [1] "/324.00 x 10^-6/" "/8.65/" "/1.36 x 10^6/" "/-59.03 x 10^3/" "NA"

Function ID

15-4

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_engineering().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_spelled_num(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector as mixed fractions

Description

With numeric values in vector, we can perform mixed-fraction-based formatting. There are several options for setting the accuracy of the fractions. Furthermore, there is an option for choosing a layout (i.e., typesetting style) for the mixed-fraction output.

The following options are available for controlling this type of formatting:

  • accuracy: how to express the fractional part of the mixed fractions; there are three keyword options for this and an allowance for arbitrary denominator settings

  • simplification: an option to simplify fractions whenever possible

  • layout: We can choose to output values with diagonal or inline fractions

  • digit grouping separators: options to enable/disable digit separators and provide a choice of separator symbol for the whole number portion

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted mixed fractions

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in number formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

vec_fmt_fraction(
  x,
  accuracy = NULL,
  simplify = TRUE,
  layout = c("inline", "diagonal"),
  use_seps = TRUE,
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  locale = NULL,
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

accuracy

Accuracy of fractions

⁠singl-kw:[low|med|high]|scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=1)⁠ // default: "low"

The type of fractions to generate. This can either be one of the keywords "low", "med", or "high" (to generate fractions with denominators of up to 1, 2, or 3 digits, respectively) or an integer value greater than zero to obtain fractions with a fixed denominator (2 yields halves, 3 is for thirds, 4 is quarters, etc.). For the latter option, using simplify = TRUE will simplify fractions where possible (e.g., 2/4 will be simplified as 1/2). By default, the "low" option is used.

simplify

Simplify the fraction

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

If choosing to provide a numeric value for accuracy, the option to simplify the fraction (where possible) can be taken with TRUE (the default). With FALSE, denominators in fractions will be fixed to the value provided in accuracy.

layout

Layout of fractions in HTML output

⁠singl-kw:[inline|diagonal]⁠ // default: "inline"

For HTML output, the "inline" layout is the default. This layout places the numerals of the fraction on the baseline and uses a standard slash character. The "diagonal" layout will generate fractions that are typeset with raised/lowered numerals and a virgule.

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Examples

Let's create a numeric vector for the next few examples:

num_vals <- c(0.0052, 0.08, 0, -0.535, NA)

Using vec_fmt_fraction() will create a character vector of fractions. Any NA values will render as "NA". The rendering context will be autodetected unless specified in the output argument (here, it is of the "plain" output type).

vec_fmt_fraction(num_vals)
#> [1] "0" "1/9" "0" "-5/9" "NA"

There are many options for formatting as fractions. If you'd like a higher degree of accuracy in the computation of fractions we can supply the "med" or "high" keywords to the accuracy argument:

vec_fmt_fraction(num_vals, accuracy = "high")
#> [1] "1/200" "2/25" "0" "-107/200" "NA"

As a last example, one can wrap the values in a pattern with the pattern argument. Note here that NA values won't have the pattern applied.

vec_fmt_fraction(num_vals, accuracy = 8, pattern = "[{x}]")
#> [1] "[0]" "[1/8]" "[0]" "[-1/2]" "NA"

Function ID

15-7

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_fraction().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_spelled_num(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector as indexed characters

Description

With numeric values in a vector, we can transform those to index values, usually based on letters. These characters can be derived from a specified locale and they are intended for ordering (often leaving out characters with diacritical marks).

Usage

vec_fmt_index(
  x,
  case = c("upper", "lower"),
  index_algo = c("repeat", "excel"),
  pattern = "{x}",
  locale = NULL,
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

case

Use uppercase or lowercase letters

⁠singl-kw:[upper|lower]⁠ // default: "upper"

Should the resulting index characters be rendered as uppercase ("upper") or lowercase ("lower") letters? By default, this is set to "upper".

index_algo

Indexing algorithm

⁠singl-kw:[repeat|excel]⁠ // default: "repeat"

The indexing algorithm handles the recycling of the index character set. By default, the "repeat" option is used where characters are doubled, tripled, and so on, when moving past the character set limit. The alternative is the "excel" option, where Excel-based column naming is adapted and used here (e.g., ⁠[..., Y, Z, AA, AB, ...]⁠).

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Examples

Let's create a numeric vector for the next few examples:

num_vals <- c(1, 4, 5, 8, 12, 20, 26, 34, 0, -5, 1.3, NA)

Using vec_fmt_index() with the default options will create a character vector with values rendered as index numerals. Zero values will be rendered as "" (i.e., empty strings), any NA values remain as NA values, and negative values will be automatically made positive. The rendering context will be autodetected unless specified in the output argument (here, it is of the "plain" output type).

vec_fmt_index(num_vals)
#> [1] "A" "D" "E" "H" "L" "T" "Z" "HH" "" "E" "A" "NA"

We can also use vec_fmt_index() with the case = "lower" option to create a character vector with values rendered as lowercase Roman numerals.

vec_fmt_index(num_vals, case = "lower")
#> [1] "a" "d" "e" "h" "l" "t" "z" "hh" "" "e" "a" "NA"

If we are formatting for a different locale, we could supply the locale ID and let gt obtain a locale-specific set of index values:

vec_fmt_index(1:10, locale = "so")
#> [1] "B" "C" "D" "F" "G" "H" "J" "K" "L" "M"

As a last example, one can wrap the values in a pattern with the pattern argument. Note here that NA values won't have the pattern applied.

vec_fmt_index(num_vals, case = "lower", pattern = "{x}.")
#> [1] "a." "d." "e." "h." "l." "t." "z." "hh." "." "e." "a." "NA"

Function ID

15-10

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_index().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_spelled_num(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector as integer values

Description

With numeric values in a vector, we can perform number-based formatting so that the input values are always rendered as integer values within a character vector. The following major options are available:

  • digit grouping separators: options to enable/disable digit separators and provide a choice of separator symbol

  • scaling: we can choose to scale targeted values by a multiplier value

  • large-number suffixing: larger figures (thousands, millions, etc.) can be autoscaled and decorated with the appropriate suffixes

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in number formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

vec_fmt_integer(
  x,
  use_seps = TRUE,
  accounting = FALSE,
  scale_by = 1,
  suffixing = FALSE,
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  force_sign = FALSE,
  locale = NULL,
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

accounting

Use accounting style

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option to use accounting style for values. Normally, negative values will be shown with a minus sign but using accounting style will instead put any negative values in parentheses.

scale_by

Scale values by a fixed multiplier

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 1

All numeric values will be multiplied by the scale_by value before undergoing formatting. Since the default value is 1, no values will be changed unless a different multiplier value is supplied. This value will be ignored if using any of the suffixing options (i.e., where suffixing is not set to FALSE).

suffixing

Specification for large-number suffixing

⁠scalar<logical>|vector<character>⁠ // default: FALSE

The suffixing option allows us to scale and apply suffixes to larger numbers (e.g., 1924000 can be transformed to ⁠2M⁠). This option can accept a logical value, where FALSE (the default) will not perform this transformation and TRUE will apply thousands (K), millions (M), billions (B), and trillions (T) suffixes after automatic value scaling.

We can alternatively provide a character vector that serves as a specification for which symbols are to used for each of the value ranges. These preferred symbols will replace the defaults (e.g., c("k", "Ml", "Bn", "Tr") replaces "K", "M", "B", and "T").

Including NA values in the vector will ensure that the particular range will either not be included in the transformation (e.g., c(NA, "M", "B", "T") won't modify numbers at all in the thousands range) or the range will inherit a previous suffix (e.g., with c("K", "M", NA, "T"), all numbers in the range of millions and billions will be in terms of millions).

Any use of suffixing (where it is not set expressly as FALSE) means that any value provided to scale_by will be ignored.

If using system = "ind" then the default suffix set provided by suffixing = TRUE will be the equivalent of c(NA, "L", "Cr"). This doesn't apply suffixes to the thousands range, but does express values in lakhs and crores.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the positive sign be shown for positive values (effectively showing a sign for all values except zero)? If so, use TRUE for this option. The default is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a minus sign. This option is disregarded when using accounting notation with accounting = TRUE.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Examples

Let's create a numeric vector for the next few examples:

num_vals <- c(5.2, 8.65, 13602, -5.3, NA)

Using vec_fmt_integer() with the default options will create a character vector where the input values undergo rounding to become integers and NA values will render as "NA". Also, the rendering context will be autodetected unless specified in the output argument (here, it is of the "plain" output type).

vec_fmt_integer(num_vals)
#> [1] "5" "9" "13,602" "-5" "NA"

We can change the digit separator mark to a period with the sep_mark option:

vec_fmt_integer(num_vals, sep_mark = ".")
#> [1] "5" "9" "13.602" "-5" "NA"

Many options abound for formatting values. If you have a need for positive and negative signs in front of each and every value, use force_sign = TRUE:

vec_fmt_integer(num_vals, force_sign = TRUE)
#> [1] "+5" "+9" "+13,602" "-5" "NA"

As a last example, one can wrap the values in a pattern with the pattern argument. Note here that NA values won't have the pattern applied.

vec_fmt_integer(num_vals, pattern = "`{x}`")
#> [1] "`5`" "`9`" "`13,602`" "`-5`" "NA"

Function ID

15-2

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_integer().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_spelled_num(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector containing Markdown text

Description

Any Markdown-formatted text in the input vector will be transformed to the appropriate output type.

Usage

vec_fmt_markdown(
  x,
  md_engine = c("markdown", "commonmark"),
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

md_engine

Choice of Markdown engine

⁠singl-kw:[markdown|commonmark]⁠ // default: "markdown"

The engine preference for Markdown rendering. By default, this is set to "markdown" where gt will use the markdown package for Markdown conversion to HTML and LaTeX. The other option is "commonmark" and with that the commonmark package will be used.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Examples

Create a vector of Markdown-based text snippets.

text_vec <-
  c(
    "This **is** *Markdown*.",
    "Info on Markdown syntax can be found
[here](https://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/).",
    "The **gt** package has these datasets:
- `countrypops`
- `sza`
- `gtcars`
- `sp500`
- `pizzaplace`
- `exibble`"
  )

With vec_fmt_markdown() we can easily convert these to different output types, like HTML

vec_fmt_markdown(text_vec, output = "html")
#> [1] "This <strong>is</strong> <em>Markdown</em>.</span>"                                                                                                                                                                                                            
#> [2] "Info on Markdown syntax can be found\n<a href=\"https://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">here</a>.</span>"                                                                                                                                              
#> [3] "The <strong>gt</strong> package has these datasets:</p>\n<ul>\n<li><code>countrypops</code></li>\n<li><code>sza</code></li>\n<li><code>gtcars</code></li>\n<li><code>sp500</code></li>\n<li><code>pizzaplace</code></li>\n<li><code>exibble</code></li>\n</ul>"

or LaTeX

vec_fmt_markdown(text_vec, output = "latex")
#> [1] "This \\textbf{is} \\emph{Markdown}."                                                                                                                                                                                                                     
#> [2] "Info on Markdown syntax can be found\n\\href{https://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/}{here}."                                                                                                                                                      
#> [3] "The \\textbf{gt} package has these datasets:\n\n\\begin{itemize}\n\\item \\texttt{countrypops}\n\n\\item \\texttt{sza}\n\n\\item \\texttt{gtcars}\n\n\\item \\texttt{sp500}\n\n\\item \\texttt{pizzaplace}\n\n\\item \\texttt{exibble}\n\n\\end{itemize}"

Function ID

15-17

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_markdown().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_spelled_num(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector as numeric values

Description

With numeric values in a vector, we can perform number-based formatting so that the values are rendered to a character vector with some level of precision. The following major options are available:

  • decimals: choice of the number of decimal places, option to drop trailing zeros, and a choice of the decimal symbol

  • digit grouping separators: options to enable/disable digit separators and provide a choice of separator symbol

  • scaling: we can choose to scale targeted values by a multiplier value

  • large-number suffixing: larger figures (thousands, millions, etc.) can be autoscaled and decorated with the appropriate suffixes

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in number formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

vec_fmt_number(
  x,
  decimals = 2,
  n_sigfig = NULL,
  drop_trailing_zeros = FALSE,
  drop_trailing_dec_mark = TRUE,
  use_seps = TRUE,
  accounting = FALSE,
  scale_by = 1,
  suffixing = FALSE,
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  dec_mark = ".",
  force_sign = FALSE,
  locale = NULL,
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

decimals

Number of decimal places

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=0) // default: 2

This corresponds to the exact number of decimal places to use. A value such as 2.34 can, for example, be formatted with 0 decimal places and it would result in "2". With 4 decimal places, the formatted value becomes "2.3400".

n_sigfig

Number of significant figures

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=1) // default: NULL (optional)

A option to format numbers to n significant figures. By default, this is NULL and thus number values will be formatted according to the number of decimal places set via decimals. If opting to format according to the rules of significant figures, n_sigfig must be a number greater than or equal to 1. Any values passed to the decimals and drop_trailing_zeros arguments will be ignored.

drop_trailing_zeros

Drop any trailing zeros

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

A logical value that allows for removal of trailing zeros (those redundant zeros after the decimal mark).

drop_trailing_dec_mark

Drop the trailing decimal mark

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value that determines whether decimal marks should always appear even if there are no decimal digits to display after formatting (e.g., 23 becomes 23. if FALSE). By default trailing decimal marks are not shown.

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

accounting

Use accounting style

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option to use accounting style for values. Normally, negative values will be shown with a minus sign but using accounting style will instead put any negative values in parentheses.

scale_by

Scale values by a fixed multiplier

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 1

All numeric values will be multiplied by the scale_by value before undergoing formatting. Since the default value is 1, no values will be changed unless a different multiplier value is supplied. This value will be ignored if using any of the suffixing options (i.e., where suffixing is not set to FALSE).

suffixing

Specification for large-number suffixing

⁠scalar<logical>|vector<character>⁠ // default: FALSE

The suffixing option allows us to scale and apply suffixes to larger numbers (e.g., 1924000 can be transformed to ⁠1.92M⁠). This option can accept a logical value, where FALSE (the default) will not perform this transformation and TRUE will apply thousands ("K"), millions ("M"), billions ("B"), and trillions ("T") suffixes after automatic value scaling.

We can alternatively provide a character vector that serves as a specification for which symbols are to used for each of the value ranges. These preferred symbols will replace the defaults (e.g., c("k", "Ml", "Bn", "Tr") replaces "K", "M", "B", and "T").

Including NA values in the vector will ensure that the particular range will either not be included in the transformation (e.g., c(NA, "M", "B", "T") won't modify numbers at all in the thousands range) or the range will inherit a previous suffix (e.g., with c("K", "M", NA, "T"), all numbers in the range of millions and billions will be in terms of millions).

Any use of suffixing (where it is not set expressly as FALSE) means that any value provided to scale_by will be ignored.

If using system = "ind" then the default suffix set provided by suffixing = TRUE will be the equivalent of c(NA, "L", "Cr"). This doesn't apply suffixes to the thousands range, but does express values in lakhs and crores.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

dec_mark

Decimal mark

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "."

The string to be used as the decimal mark. For example, using dec_mark = "," with the value 0.152 would result in a formatted value of "0,152"). This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the positive sign be shown for positive values (effectively showing a sign for all values except zero)? If so, use TRUE for this option. The default is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a minus sign. This option is disregarded when using accounting notation with accounting = TRUE.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Examples

Let's create a numeric vector for the next few examples:

num_vals <- c(5.2, 8.65, 0, -5.3, NA)

Using vec_fmt_number() with the default options will create a character vector where the numeric values have two decimal places and NA values will render as "NA". Also, the rendering context will be autodetected unless specified in the output argument (here, it is of the "plain" output type).

vec_fmt_number(num_vals)
#> [1] "5.20" "8.65" "0.00" "-5.30" "NA"

We can change the decimal mark to a comma, and we have to be sure to change the digit separator mark from the default comma to something else (a period works here):

vec_fmt_number(num_vals, sep_mark = ".", dec_mark = ",")
#> [1] "5,20" "8,65" "0,00" "-5,30" "NA"

If we are formatting for a different locale, we could supply the locale ID and let gt handle these locale-specific formatting options:

vec_fmt_number(num_vals, locale = "fr")
#> [1] "5,20" "8,65" "0,00" "-5,30" "NA"

There are many options for formatting values. Perhaps you need to have explicit positive and negative signs? Use force_sign = TRUE for that.

vec_fmt_number(num_vals, force_sign = TRUE)
#> [1] "+5.20" "+8.65" "0.00" "-5.30" "NA"

Those trailing zeros past the decimal mark can be stripped out by using the drop_trailing_zeros option.

vec_fmt_number(num_vals, drop_trailing_zeros = TRUE)
#> [1] "5.2" "8.65" "0" "-5.3" "NA"

As a last example, one can wrap the values in a pattern with the pattern argument. Note here that NA values won't have the pattern applied.

vec_fmt_number(num_vals, pattern = "`{x}`")
#> [1] "`5.20`" "`8.65`" "`0.00`" "`-5.30`" "NA"

Function ID

15-1

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_number().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_spelled_num(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector as parts-per quantities

Description

With numeric values in a vector, we can format the values so that they are rendered as per mille, ppm, ppb, etc., quantities. The following list of keywords (with associated naming and scaling factors) is available to use within vec_fmt_partsper():

  • "per-mille": Per mille, (1 part in ⁠1,000⁠)

  • "per-myriad": Per myriad, (1 part in ⁠10,000⁠)

  • "pcm": Per cent mille (1 part in ⁠100,000⁠)

  • "ppm": Parts per million, (1 part in ⁠1,000,000⁠)

  • "ppb": Parts per billion, (1 part in ⁠1,000,000,000⁠)

  • "ppt": Parts per trillion, (1 part in ⁠1,000,000,000,000⁠)

  • "ppq": Parts per quadrillion, (1 part in ⁠1,000,000,000,000,000⁠)

The function provides a lot of formatting control and we can use the following options:

  • custom symbol/units: we can override the automatic symbol or units display with our own choice as the situation warrants

  • decimals: choice of the number of decimal places, option to drop trailing zeros, and a choice of the decimal symbol

  • digit grouping separators: options to enable/disable digit separators and provide a choice of separator symbol

  • value scaling toggle: choose to disable automatic value scaling in the situation that values are already scaled coming in (and just require the appropriate symbol or unit display)

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in number formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

vec_fmt_partsper(
  x,
  to_units = c("per-mille", "per-myriad", "pcm", "ppm", "ppb", "ppt", "ppq"),
  symbol = "auto",
  decimals = 2,
  drop_trailing_zeros = FALSE,
  drop_trailing_dec_mark = TRUE,
  scale_values = TRUE,
  use_seps = TRUE,
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  dec_mark = ".",
  force_sign = FALSE,
  incl_space = "auto",
  locale = NULL,
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

to_units

Output Quantity

⁠singl-kw:[per-mille|per-myriad|pcm|ppm|ppb|ppt|ppq]⁠ // default: "per-mille"

A keyword that signifies the desired output quantity. This can be any from the following set: "per-mille", "per-myriad", "pcm", "ppm", "ppb", "ppt", or "ppq".

symbol

Symbol or units to use in output display

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "auto"

The symbol/units to use for the quantity. By default, this is set to "auto" and gt will choose the appropriate symbol based on the to_units keyword and the output context. However, this can be changed by supplying a string (e.g, using symbol = "ppbV" when to_units = "ppb").

decimals

Number of decimal places

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=0) // default: 2

This corresponds to the exact number of decimal places to use. A value such as 2.34 can, for example, be formatted with 0 decimal places and it would result in "2". With 4 decimal places, the formatted value becomes "2.3400".

drop_trailing_zeros

Drop any trailing zeros

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

A logical value that allows for removal of trailing zeros (those redundant zeros after the decimal mark).

drop_trailing_dec_mark

Drop the trailing decimal mark

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value that determines whether decimal marks should always appear even if there are no decimal digits to display after formatting (e.g., 23 becomes 23. if FALSE). By default trailing decimal marks are not shown.

scale_values

Scale input values accordingly

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

Should the values be scaled through multiplication according to the keyword set in to_units? By default this is TRUE since the expectation is that normally values are proportions. Setting to FALSE signifies that the values are already scaled and require only the appropriate symbol/units when formatted.

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

dec_mark

Decimal mark

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "."

The string to be used as the decimal mark. For example, using dec_mark = "," with the value 0.152 would result in a formatted value of "0,152"). This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the positive sign be shown for positive values (effectively showing a sign for all values except zero)? If so, use TRUE for this option. The default is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a minus sign. This option is disregarded when using accounting notation with accounting = TRUE.

incl_space

Include a space between the value and the symbol/units

⁠scalar<character>|scalar<logical>⁠ // default: "auto"

An option for whether to include a space between the value and the symbol/units. The default is "auto" which provides spacing dependent on the mark itself. This can be directly controlled by using either TRUE or FALSE.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Examples

Let's create a numeric vector for the next few examples:

num_vals <- c(10^(-3:-5), NA)

Using vec_fmt_partsper() with the default options will create a character vector where the resultant per mille values have two decimal places and NA values will render as "NA". The rendering context will be autodetected unless specified in the output argument (here, it is of the "plain" output type).

vec_fmt_partsper(num_vals)
#> [1] "1.00%." "0.10%." "0.01%." "NA"

We can change the output units to a different measure. If ppm units are desired then to_units = "ppm" can be used.

vec_fmt_partsper(num_vals, to_units = "ppm")
#> [1] "1,000.00 ppm" "100.00 ppm" "10.00 ppm" "NA"

We can change the decimal mark to a comma, and we have to be sure to change the digit separator mark from the default comma to something else (a period works here):

vec_fmt_partsper(
  num_vals,
  to_units = "ppm",
  sep_mark = ".",
  dec_mark = ","
)
#> [1] "1.000,00 ppm" "100,00 ppm" "10,00 ppm" "NA"

If we are formatting for a different locale, we could supply the locale ID and let gt handle these locale-specific formatting options:

vec_fmt_partsper(num_vals, to_units = "ppm", locale = "es")
#> [1] "1.000,00 ppm" "100,00 ppm" "10,00 ppm" "NA"

As a last example, one can wrap the values in a pattern with the pattern argument. Note here that NA values won't have the pattern applied.

vec_fmt_partsper(num_vals, to_units = "ppm", pattern = "{x}V")
#> [1] "1,000.00 ppmV" "100.00 ppmV" "10.00 ppmV" "NA"

Function ID

15-6

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_partsper().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_spelled_num(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector as percentage values

Description

With numeric values in vector, we can perform percentage-based formatting. It is assumed that numeric values in the input vector are proportional values and, in this case, the values will be automatically multiplied by 100 before decorating with a percent sign (the other case is accommodated though setting the scale_values to FALSE). For more control over percentage formatting, we can use the following options:

  • percent sign placement: the percent sign can be placed after or before the values and a space can be inserted between the symbol and the value.

  • decimals: choice of the number of decimal places, option to drop trailing zeros, and a choice of the decimal symbol

  • digit grouping separators: options to enable/disable digit separators and provide a choice of separator symbol

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in number formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

vec_fmt_percent(
  x,
  decimals = 2,
  drop_trailing_zeros = FALSE,
  drop_trailing_dec_mark = TRUE,
  scale_values = TRUE,
  use_seps = TRUE,
  accounting = FALSE,
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  dec_mark = ".",
  force_sign = FALSE,
  incl_space = FALSE,
  placement = "right",
  locale = NULL,
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

decimals

Number of decimal places

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=0) // default: 2

This corresponds to the exact number of decimal places to use. A value such as 2.34 can, for example, be formatted with 0 decimal places and it would result in "2". With 4 decimal places, the formatted value becomes "2.3400".

drop_trailing_zeros

Drop any trailing zeros

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

A logical value that allows for removal of trailing zeros (those redundant zeros after the decimal mark).

drop_trailing_dec_mark

Drop the trailing decimal mark

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value that determines whether decimal marks should always appear even if there are no decimal digits to display after formatting (e.g., 23 becomes 23. if FALSE). By default trailing decimal marks are not shown.

scale_values

Multiply input values by 100

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

Should the values be scaled through multiplication by 100? By default this scaling is performed since the expectation is that incoming values are usually proportional. Setting to FALSE signifies that the values are already scaled and require only the percent sign when formatted.

use_seps

Use digit group separators

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

An option to use digit group separators. The type of digit group separator is set by sep_mark and overridden if a locale ID is provided to locale. This setting is TRUE by default.

accounting

Use accounting style

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option to use accounting style for values. Normally, negative values will be shown with a minus sign but using accounting style will instead put any negative values in parentheses.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

dec_mark

Decimal mark

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "."

The string to be used as the decimal mark. For example, using dec_mark = "," with the value 0.152 would result in a formatted value of "0,152"). This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the positive sign be shown for positive values (effectively showing a sign for all values except zero)? If so, use TRUE for this option. The default is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a minus sign. This option is disregarded when using accounting notation with accounting = TRUE.

incl_space

Include a space between the value and the % sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

An option for whether to include a space between the value and the percent sign. The default is to not introduce a space character.

placement

Percent sign placement

⁠singl-kw:[right|left]⁠ // default: "right"

This option governs the placement of the percent sign. This can be either be "right" (the default) or "left".

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Examples

Let's create a numeric vector for the next few examples:

num_vals <- c(0.0052, 0.08, 0, -0.535, NA)

Using vec_fmt_percent() with the default options will create a character vector where the resultant percentage values have two decimal places and NA values will render as "NA". The rendering context will be autodetected unless specified in the output argument (here, it is of the "plain" output type).

vec_fmt_percent(num_vals)
#> [1] "0.52%" "8.00%" "0.00%" "-53.50%" "NA"

We can change the decimal mark to a comma, and we have to be sure to change the digit separator mark from the default comma to something else (a period works here):

vec_fmt_percent(num_vals, sep_mark = ".", dec_mark = ",")
#> [1] "0,52%" "8,00%" "0,00%" "-53,50%" "NA"

If we are formatting for a different locale, we could supply the locale ID and let gt handle these locale-specific formatting options:

vec_fmt_percent(num_vals, locale = "pt")
#> [1] "0,52%" "8,00%" "0,00%" "-53,50%" "NA"

There are many options for formatting values. Perhaps you need to have explicit positive and negative signs? Use force_sign = TRUE for that.

vec_fmt_percent(num_vals, force_sign = TRUE)
#> [1] "+0.52%" "+8.00%" "0.00%" "-53.50%" "NA"

Those trailing zeros past the decimal mark can be stripped out by using the drop_trailing_zeros option.

vec_fmt_percent(num_vals, drop_trailing_zeros = TRUE)
#> [1] "0.52%" "8%" "0%" "-53.5%" "NA"

As a last example, one can wrap the values in a pattern with the pattern argument. Note here that NA values won't have the pattern applied.

vec_fmt_percent(num_vals, pattern = "{x}wt")
#> [1] "0.52%wt" "8.00%wt" "0.00%wt" "-53.50%wt" "NA"

Function ID

15-5

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_percent().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_spelled_num(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector as Roman numerals

Description

With numeric values in a vector, we can transform those to Roman numerals, rounding values as necessary.

Usage

vec_fmt_roman(
  x,
  case = c("upper", "lower"),
  pattern = "{x}",
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

case

Use uppercase or lowercase letters

⁠singl-kw:[upper|lower]⁠ // default: "upper"

Should Roman numerals should be rendered as uppercase ("upper") or lowercase ("lower") letters? By default, this is set to "upper".

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Examples

Let's create a numeric vector for the next few examples:

num_vals <- c(1, 4, 5, 8, 12, 20, 0, -5, 1.3, NA)

Using vec_fmt_roman() with the default options will create a character vector with values rendered as Roman numerals. Zero values will be rendered as "N", any NA values remain as NA values, negative values will be automatically made positive, and values greater than or equal to 3900 will be rendered as "ex terminis". The rendering context will be autodetected unless specified in the output argument (here, it is of the "plain" output type).

vec_fmt_roman(num_vals)
#> [1] "I" "IV" "V" "VIII" "XII" "XX" "N" "V" "I" "NA"

We can also use vec_fmt_roman() with the case = "lower" option to create a character vector with values rendered as lowercase Roman numerals.

vec_fmt_roman(num_vals, case = "lower")
#> [1] "i" "iv" "v" "viii" "xii" "xx" "n" "v" "i" "NA"

As a last example, one can wrap the values in a pattern with the pattern argument. Note here that NA values won't have the pattern applied.

vec_fmt_roman(num_vals, case = "lower", pattern = "{x}.")
#> [1] "i." "iv." "v." "viii." "xii." "xx." "n." "v." "i." "NA"

Function ID

15-9

Function Introduced

v0.8.0 (November 16, 2022)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_roman().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_spelled_num(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector as values in scientific notation

Description

With numeric values in a vector, we can perform formatting so that the targeted values are rendered in scientific notation, where extremely large or very small numbers can be expressed in a more practical fashion. Here, numbers are written in the form of a mantissa (m) and an exponent (n) with the construction m x 10^n or mEn. The mantissa component is a number between 1 and 10. For instance, ⁠2.5 x 10^9⁠ can be used to represent the value 2,500,000,000 in scientific notation. In a similar way, 0.00000012 can be expressed as ⁠1.2 x 10^-7⁠. Due to its ability to describe numbers more succinctly and its ease of calculation, scientific notation is widely employed in scientific and technical domains.

We have fine control over the formatting task, with the following options:

  • decimals: choice of the number of decimal places, option to drop trailing zeros, and a choice of the decimal symbol

  • scaling: we can choose to scale targeted values by a multiplier value

  • pattern: option to use a text pattern for decoration of the formatted values

  • locale-based formatting: providing a locale ID will result in formatting specific to the chosen locale

Usage

vec_fmt_scientific(
  x,
  decimals = 2,
  n_sigfig = NULL,
  drop_trailing_zeros = FALSE,
  drop_trailing_dec_mark = TRUE,
  scale_by = 1,
  exp_style = "x10n",
  pattern = "{x}",
  sep_mark = ",",
  dec_mark = ".",
  force_sign_m = FALSE,
  force_sign_n = FALSE,
  locale = NULL,
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

decimals

Number of decimal places

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=0) // default: 2

This corresponds to the exact number of decimal places to use. A value such as 2.34 can, for example, be formatted with 0 decimal places and it would result in "2". With 4 decimal places, the formatted value becomes "2.3400".

n_sigfig

Number of significant figures

scalar<numeric|integer>(val>=1) // default: NULL (optional)

A option to format numbers to n significant figures. By default, this is NULL and thus number values will be formatted according to the number of decimal places set via decimals. If opting to format according to the rules of significant figures, n_sigfig must be a number greater than or equal to 1. Any values passed to the decimals and drop_trailing_zeros arguments will be ignored.

drop_trailing_zeros

Drop any trailing zeros

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

A logical value that allows for removal of trailing zeros (those redundant zeros after the decimal mark).

drop_trailing_dec_mark

Drop the trailing decimal mark

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: TRUE

A logical value that determines whether decimal marks should always appear even if there are no decimal digits to display after formatting (e.g., 23 becomes 23. if FALSE). By default trailing decimal marks are not shown.

scale_by

Scale values by a fixed multiplier

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 1

All numeric values will be multiplied by the scale_by value before undergoing formatting. Since the default value is 1, no values will be changed unless a different multiplier value is supplied.

exp_style

Style declaration for exponent formatting

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "x10n"

Style of formatting to use for the scientific notation formatting. By default this is "x10n" but other options include using a single letter (e.g., "e", "E", etc.), a letter followed by a "1" to signal a minimum digit width of one, or "low-ten" for using a stylized "10" marker.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

sep_mark

Separator mark for digit grouping

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: ","

The string to use as a separator between groups of digits. For example, using sep_mark = "," with a value of 1000 would result in a formatted value of "1,000". This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

dec_mark

Decimal mark

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "."

The string to be used as the decimal mark. For example, using dec_mark = "," with the value 0.152 would result in a formatted value of "0,152"). This argument is ignored if a locale is supplied (i.e., is not NULL).

force_sign_m, force_sign_n

Forcing the display of a positive sign

⁠scalar<logical>⁠ // default: FALSE

Should the plus sign be shown for positive values of the mantissa (first component, force_sign_m) or the exponent (force_sign_n)? This would effectively show a sign for all values except zero on either of those numeric components of the notation. If so, use TRUE for either one of these options. The default for both is FALSE, where only negative numbers will display a sign.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Examples

Let's create a numeric vector for the next few examples:

num_vals <- c(3.24e-4, 8.65, 1362902.2, -59027.3, NA)

Using vec_fmt_scientific() with the default options will create a character vector with values in scientific notation. Any NA values remain as NA values. The rendering context will be autodetected unless specified in the output argument (here, it is of the "plain" output type).

vec_fmt_scientific(num_vals)
#> [1] "3.24 x 10^-4" "8.65" "1.36 x 10^6" "-5.90 x 10^4" "NA"

We can change the number of decimal places with the decimals option:

vec_fmt_scientific(num_vals, decimals = 1)
#> [1] "3.2 x 10^-4" "8.7" "1.4 x 10^6" "-5.9 x 10^4" "NA"

If we are formatting for a different locale, we could supply the locale ID and gt will handle any locale-specific formatting options:

vec_fmt_scientific(num_vals, locale = "es")
#> [1] "3,24 x 10^-4" "8,65" "1,36 x 10^6" "-5,90 x 10^4" "NA"

Should you need to have positive and negative signs for the mantissa component of a given value, use force_sign_m = TRUE:

vec_fmt_scientific(num_vals, force_sign_m = TRUE)
#> [1] "+3.24 x 10^-4" "+8.65" "+1.36 x 10^6" "-5.90 x 10^4" "NA"

As a last example, one can wrap the values in a pattern with the pattern argument. Note here that NA values won't have the pattern applied.

vec_fmt_scientific(num_vals, pattern = "[{x}]")
#> [1] "[3.24 x 10^-4]" "[8.65]" "[1.36 x 10^6]" "[-5.90 x 10^4]" "NA"

Function ID

15-3

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_scientific().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_spelled_num(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector as spelled-out numbers

Description

With numeric values in a vector, we can transform those to numbers that are spelled out. Any values from 0 to 100 can be spelled out according to the specified locale. For example, the value 23 will be rendered as "twenty-three" if the locale is an English-language one (or, not provided at all); should a Swedish locale be provided (e.g., "sv"), the output will instead be "tjugotre".

Usage

vec_fmt_spelled_num(
  x,
  pattern = "{x}",
  locale = NULL,
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Supported locales

The following 80 locales are supported in the locale argument of vec_fmt_spelled_num(): "af" (Afrikaans), "ak" (Akan), "am" (Amharic), "ar" (Arabic), "az" (Azerbaijani), "be" (Belarusian), "bg" (Bulgarian), "bs" (Bosnian), "ca" (Catalan), "ccp" (Chakma), "chr" (Cherokee), "cs" (Czech), "cy" (Welsh), "da" (Danish), "de" (German), "de-CH" (German (Switzerland)), "ee" (Ewe), "el" (Greek), "en" (English), "eo" (Esperanto), "es" (Spanish), "et" (Estonian), "fa" (Persian), "ff" (Fulah), "fi" (Finnish), "fil" (Filipino), "fo" (Faroese), "fr" (French), "fr-BE" (French (Belgium)), "fr-CH" (French (Switzerland)), "ga" (Irish), "he" (Hebrew), "hi" (Hindi), "hr" (Croatian), "hu" (Hungarian), "hy" (Armenian), "id" (Indonesian), "is" (Icelandic), "it" (Italian), "ja" (Japanese), "ka" (Georgian), "kk" (Kazakh), "kl" (Kalaallisut), "km" (Khmer), "ko" (Korean), "ky" (Kyrgyz), "lb" (Luxembourgish), "lo" (Lao), "lrc" (Northern Luri), "lt" (Lithuanian), "lv" (Latvian), "mk" (Macedonian), "ms" (Malay), "mt" (Maltese), "my" (Burmese), "ne" (Nepali), "nl" (Dutch), "nn" (Norwegian Nynorsk), "no" (Norwegian), "pl" (Polish), "pt" (Portuguese), "qu" (Quechua), "ro" (Romanian), "ru" (Russian), "se" (Northern Sami), "sk" (Slovak), "sl" (Slovenian), "sq" (Albanian), "sr" (Serbian), "sr-Latn" (Serbian (Latin)), "su" (Sundanese), "sv" (Swedish), "sw" (Swahili), "ta" (Tamil), "th" (Thai), "tr" (Turkish), "uk" (Ukrainian), "vi" (Vietnamese), "yue" (Cantonese), and "zh" (Chinese).

Examples

Let's create a numeric vector for the next few examples:

num_vals <- c(1, 8, 23, 76, 0, -5, 200, NA)

Using vec_fmt_spelled_num() will create a character vector with values rendered as spelled-out numbers. Any NA values remain as NA values. The rendering context will be autodetected unless specified in the output argument (here, it is of the "plain" output type).

vec_fmt_spelled_num(num_vals)
#> [1] "one"     "eight"     "twenty-three"  "seventy-six"  "zero"
#> [6] "-5"      "200"       "NA"

If we are formatting for a different locale, we could supply the locale ID and let gt obtain a locale-specific set of spelled numbers:

vec_fmt_spelled_num(num_vals, locale = "af")
#> [1] "een"     "agt"     "drie-en-twintig"     "ses-en-sewentig"
#> [5] "nul"     "-5"      "200"                 "NA"

As a last example, one can wrap the values in a pattern with the pattern argument. Note here that NA values won't have the pattern applied.

vec_fmt_spelled_num(num_vals, pattern = "{x}.")
#> [1] "one."     "eight."     "twenty-three."  "seventy-six."  "zero."
#> [6] "-5."      "200."       "NA"

Function ID

15-11

Function Introduced

v0.9.0 (Mar 31, 2023)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_spelled_num().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_time()


Format a vector as time values

Description

Format vector values to time values using one of 25 preset time styles. Input can be in the form of POSIXt (i.e., datetimes), character (must be in the ISO 8601 forms of HH:MM:SS or ⁠YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS⁠), or Date (which always results in the formatting of 00:00:00).

Usage

vec_fmt_time(
  x,
  time_style = "iso",
  pattern = "{x}",
  locale = NULL,
  output = c("auto", "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", "word")
)

Arguments

x

The input vector

vector(numeric|integer) // required

This is the input vector that will undergo transformation to a character vector of the same length. Values within the vector will be formatted.

time_style

Predefined style for times

⁠scalar<character>|scalar<numeric|integer>(1<=val<=25)⁠ // default: "iso"

The time style to use. By default this is the short name "iso" which corresponds to how times are formatted within ISO 8601 datetime values. There are 25 time styles in total and their short names can be viewed using info_time_style().

pattern

Specification of the formatting pattern

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: "{x}"

A formatting pattern that allows for decoration of the formatted value. The formatted value is represented by the {x} (which can be used multiple times, if needed) and all other characters will be interpreted as string literals.

locale

Locale identifier

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // default: NULL (optional)

An optional locale identifier that can be used for formatting values according the locale's rules. Examples include "en" for English (United States) and "fr" for French (France). We can call info_locales() for a useful reference for all of the locales that are supported.

output

Output format

⁠singl-kw:[auto|plain|html|latex|rtf|word]⁠ // default: "auto"

The output style of the resulting character vector. This can either be "auto" (the default), "plain", "html", "latex", "rtf", or "word". In knitr rendering (i.e., Quarto or R Markdown), the "auto" option will choose the correct output value

Value

A character vector.

Formatting with the time_style argument

We need to supply a preset time style to the time_style argument. There are many time styles and all of them can handle localization to any supported locale. Many of the time styles are termed flexible time formats and this means that their output will adapt to any locale provided. That feature makes the flexible time formats a better option for locales other than "en" (the default locale).

The following table provides a listing of all time styles and their output values (corresponding to an input time of 14:35:00). It is noted which of these represent 12- or 24-hour time.

Time Style Output Notes
1 "iso" "14:35:00" ISO 8601, 24h
2 "iso-short" "14:35" ISO 8601, 24h
3 "h_m_s_p" "2:35:00 PM" 12h
4 "h_m_p" "2:35 PM" 12h
5 "h_p" "2 PM" 12h
6 "Hms" "14:35:00" flexible, 24h
7 "Hm" "14:35" flexible, 24h
8 "H" "14" flexible, 24h
9 "EHm" "Thu 14:35" flexible, 24h
10 "EHms" "Thu 14:35:00" flexible, 24h
11 "Hmsv" "14:35:00 GMT+00:00" flexible, 24h
12 "Hmv" "14:35 GMT+00:00" flexible, 24h
13 "hms" "2:35:00 PM" flexible, 12h
14 "hm" "2:35 PM" flexible, 12h
15 "h" "2 PM" flexible, 12h
16 "Ehm" "Thu 2:35 PM" flexible, 12h
17 "Ehms" "Thu 2:35:00 PM" flexible, 12h
18 "EBhms" "Thu 2:35:00 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
19 "Bhms" "2:35:00 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
20 "EBhm" "Thu 2:35 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
21 "Bhm" "2:35 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
22 "Bh" "2 in the afternoon" flexible, 12h
23 "hmsv" "2:35:00 PM GMT+00:00" flexible, 12h
24 "hmv" "2:35 PM GMT+00:00" flexible, 12h
25 "ms" "35:00" flexible

We can call info_time_style() in the console to view a similar table of time styles with example output.

Examples

Let's create a character vector of datetime values in the ISO-8601 format for the next few examples:

str_vals <- c("2022-06-13 18:36", "2019-01-25 01:08", NA)

Using vec_fmt_time() (here with the "iso-short" time style) will result in a character vector of formatted times. Any NA values remain as NA values. The rendering context will be autodetected unless specified in the output argument (here, it is of the "plain" output type).

vec_fmt_time(str_vals, time_style = "iso-short")
#> [1] "18:36" "01:08" NA

We can choose from any of 25 different time formatting styles. Many of these styles are flexible, meaning that the structure of the format will adapt to different locales. Let's use the "Bhms" time style to demonstrate this (first in the default locale of "en"):

vec_fmt_time(str_vals, time_style = "Bhms")
#> [1] "6:36:00 in the evening" "1:08:00 at night" NA

Let's perform the same type of formatting in the German ("de") locale:

vec_fmt_time(str_vals, time_style = "Bhms", locale = "de")
#> [1] "6:36:00 abends" "1:08:00 nachts" NA

We can always use info_time_style() to call up an info table that serves as a handy reference to all of the time_style options.

As a last example, one can wrap the time values in a pattern with the pattern argument. Note here that NA values won't have the pattern applied.

vec_fmt_time(
  str_vals,
  time_style = "hm",
  pattern = "temps: {x}",
  locale = "fr-CA"
)
#> [1] "temps: 6:36 PM" "temps: 1:08 AM" NA

Function ID

15-14

Function Introduced

v0.7.0 (Aug 25, 2022)

See Also

The variant function intended for formatting gt table data: fmt_time().

Other vector formatting functions: vec_fmt_bytes(), vec_fmt_currency(), vec_fmt_date(), vec_fmt_datetime(), vec_fmt_duration(), vec_fmt_engineering(), vec_fmt_fraction(), vec_fmt_index(), vec_fmt_integer(), vec_fmt_markdown(), vec_fmt_number(), vec_fmt_partsper(), vec_fmt_percent(), vec_fmt_roman(), vec_fmt_scientific(), vec_fmt_spelled_num()


Helper function for adding an image from the web

Description

We can flexibly add a web image inside of a table with web_image(). The function provides a convenient way to generate an HTML fragment with an image URL. Because this function is currently HTML-based, it is only useful for HTML table output. To use this function inside of data cells, it is recommended to use text_transform(). With that function, we can specify which data cells to target and then include a web_image() call within the required user-defined function (for the fn argument). If we want to include an image in other places (e.g., in the header, within footnote text, etc.) we need to wrap web_image() inside html().

By itself, the function creates an HTML image tag, so, the call web_image("http://example.com/image.png") evaluates to:

⁠<img src=\"http://example.com/image.png\" style=\"height:30px;\">⁠

where a height of ⁠30px⁠ is a default height chosen to work well within the heights of most table rows.

Usage

web_image(url, height = 30)

Arguments

url

An image URL

⁠scalar<character>⁠ // required

A url that resolves to an image file.

height

Height of image

⁠scalar<numeric|integer>⁠ // default: 30

The absolute height of the image in the table cell (in "px" units). By default, this is set to "30px".

Value

A character object with an HTML fragment that can be placed inside of a cell.

Examples

Get the PNG-based logo for the R Project from an image URL.

r_png_url <- "https://www.r-project.org/logo/Rlogo.png"

Create a tibble that contains heights of an image in pixels (one column as a string, the other as numerical values), then, create a gt table. Use text_transform() to insert the R logo PNG image with the various sizes.

dplyr::tibble(
  pixels = px(seq(10, 35, 5)),
  image = seq(10, 35, 5)
) |>
  gt() |>
  text_transform(
    locations = cells_body(columns = image),
    fn = function(x) {
      web_image(
        url = r_png_url,
        height = as.numeric(x)
      )
    }
  )
This image of a table was generated from the first code example in the `web_image()` help file.

Get the SVG-based logo for the R Project from an image URL.

r_svg_url <- "https://www.r-project.org/logo/Rlogo.svg"

Create a tibble that contains heights of an image in pixels (one column as a string, the other as numerical values), then, create a gt table. Use tab_header() to insert the R logo SVG image once in the title and five times in the subtitle.

dplyr::tibble(
  pixels = px(seq(10, 35, 5)),
  image = seq(10, 35, 5)
) |>
  gt() |>
  tab_header(
    title = html(
      "<strong>R Logo</strong>",
      web_image(
        url = r_svg_url,
        height = px(50)
      )
    ),
    subtitle = html(
      web_image(
        url = r_svg_url,
        height = px(12)
      ) |>
        rep(5)
    )
  )
This image of a table was generated from the second code example in the `web_image()` help file.

Function ID

9-1

Function Introduced

v0.2.0.5 (March 31, 2020)

See Also

Other image addition functions: ggplot_image(), local_image(), test_image()